FRENIC-Eco USER`S MANUAL

Designed for Fan and Pump Applications
User's Manual
Copyright © 2005 Fuji Electric FA Components & Systems Co., Ltd.
All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or copied without prior written permission from Fuji Electric
FA Components & Systems Co., Ltd.
All products and company names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective holders.
The information contained herein is subject to change without prior notice for improvement.
Preface
This manual provides all the information on the FRENIC-Eco series of inverters including its operating
procedure, operation modes, and selection of peripheral equipment. Carefully read this manual for proper use.
Incorrect handling of the inverter may prevent the inverter and/or related equipment from operating correctly,
shorten their lives, or cause problems.
The table below lists the other materials related to the use of the FRENIC-Eco. Read them in conjunction
with this manual as necessary.
Name
Material No.
Description
MEH442
Product scope, features, specifications,
drawings, and options of the product
INR-SI47-0882-E
Acceptance inspection, mounting & wiring of the
inverter, operation using the keypad, running the motor
for a test, troubleshooting, and maintenance and
inspection
RS485
Communication
User's Manual
MEH448
Overview of functions implemented by using
FRENIC-Eco RS485 communications facility, its
communications specifications, Modbus RTU/Fuji
general-purpose inverter protocol and functions, and
related data formats
RS485
Communications
Card "OPC-F1-RS"
Installation Manual
INR-SI47-0872
Items on acceptance checking, and how to install the
card option
Relay Output Card
"OPC-F1-RY"
Instruction Manual
INR-SI47-0873
Items on acceptance checking, how to install the card
option, wiring and specifications
Mounting Adapter for
External Cooling
"PB-F1" Installation
Manual
INR-SI47-0880
Items on acceptance checking, what to apply, and how
to install the adapter
Panel-mount
Adapter "MA-F1"
Installation Manual
INR-SI47-0881
Items on acceptance checking, what to apply, and how
to install the adapter
Multi-function
Keypad "TP-G1"
Instruction Manual
INR-SI47-0890-E
Items on acceptance checking, and how to install and
wire the Multi-function Keypad, an operation guide of
the keypad, and specifications
FRENIC Loader
Instruction Manual
INR-SI47-0903-E
Overview,
installation,
setting-up,
functions,
troubleshooting, and specifications of FRENIC Loader
Catalog
Instruction Manual
The materials are subject to change without notice. Be sure to obtain the latest editions for use.
Documents related to Fuji inverters
Catalogs
FRENIC5000G11S/P11S
FVR-E11S
FRENIC-Mini
MEH403/MEH413
MEH404/MEH414
MEH441/MEH451
User's Manuals and Technical Information
FRENIC5000G11S/P11S & FVR-E11S Technical Information
FRENIC-Mini User's Manual
i
MEH406
MEH446
external
Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics in Home Electric and General-purpose
Appliances
Our three-phase, 200V series inverters of 3.7 kW or less (FRENIC-Eco series) were the products of which
were restricted by the "Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics in Home Electric and General-purpose
Appliances" (established in September 1994 and revised in October 1999) issued by the Ministry of
Economy, Trade and Industry.
The above restriction, however, was lifted when the Guideline was revised in January 2004. Since then, the
inverter makers have individually imposed voluntary restrictions on the harmonics of their products.
We, as before, recommend that you connect a reactor (for suppressing harmonics) to your inverter. As a
reactor, select a "DC REACTOR" introduced in this manual. For use of the other reactor, please inquire of us
about detailed specifications.
Japanese Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics by Customers Receiving
High Voltage or Special High Voltage
Refer to this manual, Appendix B for details on this guideline.
Safety precautions
Read this manual and the FRENIC-Eco Instruction Manual (INR-SI47-0882-E) thoroughly before
proceeding with installation, connections (wiring), operation, or maintenance and inspection. Ensure you
have sound knowledge of the product and familiarize yourself with all safety information and precautions
before proceeding to operate the inverter.
Safety precautions are classified into the following two categories in this manual.
Failure to heed the information indicated by this symbol may lead to
dangerous conditions, possibly resulting in death or serious bodily injuries.
Failure to heed the information indicated by this symbol may lead to
dangerous conditions, possibly resulting in minor or light bodily injuries
and/or substantial property damage.
Failure to heed the information contained under the CAUTION title can also result in serious consequences.
These safety precautions are of utmost importance and must be observed at all times.
This product is not designed for use in appliances and machinery on which lives depend. Consult your Fuji
Electric representative before considering the FRENIC-Eco series of inverters for equipment and
machinery related to nuclear power control, aerospace uses, medical uses or transportation. When the
product is to be used with any machinery or equipment on which lives depend or with machinery or
equipment which could cause serious loss or damage should this product malfunction or fail, ensure that
appropriate safety devices and/or equipment are installed.
ii
„ Precautions for Use
Driving a 400V
general-purpose
motor
When driving a 400V general-purpose motor with an inverter using
extremely long wires, damage to the insulation of the motor may occur. Use
an output circuit filter (OFL) if necessary after checking with the motor
manufacturer. Fuji motors do not require the use of output circuit filters
because of their reinforced insulation.
Torque
characteristics and
temperature rise
When the inverter is used to run a general-purpose motor, the temperature
of the motor becomes higher than when it is operated using a commercial
power supply. In the low-speed range, the cooling effect will be weakened,
so decrease the output torque of the motor.
In running
generalpurpose
motors
When an inverter-driven motor is mounted to a machine, resonance may be
caused by the natural frequencies of the machine system.
Vibration
In running
special
motors
Note that operation of a 2-pole motor at 60 Hz or higher may cause
abnormal vibration.
* The use of a rubber coupling or vibration dampening rubber is
recommended.
* Use the inverter's jump frequency control feature to skip the resonance
frequency zone(s).
Noise
When an inverter is used with a general-purpose motor, the motor noise
level is higher than that with a commercial power supply. To reduce noise,
raise carrier frequency of the inverter. Operation at 60 Hz or higher can also
result in higher level of wind roaring sound.
Explosion-proof
motors
When driving an explosion-proof motor with an inverter, use a combination
of a motor and an inverter that has been approved in advance.
Submersible
motors and pumps
These motors have a higher rated current than general-purpose motors.
Select an inverter whose rated output current is higher than that of the
motor.
These motors differ from general-purpose motors in thermal characteristics.
Set a low value in the thermal time constant of the motor when setting the
electronic thermal overcurrent protection (for motor).
Brake motors
For motors equipped with parallel-connected brakes, their braking power
must be supplied from the inverter’s primary circuit. If the brake power is
connected to the inverter's output circuit by mistake, the brake will not
work.
Do not use inverters for driving motors equipped with series-connected
brakes.
Geared motors
If the power transmission mechanism uses an oil-lubricated gearbox or
speed changer/reducer, then continuous motor operation at low speed may
cause poor lubrication. Avoid such operation.
Synchronous
motors
It is necessary to take special measures suitable for this motor type. Contact
your Fuji Electric representative for details.
Single-phase
motors
Single-phase motors are not suitable for inverter-driven variable speed
operation. Use three-phase motors.
iii
Environmental
conditions
Combination with
peripheral
devices
Installation
location
Use the inverter within the ambient temperature range from -10 to +50qC.
The heat sink and braking resistor of the inverter may become hot under
certain operating conditions, so install the inverter on nonflammable
material such as metal.
Ensure that the installation location meets the environmental conditions
specified in Chapter 8, Section 8.5 "Operating Environment and Storage
Environment."
Installing an
MCCB or
RCD/ELCB
Install a recommended molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) or
residual-current-operated protective device (RCD)/earth leakage circuit
breaker (ELCB) (with overcurrent protection) in the primary circuit of each
inverter to protect the wiring. Ensure that the circuit breaker capacity is
equivalent to or lower than the recommended capacity.
Installing an MC
in the secondary
circuit
If a magnetic contactor (MC) is installed in the inverter's output (secondary)
circuit for switching the motor to commercial power or for any other
purpose, ensure that both the inverter and the motor are completely stopped
before you turn the MC on or off.
Remove a surge killer integrated with the magnet contactor in the inverter's
output (secondary) circuit.
Installing an MC
in the primary
circuit
Do not turn the magnetic contactor (MC) in the primary circuit on or off
more than once an hour as an inverter failure may result.
If frequent starts or stops are required during motor operation, use
(FWD)/(REV) signals or the RUN/STOP key.
Protecting the
motor
The electronic thermal feature of the inverter can protect the motor. The
operation level and the motor type (general-purpose motor, inverter motor)
should be set. For high-speed motors or water-cooled motors, set a small
value for the thermal time constant.
If you connect the motor thermal relay to the motor with a long wire, a
high-frequency current may flow into the wiring stray capacitance. This
may cause the thermal relay to trip at a current lower than the set value. If
this happens, lower the carrier frequency or use the output circuit filter
(OFL).
Discontinuance of
power-factor
correcting
capacitor
Do not connect power-factor correcting capacitors to the inverter’s primary
circuit. (Use the DC reactor to improve the inverter power factor.) Do not
use power-factor correcting capacitors in the inverter’s output (secondary)
circuit. An overcurrent trip will occur, disabling motor operation.
Discontinuance of
surge killer
Do not connect a surge killer to the inverter's output (secondary) circuit.
Reducing noise
Use of a filter and shielded wires is typically recommended to satisfy EMC
Directives.
Refer to Appendices, App. A "Advantageous Use of Inverters (Notes on
electrical noise)" for details.
Measures against
surge currents
If an overvoltage trip occurs while the inverter is stopped or operated under
light load, it is assumed that the surge current is generated by open/close of
the phase-advancing capacitor in the power system.
* Connect a DC reactor to the inverter.
Megger test
When checking the insulation resistance of the inverter, use a 500 V megger
and follow the instructions contained in the FRENIC-Eco Instruction
Manual (INR-SI47-0882-E), Chapter 7, Section 7.5 "Insulation Test."
iv
Control circuit
wiring length
When using remote control, limit the wiring length between the inverter and
operator box to 20 m or less and use twisted pair or shielded wire.
Wiring length
between inverter
and motor
If long wiring is used between the inverter and the motor, the inverter may
overheat or trip due to overcurrent because a higher harmonics current
flows into the stray capacitance between each phase wire. Ensure that the
wiring is shorter than 50 m. If this length must be exceeded, lower the
carrier frequency or install an output circuit filter (OFL).
Wire size
Select wires with a sufficient capacity by referring to the current value or
recommended wire size.
Wire type
Do not share one multi-core cable in order to connect several inverters with
motors.
Grounding
Securely ground the inverter using the grounding terminal.
Driving
general-purpose
motor
Select an inverter according to the applicable motor ratings listed in the
standard specifications table for the inverter.
When high starting torque is required or quick acceleration or deceleration
is required, select an inverter with a capacity one size greater than the
standard. Refer to Chapter 7, Section 7.1 "Selecting Motors and Inverters"
for details.
Driving special
motors
Select an inverter that meets the following condition:
Inverter rated current > Motor rated current
Wiring
Selecting
inverter
capacity
Transportation and
storage
When transporting or storing inverters, follow the procedures and select locations that meet the
environmental conditions listed in the FRENIC-Eco Instruction Manual (INR-SI47-0882-E),
Chapter 1, Section 1.3 "Transportation" and Section 1.4 "Storage Environment."
v
How this manual is organized
This manual contains Chapters 1 through 9, Appendices and Glossary.
Part 1 General Information
Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION TO FRENIC-Eco
This chapter describes the features and control system of the FRENIC-Eco series, and the recommended
configuration for the inverter and peripheral equipment.
Chapter 2 PARTS NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
This chapter contains external views of the FRENIC-Eco series and an overview of terminal blocks,
including a description of the LED display and keys on the keypad.
Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD
This chapter describes inverter operation using the keypad. The inverter features three operation modes
(Running, Programming and Alarm modes) which enable you to run and stop the motor, monitor running
status, set function code data, display running information required for maintenance, and display alarm data.
The keypad is available in two types: standard keypad and optional multi-function keypad. For the
instructions on how to operate the multi-function keypad, refer to the "Multi-function Keypad Instruction
Manual" (INR-SI47-0890-E).
Part 2 Driving the Motor
Chapter 4 BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC
This chapter describes the main block diagrams for the control logic of the FRENIC-Eco series of inverters.
Chapter 5 RUNNING THROUGH RS485 COMMUNICATION
This chapter describes an overview of inverter operation through the RS485 communications facility. Refer
to the RS485 Communication User's Manual (MEH448a) or RS485 Communications Card "OPC-F1-RS"
Installation Manual (INR-SI47-0872) for details.
Part 3 Peripheral Equipment and Options
Chapter 6 SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
This chapter describes how to use a range of peripheral equipment and options, FRENIC-Eco's configuration
with them, and requirements and precautions for selecting wires and crimp terminals.
Part 4 Selecting Optimal Inverter Model
Chapter 7 SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND INVERTER CAPACITIES
This chapter provides you with information about the inverter output torque characteristics, selection
procedure, and equations for calculating capacities to help you select optimal motor and inverter models. It
also helps you select braking resistors.
vi
Part 5 Specifications
Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS
This chapter describes specifications of the output ratings, control system, and terminal functions for the
FRENIC-Eco series of inverters. It also provides descriptions of the operating and storage environment,
external dimensions, examples of basic connection diagrams, and details of the protective functions.
Chapter 9 FUNCTION CODES
This chapter contains overview lists of seven groups of function codes available for the FRENIC-Eco series
of inverters and details of each function code.
Appendices
App. A Advantageous Use of Inverters (Notes on electrical noise)
App. B Japanese Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics by Customers Receiving High Voltage or Special
High Voltage
App. C Effect on Insulation of General-purpose Motors Driven with 400 V Class Inverters
App. D Inverter Generating Loss
App. E Conversion from SI Units
App. F Allowable Current of Insulated Wires
Glossary
Icons
The following icons are used throughout this manual.
This icon indicates information which, if not heeded, can result in the inverter not operating to
full efficiency, as well as information concerning incorrect operations and settings which can
result in accidents.
This icon indicates information that can prove handy when performing certain settings or
operations.
This icon indicates a reference to more detailed information.
vii
CONTENTS
Part 1 General Information
Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION TO FRENIC-Eco
1.1
Features..................................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2
Control System ....................................................................................................................................... 1-19
1.3
Recommended Configuration ................................................................................................................. 1-20
Chapter 2 PARTS NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
2.1
External View and Allocation of Terminal Blocks.................................................................................... 2-1
2.2
LED Monitor, Keys and LED Indicators on the Keypad .......................................................................... 2-4
Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD
3.1
Overview of Operation Modes ................................................................................................................. 3-1
3.2
Running Mode .......................................................................................................................................... 3-3
3.2.1 Monitoring the running status ............................................................................................................. 3-3
3.2.2 Setting up frequency and PID process commands .............................................................................. 3-4
3.2.3 Running/stopping the motor................................................................................................................ 3-7
3.3
Programming Mode ................................................................................................................................ 3-11
3.3.1 Setting up basic function codes quickly -- Menu #0 "Quick Setup" --............................................. 3-13
3.3.2 Setting up function codes -- Menu #1 "Data Setting" --................................................................... 3-17
3.3.3 Checking changed function codes -- Menu #2 "Data Checking" -- .................................................. 3-18
3.3.4 Monitoring the running status -- Menu #3 "Drive Monitoring" -- ................................................... 3-19
3.3.5 Checking I/O signal status -- Menu #4 "I/O Checking" -- ............................................................... 3-22
3.3.6 Reading maintenance information -- Menu #5 "Maintenance Information" -- ................................ 3-26
3.3.7 Reading alarm information -- Menu #6 "Alarm Information" --...................................................... 3-29
3.3.8 Data copying information -- Menu #7 "Data Copying" --................................................................ 3-31
3.4
Alarm Mode............................................................................................................................................ 3-34
3.4.1 Releasing the alarm and switching to Running mode ....................................................................... 3-34
3.4.2 Displaying the alarm history ............................................................................................................. 3-34
3.4.3 Displaying the status of inverter at the time of alarm ....................................................................... 3-34
3.4.4 Switching to Programming mode ........................................................................................................... 3-34
Part 2 Driving the Motor
Chapter 4 BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC
4.1
Symbols Used in Block Diagrams and their Meanings ............................................................................ 4-1
4.2
Drive Frequency Command Generator ..................................................................................................... 4-2
4.3
Drive Command Generator....................................................................................................................... 4-4
4.4
Digital Terminal Command Decoder ........................................................................................................ 4-6
4.4.1 Terminals and related function codes .................................................................................................. 4-6
4.4.2 Functions assigned to digital control input terminals.......................................................................... 4-7
4.4.3 Block diagrams for digital control input terminals.............................................................................. 4-8
4.5
Digital Output Selector ........................................................................................................................... 4-12
4.5.1 Digital output components (Internal block) ...................................................................................... 4-12
4.5.2 Universal DO (Access to the function code S07 exclusively reserved for the communications
link) ................................................................................................................................................... 4-15
4.6
Analog Output (FMA) Selector .............................................................................................................. 4-16
4.7
Digital Output (FMP) Selector................................................................................................................ 4-17
4.8
Drive Command Controller .................................................................................................................... 4-18
4.9
PID Frequency Command Generator...................................................................................................... 4-20
viii
Chapter 5 RUNNING THROUGH RS485 COMMUNICATION (OPTION)
5.1
Overview on RS485 Communication ....................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.1 RS485 common specifications (standard and optional) ...................................................................... 5-2
5.1.2 RJ-45 connector pin assignment for standard RS485 communications port ....................................... 5-3
5.1.3 Pin assignment for optional RS485 Communications Card ................................................................ 5-4
5.1.4 Cable for RS485 communications port ............................................................................................... 5-4
5.1.5 Communications support devices........................................................................................................ 5-5
5.2
Overview of FRENIC Loader................................................................................................................... 5-6
5.2.1 Specifications ...................................................................................................................................... 5-6
5.2.2 Connection .......................................................................................................................................... 5-7
5.2.3 Function overview............................................................................................................................... 5-7
5.2.3.1 Setting of function code .............................................................................................................. 5-7
5.2.3.2 Multi-monitor.............................................................................................................................. 5-8
5.2.3.3 Running status monitor ............................................................................................................... 5-9
5.2.3.4 Test-running .............................................................................................................................. 5-10
5.2.3.5 Real-time trace—Displaying running status of an inverter in waveforms ................................ 5-11
Part 3 Peripheral Equipment and Options
Chapter 6 SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
6.1
Configuring the FRENIC-Eco .................................................................................................................. 6-1
6.2
Selecting Wires and Crimp Terminals....................................................................................................... 6-2
6.2.1 Recommended wires ........................................................................................................................... 6-4
6.3
Peripheral Equipment ............................................................................................................................... 6-8
6.4
Selecting Options.................................................................................................................................... 6-14
6.4.1 Peripheral equipment options............................................................................................................ 6-14
6.4.2 Options for operation and communications ...................................................................................... 6-22
6.4.3 Extended installation kit options ....................................................................................................... 6-27
6.4.4 Meter options .................................................................................................................................... 6-29
Part 4 Selecting Optimal Inverter Model
Chapter 7 SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND INVERTER CAPACITIES
7.1
Selecting Motors and Inverters ................................................................................................................. 7-1
7.1.1 Motor output torque characteristics..................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.2 Selection procedure............................................................................................................................. 7-3
7.1.3 Equations for selections ...................................................................................................................... 7-6
7.1.3.1 Load torque during constant speed running ................................................................................ 7-6
7.1.3.2 Acceleration and deceleration time calculation........................................................................... 7-7
7.1.3.3 Heat energy calculation of braking resistor............................................................................... 7-10
ix
Part 5 Specifications
Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS
8.1
Standard Models ....................................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.1 Three-phase 200 V series .................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.2 Three-phase 400 V series .................................................................................................................... 8-2
8.2
Models Available on Order ....................................................................................................................... 8-4
8.2.1 DCR built-in type................................................................................................................................ 8-4
8.2.1.1 Three-phase 200 V series ............................................................................................................ 8-4
8.2.1.2 Three-phase 400 V series ............................................................................................................ 8-5
8.3
Common Specifications............................................................................................................................ 8-6
8.4
Terminal Specifications ............................................................................................................................ 8-9
8.4.1 Terminal functions .............................................................................................................................. 8-9
8.4.2 Terminal arrangement diagram and screw specifications.................................................................. 8-28
8.4.2.1 Main circuit terminals ............................................................................................................... 8-28
8.4.2.2 Control circuit terminals............................................................................................................ 8-30
8.5
Operating Environment and Storage Environment ................................................................................. 8-31
8.5.1 Operating environment...................................................................................................................... 8-31
8.5.2 Storage environment ......................................................................................................................... 8-32
8.5.2.1 Temporary storage..................................................................................................................... 8-32
8.5.2.2 Long-term storage ..................................................................................................................... 8-32
8.6
External Dimensions............................................................................................................................... 8-33
8.6.1 Standard models ................................................................................................................................ 8-33
8.6.2 DC reactor ......................................................................................................................................... 8-36
8.6.3 Models available on order ................................................................................................................. 8-37
8.6.3.1 DCR built-in type ...................................................................................................................... 8-37
8.6.4 Standard keypad ................................................................................................................................ 8-40
8.7
Connection Diagrams ............................................................................................................................. 8-41
8.7.1 Running the inverter with keypad ..................................................................................................... 8-41
8.7.2 Running the inverter by terminal commands .................................................................................... 8-42
8.7.3 Running the DCR built-in type with terminal commands................................................................. 8-44
8.8
Protective Functions ............................................................................................................................... 8-46
Chapter 9 FUNCTION CODES
9.1
Function Code Tables ............................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.2
Overview of Function Codes .................................................................................................................. 9-19
9.2.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) ...................................................................................................... 9-19
9.2.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions)............................................................................................. 9-48
9.2.3 C codes (Control functions of frequency) ......................................................................................... 9-87
9.2.4 P codes (Motor parameters) .............................................................................................................. 9-91
9.2.5 H codes (High performance functions) ............................................................................................. 9-94
9.2.6 J codes (Application functions)....................................................................................................... 9-119
9.2.7 y codes (Link functions).................................................................................................................. 9-130
x
Appendices
App.A
A.1
A.2
A.3
App.B
B.1
B.2
App.C
C.1
C.2
C.3
C.4
App.D
App.E
App.F
Advantageous Use of Inverters (Notes on electrical noise)................................................................... A-1
Effect of inverters on other devices ....................................................................................................... A-1
Noise...................................................................................................................................................... A-2
Noise prevention.................................................................................................................................... A-4
Japanese Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics by Customers Receiving High Voltage
or Special High Voltage ....................................................................................................................... A-12
Application to general-purpose inverters............................................................................................. A-12
Compliance to the harmonic suppression for customers receiving high voltage
or special high voltage......................................................................................................................... A-13
Effect on Insulation of General-purpose Motors Driven with 400 V Class Inverters.......................... A-17
Generating mechanism of surge voltages ............................................................................................ A-17
Effect of surge voltages ....................................................................................................................... A-18
Countermeasures against surge voltages ............................................................................................. A-18
Regarding existing equipment ............................................................................................................. A-19
Inverter Generating Loss ..................................................................................................................... A-20
Conversion from SI Units.................................................................................................................... A-21
Allowable Current of Insulated Wires ................................................................................................. A-23
Glossary
xi
Part 1 General Information
Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION TO FRENIC-Eco
Chapter 2 PARTS NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD
Chapter 1
Introduction to FRENIC-Eco
This chapter describes the features and control system of the FRENIC-Eco series and the recommended
configuration for the inverter and peripheral equipment.
Contents
1.1
1.2
1.3
Features ....................................................................................................................................................... 1-1
Control System.......................................................................................................................................... 1-19
Recommended Configuration ................................................................................................................... 1-20
1.1 Features
Chap. 1
1.1 Features
„ Switching motor power between commercial lines and inverter outputs
The FRENIC-Eco series of inverters is equipped with built-in sequence control logic that supports
starting of the motor via the commercial lines by using an external sequence and switches the motor
power between commercial lines and inverter outputs. This feature simplifies the user’s power control
system configuration.
In addition to this Fuji’s standard switching sequence, an auto-switching sequence is also available
upon occurrence of an inverter alarm.
The schematic diagram below shows a typical sequence control circuit externally configured for an
effective application of the sequence control logic.
Refer to function codes E01 to E05 in Section 9.2.2 "E codes" and J22 in Section 9.2.6 "J codes."
„ Full PID control functions
The PID control has the "slow flowrate stop" and "deviation alarm/absolute value alarm output"
functions. It also supports a variety of manual speed (frequency) commands to make a balance-less
and bump-less switching available that automatically adjusts the output frequency against the
frequency command.
Further, the PID control has an anti-reset wind-up function for prevention of overshooting, as well as
supporting PID output limiter and integration hold/reset signals, facilitating the adjustment necessary
for PID control.
Refer to the PID Frequency Command Generator in Section 4.9, function codes E01 to E05, E20
to E22, E24, and E27 in Section 9.2.2 "E codes," and J01 to J06, J10 to J13, and J15 to J19 in
Section 9.2.6 "J codes."
1-1
ABOUT FRENIC-Eco
Default functions for fans and pumps
„ Slow flowrate stop function
A new function called slow flowrate stop is now added to the low limiter for securing the minimum
operation speed of a fan and pump, etc., whereby the operation will stop if the flowrate drops and
remains below the low limit for a certain length of time. This, combined with PID control, contributes
to more energy-saving operation.
Refer to function codes E20 to E22, E24, and E27 in Section 9.2.2 "E codes" and J15, J16, and
J17 in Section 9.2.6 "J codes."
„ Command loss detection
The analog frequency command is monitored and when an abnormal condition is detected, an alarm
signal is output. Further, if in a critical system such as an air conditioner for an important facility, an
abnormal condition is detected in the circuit handling the analog frequency command source, the
system will be stopped or will continue its operation at the specified speed (at the specified percentage
of the command just before the detection of the abnormal condition).
Refer to function codes E20 to E22, E24, E27, and E65 in Section 9.2.2 "E codes."
1-2
1.1 Features
Refer to function codes E20 to E22, E24, E27, E80 and E81 in Section 9.2.2 "E codes."
„ Continuous operation at momentary power failure
You can choose either tripping or automatic restart in the event of a momentary power failure. You can
choose starting at the frequency at the momentary power failure occurrence or starting at 0 Hz,
according to the requirement. Further, you can choose a control mode to prolong the running time
utilizing the kinetic energy due to the load’s moment of inertia during the momentary power failure.
Refer to function code F14 in Section 9.2.1 "F codes."
1-3
ABOUT FRENIC-Eco
A low output torque detection signal is asserted in the event of sudden decrease in torque as a result of
an abnormal condition such as the belt being broken between the motor and the load (e.g., a belt-driven
fan). This signal, which indicates abnormal conditions occurring in the facility (load), can therefore be
used as maintenance information.
Chap. 1
„ Low output torque detection
„ Switching between remote and local modes
You can choose a mode of inverter operation between remote (communications link or terminal
commands) and local (keypad in any location such as built-in or on the power control enclosure) for
both run commands and frequency commands, with combination sets of frequency command 1 and
frequency command 2, run command 1 and run command 2.
Refer to Running/stopping the motor in Section 3.2.3 and function codes F01 and F02 in Section
9.2.1 "F codes."
„ Auto sync search with motor in idling state
The auto sync search feature helps the idling motor start smoothly, by setting a synchronizing
frequency. When the motor is in idling state due to natural convection, momentary power failure or
other similar situations, the inverter can automatically search for the current motor rotation speed and
direction and start/restart the motor smoothly from the frequency that can be synchronized with the
current motor speed and rotation, without stopping it. For restart after a recovery from the momentary
power failure, you have a choice of two frequencies--the frequency saved at the power failure and the
starting frequency.
Refer to function codes H09 and H17 in Section 9.2.5 "H codes."
1-4
1.1 Features
A variety of frequency command sources are provided to match your power system as listed below.
• Analog terminal inputs
You can set up analog inputs with the following signals, either individually or in combination of them.
- 4 to 20 mA DC [C1] or 0 to 10 VDC [12]
- Inverse of the above signals
- Voltage input terminal for analog setting [V2] (built-in)
• Multistep frequency (8 steps)
• UP/DOWN operation
• Switching between frequency commands 1 and 2
• Suitable manipulation (addition) of frequencies, available by using auxiliary frequency commands 1
and 2
• RS485 communications link facility supported as standard
• Switching between remote and local command sources
Refer to function code F01 in Section 9.2.1 "F codes," E01 to E05 and E61 to E63 in Section
9.2.2 "E codes," and H30 in Section 9.2.5 "H codes."
1-5
ABOUT FRENIC-Eco
• Keypad ( /
keys)
The keypad allows you to set a frequency command as an output frequency, motor rotation speed, load
shaft speed, percentage to the maximum frequency, etc.
Chap. 1
„ Choosing from a variety of frequency command sources
„ Monitor for analog input
The inverter is equipped with input terminals for accepting analog signals from the outside equipment
or the motor. By connecting the outputs of a flow meter, a pressure gauge, or any other sensor, you can
display them on the LED monitor on the keypad that shows their physical values in easy-to-understand
analog values (multiplied with a specified coefficient in some cases). It is also possible to build a
host-controlled system by sending/receiving such information via the communications link to/from a
host computer.
Refer to function codes E43, E45, and E48 in Section 9.2.2 "E codes."
1-6
1.1 Features
„ Automatic energy-saving (standard feature)
Figure 1.1 Example of Energy-Saving
Refer to the Drive Command Controller in Section 4.8 and function codes F09 and F37 in
Section 9.2.1 "F codes."
„ Monitoring electric power
In addition to electric power monitoring on the standard keypad (or optional multi-function keypad),
online monitoring is available from the host equipment through the communications link.
This function monitors real-time power consumption, cumulative power consumption in watt-hours,
and cumulative power consumption with a specified coefficient (such as an electricity charge).
Refer to Chapter 3 "OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD" and Chapter 5 "RUNNING
THROUGH RS485 COMMUNICATION."
1-7
ABOUT FRENIC-Eco
A new, automatic energy-saving function is included as a standard feature, which controls the system
to minimize the total loss (motor loss plus inverter loss), rather than just the motor loss as in the
predecessor models. This feature thus contributes to further energy saving in applications with fans
and pumps.
Chap. 1
Contribution to energy-saving
„ PID control supported
PID control, which is a standard feature on the inverter, allows you to control temperature, pressure,
and flowrate without using any external adjustment devices so that you can configure a temperature
control system without an external thermal conditioner.
Refer to the PID Frequency Command Generator in Section 4.9 and function codes J01 to J06 in
Section 9.2.6 "J codes."
„ Cooling fan ON/OFF control
The inverter's cooling fan can be stopped whenever the inverter does not output power. This
contributes to noise reduction, longer service life, and energy saving.
Refer to function codes E20 to E22, E24, and E27 in Section 9.2.2 "E codes" and H06 in Section
9.2.5 "H codes."
1-8
1.1 Features
„ Reactor built-in type added to standard line-up
Refer to Chapter 6 "SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT."
„ Inrush current suppression circuit integrated in all models
An inrush current suppression circuit is integrated as standard in all models, therefore the cost of
peripheral devices such as magnetic contactor (MC) can be reduced.
„ EMC-filter built-in type added to semi-standard line-up
The product can be used to fully comply with the EMC Directives in EU. (15 kW or below)
„ Standard installation of input terminals for auxiliary control power of all models
The auxiliary control input terminals provide a convenient shortcut for automatic input power source
switching between commercial line and inverter as standard terminals.
Refer to Section 8.4 "Terminal Specifications."
Various functions for protection and easy maintenance
FRENIC-Eco series features the following facilities useful for maintenance.
Refer to Chapter 3 "OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD" in this manual and the
"FRENIC-Eco Instruction Manual" (INR-SI47-0882-E), Chapter 7 "MAINTENANCE AND
INSPECTION."
„ Lifetime estimation for DC link bus capacitors (reservoir capacitors)
This function shows the lifetime of the DC link bus capacitor as a ratio to its initial capacitance value,
helping you determine the replacement timing of the capacitor. (Design life of DC link bus capacitors:
10 years under these conditions: load = 80% of inverter's rated current; ambient temperature = 40qC)
„ Long-life fans
Use of a long-life fan reduces replacement work. (Design life of fans: 7 years for models of 5.5 kW or
below; 4.5 years for models of 7.5-30 kW; 3 years for models of 37 kW or above, at ambient
temperature of 40°C)
1-9
ABOUT FRENIC-Eco
A DC reactor for power-factor correction is now integrated in the inverter (for the range of 0.75 to 55
kW). In addition, a zero-phase reactor (ferrite ring) and a capacitive filter are integrated in the inverters
of 22 kW or below. These features simplify the power-related wiring (no need for DC reactor and
capacitive filter wiring). The new good-shortcut wiring feature also fully covers Standard
Specifications for Public Building Construction set by the Japanese Ministry of Land, Infrastructure
and Transport (Volume for Electric Facilities and Volume for Mechanical Facilities).
Chap. 1
Consideration for surrounding environment
„ Easy to replace cooling fans
On 5.5-30 kW models, you can easily replace the cooling fan in simple steps, since it is mounted on
the upper part of the inverter. On models of 37 kW or above, you can replace it easily from the front
side without detaching the inverter from your enclosure.
To replace the cooling fan, follow the procedures as shown below.
<FRN15F1S-2J>
<FRN45F1S-2J>
1-10
1.1 Features
These data can be transferred to host equipment via the communications link and used for monitoring
and maintenance for mechanical system to increase the reliability of the facility or plant (load).
„ Outputting a lifetime early warning signal to the programmable transistor
When either one of the DC link bus capacitor (reservoir capacitor), the electrolytic capacitors on the
printed circuit boards, and the cooling fans is nearing the end of its lifetime, a lifetime early warning
signal is output.
Refer to function codes E20 to E22, E24, and E27 in Section 9.2.2 "E codes."
„ Record of the 4 latest alarm history available
You can view alarm codes and their related information up to four latest ones.
Refer to Section 3.3.7 "Reading alarm information."
„ Protective function against phase loss in input/output
Protection against phase loss in input/output circuits is possible at start-up and during operation.
Refer to the Protective Functions in Section 8.8 and function code H98 in Section 9.2.5 "H
codes."
„ Protective function for grounding fault
Protection is provided for an overcurrent caused by a grounding fault.
Refer to the Protective Functions in Section 8.8.
1-11
ABOUT FRENIC-Eco
FRENIC-Eco series accumulates running hours of the inverter itself, motor (mechanical system),
cooling fan, and electrolytic capacitor on the printed circuit board for recording and displaying on the
keypad.
Chap. 1
„ Cumulative running hours of inverter, capacitor, cooling fan, and motor
„ Protection of motor with PTC thermistor
By connecting the Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) thermistor embedded in the motor to the
terminal [V2], you can monitor the temperature of the motor, and stop the inverter output before the
motor overheats, thereby protecting the motor. You can select the action in the event of an overheat
hazard according to the PTC protection level: whether to stop the inverter (alarm stop) or to turn ON
the alarm output signal on the programmed terminal.
Refer to function codes F10 to F12 in Section 9.2.1 "F codes" and H26 and H27 in Section 9.2.5
"H codes."
1-12
1.1 Features
„ Standard keypad capable of operating at a remote site
The standard keypad has the function code data copying function that allows you to copy data to other
inverters. A multi-function keypad (optional) is also available.
Refer to Chapter 2 "PARTS NAMES AND FUNCTIONS," Section 3.3.8 "Data copying
information," Section 6.4.2 "Options for operation and communications," and Section 9.2
"Overview of Function Codes." Refer to function codes E43, E45 to E47 in Section 9.2.2 "E
codes."
„ Quick setup function
Using an optional multi-function keypad can define a set of 19 function codes for quick setup. This
feature thus allows you to combine only frequently used or important function codes into a customized
set to shortcut operation and management.
Refer to Section 3.3.1 "Setting up function codes quickly."
„ Menu mode accessible from the keypad
You can easily access the keypad menu mode including "Data setting," "Data checking," "Drive
monitoring," "I/O checking," "Maintenance information," and "Alarm information."
Refer to Section 3.3 "Programming Mode."
1-13
ABOUT FRENIC-Eco
Using the optional extension cable easily allows local mode operation at a remote site such as on the
power system enclosure wall or on hand.
Chap. 1
Simple operation and wiring
„ Multi-function keypad (option)
- A backlit LCD makes it easy to view and note the displayed data.
- Interactive mode of operation simplifies the set-up procedures.
- The keypad can save function code data for up to three inverters.
key switches the mode between Remote and Local with a single touch on it (holding it
- The
down for three seconds).
- The keypad allows you to customize the defined set of 19 function codes for quick setup through
addition and deletion into your own favorite function code set.
- The keypad allows you to measure the load factor around the clock.
- The keypad is equipped with a communications debug feature.
Refer to Section 6.4.2 "Options for operation and communications," Section 9.2 "Overview of
Function Codes," and function codes E43, E45 to E47 in Section 9.2.2,"E codes."
„ Easy-to-remove/mount front cover and terminal cover
The front cover and the terminal cover of the FRENIC-Eco are easy to remove and mount for setup,
checkup and maintenance.
Refer to Section 2.1 "External View and Allocation of Terminal Blocks" in this manual and the
FRENIC-Eco Instruction Manual (INR-SI47-0882-E), Chapter 2 "MOUNTING AND WIRING
OF THE INVERTER."
„ LED monitor on the keypad displaying all types of data
You can access and monitor all types of the inverter's operating status data including output frequency,
reference frequency, load shaft speed, output current, output voltage, alarm history, and input power,
using the keypad regardless the pattern of installation.
Refer to Chapter 3 "OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD."
1-14
1.1 Features
„ All standard models comply with the EC Directive (CE marking), UL standards and
Canadian standards (cUL certification).
All standard FRENIC-Eco inverters comply with European and North American/Canadian standards,
enabling standardization of the specifications for machines and equipment used at home and abroad.
„ If the model with built-in EMC filter is used, the model conforms to the European
EMC Directive.
„ Enhanced network support
With an optional card, the inverter extends its conformity with various world-standard of open bus
protocols such as DeviceNet, PROFIBUS-DP, LonWorks network, Modbus Plus or CC-Link.
A standard RS485 communications port (compatible to Modbus RTU protocol, shared with a keypad)
is a built-in feature. With an additional RS485 communications card (optional), up to two ports are
available.
Networking allows you to control up to 31 inverters through host equipment such as a PC (personal
computer) and PLC (programmable logic controller.)
Refer to Chapter 5 "RUNNING THROUGH RS485 COMMUNICATION," Section 6.4.2
"Options for operation and communications," and Section 9.4.7, "y codes."
1-15
ABOUT FRENIC-Eco
FRENIC-Eco series of inverters are designed for use in global market and to comply with the global
standards listed below.
Chap. 1
Global products
Space saving
„ Side-by-side mounting is possible.
When multiple inverter units are installed next to each other inside a panel, the installation space can
be minimized. This applies to inverters of 5.5 kW or below operating at ambient temperatures of 40°C
or below.
Figure 1.2 Side-by-side Mounting (Example)
1-16
1.1 Features
„ Compatible with a wide range of frequency command sources
Refer to function codes E01 to E05 in Section 9.2.5 "H codes."
„ Switchable sink/source signal input mode
The input mode (sink/source) of the digital input terminals can be switched by means of a slide switch
inside the inverter. No engineering change is required in other control equipments including PLC.
Refer to Section 8.4.1 "Terminal functions."
„ Three transistor switch outputs and a relay output card option available
The three transistor switch outputs enable issuing of motor overload early warning, lifetime early
warning and other information signals when the inverter is running. In addition, using the optional
relay output card OPC-F1-RY can convert these outputs to three pairs of transfer relay contact outputs
[Y1A/Y1B/Y1C], [Y2A/Y2B/Y2C] and [Y3A/Y3B/Y3C], which can be used in the same manner as
the conventional relay contact output [30A/B/C].
Refer to function codes E20 to E22, E24, and E27 in Section 9.2.2 "E codes" in this manual and
the Relay Output Card "OPC-F1-RY" Instruction Manual (INR-SI47-0873).
„ Maximum frequency - up to 120 Hz
The inverter can be used with equipment that requires a high motor speed. For high-speed applications,
you need to ensure beforehand that the inverter can operate normally with the motor.
Refer to function code F03 in Section 9.2.1 "F codes."
„ Two points can be set for a non-linear V/f pattern.
The addition of an extra point (total: 2 points) for the non-linear V/f pattern, which can be set as
desired, improves the FRENIC-Eco's drive capability, because the V/f pattern can be adjusted to
match a wider application area. (Maximum frequency: 120 Hz; Base frequency range: 25 Hz and
above)
Refer to Section 4.8 "Drive Command Controller" and function codes F04 and F05 in Section
9.2.1 "F codes."
1-17
ABOUT FRENIC-Eco
You can select the optimum frequency command source that matches your machine or equipment via
the keypad ( / keys), analog voltage input, analog current input, multistep frequency commands
(steps 0 to 7), or the RS485 communications link.
Chap. 1
The ideal functions to serve a multiplicity of needs
Flexible through options
„ Function code data copying function
Because the optional multi-function keypad is provided with a built-in copy function, similar to that
installed on the inverter as a standard feature, function code data can be easily copied to the second or
more inverters without requiring setups individual to the inverter.
Refer to Section 9.2 "Overview of Function Codes" and Section 3.3.8 "Data copying."
„ Customized set of function code for simplified operation
By using an optional multi-function keypad, you can define your own set of function codes (in
addition to those for quick setup) which you will use most frequently, so that you can modify and
manage the data for those function codes in simple operation.
Refer to the Multi-function Keypad Instruction Manual (INR-SI47-0890-E).
„ Inverter loader software (option)
FRENIC Loader is a support tool for FRENIC-Eco/Mini series of inverters to enable a
Windows-based PC to remotely control the inverter. The Loader makes it significantly easier to
perform data editing and management such as data management, data copying, and real-time tracing.
(For connection via a USB port of your PC, an optional USB-RS485 interface converter is available.)
Refer to Chapter 5 "RUNNING THROUGH RS485 COMMUNICATION" in this manual and
the FRENIC Loader Instruction Manual (INR-SI47-0903-E).
„ Mounting Adapter for External Cooling
A mounting adapter for external cooling (Option for 30 kW or below. Standard for 37 kW or above)
cools the inverter outside the panel. It can be easily mounted on the enclosure.
Refer to Section 6.4.3 "Extended installation kit options."
1-18
1.2 Control System
Chap. 1
1.2 Control System
As shown in Figure 1.4, the converter section converts the input commercial power to DC power by
means of a full-wave rectifier, which is then used to charge the DC link bus capacitor (reservoir
capacitor). The inverter portion modulates the electric energy charged in the DC link bus capacitor by
Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) and feeds the output to the motor. (The PWM switching frequency is
called the "Carrier Frequency.") The voltage applied to the motor terminals has a waveform shown on
the left-hand side ("PWM voltage waveform") of Figure 1.3, consisting of alternating cycles of
positive pulse trains and negative pulse trains. The current running through the motor, on the other
hand, has a fairly smooth alternating current (AC) waveform shown on the right-hand side ("Current
waveform") of Figure 1.3, thanks to the inductance of the motor coil inductance. The control logic
section controls the PWM so as to bring this current waveform as close to a sinusoidal waveform as
possible.
PWM voltage waveform
Current waveform
Figure 1.3 Output Voltage and Current Waveform of the Inverter
For the frequency command given in the control logic, the accelerator/decelerator processor calculates
the acceleration/deceleration rate required by run/stop control of the motor and transfers the calculated
results to the 3-phase voltage processor directly or via the V/f pattern generator whose output drives
the PWM block to switch the power gates.
Refer to Section 4.8 "Drive Command Controller" for details.
The FRENIC-Eco series features simplified magnetic flux estimation integrated in the V/f pattern
generator section. This feature automatically adjusts the voltage applied to the motor according to the
motor load so as to make the motor generate more stable and higher torque even during low speed
operation.
The control logic section, which is the very brain of the inverter, allows you to customize the inverter's
driving patterns throughout the function code data settings.
Refer to Section 4.8 "Drive Command Controller," function codes F04 and F05 in Section 9.2.1
"F codes," and H50 and H51 in Section 9.2.5 "H codes" for details.
Figure 1.4 Schematic Block Diagram of FRENIC-Eco
1-19
ABOUT FRENIC-Eco
This section gives you a general overview of inverter control systems and features specific to the
FRENIC-Eco series of inverters.
1.3 Recommended Configuration
To control a motor with an inverter correctly, you should consider the rated capacity of both the motor
and the inverter and ensure that the combination matches the specifications of the machine or system
to be used. Refer to Chapter 7 "SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND INVERTER CAPACITIES"
for details.
After selecting the rated capacity, select appropriate peripheral equipment for the inverter, then
connect them to the inverter.
Refer to Chapter 6 "SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT" and Section 8.7 "Connection
Diagrams" for details on the selection and connection of peripheral equipment.
Figure 1.5 shows the recommended configuration for an inverter and peripheral equipment.
Figure 1.5 Recommended Configuration Diagram
1-20
Chapter 2
PARTS NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
This chapter contains external views of the FRENIC-Eco series and an overview of terminal blocks,
including a description of the LED monitor, keys and LED indicators on the keypad.
Contents
2.1
2.2
External View and Allocation of Terminal Blocks ...................................................................................... 2-1
LED Monitor, Keys and LED Indicators on the Keypad ............................................................................ 2-4
2.1 External View and Allocation of Terminal Blocks
2.1 External View and Allocation of Terminal Blocks
(1) External views
PARTS NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
„ Standard types
Chap. 2
Figures 2.1 and 2.2 show the external views of the FRENIC-Eco.
(a) FRN15F1S-2J
(b) FRN37F1S-2J
Figure 2.1 External Views of Standard Type Inverters
2-1
„ FRENIC-Eco with integrated DC reactor
(a) FRN15F1H-2J
(b) FRN37F1H-2J
Figure 2.2 External Views of FRENIC-Eco with Integrated DC Reactor (DCR)
2-2
2.1 External View and Allocation of Terminal Blocks
(2) Terminal block location
Chap. 2
PARTS NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
(a) FRN15F1S-2J
(b) FRN37F1S-2J
Figure 2.3 Terminal Blocks and Keypad Enclosure Location
(a) FRN15F1S-2J
(b) FRN37F1S-2J
Figure 2.4 Enlarged View of the Terminal Blocks
Refer to Chapter 8 "SPECIFICATIONS" for details on terminal functions, arrangement and
connection and to Chapter 6, Section 6.2.1 "Recommended wires" when selecting wires.
For details on the keys and their functions, refer to Section 2.2 "LED Monitor, Keys and LED
Indicators on the Keypad." For details on keying operation and function code setting, refer to
Chapter 3 "OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD."
2-3
2.2 LED Monitor, Keys and LED Indicators on the Keypad
As shown at the right, the keypad consists
of a four-digit LED monitor, six keys, and
five LED indicators.
The keypad allows you to run and stop the
motor, monitor running status, and switch
to the menu mode. In the menu mode, you
can set the function code data, monitor I/O
signal states, maintenance information, and
alarm information.
A multi-function keypad is optionally
available.
7-segment
LED monitor
LED
indicators
Program/
Reset key
RUN key
Function/
Data key
STOP key
UP key
DOWN key
Figure 2.5 Keypad
Table 2.1 Overview of Keypad Functions
Item
LED Monitor,
Keys, and
LED Indicators
Functions
Four-digit, 7-segment LED monitor which displays the followings according to the
operation modes.
„ In Running mode:
Running status information (e.g., output frequency, current,
and voltage)
„ In Programming mode: Menus, function codes and their data
„ In Alarm mode:
Alarm code, which identifies the error factor if the
protective function is activated.
LED
Monitor
Program/Reset key which switches the operation modes of the inverter.
„ In Running mode:
Pressing this key switches the inverter to Programming
mode.
„ In Programming mode: Pressing this key switches the inverter to Running mode.
„ In Alarm mode:
Pressing this key after removing the error factor will switch
the inverter to Running mode.
Function/Data key which switches the operation you want to do in each mode as
follows:
„ In Running mode:
Pressing this key switches the information to be displayed
concerning the status of the inverter (output frequency
(Hz), output current (A), output voltage (V), etc.).
„ In Programming mode: Pressing this key displays the function code and sets the
and
keys.
data entered with
„ In Alarm mode:
Pressing this key displays the details of the problem
indicated by the alarm code that has come up on the LED
monitor.
Operation
Keys
RUN key. Press this key to run the motor.
STOP key. Press this key to stop the motor.
and
RUN LED
UP and DOWN keys. Press these keys to select the setting items and change the
function code data displayed on the LED monitor.
Lights when the inverter is running by a run command from the
(FWD)/(REV) signal, or via the communications link.
key,
Lights when the keypad operation is selected (F02 = 0, 2 or 3). In Programming and
KEYPAD
CONTROL LED Alarm modes, the keypad operation is disabled even if the indicator lights.
LED
Indicators
The lower 3 LED indicators identify the unit of numeral displayed on the LED monitor
in Running mode by combination of lit and unlit states of them.
Unit and mode
Unit: kW, A, Hz, r/min and m/min
expression by the
Refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.2.1 "Monitoring the running status" for details.
three LED
While
the inverter is in Programming mode, two LEDs at both ends of the lower
indicators
indicators light.
In Programming mode: ‫ع‬Hz ‫غ‬A ‫ع‬kW
2-4
2.2 LED Monitor, Keys and LED Indicators on the Keypad
„ LED monitor
If one of LED4 through LED1 is blinking, it means that the cursor is at this digit, allowing you to
change it.
LED4
LED3
LED2
LED1
Figure 2.6 7-Segment LED Monitor
Table 2.2 Alphanumeric Characters on the LED Monitor
Character
7-segment
Character
7-segment
Character
7-segment
Character
7-segment
0
9
i
K
r
T
1
A
C
J
L
S
5U
2
b
$D
K
M
T
6
3
C
%E
L
N
u
7
4
d
F
M
O
V
W
5
E
G
n
P
W
Y
6
F
H
o
Q
X
Z
7
G
I
P
R
y
[
8
H
J
q
S
Z
<
Special characters and symbols (numbers with decimal point, minus and underscore)
0. - 9.
– -
_
A
„ Simultaneous keying
Simultaneous keying means pressing two keys at the same time. The FRENIC-Eco supports
simultaneous keying as listed below. The simultaneous keying operation is expressed by a "+" letter
between the keys throughout this manual.
(For example, the expression "
key.)
+
keys" stands for pressing the
key while holding down the
Table 2.3 Simultaneous Keying
Operation mode
Used to:
Simultaneous keying
+
keys
+
keys
+
keys
Change certain function code data. (Refer to codes F00,
H03, and H97 in Chapter 9 "FUNCTION CODES.")
Programming mode
Alarm mode
Switch to Programming mode without resetting alarms
currently occurred.
2-5
PARTS NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
If the decimal point of LED1 is blinking, it means that the currently displayed data is a value of the
PID process command, not the frequency data usually displayed.
Chap. 2
In Running mode, the LED monitor displays running status information (output frequency, current or
voltage); in Programming mode, it displays menus, function codes and their data; and in Alarm mode,
it displays an alarm code which identifies the error factor if the protective function is activated.
Chapter 3
OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD
This chapter describes inverter operation using the keypad. The inverter features three operation modes
(Running, Programming and Alarm modes) which enable you to run and stop the motor, monitor running
status, set function code data, display running information required for maintenance, and display alarm data.
The keypad is available in two types: standard keypad and optional multi-function keypad. For the
instructions on how to operate the multi-function keypad, refer to the "Multi-function Keypad Instruction
Manual" (INR-SI47-0890-E).
Contents
3.1 Overview of Operation Modes.................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 Running Mode ............................................................................................................................................ 3-3
3.2.1 Monitoring the running status ............................................................................................................. 3-3
3.2.2 Setting up frequency and PID process commands .............................................................................. 3-4
3.2.3 Running/stopping the motor................................................................................................................ 3-7
3.3 Programming Mode .................................................................................................................................. 3-11
3.3.1 Setting up basic function codes quickly -- Menu #0 "Quick Setup" --............................................. 3-13
3.3.2 Setting up function codes -- Menu #1 "Data Setting" --................................................................... 3-17
3.3.3 Checking changed function codes -- Menu #2 "Data Checking" -- .................................................. 3-18
3.3.4 Monitoring the running status -- Menu #3 "Drive Monitoring" -- ................................................... 3-19
3.3.5 Checking I/O signal status -- Menu #4 "I/O Checking" -- ............................................................... 3-22
3.3.6 Reading maintenance information -- Menu #5 "Maintenance Information" -- ................................ 3-26
3.3.7 Reading alarm information -- Menu #6 "Alarm Information" --...................................................... 3-29
3.3.8 Data copying information -- Menu #7 "Data Copying" --................................................................ 3-31
3.4 Alarm Mode .............................................................................................................................................. 3-34
3.4.1 Releasing the alarm and switching to Running mode ....................................................................... 3-34
3.4.2 Displaying the alarm history ............................................................................................................. 3-34
3.4.3 Displaying the status of inverter at the time of alarm ....................................................................... 3-34
3.4.4 Switching to Programming mode...................................................................................................... 3-34
3.1 Overview of Operation Modes
3.1
Overview of Operation Modes
FRENIC-Eco features the following three operation modes:
■ Running mode
: This mode allows you to enter run/stop commands in regular operation. You
can also monitor the running status in real time.
■ Alarm mode
* Alarm code: Indicates the cause of the alarm condition that has triggered a protective
function. For details, refer to Chapter 8, Section 8.8 "Protective Functions."
Figure 3.1 shows the status transition of the inverter between these three operation modes.
Figure 3.1 Status Transition between Operation Modes
Figure 3.2 illustrates the transition of the LED monitor screen during Running mode, the transition
between menu items in Programming mode, and the transition between alarm codes at different
occurrences in Alarm mode.
3-1
OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD
: If an alarm condition arises, the inverter automatically enters the Alarm
mode. In this mode, you can view the corresponding alarm code* and its
related information on the LED monitor.
Chap. 3
■ Programming mode : This mode allows you to set function code data and check a variety of
information relating to the inverter status and maintenance.
*1 In speed monitor, you can have any of the following displayed according to the setting of function code E48:
Output frequency (Hz), Motor speed (r/min), Load shaft speed (r/min), and Display speed (%).
*2 Applicable only when PID control is active. (J01 = 1 or 2)
*3 Applicable only when the analog signal input monitor is assigned to any terminals [12], [C1], or [V2] by E61,
E62 or E63 (= 20).
*4 Applicable only when the full-menu mode is active. (E52 = 2)
Figure 3.2 Transition between Basic Display Frames by Operation Mode
3-2
3.2 Running Mode
3.2
Running Mode
When the inverter is turned on, it automatically enters Running mode. In this mode, you can:
(1) Monitor the running status (e.g., output frequency, output current),
(2) Set up the frequency command and others, and
Chap. 3
(3) Run/stop the motor.
In Running mode, the eleven items listed below can be monitored. Immediately after the inverter is
turned on, the monitor item specified by function code E43 is displayed. Press the
key to switch
between monitor items. For details of switching the monitor item by using the
key, refer to
"Monitoring of Running Status" in Figure 3.2 Transition between Basic Display Frames by Operation
Mode.
Table 3.1 Monitoring Items
Monitor Items
Display
Sample on
the LED
monitor *1
Speed monitor
Function code E48 specifies what to be displayed on the LED monitor and LED
indicators.
LED indicator
‫ع‬: on, ‫غ‬: off
Unit
Meaning of Displayed Value
Function
Code E43
0
Output
frequency
‫ع‬Hz ‫غ‬A ‫غ‬kW
Hz
Motor speed
‫ع‬Hz ‫ع‬A ‫غ‬kW
r/min
Output frequency (Hz) ×
120
P01
(E48 = 3)
Load shaft
speed
‫ع‬Hz ‫ع‬A ‫غ‬kW
r/min
Output frequency (Hz) u E50
(E48 = 4)
Speed (%)
‫غ‬Hz ‫غ‬A ‫غ‬kW
%
Output frequency
× 100
Maximum frequency
(E48 = 7)
Output current
‫غ‬Hz ‫ع‬A ‫غ‬kW
A
Current output from the inverter in
RMS
3
Output voltage *2
W
‫غ‬Hz ‫غ‬A ‫غ‬kW
V
Voltage output from the inverter in
RMS
4
Calculated
output torque
‫غ‬Hz ‫غ‬A ‫غ‬kW
%
Motor output torque in % (Calculated
value)
8
Input power
‫غ‬Hz ‫غ‬A ‫ع‬kW
kW
Input power to the inverter
9
PID process
command
*3, *4
‫غ‬Hz ‫غ‬A ‫غ‬kW
㧙
PID feedback
value
*3, *5
‫غ‬Hz ‫غ‬A ‫غ‬kW
㧙
Refer to the function codes E40 and
E41 for details.
12
‫غ‬Hz ‫غ‬A ‫غ‬kW
%
PID output in % as the maximum
frequency (F03) being at 100%
14
Load factor of the motor in % as the
rated output being at 100%
15
Motor output in kW
16
PID output *3, *4
*6
‫غ‬Hz ‫غ‬A ‫غ‬kW
%
Motor output *7
‫غ‬Hz ‫غ‬A ‫ع‬kW
kW
Load factor
Analog input *8
‫غ‬Hz ‫غ‬A ‫غ‬kW
3-3
㧙
Frequency actually being output
PID process command/feedback value
transformed to that of virtual physical
value of the object to be controlled
(e.g. temperature)
Analog input signal to the inverter,
transformed by E40 and E41
Refer to the function codes E40 and
E41 for details.
(E48 = 0)
10
17
OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD
3.2.1 Monitoring the running status
*1 A value exceeding 9999 cannot be displayed on the 4-digit LED monitor screen, so “
“ (7-segment letters)
appear instead.
*2 For displaying an output voltage on the LED monitor, the 7-segment letter W is used in the lowest digit as an
alternative expression of the unit of the V (volt).
*3 These PID-related items appear only when the inverter PID-controls the motor according to a PID process
command specified by the function code J01 (= 1 or 2).
*4 When the LED monitor displays a PID process command or its output amount, the dot (decimal point) attached to
the lowest digit of the 7-segment letter blinks.
*5 When the LED monitor displays a PID feedback value, the dot (decimal point) attached to the lowest digit of the
7-segment letter lights.
6
* For displaying a load factor on the LED monitor, the 7-segment letter is used in the lowest digit as an alternative
expression of the unit of %.
*7 When the LED monitor displays the motor output, the unit LED indicator "kW" blinks.
*8 Analog input monitoring becomes active only when any data of the function codes E61, E62 and E63 is effective (=
20) to define a terminal function.
3.2.2 Setting up frequency and PID process commands
You can set up the desired frequency and PID process commands by using
and
keys on the
keypad. It is also possible to set up the frequency command as load shaft speed, motor speed or speed
(%) by setting function code E48.
■ Setting up a frequency command
Using
and
keys (Factory default)
(1) Set function code F01 to "0: Keypad operation." This can be done only when the inverter is in
Running mode.
(2) Press the
/
key to display the present reference frequency. The lowest digit will blink.
(3) If you need to change the frequency command, press the
/
key again. The new setting will
be automatically saved into the inverter's internal memory and retained even when the power is
off. When the power is turned on next time, the setting will be used as an initial reference
frequency.
• The frequency command can be saved either automatically as mentioned above or by
key. You can choose either way using function code E64.
pressing the
key)" but have
• If you have set function code F01 to "0: Keypad operation ( /
selected a frequency command source other than frequency command 1 (i.e., frequency
command 2, frequency command via communication, or multistep frequency command),
then the
/
key is disabled to change the current frequency command even in
Running mode. Pressing either of these keys just displays the present reference
frequency.
• When you start specifying or changing the frequency command or any other parameter
with the
/
key, the lowest digit on the display blinks and starts changing. As you
are holding down the key, blinking will gradually move to the upper digit places and the
upper digits will be changeable.
• If you press the
/
key once and then hold down the
key for more than 1 second
after the lowest digit starts blinking, blinking will move to the next upper digit place to
allow you to change the value of that digit (cursor movement). This way you can easily
change the values of the higher digits.
key)" and selecting
• By setting function code C30 to "0: Keypad operation ( /
frequency command 2, you can also specify or change the frequency command in the
same manner using the
/
key
You can set up a frequency command not only with the frequency (Hz) but also with other menu items
(Motor speed, load shaft speed, and speed (%)) depending on the setting of function code E48 (= 3, 4,
or 7) "Speed monitor items" as shown in Table 3.1.
3-4
3.2 Running Mode
■ Make setting under PID control
To enable PID control, you need to set function code J01 to 1 or 2.
Refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.9, "PID Frequency Command Generator" for details on the PID
control.
and
keys
(1) Set function code F01 to "0: Keypad operation."
(2) Set the LED monitor to something other than the speed monitor (E43=0) when the keypad is in
Running mode. When the keypad is in Programming or Alarm mode, you cannot modify the PID
/
key. To enable the PID process command to be modified
process command with the
with the
/
key, first switch to Running mode.
/
key to have the PID process command displayed. The lowest digit will blink on
(3) Press the
the LED monitor.
(4) To change the PID process command, press the
/
key again. The PID process command
you have specified will be automatically saved into the inverter’s internal memory. It is kept
there even if you temporarily switch to another means of specifying the PID process command
and then go back to the means of specifying the PID process command via the keypad. Also, it is
kept there even while the inverter is powered off, and will be used as the initial PID process
command next time the inverter is powered on.
• Even if multistep frequency is selected as the PID process command ((SS4) = ON), you
still can set the process command using the keypad.
/
key
• When function code J02 is set to any value other than 0, pressing the
displays, on the 7-segment LED monitor, the PID command currently selected, while you
cannot change the setting.
• On the 7-segment LED monitor, the decimal point of the lowest digit is used to
characterize what is displayed. The decimal point of the lowest digit blinks when a PID
process command is displayed; the decimal point lights when a PID feedback value is
displayed.
Table 3.2 PID Process Command Manually Set with
PID Control
(Selection)
J01
PID Control
(Remote Process
Command)
J02
LED Monitor
E43
Multistep
Frequency
(SS4)
0
1 or 2
/
Key and Requirements
With the
/
key
PID process command by keypad
Other than 0
Other than 0
3-5
ON or OFF
PID process command currently
selected
OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD
Setting the PID process command with
Chap. 3
Under the PID control, the items that can be set or checked with
and
keys are different from
those under regular frequency control, depending upon the current LED monitor setting. If the LED
monitor is set to the speed monitor (E43 = 0), you can access manual speed commands (Frequency
command) with
and
keys; if it is set to any other, you can access the PID process command with
those keys.
Setting up the frequency command with
and
keys under PID control
When function code F01 is set to "0" (Enable
keys on keypad) and frequency command 1 is
/
selected as a manual speed command (that is, disabling the frequency setting command via
communications link and multistep frequency command), switching the LED monitor to the speed
monitor in Running mode enables you to modify the frequency command with the
keys.
/
In Programming or Alarm mode, the
You need to switch to Running mode.
/
keys are disabled to modify the frequency command.
Table 3.3 lists the combinations of the commands and the figure illustrates how the manual speed
command entered via the keypad is translated to the final frequency command .
The setting procedure is the same as that for setting of a usual frequency command.
Table 3.3 Manual Speed (Frequency) Command Set with
PID
Frequency Multistep Multistep
LED
Control
Monitor Command 1 Frequency Frequency
(Selection)
(SS1)
(SS2)
F01
E43
J01
/
Link
Operation
Selection
(LE)
Keys and Requirements
Disable
PID
Pressing
/
Control keys controls:
(Hz/PID)
OFF
(PID
enabled)
0
1 or 2
OFF
OFF
OFF
PID output
(as final frequency
command)
Manual speed
ON
(frequency)
(PID
command set by
disabled)
keypad
0
OFF
(PID
enabled)
Other than the above
3-6
PID output
(as final frequency
command)
Manual speed
ON
(frequency)
(PID
command currently
disabled)
selected
3.2 Running Mode
3.2.3 Running/stopping the motor
By factory default, pressing the
key starts
running the motor in the forward direction and
pressing the
key decelerates the motor to stop.
The
key is enabled only in Running mode.
Chap. 3
The motor rotational direction can be selected by
changing the setting of function code F02.
■ Operational relationship between function code F02 (Run command) and
Table 3.4 lists the relationship between function code F02 settings and the
the motor rotational direction.
key
key, which determines
Table 3.4 Motor Rotational Direction Specified by F02
Data for F02 Pressing the
0
key runs the motor:
In the direction commanded by terminal
[FWD] or [REV]
key disabled
1
(The motor is driven by terminal command
[FWD] or [REV].)
2
In the forward direction
3
In the reverse direction
(Note) The rotational direction of
IEC-compliant motors is opposite to
that of the motor shown here.
For the details on operations with function code F02, refer Chapter 9 “FUNCTION CODES.”
When the keypad is in use for specifying the frequency settings or driving the motor, do not
disconnect the keypad from the inverter when the motor is running. Doing so may stop the
inverter.
3-7
OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD
For the optional multi-function keypad, see page
3-10.
■ Remote and local modes
The inverter can be operated either in remote or local mode. In remote mode that applies to ordinary
operation, the inverter is driven under the control of the data settings stored in the inverter, whereas in
local mode that applies to maintenance operation, it is separated from the control system and is driven
manually under the control of the keypad.
• Remote mode: The run and frequency commands are selected by source switching signals
including function codes, run command 2/1 signals, and communications link
operation signal.
• Local mode:
The command source is the keypad, regardless of the settings specified by function
codes. The keypad takes precedence over the settings specified by run command 2/1
signals or communications link operation signal.
Run commands from the keypad in local mode
The table below shows the input procedures of run commands from the keypad in local mode.
Table 3.5 Run Commands from the Keypad in Local Mode
When Data for F02
(Run command) is :
0: Enable
/
keys on keypad
(Motor rotational direction from
digital terminals [FWD]/[REV])
Input Procedures of Run Commands from Keypad
Pressing the
key runs the motor in the direction specified by
command (FWD) or (REV) assigned to terminal [FWD] or
key stops the motor.
[REV], respectively. Pressing the
1: Enable terminal command
(FWD)/(REV)
Pressing the
Pressing the
2: Enable
/
(Forward)
keys on keypad
No specification of the motor rotational direction is required.
3: Enable
/
(Reverse)
keys on keypad
Pressing the
Pressing the
key runs the motor in the forward direction only.
key stops the motor.
key runs the motor in the reverse direction only.
key stops the motor.
No specification of the motor rotational direction is required.
3-8
3.2 Running Mode
Switching between remote and local modes
The remote and local modes can be switched by a digital input signal provided from the outside of the
inverter.
To enable the switching, you need to assign (LOC) as a digital input signal to any of terminals [X1] to
[X5] by setting "35" to any of E01 to E05, E98 and E99. By factory default, (LOC) is assigned to [X5].
For further details on how to specify run and frequency commands in remote and local modes,
refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.3, "Drive Command Generator."
Transition between Remote and Local Modes by (LOC)
3-9
OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD
The transition paths between remote and local modes depend on the current mode and the value
(on/off) of (LOC), as shown in the status transition diagram given below. Also, refer to Table 3.5 "Run
Commands from the Keypad in Local Mode" for details.
Chap. 3
Switching from remote to local mode automatically inherits the frequency settings used in remote
mode. If the motor is running at the time of the switching from remote to local, the run command is
automatically turned on so that all the necessary data settings will be carried over. If, however, there is
a discrepancy between the settings used in remote mode and ones made on the keypad (e.g., switching
from the reverse rotation in remote mode to the forward rotation only in local mode), the inverter
automatically stops.
Switching between Remote and Local Modes on Optional Multi-function Keypad
The multi-function keypad has a remote/local toggle key . Holding down the key for at
least one second toggles between remote and local modes when the digital input signal
(LOC) is off.
When the (LOC) is on, the
key is disabled.
The figure below shows the switching by the
key and (LOC).
Run commands from the keypad in local mode
The multi-function keypad has the
keypad.
and
keys instead of the
key provided on the standard
The table below shows the input procedures of run commands from the multi-function keypad, which
differ from those in Table 3.5.
Table 3.6 Run Commands from the Multi-Function Keypad in Local Mode
When Data for F02
(Run command) is :
0: Enable
/
keys on keypad
(Motor rotational direction from
digital terminals [FWD]/[REV])
Input Procedures of Run Commands
from Multi-Function Keypad
/
key runs the motor in the forward or
Pressing the
reverse direction, respectively.
Pressing the
key stops the motor.
1: Enable terminal command
(FWD)/(REV)
2: Enable
/
(Forward)
keys on keypad
Pressing the
/
key on the keypad runs the motor in the
forward direction or stops it, respectively.
Reverse rotation is not allowed. (The
3: Enable
/
(Reverse)
keys on keypad
key is disabled.)
Pressing the
/
key on the keypad runs the motor in the
reverse direction or stops it, respectively.
Forward rotation is not allowed. (The
key is disabled.)
The multi-function keypad shows the current mode with the LED indicator indexes on the
LCD monitor--REM for remote mode and LOC for local mode.
3-10
3.3 Programming Mode
3.3
Programming Mode
When the inverter enters Programming mode from the second time on, the menu selected last in
Programming mode will be displayed.
Menu #
0
1
Menu
"Quick Setup"
"Data Setting"
LED
monitor
shows:
Main functions
Refer to:
HP
Displays only basic function codes to customize
the inverter operation.
Section
3.3.1
HAA
F codes
(Fundamental functions)
GAA
E codes
(Extension terminal
functions)
EAA
C codes
(Control functions of
frequency)
RAA
P codes
(Motor parameters)
JAA
H codes
(High performance
functions)
LAA
J codes
(Application functions)
[AA
y codes (Link functions)
Selecting each of
these function
codes enables its
data to be
displayed/changed.
Section
3.3.2
QAA
o code (Optional function)
(Note)
2
"Data
Checking"
TGR
Displays only function codes that have been
changed from their factory defaults. You can refer
to or change those function code data.
Section
3.3.3
3
"Drive
Monitoring"
QRG
Displays the running information required for
maintenance or test running.
Section
3.3.4
4
"I/O Checking"
KAQ
Displays external interface information.
Section
3.3.5
5
"Maintenance
Information"
EJG
Displays maintenance information including
cumulative run time.
Section
3.3.6
6
"Alarm
Information"
CN
Displays the latest four alarm codes. You can
refer to the running information at the time when
the alarm occurred.
Section
3.3.7
7
"Data Copying"
ER[
Allows you to read or write function code data, as
well as verifying it.
Section
3.3.8
(Note) An o code appears only when any option is mounted on the inverter. For details, refer to the instruction
manual of the corresponding option.
Using the multi-function keypad (option) provides the "Alarm Cause," "Load Factor
Measurement," "User Setting," and "Communication Debugging" in addition to the menus
listed above.
For details, refer to the "Multi-function Keypad Instruction Manual" (INR-SI47-0890-E).
3-11
OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD
Table 3.7 Menus Available in Programming Mode
Chap. 3
The Programming mode provides you with these functions--setting and checking function code data,
monitoring maintenance information and checking input/output (I/O) signal status. The functions can
be easily selected with the menu-driven system. Table 3.7 lists menus available in Programming mode.
The leftmost digit (numerals) of each letter string on the LED monitor indicates the corresponding
menu number and the remaining three digits indicate the menu contents.
Figure 3.3 illustrates the menu-driven function code system in Programming mode.
Figure 3.3 Menu Transition in the Programming Mode
3-12
3.3 Programming Mode
■ Limiting menus to be displayed
The menu-driven system has a limiter function (specified by function code E52) that limits menus to
be displayed for the purpose of simple operation. The factory default (E52 = 0) is to display only three
menus--Menu #0 "Quick Setup," Menu #1 "Data Setting" and Menu #7 "Data Copying," allowing no
switching to any other menu.
Data for E52
Mode
Menus selectable
0
Function code data editing mode (factory default)
Menu #0 "Quick Setup"
Menu #7 "Data Copying"
1
Function code data check mode
Menu #2 "Data Checking"
Menu #7 "Data Copying"
2
Full-menu mode
Pressing the
/
Menu #0 through #7
key will cycle through the menu. With the
key, you can select the
desired menu item. Once the entire menu has been cycled through, the display will return to
the first menu item.
3.3.1
Setting up basic function codes quickly
-- Menu #0 "Quick Setup" --
Menu #0 "Quick Setup" in Programming mode allows you to quickly display and set up a basic set of
function codes specified in Chapter 9, Section 9.1, "Function Code Tables."
To use Menu #0 "Quick Setup," you need to set function code E52 to "0" (Function code data editing
mode) or "2" (Full-menu mode).
The predefined set of function codes that are subject to quick setup are held in the inverter.
3-13
OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD
Menu #1 "Data Setting"
Chap. 3
Table 3.8 Keypad Display Mode Selection – Function Code E52
Listed below are the function codes (including those not subject to quick setup) available on the
FRENIC-Eco. A function code is displayed on the LED monitor on the keypad in the following
format:
ID number in each function code group
Function code group
Table 3.9 Function Codes Available on FRENIC-Eco
Function Code Group Function Codes
Function
Description
F codes
F00 to F44
Fundamental
functions
Functions concerning basic motor
running
E codes
E01 to E99
Extension terminal
functions
Functions concerning the assignment
of control circuit terminals
Functions concerning the display of
the LED monitor
C codes
C01 to C53
Control functions of
frequency
Functions associated with frequency
settings
P codes
P01 to P99
Motor parameters
Functions for setting up
characteristics parameters (such as
capacity) of the motor
H codes
H03 to H98
High performance
functions
Highly added-value functions
Functions for sophisticated control
J codes
J01 to J22
Application functions
Functions for applications such as
PID control
y codes
y01 to y99
Link functions
Functions for controlling
communication
o codes
o27 to o59
Optional functions
Functions for options (Note)
(Note) The o codes are displayed only when the corresponding option is mounted. For details of the o codes, refer to
the Instruction Manual for the corresponding option.
For the list of function codes subject to quick setup and their descriptions, refer to Chapter 9,
Section 9.1 "Function Code Tables."
„ Function codes requiring simultaneous keying
To modify the data for function code F00 (data protection), H03 (data initialization), or H97 (clear
keys or
+
+
keys.
alarm data), simultaneous keying is needed, involving the
„ Changing, validating, and saving function code data when the inverter is running
Some function code data can be changed while the inverter is running, whereas others cannot. Further,
depending on the function code, modifications may or may not validate immediately. For details, refer
to the "Change when running" column in Chapter 9, Section 9.1 " Function Code Tables."
For details of function codes, refer to Chapter 9, Section 9.1 " Function Code Tables."
3-14
3.3 Programming Mode
Figure 3.4 shows the menu transition in Menu #1 "Quick Setup."
Chap. 3
OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD
Figure 3.4 Menu Transition in Menu #0 "Quick Setup"
Through a multi-function keypad, you can add or delete function codes that are subject to
Quick Setup. For details, refer to the "Multi-function Keypad Instruction Manual"
(INR-SI47-0890-E).
Once you have added or deleted function codes for Quick Setup through a multi-function
keypad, they will remain valid even after you switch to a standard keypad. To restore the
function code settings subject to Quick Setup to their factory defaults, initialize the whole
data using function code H03 (data = 1).
3-15
Basic key operation
This section gives a description of the basic key operation, following the example of the function code
data changing procedure shown in Figure 3.5.
/
This example shows you how to change function code F01 data from the factory default "Enable
keys on keypad (F01 = 0)" to "Enable current input to terminal [C1] (4 to 20 mA DC) (F01 = 2)."
key to
(1) Turn the inverter on. It automatically enters Running mode. In that mode, press the
switch to Programming mode. The function selection menu appears. (In this example, HP is
displayed.)
(2) If anything other than HP is displayed, use the
(3) Press the
and
keys to display HP.
key to proceed to a list of function codes.
(4) Use the
and
keys to display the desired function code (H in this example), then press
the
key.
The data of this function code appears. (In this example, data of H appears.)
(5) Change the function code data using the
times to change data to .)
and
keys. (In this example, press the
key two
(6) Press the
key to establish the function code data.
The UCWG appears and the data will be saved in the memory inside the inverter. The display will
return to the function code list, then move to the next function code. (In this example,H .)
key instead of the
key cancels the change made to the data. The data reverts
Pressing the
to the previous value, the display returns to the function code list, and the original function code
reappears.
(7) Press the
key to return to the menu from the function code list.
Cursor movement
You can move the cursor when changing function code data by holding down the
key for
1 second or longer in the same way as with the frequency settings. This action is called
"Cursor movement."
Figure 3.5 Example of Function Code Data Changing Procedure
3-16
3.3 Programming Mode
3.3.2
Setting up function codes
-- Menu #1 "Data Setting" --
Menu #1 "Data Setting" in Programming mode allows you to set up function codes for making the
inverter functions match your needs.
To set function codes in this menu, it is necessary to set function code E52 to "0" (Function code data
editing mode) or "2" (Full-menu mode).
Chap. 3
Figure 3.6 shows the menu transition in Menu #1 "Data Setting."
OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD
Figure 3.6 Menu Transition in Menu #1 "Data Setting"
Basic key operation
For details of the basic key operation, refer to Menu #0 "Quick Setup" in Section 3.3.1.
3-17
3.3.3
Checking changed function codes -- Menu #2 "Data Checking" --
Menu #2 "Data Checking" in Programming mode allows you to check function codes that have been
changed. Only the function codes whose data has been changed from the factory defaults are displayed
on the LED monitor. You can refer to the function code data and change it again if necessary. Figure
3.7 shows the menu transition in Menu #2 "Data Checking."
* Pressing the
key when the G data is displayed returns to H .
Figure 3.7 Menu Transition in Menu #2 "Data Checking" (Changing F01, F05 and E52 data only)
Basic key operation
For details of the basic key operation, refer to Menu #1 "Quick Setup" in Section 3.3.1.
To check function codes in Menu #2 "Data Checking," it is necessary to set function code
E52 to "1" (Function code data check mode) or "2" (Full-menu mode).
For details, refer to "■ Limiting menus to be displayed" on page 3-13.
3-18
3.3 Programming Mode
3.3.4
Monitoring the running status
-- Menu #3 "Drive Monitoring" --
Menu #3 "Drive Monitoring" is used to monitor the running status during maintenance and trial
running. The display items for "Drive Monitoring" are listed in Table 3.10. Figure 3.8 shows the menu
transition in Menu #3 "Drive Monitoring."
Chap. 3
OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD
Figure 3.8 Menu Transition in Menu #3 "Drive Monitoring"
Basic key operation
To monitor the running status on the drive monitor, set function code E52 to "2" (Full-menu mode)
beforehand.
(1) Turn the inverter on. It automatically enters Running mode. In that mode, press the
switch to Programming mode. The function selection menu appears.
(2) Use the
(3) Press the
and
keys to display "Drive Monitoring" (QRG).
key to proceed to a list of monitoring items (e.g. A).
(4) Use the
and
keys to display the desired monitoring item, then press the
The running status information for the selected item appears.
(5) Press the
menu.
key to
key to return to a list of monitoring items. Press the
3-19
key.
key again to return to the
Table 3.10 Drive Monitor Display Items
LED
monitor
shows:
Item
Description
Hz
Output frequency
A Output current
A
Output current
A Output voltage
V
Output voltage
A
Output
frequency
Unit
Calculated
Torque
%
Calculated output torque of the loaded motor in %
A
Reference
frequency
Hz
Frequency specified by a frequency command
A
Motor rotational
direction
N/A
Motor rotational direction being outputted
H: forward; T: reverse,
: stop
A
Running status
N/A
Running status in hexadecimal format
Refer to "„ Displaying running status" on the next page.
r/min
Display value
r/min
Display value = (Output frequency Hz) u (Function code E50)
A Motor speed
Load shaft speed
A
(Output frequency Hz) ×
120
(Function code P01)
appear for 10000 (r/min) or more. If
The 7-segment letters
appear, decrease function code E52 data so that the LED
monitor displays 9999 or below, referring to the above equation.
A
PID process
command
N/A
A
Virtual physical value (e.g., temperature or pressure) of the
object to be controlled, which is converted from the PID process
command using function code E40 and E41 data (PID display
coefficients A and B)
Display value = (PID process command) u (Coefficient A - B) + B
PID feedback
value
A
N/A
If PID control is disabled, "
" appears.
Virtual physical value (e.g., temperature or pressure) of the
object to be controlled, which is converted from the PID process
command using function code E40 and E41 data (PID display
coefficients A and B)
Display value = (PID feedback value) u (Coefficient A - B) + B
3-20
If PID control is disabled, "
" appears.
3.3 Programming Mode
„ Displaying running status
To display the running status in hexadecimal format, each state has been assigned to bits 0 to 15 as
listed in Table 3.11. Table 3.12 shows the relationship between each of the status assignments and the
LED monitor display. Table 3.13 gives the conversion table from 4-bit binary to hexadecimal.
Table 3.11 Running Status Bit Assignment
Notation
15
BUSY
WR
13
Bit
Notation
Content
1 when function code data is being
written.
7
VL
1 under voltage limiting control.
Always 0.
6
TL
Always 0.
Always 0.
5
NUV
1 when the DC link bus voltage is
higher than the undervoltage level.
1 when communication is enabled
(when ready for run and frequency
commands via communications
link).
4
BRK
1 during braking
12
RL
11
ALM
1 when an alarm has occurred.
3
INT
1 when the inverter output is shut
down.
10
DEC
1 during deceleration.
2
EXT
1 during DC braking.
9
ACC
1 during acceleration.
1
REV
1 during running in the reverse
direction.
8
IL
1 under current limiting control.
0
FWD
1 during running in the forward
direction.
Table 3.12 Running Status Display
LED No.
LED4
Bit
15
Notation
BUSY
Binary
Example
14
1
LED3
13
WR
0
12
11
10
9
RL ALM DEC ACC
0
0
0
0
1
LED2
8
7
IL
VL
1
0
6
5
LED1
4
3
2
1
0
TL NUV BRK INT EXT REV FWD
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
Hexadecimal on
the LED
monitor
„ Hexadecimal expression
A 4-bit binary number can be expressed in hexadecimal format (1 hexadecimal digit). Table 3.13
shows the correspondence between the two notations. The hexadecimals are shown as they appear on
the LED monitor.
Table 3.13 Binary and Hexadecimal Conversion
Binary
Hexadecimal
Binary
Hexadecimal
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
C
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
D
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
E
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
F
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
G
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
H
3-21
OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD
14
Content
Chap. 3
Bit
3.3.5
Checking I/O signal status
-- Menu #4 "I/O Checking" --
Using Menu #4 "I/O Checking" displays the I/O status of external signals including digital and analog
I/O signals without using a measuring instrument. Table 3.14 lists check items available. The menu
transition in Menu #4 "I/O Checking" is shown in Figure 3.9.
Figure 3.9 Menu Transition in Menu #4 "I/O Checking"
3-22
3.3 Programming Mode
Basic key operation
To check the status of the I/O signals, set function code E52 to "2" (Full-menu mode) beforehand.
(1) Turn the inverter on. It automatically enters Running mode. In that mode, press the
switch to Programming mode. The function selection menu appears.
(2) Use the
keys to display "I/O Checking" (KAQ).
key to proceed to a list of I/O check items (e.g. A).
(5) Press the
menu.
key to return to a list of I/O check items. Press the
key again to return to the
Table 3.14 I/O Check Items
LED monitor
shows:
A
Item
Description
I/O signals on the control
circuit terminals
Shows the ON/OFF state of the digital I/O terminals.
Refer to
"„ Displaying control I/O signal terminals" on the
next page for details.
A
I/O signals on the control
circuit terminals under
communication control
Shows the ON/OFF state for the digital I/O terminals
that received a command via RS485 and optional
communications. Refer to
"„ Displaying control I/O signal terminals" and
"„ Displaying control I/O signal terminals under
communication control" on the following pages for
details.
A
Input voltage on terminal [12]
Shows the input voltage on terminal [12] in volts (V).
A
Input current on terminal [C1]
Shows the input current on terminal [C1] in
milliamperes (mA).
A
Output voltage to analog
meters [FMA]
Shows the output voltage on terminal [FMA] in volts
(V).
A
Output voltage to digital
meters [FMP]
Shows the output voltage on terminal [FMP] in volts
(V).
A
Pulse rate of [FMP]
Shows the output pulse rate on terminal [FMP] in p/s
(pulses per second).
A
Input voltage on terminal [V2]
Shows the input voltage on terminal [V2] in volts (V).
A
Output current to analog
meters [FMA]
Shows the output current on terminal [FMA] in mA.
3-23
OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD
(4) Use the
and
keys to display the desired I/O check item, then press the
key.
and
The corresponding I/O check data appears. For the item A or A, using the
keys switches the display method between the segment display (for external signal information
in Table 3.15) and hexadecimal display (for I/O signal status in Table 3.16).
Chap. 3
(3) Press the
and
key to
■
Displaying control I/O signal terminals
The status of control I/O signal terminal may be displayed with ON/OFF of the LED segment or in
hexadecimal display.
• Display I/O signal status with ON/OFF of each LED segment
As shown in Table 3.15 and the figure below, each of segments "a" to "g" on LED1 lights when the
corresponding digital input terminal circuit ([FWD], [REV], [X1], [X2], [X3], [X4] or [X5]) is closed;
it goes off when it is open (*1). Segment "a to c" and "e" on LED3 lights when the circuit between
output terminal [Y1], [Y2], or [Y3] and terminal [CMY], or [Y5A] and [Y5C] is closed; it goes off
when the circuit is open. Segment "a" on LED4 is for terminals [30A/B/C]. Segment "a" on LED4
lights when the circuit between terminals [30C] and [30A] is closed; it goes off when it is open.
If all terminal input signals are OFF (open), segment "g" on all of LED1 to LED4 will blink
("– – – –").
Table 3.15 Segment Display for External Signal Information
Segment
LED4
LED3
LED2
LED1
a
30A/B/C
Y1-CMY
—
FWD (*1)
b
—
Y2-CMY
—
REV (*1)
c
—
Y3-CMY
—
X1 (*1)
d
—
—
—
X2 (*1)
e
—
Y5A-Y5C
—
X3 (*1)
f
—
—
(XF) (*2)
X4 (*1)
g
—
—
(XR) (*2)
X5 (*1)
dp
—
—
(RST) (*2)
—
—: No corresponding control circuit terminal exists
(*1)
For the open/close states of [FWD], [REV], [X1] through [X5] circuits, refer to the setting of the
SINK/SOURCE slide switch in the FRENIC-Eco Instruction Manual (INR-SI47-0882-E), Chapter 2, Table
2.11 "Symbols, Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals."
(*2) (XF), (XR), and (RST) are assigned for communication. Refer to "„ Displaying control I/O signal terminals
under communication control" on the next page.
3-24
3.3 Programming Mode
• Displaying I/O signal status in hexadecimal format
Each I/O terminal is assigned to bit 15 through bit 0 as shown in Table 3.16. An unassigned bit is
interpreted as "0." Allocated bit data is displayed on the LED monitor in 4 hexadecimal digits ( to H
each).
slide switch in the FRENIC-Eco Instruction Manual (INR-SI47-0882-E), Chapter 2, Table 2.11 "Symbols, Names
and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals."
Digital output terminal [Y1], [Y2] and [Y3] are assigned to bits 0 to 2. Each bit is set to "1" when the
terminal is short-circuited with [CMY], and to "0" when it is open. The status of the relay contact
output terminal [30A/B/C] is assigned to bit 8. It is set to "1" when the circuit between output
terminals [30A] and [30C] is closed and to "0" when the circuit between [30B] and [30C] is closed.
The status of the relay contact output [Y5A/C] is assigned to bit 4. It is set "1" when the circuit
between [Y5A] and [Y5C] is closed and to "0" when opened. For example, if [Y1] is on, [Y5A] is not
connected to [Y5C], and [30A] is connected to [30C], then is displayed on the LED4 to LED1.
Table 3.16 presents an example of bit assignment and corresponding hexadecimal display on the
7-segment LED.
Table 3.16 Segment Display for I/O Signal Status in Hexadecimal Format
LED No.
Bit
15
Input
terminal
Output
terminal
Binary
Example
LED4
14
LED3
13
(RST)* (XR)* (XF)*
LED2
LED1
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
-
-
-
-
-
-
X5
X4
X3
X2
2
1
0
X1 REV FWD
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
30
A/B/C
-
-
-
Y5A/C
-
Y3
Y2
Y1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
Hexadecimal
on the
LED
monitor
– No corresponding control terminal exists.
* (XF), (XR), and (RST) are assigned for communication. Refer to "„ Displaying control I/O signal terminals
under communication control" below.
■
Displaying control I/O signal terminals under communication control
During control via communication, input commands sent via RS485 communications can be displayed
in two ways depending on setting of the function code S06: "Display with ON/OFF of the LED
segment" or "In hexadecimal format." The content to be displayed is basically the same as that for the
control I/O signal terminal status display; however, (XF), (XR), and (RST) are added as inputs. Note
that under communications control, I/O display is in normal logic (using the original signals that are
not inverted).
Refer to the RS485 Communication User's Manual (MEH448a) for details on input commands
sent through RS485 communications and the instruction manual of communication-related
options as well.
3-25
OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD
(*) For the open/close states of [FWD], [REV], [X1] through [X5] circuits, refer to the setting of the SINK/SOURCE
Chap. 3
With the FRENIC-Eco, digital input terminals [FWD] and [REV] are assigned to bit 0 and bit 1,
respectively. Terminals [X1] through [X5] are assigned to bits 2 through 6. The bit is set to "1" when
the corresponding input terminal is short-circuited (ON)*, and is set to "0" when it is open (OFF). For
example, when [FWD] and [X1] are on (short-circuited) and all the others are off (open), is
displayed on LED4 to LED1.
3.3.6
Reading maintenance information
-- Menu #5 "Maintenance Information" --
Menu #5 "Maintenance Information" contains information necessary for performing maintenance on
the inverter. Table 3.17 lists the maintenance information display items and Figure 3.10 shows the
menu transition in Menu #5 "Maintenance information."
Figure 3.10 Menu Transition in Menu #5 "Maintenance Information"
Basic key operation
To view the maintenance information, set function code E52 to "2" (Full-menu mode) beforehand.
(1) Turn the inverter on. It automatically enters Running mode. In that mode, press the
switch to Programming mode. The function selection menu appears.
(2) Use the
(3) Press the
and
keys to display "Maintenance Information" (EJG).
key to proceed to a list of maintenance item codes (e.g. A).
(4) Use the
and
keys to display the desired maintenance item, then press the
The data of the corresponding maintenance item appears.
(5) Press the
menu.
key to
key to return to a list of maintenance items. Press the
3-26
key.
key again to return to the
3.3 Programming Mode
Table 3.17 Display Items for Maintenance Information
LED
Monitor
shows:
Item
Description
DC link bus
Shows the DC link bus voltage of the inverter main circuit.
Unit: V (volts)
Max. temperature
Shows a maximum temperature inside the inverter for every hour.
Unit: qC (Temperatures below 20qC are displayed as 20qC.)
Max. temperature
Shows the maximum temperature of the heat sink for every hour.
Unit: qC (Temperatures below 20qC are displayed as 20qC.)
Max. effective
Shows the maximum current in RMS for every hour.
Unit: A (amperes)
A
A voltage
A inside the inverter
A of heat sink
A output current
Capacitance of
the DC link bus
A capacitor
Shows the current capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor (reservoir
capacitor) in %, based on the capacitance when shipping as 100%. Refer
to the FRENIC-Eco Instruction Manual (INR-SI47-0882-E), Chapter 7
"MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION" for details.
Unit: %
Cumulative run
time of
electrolytic
A capacitor on the
printed circuit
board
Shows the content of the cumulative run time counter of the electrolytic
capacitor mounted on the printed circuit board.
The display method is the same as for "Cumulative run time (A )
above.
However, when the total time exceeds 65535 hours, the count stops and
the display remains at 65.53.
Cumulative run
time of the
cooling fan
Shows the content of the cumulative run time counter of the cooling fan.
This counter does not work when the cooling fan ON/OFF control
(function code H06) is enabled but the fan does not run.
The display method is the same as for "Cumulative run time (A )
above.
However, when the total time exceeds 65535 hours, the count stops and
the display remains at 65.53.
Number of
startups
Shows the content of the cumulative counter of times the inverter is
started up (i.e., the number of run commands issued).
1.000 indicates 1000 times. When any number from 0.001 to 9.999 is
displayed, the counter increases by 0.001 per startup, and when any
number from 10.00 to 65.53 is counted, the counter increases by 0.01
every 10 startups. When the counted number exceeds 65535, the counter
will be reset to 0 and the count will start again.
Input watt-hour
Shows the input watt-hour of the inverter.
Unit: 100 kWh (Display range: 0.001 to 9999)
Depending on the value of integrated input watt-hour, the decimal point
on the LED monitor shifts to show it within the LED monitors’
resolution (e.g. the resolution varies between 0.001, 0.01, 0.1 or 1). To
reset the integrated input watt-hour and its data, set function code E51 to
"0.000."
When the input watt-hour exceeds 1000000 kWh, it returns to "0."
A
A
A
3-27
OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD
Shows the content of the cumulative power-ON time counter of the
inverter.
Unit: thousands of hours.
(Display range: 0.001 to 9.999, 10.00 to 65.53)
When the total ON-time is less than 10000 hours (display: 0.001 to
9.999), data is shown in units of one hour (0.001). When the total time is
10000 hours or more (display: 10.00 to 65.53), it is shown in units of 10
hours (0.01). When the total time exceeds 65535 hours, the counter will
be reset to 0 and the count will start again.
Chap. 3
Cumulative run
time
Table 3.17 Continued
LED
Monitor
shows:
Item
Input watt-hour
data
Description
Shows the value expressed by "input watt-hour (kWh)˜ E51 (whose
data range is 0.000 to 9999)."
Unit: None.
(Display range: 0.001 to 9999. The data cannot exceed 9999. (It will be
fixed at 9999 once the calculated value exceeds 9999.))
Depending on the value of integrated input watt-hour data, the decimal
point on the LED monitor shifts to show it within the LED monitors’
resolution.
To reset the integrated input watt-hour data, set function code E51 to
"0.000."
A
A
No. of RS485
errors (standard)
Shows the total number of errors that have occurred in standard RS485
communication (via the RJ-45 connector as standard) since the power is
turned on.
Once the number of errors exceeds 9999, the count returns to 0.
Content of RS485
communications
A error (standard)
No. of option
A errors
Shows the latest error that has occurred in standard RS485
communication in decimal format.
For error contents, refer to the RS485 Communication User’s Manual
(MEH448a).
Shows the total number of optional communications card errors since
the power is turned on.
Once the number of errors exceeds 9999, the count returns to 0.
A
Inverter's ROM
version
Shows the inverter's ROM version as a 4-digit code.
A
Keypad's ROM
version
Shows the keypad's ROM version as a 4-digit code.
No. of RS485
Shows the total number of errors that have occurred in optional RS485
communication since the power is turned on.
A errors (option)
Once the number of errors exceeds 9999, the count returns to 0.
Content of RS485
communications
A error (option)
A
A
Shows the latest error that has occurred in optional RS485
communication in decimal format.
For error contents, refer to the RS485 Communication User’s Manual
(MEH448a).
Option's ROM
version
Shows the option's ROM version as a 4-digit code.
Cumulative motor
run time
Shows the content of the cumulative power-ON time counter of the
motor.
The display method is the same as for "Cumulative run time (A )
above.
3-28
3.3 Programming Mode
3.3.7
Reading alarm information
-- Menu #6 "Alarm Information" --
Menu #6 "Alarm Information" shows the causes of the past 4 alarms in alarm code. Further, it is also
possible to display alarm information that indicates the status of the inverter when the alarm occurred.
Figure 3.11 shows the menu transition in Menu #6 "Alarm Information" and Table 3.18 lists the details
of the alarm information.
Chap. 3
OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD
Figure 3.11 "Alarm Information" Menu Transition
3-29
Basic key operation
To view the alarm information, set function code E52 to "2" (Full-menu mode) beforehand.
(1) Turn the inverter on. It automatically enters Running mode. In that mode, press the
switch to Programming mode. The function selection menu appears.
(2) Use the
and
key to
keys to display "Alarm Information" (CN).
(3) Press the
key to proceed to a list of alarm lists (e.g. N).
In the list of alarm codes, the alarm information for the last 4 alarms is saved as an alarm history.
(4) Each time the
or
key is pressed, the last 4 alarms are displayed in order from the most
recent one as , , and .
(5) While the alarm code is displayed, press the
key to have the corresponding alarm item
number (e.g. A) and data (e.g. Output frequency) displayed alternately in intervals of
approximately 1 second. You can also have the item number (e.g. A) and data (e.g. Output
current) for any other item displayed using the
and
keys.
(6) Press the
key to return to a list of alarm codes. Press the
key again to return to the menu.
Table 3.18 Alarm Information Displayed
LED monitor
shows:
(item No.)
Item displayed
Description
A
Output current
Output current
A
Output voltage
Output voltage
A
Calculated torque
Calculated motor output torque
A
Reference frequency
Frequency specified by frequency command
A
Motor rotational
direction
This shows the motor rotational direction being output.
: forward; : reverse;
: stop
A
Running status
This shows the running status in hexadecimal. Refer to
"„ Displaying running status" in Section 3.3.4.
Cumulative run time
Shows the content of the cumulative power-ON time
counter of the inverter.
Unit: thousands of hours.
(Display range: 0.001 to 9.999, 10.00 to 65.53)
When the total ON-time is less than 10000 hours (display:
0.001 to 9.999), data is shown in units of one hour (0.001).
When the total time is 10000 hours or more (display: 10.00
to 65.53), it is shown in units of 10 hours (0.01). When the
total time exceeds 65535 hours, the counter will be reset to
0 and the count will start again.
A
No. of startups
Shows the content of the cumulative counter of times the
inverter is started up (i.e., the number of run commands
issued).
1.000 indicates 1000 times. When any number from 0.001
to 9.999 is displayed, the counter increases by 0.001 per
startup, and when any number from 10.00 to 65.53 is
counted, the counter increases by 0.01 every 10 startups.
When the counted number exceeds 65535, the counter will
be reset to 0 and the count will start again.
A
DC link bus voltage
Shows the DC link bus voltage of the inverter main circuit.
Unit: V (volts)
A
Temperature inside the
inverter
Shows the temperature inside the inverter when an alarm
occurs.
Unit: ºC
A
3-30
Output frequency
T
Output frequency
H
A
3.3 Programming Mode
Table 3.18 Continued
LED monitor
shows:
(item No.)
Item displayed
A
Max. temperature of heat
sink
A
Terminal I/O signal status
(displayed with the
ON/OFF of LED
segments)
A
Terminal input signal
status (in hexadecimal
format)
A
Terminal output
signal status (in
hexadecimal format)
A
No. of consecutive
occurrences
This is the number of times the same alarm occurs
consecutively.
A
Overlapping alarm 1
Simultaneously occurring alarm codes (1)
("" is displayed if no alarms have occurred.)
A
Overlapping alarm 2
Simultaneously occurring alarm codes (2)
("" is displayed if no alarms have occurred.)
A
Terminal I/O signal status
under communication
control
(displayed with the
ON/OFF of LED
segments)
A
Error sub code
Shows the ON/OFF status of the digital I/O terminals.
Refer to "„ Displaying control I/O signal terminals" in
Section 3.3.5 "Checking I/O signal status" for details.
Shows the ON/OFF status of the digital I/O terminals
under RS485 communications control. Refer to
"„ Displaying control I/O signal terminals under
communication control" in Section 3.3.5 "Checking I/O
signal status" for details.
Secondary error code for the alarm.
When the same alarm occurs repeatedly in succession, the alarm information for the first and
last occurrences will be preserved and the information for other occurrences inbetween will
be discarded. Only the number of consecutive occurrences will be updated.
3.3.8
Data copying information
-- Menu #7 "Data Copying" --
Menu #7 "Data Copying" is used to read function code data out of an inverter for which function codes
are already set up and then to write such function code data altogether into another inverter, or to
verify the function code data stored in the keypad with the one registered in the inverter.
3-31
OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD
A
Terminal output signal
status under
communication control
(in hexadecimal format)
Shows the temperature of the heat sink.
Unit: ºC
Chap. 3
A
Terminal input signal
status under
communication control
(in hexadecimal format)
Description
„ If data copying does not work
Check whether GTTor ERGTis blinking.
(1) If GTT is blinking (a write error), any of the following problems has arisen:
• No data exists in the keypad memory. (No data read operation has been performed since
shipment, or a data read operation has been aborted.)
• Data stored in the keypad memory contains any error.
• The models of copy source and destination inverters are different.
• A data write operation has been performed while the inverter is running.
• The copy destination inverter is data-protected. (function code F00=1)
• In the copy destination inverter, the "Enable write from keypad" command (WE-KP) is off.
(2) If ERGT is blinking, any of the following problems has arisen:
• The function codes stored in the keypad and ones registered in the inverter are not compatible
with each other. (Either of the two may have been revised or upgraded in a non-standard or
incompatible manner. Contact your Fuji Electric representative.)
Figure 3.12 shows the menu transition in Menu #7 "Data Copying." Table 3.19 provides a detailed
description of the Data Copying functions. The keypad can hold function codes for just one inverter.
Figure 3.12 Menu Transition in Menu #7 "Data Copying"
3-32
3.3 Programming Mode
Basic keying operation
(1) Turn the inverter on. It automatically enters Running mode. In that mode, press the
switch to Programming mode. The function selection menu appears.
(2) Use the
(3) Press the
and
key to
keys to display "Data Copying" (ER[).
key to proceed to a list of copying functions (e.g. TGCF).
(5) When the selected function has been executed, GPFappears. Press the
data copying function list. Press the
key again to return to the menu.
key to return to the
Table 3.19 List of Data Copying Functions
Display on
LED Monitor
TGCF
Function
Read data
Description
Reads the function code data out of the inverter’s memory and stores it
into the keypad memory.
Pressing the
key during a read operation (TGCF blinking)
immediately aborts the operation and displays GTT (blinking). (*)
If this happens, the entire contents of the memory of the keypad will be
completely cleared.
EQR[
Write data
Writes data stored in the keypad memory into the inverter’s memory.
Pressing the
key during a write operation (EQR[ blinking)
immediately aborts the operation and displays GTT(blinking). (*).
The contents (function code data,) of the inverter’s memory remain
partly old and partly updated. If this happens, do not operate the
inverter; instead, perform initialization or rewrite the entire data.
If any incompatible code is about to be written, ERGTappears
blinking.
If this function does not work, refer to "„ If data copying does not
work" on the previous page.
WGTK
Verify data
Verifies (collates) the data stored in the keypad memory with that in the
inverter's memory.
If any mismatch is detected, the verify operation will be aborted, with
the function code in disagreement displayed blinking. Pressing the
key again causes the verification to continue from the next function
code.
Pressing the
key during a verify operation (WGTK blinking)
immediately aborts the operation and displays GTT(blinking).(*)
GTTappears blinking(*) also when the keypad does not contain any
valid data.
* To get out of the error state indicated by a blinking GTT or ERGT, press the
( )
3-33
key.
OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD
key to execute the
Chap. 3
(4) Use the
and
keys to select the desired function, then press the
selected function. (e.g. TGCF will blink.)
3.4
Alarm Mode
If an abnormal condition arises, the protective function is invoked to issue an alarm, and the inverter
automatically enters Alarm mode. At the same time, an alarm code appears on the LED monitor.
3.4.1
Releasing the alarm and switching to Running mode
Remove the cause of the alarm and press the
key to release the alarm and return to Running mode.
The alarm can be removed using the
key only when the alarm code is displayed.
3.4.2
Displaying the alarm history
It is possible to display the most recent 3 alarm codes in addition to the one currently displayed.
Previous alarm codes can be displayed by pressing the
/
key while the current alarm code is
displayed.
3.4.3
Displaying the status of inverter at the time of alarm
When the alarm code is displayed, you may check various running status information (output
frequency and output current, etc.) by pressing the
key. The item number and data for each running
information will be displayed alternately.
Further, you can view various pieces of information on the running status of the inverter using the
/
key. The information displayed is the same as for Menu #6 "Alarm Information" in Programming
mode. Refer to Table 3.18 in Section 3.3.7, "Reading alarm information."
Pressing the
codes.
key while the running status information is displayed returns the display to the alarm
When the running status information is displayed after removal of the alarm cause, pressing
the
key twice returns to the alarm code display and releases the inverter from the alarm
state. This means that the motor starts running if a run command has been received by this
time.
3.4.4
Switching to Programming mode
You can also switch to Programming mode by pressing
displayed, and modify the function code data.
3-34
+
keys simultaneously with the alarm
3.4 Alarm Mode
Figure 3.13 summarizes the possible transitions between different menu items.
Chap. 3
OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD
Figure 3.13 Menu Transition in Alarm Mode
3-35
Part 2 Driving the Motor
Chapter 4 BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC
Chapter 5 RUNNING THROUGH RS485 COMMUNICATION (OPTION)
Chapter 4
BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC
This chapter describes the main block diagrams for the control logic of the FRENIC-Eco series of inverters.
Contents
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
Symbols Used in Block Diagrams and their Meanings............................................................................... 4-1
Drive Frequency Command Generator ....................................................................................................... 4-2
Drive Command Generator ......................................................................................................................... 4-4
Digital Terminal Command Decoder .......................................................................................................... 4-6
4.4.1
4.4.2
4.4.3
Terminals and related function codes ................................................................................................................... 4-6
Functions assigned to digital control input terminals............................................................................................ 4-7
Block diagrams for digital control input terminals ............................................................................................... 4-8
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
4.5
Digital control input block (General)............................................................................................. 4-8
Digital control input block (Only for terminals)............................................................................ 4-9
Digital control input block (ORing the signals on terminals and the communications link) ......... 4-9
Digital control input block (Forced to turn off the signals on terminals during (LE)
being turned on)........................................................................................................................... 4-10
[ 5 ] Assigning terminal functions via the communications link (Access to function code S06
exclusively reserved for the communications link) ..................................................................... 4-11
Digital Output Selector ............................................................................................................................. 4-12
4.5.1
4.5.2
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
Digital output components (Internal block) ........................................................................................................ 4-12
Universal DO (Access to the function code S07 exclusively reserved for the communications link) ................ 4-15
Analog Output (FMA) Selector ................................................................................................................ 4-16
Digital Output (FMP) Selector.................................................................................................................. 4-17
Drive Command Controller....................................................................................................................... 4-18
PID Frequency Command Generator........................................................................................................ 4-20
4.1 Symbols Used in the Block Diagrams and their Meanings
FRENIC-Eco series of inverters for variable (quadratic) torque loads increasing in proportion to the square of
speed such as fans and pumps are equipped with a number of function codes to match a variety of motor
operations required in your system. Refer to Chapter 9 "FUNCTION CODES" for details of the function
codes.
The function codes have functional relationship each other. Several special function codes also work with
execution priority each other depending on their functions or data settings.
This chapter explains the main block diagrams for control logic in the inverter. You are requested to fully
understand the inverter's control logic together with the function codes in order to set the function code data
correctly.
Table 4.1 lists symbols commonly used in block diagrams and their meanings with some examples.
Table 4.1 Symbols and Meanings
Symbol
Meaning
[FWD], [Y1]
etc.
Input/output signals to/from
the inverter's control
terminal block.
(FWD), (REV)
etc.
Control commands assigned
to the control terminal block
input signals.
Symbol
Meaning
Function code.
Switch controlled by a
function code. Numbers
assigned to the terminals
express the function code
data.
Low-pass filter: Features
appropriate characteristics
by changing the time
constant through the
function code data.
Switch controlled by an
external control command.
In the example shown on the
left, the enable
communications link
command (LE) assigned to
one of the digital input
terminals from [X1] to [X5]
controls the switch.
Internal control command
for inverter logic.
High limiter: Limits the
upper value by a constant or
data set to a function code.
Low limiter: Limits the
lower value by a constant or
data set to a function code.
OR logic: In normal logic, if
any input is ON, then C =
ON. Only if all inputs are
OFF, then C = OFF.
Zero limiter: Prevents data
from dropping to a negative
value.
NOR (Not-OR) logic: In
normal logic, if any input is
OFF, then C = ON. If all
inputs are ON, C = OFF.
Gain multiplier for reference
frequencies given by current
and/or voltage input or for
analog output signals.
AND logic: In normal logic,
only if A = ON and B = ON,
then C = ON. Otherwise, C =
OFF.
C =Au B
Adder for 2 signals or
values. C = A + B
NOT logic: In normal logic,
if A = ON, then B = OFF, and
vice versa.
If B is negative then C = A –
B (acting as a subtracter).
4-1
BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC
4.1 Symbols Used in Block Diagrams and their Meanings
Chap. 4
The block diagrams contained in this chapter show only function codes having mutual relationship. For the
function codes that work independently and for detailed explanation of each function code, refer to Chapter 9
"FUNCTION CODES."
4.2 Drive Frequency Command Generator
Figure 4.1 Block Diagram of Drive Frequency Command Generator
4-2
4.2 Drive Frequency Command Generator
Figure 4.1 shows the processes that generate the internal drive frequency command through the various
frequency command and switching steps by means of function codes. If PID process control takes effect
(J01=1 or 2), the drive frequency command generator will differ from that shown in this diagram. (Refer to
Section 4.9 "PID Frequency Command Generator.")
Additional and supplemental information is given below.
• Frequency command sources using the
/
key on the keypad may take different formats such as
motor speed in r/min, load shaft speed in r/min or display speed in % by means of the data setup of
function code E48. Refer to the function code E48 in Chapter 9 "FUNCTION CODES" for details.
• Switching between normal and inverse operation is only effective for the reference frequency from the
analog frequency command input signal (terminal [12], [C1] or [V2]). Note that the frequency command
source set up by using the
/
key is only valid for normal operation.
• Frequency commands by S01 and S05 for the communications link facility take different command
formats as follows.
-
S01: the setting range is –32768 to +32767, where the maximum frequency is obtained at r20000
-
S05: the setting range is 0.00 to 655.35 Hz in increments of 0.01 Hz
-
Basically, priority level for the command in S01 is higher than that in S05. If a value other than "0"
is set in S01, the data set in S01 will take effect. If S01 is set at "0", data in S05 will take effect.
-
Refer to the RS485 Communication User’s Manual (MEH448a) for details.
• The frequency limiter (Low) (F16) helps user select the inverter operation for either the output frequency
is held at data of the frequency limiter (lower), or the inverter decelerates to stop the motor with reference
frequency data of "0", by specifying the lower limiter (select) (H63.)
4-3
BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC
• Case that data setup for both the gain and bias will take effect concurrently is only available for the
frequency command source 1 (F01). For the frequency command source 2 (C30) and auxiliary frequency
command sources 1 and 2 (E61 to E63), only setup of the gain will take effect.
Chap. 4
• If the voltage input terminal [V2] is specified to the PTC thermistor input (i.e. setting the slide switch SW5
on the control printed circuit board to the PTC side and setup of function code H26 data at 1 or 2), then the
frequency command input signal on the terminal [V2] will always be interpreted as "0."
4.3 Drive Command Generator
Figure 4.2 Block Diagram of Drive Command Generator
4-4
4.3 Drive Command Generator
Figure 4.2 shows the processes that generate the final drive commands (FWD: Drive the motor in the forward
direction and REV: Drive the motor in reverse direction) through the various run commands and switching
steps by means of function codes.
Additional and supplemental information is given below.
/
key on the standard keypad, the generator holds the run
• For the inverter operation given by the
command ON upon depression of the
key, decides the motor rotation direction according to the run
forward command (FWD) or the run reverse command (REV), and releases the hold state upon depression
of the
key.
key on the multi-function keypad, the generator holds
key, and releases the hold state upon depression of the
Chap. 4
• The 3-wire operation terminal command (HLD) holds the run forward terminal command (FWD) and the
run reverse terminal command (REV). This allows you to run the inverter in "3-Wire Operation." Refer to
the function code E01 in Chapter 9 "FUNCTION CODES" for details.
If you do not assign the 3-wire operation command (HLD) to any digital input terminals, the "2-Wire
Operation" using the commands (FWD) and (REV) will take effect. Note that the (HLD) function does not
apply to the run forward 2 (FWD2) and run reverse 2 (REV2) commands.
BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC
For the inverter operation given by the
/
the command ON upon depression of the
key.
/
/
• S06 (2-byte data of bit 15 through bit 0, programmable bitwise), the operation command via the
communications link, includes:
- Bit 0: assigned to (FWD)
- Bit 1: assigned to (REV)
- Bit 13 (XF) and bit 14 (XR): Programmable bits equivalent to the terminal inputs [FWD] and [REV]
In the block diagram, all of these are denoted as operation commands. The data setting for function code
E98 to select the function of terminal [FWD] and E99 of [REV] determine which bit value should be
selected as the run command. If bits 13 and 14 have the same setting to select the function of (FWD) or
(REV), the output of bit 13-14 processor logic will follow the truth table listed in Figure 4.2.
If either one of bits 13 and 14 is ON (= 1 as a logic value), the OR logic output will make the enable
communications link command (LE) turn on. This is the same as with bit 0 and 1.
• If run commands (FWD) and (REV) are concurrently turned on, then logic forcibly makes the internal run
command <FWD> or <REV> turn off.
key
• If you set data, 1 or 3, up to the function code H96 (STOP key priority/Start Check) to make the
priority effective, then depressing the
key forcibly turns off the internal run commands <FWD> and
<REV>. In this case, the generator automatically replaces deceleration characteristics of the inverter for
that of the linear deceleration regardless of the setting of H07 (Acceleration/deceleration pattern).
• If the reference frequency is lower than the starting frequency (F23) or the stop frequency (F25), then the
internal run commands will be finally turned off according to the output of run decision logic, and the
inverter decelerates to stop the motor. (Refer to the final stage of the block diagram.)
• If you have assigned the "enable to run" terminal command (RE), giving any RUN command cannot start
the motor unless turning (RE) on in advance.
• Upon giving the "select local (keypad) mode" terminal command (LOC) to select the keypad for a
key on the multi-function keypad, the generator disables the
command source, or holding down the
command sources such as:
-
The run command source selected by the function code F02
-
The "switch run command 2/run command 1 (FR2/FR1)" and
-
The operation selection by the "enable communications link" command (LE)
The inverter operation is switched to the local run command issued by the / key on the standard
keypad or the
/
/
key on the multi-function keypad. This command source switching operation
also involves the frequency command source selected by the local keypad (E48). (Refer to Figure 4.1
"Block Diagram of Drive Frequency Command Generator.")
4-5
4.4 Digital Terminal Command Decoder
4.4.1
Terminals and related function codes
Table 4.2 shows a summery of relationship between digital control input terminals, those defined by a control
string of the link command S06, and function codes to characterize them.
Table 4.2 Terminals and Related Function Codes
Terminal
symbol
Bit assignment in the link
command S06 (Control string)
Function code to characterize a
digital input terminal
[X1]
Bit 2
E01
[X2]
Bit 3
E02
[X3]
Bit 4
E03
[X4]
Bit 5
E04
[X5]
Bit 6
E05
[FWD]
Bit 13
E98
[REV]
Bit 14
E99
Refer to the table on the next page for functions assigned to each terminal, and settings of function codes.
Also refer to Chapter 9 "FUNCTION CODES" for details of function codes.
4-6
4.7 Digital Output (FMP) Selector
4.4.2
Functions assigned to digital control input terminals
Table 4.3 shows a summary of functions assigned to digital control input terminals. Refer to Chapter 9
"FUNCTION CODES" for details of the function code setting. Block diagrams shown on the
succeeding pages differ with each other for every functional block.
Table 4.3 Functions Assigned to Digital Control Input Terminals
Function code
data
Active
OFF
0
1000
Command assignment to terminals
Symbol
(SS1)
(SS2)
1
1001
2
1002
6
1006
Enable 3-wire operation
7
1007
Coast to a stop
(BX)
8
1008
Reset alarm
(RST)
1009
9
Enable external alarm trip
(THR)
11
1011
13
(SS4)
(HLD)
Switch reference frequency 2/1
(Hz2/Hz1)
㧙
DC injection brake
(DCBRK)
15
㧙
Switch to commercial power (50 Hz)
(SW50)
16
㧙
Switch to commercial power (60 Hz)
(SW60)
17
1017
UP (Increase output frequency)
18
1018
DOWN (Decrease output frequency)
(DOWN)
19
1019
Enable write from keypad (Data changeable)
(WE-KP)
20
1020
Cancel PID control
(Hz/PID)
21
1021
Switch normal/inverse operation
22
1022
Interlock
24
1024
Enable communications link via RS485 or field bus (option)
25
1025
Universal DI
(U-DI)
26
1026
Select starting characteristic
(STM)
1030
30
Force to stop
(STOP)
33
1033
Reset PID integral and differential components
(PID-RST)
34
1034
Hold PID integral component
(PID-HLD)
35
1035
Select local (keypad) operation
38
1038
Enable to run
39
㧙
Protect motor from dew condensation
(DWP)
40
㧙
Enable integrated sequence to switch to commercial power (50 Hz)
(ISW50)
41
㧙
Enable integrated sequence to switch to commercial power (60 Hz)
(ISW60)
87
1087
88
㧙
Run forward 2
(FWD2)
89
㧙
Run reverse 2
(REV2)
(UP)
(IVS)
(IL)
(LE)
(LOC)
(RE)
Switch run command 2/1
(FR2/FR1)
4-7
BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC
Select multistep frequency
Chap. 4
Active
ON
4.4.3
Block diagrams for digital control input terminals
In the block diagrams for digital control input terminals, A [Terminal] should be replaced by [X1],
[X2], [X3], [X4], [X5], [FWD] or [REV] depending on the function to be assigned.
Assign a function to a terminal by setting data of function codes E01 to E05, E98, and E99. Once a
function is assigned to a terminal, "Select Input Terminal" shown in each block diagram is turned on.
If one and the same function is assigned to more than one terminals, the decoder logic ORs them so
that if any of the input signal is turned on, the function signal output is turned on.
[ 1 ] Digital control input block (General)
Figure 4.3 (a) Block Diagram of Digital Control Input Block (General)
Figure 4.3 (a) Digital Control Input Block (General) is a block diagram indicating the functions that
switch external control signals between the digital input terminals and the control string (bit
information) in S06 from the communications link.
4-8
4.7 Digital Output (FMP) Selector
[ 2 ] Digital control input block (Only for terminals)
Chap. 4
Figure 4.3 (b) is a block diagram of the Digital Control Input Block (Only for terminals) that applies
only to the digital terminal input functional block, which cannot use any control string from the
communications link.
[ 3 ] Digital control input block (ORing the signals on terminals and the
communications link)
Figure 4.3 (c) Block Diagram of Digital Control Input Block
(ORing the signals on terminals and communications link)
Figure 4.3 (c) is a block diagram of Digital Control Input Block (ORing the signals on terminals and
communications link) that applies to the functional block of ORing (if any one signal being ON, the
output turning ON) the input signals on terminals and the communications link.
4-9
BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC
Figure 4.3 (b) Block Diagram of Digital Control Input Block (Only for terminals)
[ 4 ] Digital control input block (Forced to turn off the signals on terminals
during (LE) being turned on)
Figure 4.3 (d) Block Diagram of Digital Control Input Block
(Forced to turn off the signals on terminals during (LE) being turned on)
Figure 4.3 (d) is a block diagram of the Digital Control Input Block (Forced to turn off the signals on
terminals during the enable communications link command (LE) being turned on) that forces to turn
off any signals on the digital input terminals during the communications link is activated ((LE) being
turned on). Upon the "enable communications link" being disabled, the signals on the digital input
terminals directly become the signal output for control.
4-10
4.7 Digital Output (FMP) Selector
[ 5 ] Assigning terminal functions via the communications link (Access to
function code S06 exclusively reserved for the communications link)
Chap. 4
Similar to the Drive Command Generator explained in the Section 4.3, the command from the
communications link is also available for characterizing the terminal functions. Any inverter can
communicate with host equipment such as a personal computer and PLC (programmable logic
controller), via the standard communications port for the keypad or the RS485 card (option), using
RS485 communications protocol. Inverters can also communicate with host equipment via the field
bus (option) using the FA protocol like DeviceNet.
As shown in Figure 4.3 (e), the terminal function is assigned to each bit of 16-bit string in S06 bitwise.
Bit 2 to bit 6 (functionally equivalent to E01 to E05), bit 13 (equivalent to E98) and bit 14 (equivalent
to E99) are available for characterizing of terminal functions. To enable the communications link for
host equipment, use the function codes H30 and y98. For the field bus option, however, only use H30
to activate the communications link because the bus option does not support y98.
For details of communications, refer to Chapter 5 "RUNNING THROUGH RS485
COMMUNICATION."
4-11
BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC
Figure 4.3 (e) Block Diagram of Digital Control Input Block (Commanding via communications link)
4.5 Digital Output Selector
4.5.1
Digital output components (Internal block)
Figure 4.4 (a) Block Diagram of Digital Output Components (Internal block)
4-12
4.7 Digital Output (FMP) Selector
Chap. 4
BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC
Figure 4.4 (b) Block Diagram of Digital Output Components (Internal block)
4-13
Figure 4.4 (c) Block Diagram of Digital Output Components (Final stage block)
The block diagrams shown in Figures 4.4 (a) to 4.4 (c) show you the processes to select the internal
logic signals to generate five digital output signals at [Y1], [Y2], [Y3], [Y5A/C] and [30A/B/C].
Output terminals [Y1] to [Y3] (transistor outputs), [Y5A/C] and [30A/B/C] (mechanical relay contact
outputs) are programmable terminals. You can assign various functions to these terminals using
function codes E20 to E22, E24 and E27. Setting data of 1000s to the function code allows you to use
these terminals for a negative logic system.
4-14
4.7 Digital Output (FMP) Selector
4.5.2
Universal DO (Access to the function code S07 exclusively
reserved for the communications link)
Chap. 4
The universal DO is a feature that receives a signal from the host equipment via the communications
link and outputs commands in ON/OFF format to the equipment connected to the inverter via the
inverter’s output terminals. To enable the feature, assign data "27" to one of function codes E20 to E22,
E24 and E27 (for a negative logic system, set "1027"). For the 16-bit command string via the
communications link, terminal and bit assignments are:
Bit 0 to bit 2 for output terminals [Y1] to [Y3] (transistor outputs) respectively
Bit 4 and bit 8 for output terminals [Y5A/C] and [30A/B/C] (relay contact outputs) respectively
4-15
BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC
Figure 4.4 (d) Block Diagram of Universal DO
4.6 Analog Output (FMA) Selector
Figure 4.5 Block Diagram of Analog Output (FMA) Selector
The block diagram Figure 4.5 shows the process for selecting and processing the internal signals to be output
to the analog output terminal [FMA]. The data of function code F31 determines the signals to be output to
[FMA]. Function code F30 is of adjusting the full-scale the output signal to a level suitable for the meter’s
indication to be connected to the [FMA] terminal. Function code F29 and the slide switch SW4 on the control
circuit board allows you to select its output mode in voltage or in current.
Setting data at "10" in the function code F31 for enabling the universal AO (S12) allows you to output
information from the host equipment via the communications link on the [FMA] terminal.
The voltage output range is 0 to +10 V DC and the maximum allowable load current is 2 mA. This is capable
of driving up to two analog voltmeters with 10 V, 1 mA rating.
The current output range is +4 mA to +20 mA DC and the allowable load resistance is 500: or less.
The calibration analog output (14) makes an output of [FMA]’s full-scale voltage or current in order to adjust
the scale of the connected meter.
4-16
4.7 Digital Output (FMP) Selector
4.7 Digital Output (FMP) Selector
Chap. 4
BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC
Figure 4.6 Block Diagram of Digital Output (FMP) Selector
The block diagram Figure 4.6 shows the process for selecting and processing the internal signals to be output
to the digital output terminal [FMP]. Data of the function code F35 determines the signal to output to [FMP].
Setting data at "10" in the function code F35 for enabling the universal AO (S12) allows you to output
information from host equipment via the communications link on the [FMP] terminal.
Using the function codes F33 that determines [FMP] output pulse rate and F34 that determines [FMP]
voltage adjust allows you to choose its output mode. The pulse output (F34 = 0) is for a pulse counter, and
changing the output pulse rate allows you to adjust digital display suitable for resolution of the counter. A 2
kbps pulse train output (F34 z 0) is for driving an analog meter, and the "duty" (F34 = 1 to 200%, assuming
that a half cycle of square wave is at 100%) determines the output to be matched with the meter’s indication
range.
For details, refer to function code F34 in Chapter 9 "FUNCTION CODES."
4-17
4.8 Drive Command Controller
Figure 4.7 Block Diagram of Drive Command Controller and Related Part of the Inverter
4-18
4.8 Drive Command Controller
Figure 4.7 is a schematic block diagram that explains the processes in which the inverter drives the motor
according to the final run command <FWD> or <REV> and the <Drive Frequency Command> sent from the
drive frequency command generator or the PID frequency command generator block.
Additional and supplemental information is given below.
- The logic shown in the upper left part of the block diagram processes the final reference frequency so that
it is inverted (u(-1)) for reverse rotation of the motor or is replaced with 0 (zero) for stopping the motor.
- The voltage processor determines the output voltage of the inverter. The processor adjusts the output
voltage to control the motor output torque.
- If the DC injection braking control is enabled, the logic switches the voltage and frequency control
components to the ones determined by the DC injection braking block to feed the proper DC current to the
motor for the DC injection braking.
- If regenerative energy redirection control is enabled, the logic automatically controls the output frequency
at the higher level, consequently prolongs the deceleration time (automatic deceleration).
4-19
BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC
- If the overload prevention control is enabled, the logic automatically switches the output frequency to the
enabled side of overload suppression control and controls the output frequency accordingly.
- If the current limiter is enabled (F43 z 0 and H12 = 1), the logic automatically switches the output
frequency to the enabled side of the current limiting.
Chap. 4
- The acceleration/deceleration processor determines the output frequency of the inverter by referring to
data of related function codes. If the output frequency exceeds the upper limit given by the frequency
limiter (High) (F15), the controller automatically limits the output frequency at the upper limit.
4.9 PID Frequency Command Generator
Figure 4.8 Block diagram of PID Frequency Command Generator
4-20
4.8 PID Frequency Command Generator
Figure 4.8 shows a block diagram of the PID frequency command generator when the PID control is enabled
(J01= 1 or 2). The logic shown generates the <drive frequency command> according to the PID process
command source and PID feedback source, PID conditioner, and the selected frequency command source for
a manual speed command.
Additional and supplemental information is given below.
- Selection of the frequency command source 2 (C30) and the auxiliary frequency command source 1 and 2
(E61 to E63) as a manual speed command are disabled under the PID control.
- The multistep frequency commands 1 and 2 are only applicable to the manual speed command.
- The multistep frequency command 4 (C08) selected by (SS4) is only applicable to PID process command.
- Refer to Section 4.2 " Drive Frequency Command Generator" for explanations of common items.
- When the inverter has entered the process of stopping the motor due to slow flowrate under PID control, if
any of conditions determined by function codes J15, J16 and J17 is taken, the slow flowrate stop control
logic forces to switch the PID output (<drive frequency command>) to 0 Hz to stop the inverter output. For
details, refer to function codes J15, J16 and J17 in Chapter 9, Section 9.2.6 "J codes (Application
functions)."
4-21
BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC
- To switch the operation between normal and inverse, the logic inverses the polarity of difference between
the PID command and its feedback (turning the (INV) command on/ff, or setting data J01 at 1 or 2).
Chap. 4
- For selecting analog input (terminal [12], [C1], or [V2]) as the PID process command source, you need to
set data up for function codes E61 to E62 and J02.
Chapter 5
RUNNING THROUGH RS485
COMMUNICATION
This chapter describes an overview of inverter operation through the RS485 communications facility. Refer
to the RS485 Communication User's Manual (MEH448a) for details.
Contents
5.1 Overview on RS485 Communication ......................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.1 RS485 common specifications (standard and optional) ...................................................................... 5-2
5.1.2 RJ-45 connector pin assignment for standard RS485 communications port ....................................... 5-3
5.1.3 Pin assignment for optional RS485 Communications Card ................................................................ 5-4
5.1.4 Cable for RS485 communications port ............................................................................................... 5-4
5.1.5 Communications support devices........................................................................................................ 5-5
5.2 Overview of FRENIC Loader ..................................................................................................................... 5-6
5.2.1 Specifications ...................................................................................................................................... 5-6
5.2.2 Connection .......................................................................................................................................... 5-7
5.2.3 Function overview............................................................................................................................... 5-7
5.2.3.1
5.2.3.2
5.2.3.3
5.2.3.4
5.2.3.5
Setting of function code ............................................................................................................................... 5-7
Multi-monitor .............................................................................................................................................. 5-8
Running status monitor ................................................................................................................................ 5-9
Test-running............................................................................................................................................... 5-10
Real-time trace—Displaying running status of an inverter in waveforms ................................................. 5-11
5.1 Overview on RS485 Communication
5.1
Overview on RS485 Communication
Removing the built-in keypad from your FRENIC-Eco inverter and using the standard RJ-45
connector (modular jack) for it as an RS485 communications port brings about the following
enhancements in functionality and operation:
„ Operation from a keypad at the remote location
You can use your built-in keypad or an optional multi-function keypad as a remote keypad by
connecting it to the RJ-45 port by means of an extension cable. You may mount it on a panel of the
conveniently located control enclosure for easy access. The maximum length of the extension cable is
20 m.
„ Operation by FRENIC Loader
The Windows-based PC can be connected to the standard RS485 communications port via a suitable
converter. Through the RS485 communications facility, you may run FRENIC Loader on the PC to
edit the function code data and monitor the running status information of the inverter.
Chap. 5
„ Control via a host equipment
RUNNING THROUGH RS485 COMMUNICATION
You can use a personal computer (PC) or a PLC as host (higher-level) equipment and through it
control the inverter as its subordinate device.
Protocols for managing a network including inverters include the Modbus RTU protocol (compliant to
the protocol established by Modicon Inc.) that is widely used in FA markets and the Fuji
general-purpose inverter protocol that supports the FRENIC-Eco and conventional series of inverters.
When you use a remote keypad, the inverter automatically recognizes it and adopts the
keypad protocol; there is no need to modify the function code setting.
When using FRENIC Loader, which requires a special protocol for handling Loader
commands, you need to set up some communication function codes accordingly.
For details, refer to the FRENIC Loader Instruction Manual (INR-SI47-0903-E).
Further, you can add another RS485 communications port by installing an optional RS485
Communications Card onto the printed circuit board inside your FRENIC-Eco inverter. This
additional communications link can be used only as the port for host equipment; you cannot use it as
the communications port for a remote keypad or FRENIC Loader.
For details of RS485 communication, refer to the RS485 Communication User's Manual
(MEH448a).
5-1
5.1.1
RS485 common specifications (standard and optional)
Items
Specifications
Protocol
FGI-BUS
Modbus RTU
Loader commands
(supported only on the
standard version)
Compliance
Fuji general-purpose
inverter protocol
Modicon Modbus
RTU-compliant
(only in RTU mode)
Dedicated protocol
(Not disclosed)
No. of supporting
stations
Host device: 1
Inverters:
Up to 31
Electrical
specifications
EIA RS485
Connection to RS485
8-pin RJ-45 connector (standard) or terminal block (optional)
Synchronization
Asynchronous start-stop system
Transmission mode
Half-duplex
Transmission speed
2400, 4800, 9600 19200 or 38400 bps
Max. transmission
cable length
500 m
No. of logical station
addresses available
1 to 31
1 to 247
1 to 255
Message frame format
FGI-BUS
Modbus RTU
FRENIC loader
Frame
synchronization
Detection SOH (Start Of
Header) character
Detection of no-data
transmission time for
3-byte period
Start code 96H
detection
Frame length
Normal transmission:
16 bytes (fixed)
Variable length
Variable length
Write: 50 words
Read: 50 words
Write: 41 words
Read: 41 words
High-speed transmission:
8 or 12 bytes
Max. transfer data
Write: 1 word
Read: 1 word
Messaging system
Polling/Selecting/Broadcast
Command message
Transmission
character format
ASCII
Binary
Binary
Character length
8 or 7 bits
(selectable by the
function code)
8 bits (fixed)
8 bits (fixed)
Parity
Even, Odd, or None
(selectable by the function code)
Stop bit length
1 or 2 bits
(selectable by the
function code)
No parity:
2 bits
Even or Odd parity:
1 bit
1 bit (fixed)
Error checking
Sum-check
CRC-16
Sum-check
5-2
Even (fixed)
5.1 Overview on RS485 Communication
5.1.2
RJ-45 connector pin assignment for standard RS485
communications port
The port designed for a standard keypad uses an RJ-45 connector having the following pin
assignment:
Pin
Signal name
Function
Remarks
Vcc
Power source for the keypad
5V power lines
2 and 7
GND
Reference voltage level
Grounding pins
3 and 6
NC
Not used.
No connection
4
DX-
RS485 data (-)
5
DX+
RS485 data (+)
Built-in terminator: 112:
Open/close by SW3*
* For details about SW3, refer to "Setting up the slide switches" in Section 8.4.1 "Terminal functions."
5-3
RUNNING THROUGH RS485 COMMUNICATION
Pins 1, 2, 7, and 8 on the RJ-45 connector are exclusively assigned to power supply and
grounding for keypads. When connecting other devices to the RJ-45 connector, take care not
to use those pins. Failure to do so may cause a short-circuit hazard.
Chap. 5
1 and 8
5.1.3
Pin assignment for optional RS485 Communications Card
The RS485 Communications Card has two sets of pins for multi-drop connection as listed below.
Terminal symbol
1 (standard)
Function description
DX+
RS485 communications data
(+) terminal
This is the (+) terminal of RS485
communications data.
DX
RS485 communications data
(-) terminal
This is the () terminal of RS485
communications data.
Communications cable shield
terminal
This is the terminal for relaying the shield of
the shielded cable, insulated from other
circuits.
DX+ relay terminal
This is the relay terminal of RS485
communications data (+).
DX- relay terminal
This is the relay terminal of RS485
communications data (-).
SD relay terminal
This is the terminal for relaying the shield of
the shielded cable, insulated from other
circuits.
SD
2 (for relay)
Terminal name
DX+
DX
SD
SW103 is provided on the RS485 Communications Card for connecting or disconnecting the
terminating resistor (112:). For the location of SW103, refer to the RS485 Communications Card
"OPC-F1-RS" Installation Manual (INR-SI47-0872).
5.1.4
Cable for RS485 communications port
For connection with the RS485 communications port, be sure to use an appropriate cable and a
converter that meet the applicable specifications.
For details, refer to the RS485 Communication User's Manual (MEH448a).
5-4
5.1 Overview on RS485 Communication
5.1.5
Communications support devices
This section provides information necessary for connection of the inverter to host equipment having
no RS485 communications port such as a PC or for configuring a multi-drop connection.
[ 1 ] Communications level converter
Most personal computers (PC) are not equipped with an RS485 communications port but RS232C and
USB ports. To connect a FRENIC-Eco inverter to a PC, therefore, you need to use an RS232C-RS485
communications level converter or a USB-RS485 interface converter. For correct running of the
communications facility to support FRENIC-Eco series of inverters, be sure to use one of the
recommended converters listed below.
KS-485PTI (RS232C-RS485 communications level converter)
USB-485I RJ45-T4P (USB-RS485 interface converter)
Supplied by SYSTEM SACOM Corporation.
Use an off-the-shelf 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX LAN cable (ANSI/TIA/EIA-568A category 5
compliant, straight type).
The RJ-45 connector has power source pins (pins 1, 2 7 and 8) exclusively assigned for
keypads. When connecting other devices to the RJ-45 connector, take care not to use those
pins. Failure to do so may cause a short-circuit hazard.
[ 3 ] Multi-drop adapter
To connect a FRENIC-Eco inverter to a network in a multi-drop configuration with a LAN cable that
has RJ-45 as the communications connector, use a multi-drop adapter for the RJ-45 connector.
Recommended multi-drop adapter
Model MS8-BA-JJJ made by SK KOHKI Co., Ltd.
[ 4 ] RS485 Communications Card
To equip your inverter with another RS485 communications port in addition to the standard RS485
communications port, you need to install this optional card. Note that you cannot use FRENIC Loader
through the optional RS485 communications port.
RS485 Communications Card (option)
For details, refer to the RS485 Communications Card Option "OPC-F1-RS" Installation Manual
(INR-SI47-0872).
For more details through Section 5.1.5, refer to the RS485 Communication User's Manual
(MEH448a).
5-5
RUNNING THROUGH RS485 COMMUNICATION
[ 2 ] Requirements for the cable
Chap. 5
Recommended converters
5.2
Overview of FRENIC Loader
FRENIC Loader is a software tool that supports the operation of the inverter via an RS485
communications link. It allows you to remotely run or stop the inverter, edit, set, or manage the
function codes, monitor key parameters and values during operation, as well as monitor the running
status (including alarm information) of the inverters on the RS485 communications network.
5.2.1
For details, refer to the FRENIC Loader Instruction Manual (INR-SI47-0903-E).
Specifications
Item
Specifications
(White on black indicates factory default)
FRENIC Loader Ver. 2.0.1.0 or later
Supported inverter
FRENIC-Eco series
FRENIC-Mini series
No. of supported inverters
Up to 31
Recommended cable
10BASE-T cable with RJ-45 connectors
compliant with EIA568
Transmission requirements
Operating environment
Name of software
Remarks
(Note 1)
CPU
Intel Pentium 200 MHz with MMX or
later
(Note 2)
OS
Microsoft Windows 98
Microsoft Windows 2000
Microsoft Windows XP
Memory
32 MB or more RAM
Hard disk
5 MB or more free space
COM port
RS-232C or USB
Conversion to RS485
communication required to
connect inverters
Monitor resolution
XVGA (800 x 600) or higher
1024 x 768, 16-bit color or
higher is recommended
COM port
COM1, COM2, COM3, COM4, COM5,
COM6, COM7, COM8
PC COM ports assigned to
Loader
Transmission rate
38400, 19200, 9600, 4800 and 2400 bps
19200 bps or more is
recommended.
(Note 3)
Character length
8 bits
Prefixed
Stop bit length
1 bit
Prefixed
Parity
Even
Prefixed
No. of retries
None or 1 to 10
No. of retry times before
detecting communications
error
Timeout setting
(100 ms, 300 ms, 500 ms), (1.0 to 9.0 s) or
(10.0 to 60.0 s)
This setting should be longer
than the response interval
time set by function code y09
of the inverter.
64 MB or more is
recommended
(Note 1) FRENIC Loader cannot be used with inverters that do not support SX protocol (protocol for
handling Loader commands).
With special order-made inverters, FRENIC Loader may not be able to display some function
codes normally.
To use FRENIC Loader on FRENIC-Mini series of inverters, an RS485 Communications Card
(Option: OPC-C1-RS) is required.
5-6
5.2 Overview of FRENIC Loader
(Note 2) Use a PC with as high a performance as possible, since some slow PCs may not properly refresh
the operation status monitor and Test-run windows.
(Note 3) To use FRENIC Loader on a network where a FRENIC-Mini inverter is also configured, choose
19200 bps or below.
5.2.2
Connection
By connecting a number of inverters to one PC, you can control one inverter at a time or a number of
inverters simultaneously through multiple windows on the PC. You can also simultaneously monitor
multiple inverters on a single screen.
For how to connect a PC to one or more inverters, refer to the RS485 Communication User's
Manual (MEH448a).
5.2.3.1
Setting of function code
You can set, edit, and checkout the setting of the inverter’s function code data.
List and Edit
In List and edit, you can list and edit function codes with function code No., name, set value, set range,
and factory default.
You can also list function codes by any of the following groups according to your needs:
• Function code group
• Function codes that have been modified from their factory defaults
• Result of comparison with the settings of the inverter
• Result of search by function code name
• User-specified function code set
5-7
RUNNING THROUGH RS485 COMMUNICATION (OPTION)
Function overview
Chap. 5
5.2.3
Comparison
You can compare the function code data currently being edited with that saved in a file or stored in the
inverter.
To perform a comparison and review the result displayed, click the Comparison tab and then click the
Compared with inverter tab or click the Compared with file tab, and specify the file name.
The result of the comparison will be displayed also in the Comparison Result column of the list.
File information
Clicking the File information tab displays the property and comments for identifying the function
code editing file.
(1) Property
Shows file name, inverter model, inverter’s capacity, date of readout, etc.
(2) Comments
Displays the comments you have entered. You can write any comments necessary for identifying the
file.
5.2.3.2
Multi-monitor
This feature lists the status of all the inverters that are marked "connected" in the configuration table.
Multi-monitor
Allows you to monitor the status of more than one inverter in a list format.
5-8
5.2 Overview of FRENIC Loader
5.2.3.3
Running status monitor
The running status monitor offers four monitor functions: I/O monitor, System monitor, Alarm
monitor, and Meter display. You can choose an appropriate monitoring format according to the
purpose and situation.
I/O monitor
Allows you to monitor the ON/OFF states of the
digital input signals to the inverter and the
transistor output signals.
Chap. 5
Allows you to check the inverter’s system
information (version, model, maintenance
information, etc.).
Alarm monitor
The alarm monitor shows the alarm status of the
selected inverter. In this window you can check
the details of the alarm currently occurs and
related information.
Meter display
Displays analog readouts of the selected inverter
(such as output frequency) on analog meters.
The example on the right displays the reference
frequency and the output frequency.
5-9
RUNNING THROUGH RS485 COMMUNICATION (OPTION)
System monitor
5.2.3.4
Test-running
The Test-running feature allows you to test-run the motor in "Run forward" or "Run reverse" while
monitoring the running status of the selected inverter.
Select monitor item
Select what is to be displayed here from
frequency command, current, etc.
Setting frequency command
Enter or select the set frequency command to write it into the inverter.
Click Apply to make it effective.
I/O terminal status
Shows status of the programmable
I/O terminals of the inverter.
Indicating
Operation
status
Shows
FWD,
REV,
STOP and
Alarm
codes.
Operation
buttons*
Selecting monitor item
Select the operation status information to
be monitored real-time.
Update the inverter info
for the latest ones
Click the Refresh button to update
running status of the inverter
shown on the Loader screen.
Loader will become to show the
latest inverter status.
Switching frequency and run
command sources
Select the frequency and run
command sources and apply them
by clicking Apply.
* Refer to the table shown below for details of the operation buttons. The indented appearance of the FWD
button as shown in the figure above indicates that it is active for running the motor forward, while that of
the REV button is same for running reverse.
Button
Description
STOP
Stops the motor.
FWD
Run the motor forward.
REV
Run the motor reverse.
RESET
Resets all alarm information saved in the selected inverter.
5-10
5.2 Overview of FRENIC Loader
5.2.3.5
Real-time trace—Displaying running status of an inverter in waveforms
This function allows you to monitor up to 4 analog readouts and up to 8 digital ON/OFF signals (a
combined total of 8 channels), measured at fixed sampling intervals of 200 ms, which represent the
running status of a selected inverter. These quantities are displayed in real-time waveforms on a time
trace.
Waveform capturing capability: Max. 15,360 samples/channel
Sub-panes
Set up the monitor items
Position graph
Status of
monitoring
Cursor
position
Save Data
Hardcopy
the monitor
Cursor scroll
slide
Blinks during the
real-time trace
running
Chap. 5
RUNNING THROUGH RS485 COMMUNICATION (OPTION)
START/STOP
the real-time trace.
Monitoring items
of the channels
Advanced setting
of the channels
Scope scroll
slide
Cursor
Monitor window
During the trace in progress you cannot:
• Change the RS485 station address,
• Change the advanced waveform settings, or
• Scroll the real-time trace screen or move the cursor.
Resizing the real-time trace window automatically changes the monitor window size.
5-11
Part 3 Peripheral Equipment
and Options
Chapter 6 SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
CHAPTER 6
SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
This chapter describes how to use a range of peripheral equipment and options, FRENIC-Eco's configuration
with them, and requirements and precautions for selecting wires and crimp terminals.
Contents
6.1 Configuring the FRENIC-Eco..................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.2 Selecting Wires and Crimp Terminals......................................................................................................... 6-2
6.2.1 Recommended wires ........................................................................................................................... 6-4
6.3 Peripheral Equipment.................................................................................................................................. 6-8
[ 1 ] Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB), earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB)
and magnetic contactor (MC) ........................................................................................................ 6-8
[ 2 ] Surge killers................................................................................................................................. 6-12
[ 3 ] Arresters ...................................................................................................................................... 6-12
[ 4 ] Surge absorbers............................................................................................................................ 6-13
6.4 Selecting Options ...................................................................................................................................... 6-14
6.4.1 Peripheral equipment options............................................................................................................ 6-14
[ 1 ] DC reactors (DCRs)..................................................................................................................... 6-14
[ 2 ] AC reactors (ACRs)..................................................................................................................... 6-16
[ 3 ] Output circuit filters (OFLs)........................................................................................................ 6-18
[ 4 ] Ferrite ring reactors for reducing radio noise (ACL)................................................................... 6-21
6.4.2 Options for operation and communications ...................................................................................... 6-22
[ 1 ] External potentiometer for frequency setting .............................................................................. 6-22
[ 2 ] Multi-function keypad ................................................................................................................. 6-23
[ 3 ] Extension cable for remote operation .......................................................................................... 6-23
[ 4 ] RS485 communications card ....................................................................................................... 6-24
[ 5 ] Relay output card......................................................................................................................... 6-25
[ 6 ] Inverter support loader software.................................................................................................. 6-26
6.4.3 Extended installation kit options ....................................................................................................... 6-27
[ 1 ] Panel-mount Adapter ................................................................................................................... 6-27
[ 2 ] Mounting Adapter for External Cooling...................................................................................... 6-28
6.4.4 Meter options .................................................................................................................................... 6-29
[ 1 ] Frequency meters......................................................................................................................... 6-29
6.1 Configuring the FRENIC-Eco
6.1 Configuring the FRENIC-Eco
This section lists the names and features of peripheral equipment and options for the FRENIC-Eco
series of inverters and includes a configuration example for reference. Refer to Figure 6.1 for a quick
overview of available options.
Chap. 6
SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
Figure 6.1 Quick Overview of Options
6-1
6.2 Selecting Wires and Crimp Terminals
This section contains information needed to select wires for connecting the inverter to commercial
power lines, motor or any of the optional/peripheral equipment. The level of electric noise issued from
the inverter or received by the inverter from external sources may vary depending upon wiring and
routing. To solve such noise-related problems, refer to Appendices App. A "Advantageous Use of
Inverters (Notes on electrical noise)."
Select wires that satisfy the following requirements:
-
Sufficient capacity to flow the rated current (allowable current capacity).
Protective device coordination with an overcurrent circuit breaker such as an MCCB in the
overcurrent zone for overcurrent protection.
Voltage drop due to the wire length is within the allowable range.
Suitable for the type and size of terminals of the inverter and optional equipment to be used.
Recommended wires are listed below. Use these wires unless otherwise specified.
■ 600V indoor PVC insulated wires (IV wires)
Use this class of wire for the indoor power circuits. This class of wire is hard to twist, so using it for the
control signal circuits is not recommended. Maximum ambient temperature for this wire is 60qC.
■ 600V heat-resistant PVC insulated wires or 600V polyethylene insulated wires (HIV wires)
As wires in this class are smaller in diameter and more flexible than IV wires and can be used at a
higher ambient temperature (75qC), they can be used for both of the main power and control signal
circuits. To use this class of wire for the control circuits, you need to correctly twist the wires and keep
the wiring length for equipment being connected as short as possible.
■ 600V cross-link polyethylene-insulated wires (FSLC wires)
Use this class of wire mainly for power and grounding circuits. These wires are smaller in diameter
and more flexible than those of the IV and HIV classes of wires, meaning that these wires can be used
to save on space and on wiring cost of your power system, even in high temperature environments.
The maximum allowable ambient temperature for this class of wires is 90qC. The (Boardlex) wire
range available from Furukawa Electric Co., Ltd. satisfies these requirements.
■ Shielded-twisted cables for internal wiring of electronic/electric equipment
Use this category of cables for the control circuits of the inverter so as to prevent the signal lines from
being affected by radiation or induction noises from external sources, including the power
input/output lines of the inverter themselves. Even if the signal lines are inside the power control
enclosure, always use this category of cables when the length of wiring is longer than normal. Cables
satisfying these requirements are the Furukawa's BEAMEX S shielded cables of the XEBV and
XEWV ranges.
6-2
6.2 Selecting Wires and Crimp Terminals
Currents flowing through components of the inverter
Table 6.1 summarizes average (effective) electric currents flowing across each component of the
inverter for ease of reference when selecting peripheral equipment, options and electric wires for each
inverter--including supplied power voltage and applicable motor rating.
Table 6.1 Currents Flowing through Components of the Inverter
Power
supply
voltage
Applicable
motor
rating
(kW)
0.75
1.5
2.2
4.9
(5.3)
3.7
(4.0)
8.7
12.0
(9.5)
(13.1)
6.9
10.0
(7.5)
(11.0)
13.6
19.0
26.0
(14.9)
(20.9)
(28.6)
20.0
28.4
38.5
(22.0)
(31.2)
(42.3)
16.7
23.3
31.9
(18.3)
(25.6)
(35.1)
70.6
38.0
52.0
(41.8)
(57.1)
54.7
72.2
(60.1)
(79.4)
46.6
63.7
(51.2)
(70.0)
97.0
112
87.0
103
64.0
76.0
(70.3)
(83.6)
87.4
101
(96.1)
(111)
78.4
93.1
(86.1)
(102)
114
138
151
185
140
169
103
113
136
150
126
(138)
FRN45F1„-2†
167
225
205
124
150
137
165
167
203
183
223
152
184
(168)
(203)
FRN55F1„-2†
203
282
270
-
249
345
183
201
243
267
224
(246)
254
279
311
(342)
11.0
15.0
21.1
28.8
42.2
22.2
31.5
42.7
60.7
18.4
25.9
35.3
51.7
57.6
80.1
FRN22F1„-2†
71.0
84.4
FRN30F1„-2†
FRN37F1„-2†
FRN15F1„-2†
FRN18.5F1„-2†
45
55
75
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
132
160
200
220
FRN75F1„-2†
FRN0.75F1„-4†
FRN1.5F1„-4†
-
1.6
(1.7)
3.1
(3.3)
2.0
(2.1)
1.6
(1.5)
3.1
(2.9)
2.0
(1.9)
FRN2.2F1„-4†
3.0
4.5
(3.2)
(4.8)
5.9
8.2
(6.3)
(8.7)
3.7
5.6
(4.0)
(5.9)
3.0
4.5
(2.8)
(4.1)
5.9
8.2
(5.4)
(7.5)
3.7
5.6
(3.5)
(5.1)
FRN3.7F1„-4†
FRN5.5F1„-4†
FRN7.5F1„-4†
7.5
10.6
14.4
(7.9)
(11.2)
(15.2)
13
17.3
23.2
(13.7)
(18.3)
(24.5)
9.2
13.0
17.7
(9.7)
(13.8)
(18.7)
7.5
10.5
14.3
(6.9)
(9.6)
(13.0)
12.9
17.2
23.0
(11.8)
(15.7)
(21.0)
9.2
12.9
17.6
(8.5)
(11.8)
(16.0)
FRN11F1„-4†
FRN15F1„-4†
21.1
28.8
(22.3)
(30.4)
33.0
43.8
(34.8)
(46.2)
25.9
35.3
(27.4)
(37.3)
20.9
28.6
(19.0)
(26.0)
32.7
43.4
(29.8)
(39.5)
25.6
35.1
(23.3)
(31.9)
FRN18.5F1„-4†
FRN22F1„-4†
35.5
(37.4)
52.3
(55.1)
43.5
(45.9)
35.2
(32.0)
51.8
(47.1)
43.2
(39.2)
42.2
57.0
(44.5)
(60.0)
60.6
77.9
(63.8)
(82.0)
51.7
69.9
(54.6)
(73.5)
41.8
56.5
(38.0)
(51.4)
60.0
77.2
(54.6)
(70.2)
51.2
69.2
(46.6)
(63.0)
68.5
(72.2)
94.3
(99.3)
83.9
(88.5)
67.9
(61.8)
93.4
(85.0)
83.2
(75.7)
83.2
102
(87.6)
(107)
114
140
(120)
(147)
102
125
(107)
(132)
82.4
101.0
(75.0)
(92)
113
139
(103)
(126)
101.0
124
92
113
138
(145)
169
(178)
137
(124)
168
152
164
201
(173)
(212)
-
201
246
(212)
(259)
162
199
(148)
(181)
-
199
244
181
222
FRN160F1„-4†
238
286
(251)
(301)
-
292
350
(307)
(369)
236
283
(214)
(258)
-
289
347
263
315
FRN200F1„-4†
357
(376)
(460)
354
(321)
394
(411)
478
(503)
386
(351)
-
433
390
-
437
FRN220F1„-4†
473
430
FRN30F1„-4†
FRN37F1„-4†
FRN45F1„-4†
FRN55F1„-4†
FRN75F1„-4†
FRN90F1„-4†
FRN110F1„-4†
FRN132F1„-4†
-
-
- Inverter efficiency is calculated using values suitable for each inverter model. The input route mean
square (RMS) current is calculated under the following conditions:
Power supply capacity: 500 kVA; power supply impedance: 5%
- The RMS current listed in the above table will vary in inverse proportion to the power supply
voltage, such as 230 VAC and 380 VAC.
Note
1) A box („) in the above table replaces S (Standard type), E (EMC filter built-in type), or H (DCR built-in
type) depending on the product specifications.
2) A box (†) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or J depending on the shipping destination.
6-3
SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
(3.2)
(6.1)
(8.9)
9.5
13.2
Chap. 6
3.0
5.6
8.1
5.3
6.1
8.9
15
18.5
37
60Hz, 220V (200V䋩/400V (440V䋩
Input RMS current (A)
DC link
DC reactor (DCR)
bus current (A)
w/ DCR
w/o DCR
4.0
7.5
3.2
11
22
30
Threephase
400 V
FRN0.75F1„-2†
FRN1.5F1„-2†
FRN2.2F1„-2†
FRN3.7F1„-2†
FRN5.5F1„-2†
FRN7.5F1„-2†
FRN11F1„-2†
3.7
5.5
7.5
Threephase
200 V
Inverter type
50Hz, 200V/400V (380V䋩
Input RMS current (A)
DC link
DC reactor (DCR)
circuit current
(A)
w/ DCR
w/o DCR
6.2.1 Recommended wires
Tables 6.2 and 6.3 list the recommended wires according to the internal temperature of your power
control enclosure, for ease of reference to wiring of each inverter model.
■ If the internal temperature of your power control cabinet is 50qC or below
Table 6.2 Wire Size (for main circuit power input and inverter output)
2
AppliPower cable
supply motor
voltage rating
(kW)
Recommended wire size (mm )
Inverter type
Allowable temp. *1
0.75 FRN0.75F1„-2†
1.5 FRN1.5F1„-2†
Allowable temp. *1
60qC
75qC
90qC
Current
䋨A䋩
60qC
75qC
90qC
Current
䋨A䋩
60qC
75qC
90qC
Current
䋨A䋩
2.0
2.0
2.0
3.2
2.0
2.0
2.0
5.3
2.0
2.0
2.0
4.2
2.0
2.0
2.0
6.1
2.0
2.0
2.0
9.5
2.0
2.0
2.0
7.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
3.5
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
8.9
15.0
21.1
28.8
2.0
5.5
8.0
14.0
2.0
2.0
3.5
5.5
2.0
2.0
3.5
5.5
13.2
22.2
31.5
42.7
2.0
3.5
5.5
8.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
3.5
2.0
2.0
2
2
10.6
16.7
22.5
29.0
FRN2.2F1„-2†
3.7
5.5
FRN3.7F1„-2†
FRN5.5F1„-2†
FRN7.5F1„-2†
2.0
2.0
5.5
8.0
11
FRN11F1„-2†
14.0
5.5
5.5
42.2
22.0
14.0
8.0
60.7
14.0
5.5
3.5
42.0
15
FRN15F1„-2†
22.0
14.0
8.0
57.6
38.0
22.0
14.0
80.1
22.0
8.0
5.5
55.0
38.0
14.0
14.0
71.0
60.0
22.0
14.0
97.0
38.0
14.0
8.0
68.0
38.0
22.0
14.0
84.4
60.0
38.0
22.0
112
38.0
14.0
14.0
80.0
18.5 FRN18.5F1„-2†
22 FRN22F1„-2†
30
FRN30F1„-2†
60.0
38.0
22.0
114
100
60.0
38.0
151
60.0
38.0
22.0
107
37
FRN37F1„-2†
100 *2
38.0
38.0
138
60×2
60.0
38.0
185
100 *2
38.0
22.0
130
45
FRN45F1„-2†
100
60.0
38.0
167
100×2
100
60.0
225
100
60.0
38.0
156
55
75
FRN55F1„-2†
60×2
100
60.0
203
100×2
100
100
270
60×2
100
60.0
198
FRN75F1„-2†
100×2 150 *3
0.75 FRN0.75F1„-4†
1.5 FRN1.5F1„-4†
100
282
-
-
-
-
100×2
100
100
270
2.0
2.0
2.0
1.6
2.0
2.0
2.0
3.1
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.5
2.0
2.0
2.0
3.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
5.9
2.0
2.0
2.0
3.7
2.2
FRN2.2F1„-4†
2.0
2.0
2.0
4.5
2.0
2.0
2.0
8.2
2.0
2.0
2.0
5.5
3.7
5.5
FRN3.7F1„-4†
FRN5.5F1„-4†
FRN7.5F1„-4†
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
7.5
10.6
14.4
2.0
3.5
5.5
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
13.0
17.3
23.2
2.0
2.0
3.5
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
9.0
12.5
16.5
11
FRN11F1„-4†
5.5
2.0
2.0
21.1
8.0
3.5
3.5
33.0
5.5
2.0
2.0
23.0
15
FRN15F1„-4†
8.0
3.5
2.0
28.8
14.0
5.5
5.5
43.8
8.0
3.5
2.0
30.0
7.5
Threephase
400 V
Allowable temp. *1
Inverter output [U , V , W]
2.2
7.5
Threephase
200 V
Main circuit power input [L1/R , L2/S , L3/T]
w/ DC reactor (DCR)
w/o DC reactor (DCR)
18.5 FRN18.5F1„-4†
22 FRN22F1„-4†
14.0
5.5
3.5
35.5
22.0
8.0
5.5
52.3
14.0
5.5
3.5
37.0
14.0
5.5
5.5
42.2
22.0
14.0
8.0
60.6
14.0
5.5
5.5
44.0
58.0
30
FRN30F1„-4†
22.0
14.0
8.0
57.0
38.0
14.0
14.0
77.9
22.0
14.0
8.0
37
FRN37F1„-4†
38.0
14.0
8.0
68.5
60.0
22.0
14.0
94.3
38.0
14.0
14.0
71.0
45
FRN45F1„-4†
38.0
22.0
14.0
83.2
60.0
38.0
22.0
114
38.0
22.0
14.0
84.0
55
FRN55F1„-4†
60.0
22.0
22.0
102
100 *2
38.0
38.0
140
60.0
22.0
22.0
102
75
FRN75F1„-4†
100 *2
38.0
38.0
138
-
-
-
-
100 *2
38.0
38.0
139
90
FRN90F1„-4†
100
60.0
38.0
164
-
-
-
-
100
60.0
38.0
168
203
110 FRN110F1„-4†
132 FRN132F1„-4†
160 FRN160F1„-4†
200 FRN200F1„-4†
220 FRN220F1„-4†
60×2
100
60.0
201
-
-
-
-
60×2
100
60.0
100×2
100
60.0
238
-
-
-
-
100×2
100
60.0
240
-
150
100
286
-
-
-
-
100×2
150
100
290
-
150
150
357
-
-
-
-
-
200
150
360
-
200
150
390
-
-
-
-
-
200
150
415
*1 Assuming the use of aerial wiring (without rack or duct): 600V indoor PVC insulated wires (IV wires) for up to
60qC, 600V heat-resisting PVC insulated wires or 600V class polyethylene insulated wires (HIV wires) for up to
75qC, and 600V cross-link polyethylene-insulated wires (FSLC wires) for up to 90qC.
*2 Use crimp terminals for low voltage devices, CB100-8 (JEM 1399) compliant.
*3 Use crimp terminals for low voltage devices, CB150-10 (JEM 1399) compliant.
Note
1) A box („) in the above table replaces S (Standard type), E (EMC filter built-in type), or H (DCR built-in
type) depending on the product specifications.
2) A box (†) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or J depending on the shipping destination.
If environmental requirements such as power supply voltage and ambient temperature differ
from those recommendations listed above, select wires suitable for your system by referring to
Table 6.1 and Appendices, App. F "Allowable Current of Insulated Wires."
6-4
6.2 Selecting Wires and Crimp Terminals
Table 6.2 Cont. (for DC reactor, control circuits, auxiliary power input (for the control circuit and fans) and
inverter grounding)
2
AppliPower cable
supply motor
voltage rating
(kW)
Recommended wire size (mm )
Inverter type
Allowable temp. *1
75°C
90°C
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
3.5
5.5
14.0
2.0
2.0
3.5
5.5
22.0
38.0
FRN15F1„-2†
18.5 FRN18.5F1„-2† 38.0
60.0
22 FRN22F1„-2†
1.5
FRN1.5F1„-2†
2.2
FRN2.2F1„-2†
FRN3.7F1„-2†
FRN5.5F1„-2†
FRN7.5F1„-2†
FRN11F1„-2†
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
37
45
FRN37F1„-2†
FRN45F1„-2†
55
FRN55F1„-2†
75
FRN75F1„-2†
4.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
3.5
2.0
18.4
25.9
35.3
3.5
8.0
14.0
5.5
14.0
51.7
70.6
22.0
22.0
14.0
22.0
87.0
103
100
38.0
100 *2 60.0
38.0
38.0
140
169
-
100
100
60.0
60.0
205
249
-
150
150
345
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.1
4.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
3.5
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
5.9
9.7
13.8
18.7
5.5
14.0
FRN15F1„-4†
18.5 FRN18.5F1„-4† 14.0
22.0
22 FRN22F1„-4†
3.5
5.5
2.0
3.5
27.4
37.3
8.0
8.0
5.5
5.5
45.9
54.6
14.0
22.0
14.0
14.0
73.5
88.5
60.0 38.0
100 *2 38.0
22.0
22.0
107
132
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
FRN1.5F1„-4†
FRN2.2F1„-4†
FRN3.7F1„-4†
FRN5.5F1„-4†
FRN7.5F1„-4†
FRN11F1„-4†
15
Threephase
400 V
Current Allowable temp. *1 Allowable temp. *1 Allowable temp. *1 Allowable temp. *1
䋨A䋩
60°C 75°C 90°C 60°C 75°C 90°C 60°C 75°C 90°C 60°C 75°C 90°C
2.0
2.0
0.75 FRN0.75F1„-4†
30
FRN30F1„-4†
37
FRN37F1„-4†
FRN45F1„-4†
45
55
75
90
110
FRN55F1„-4†
FRN75F1„-4†
FRN90F1„-4†
FRN110F1„-4†
38.0
38.0
60×2
-
60.0
100
38.0
60.0
178
212
-
100
150
100.0
100
259
307
200
250
150
200
369
460
250
200
503
160
FRN132F1„-4†
FRN160F1„-4†
200
FRN200F1„-4†
-
220
FRN220F1„-4†
-
132
Inverter grounding
[\G]
0.75
to
1.25
0.75
to
1.25
0.75
to
1.25
2.0
2.0
-
-
2.0
5.5
8.0
14.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
22.0
2.0
-
-
-
3.5
5.5
0.75
to
1.25
0.75
to
1.25
0.75
to
1.25
2.0
2.0
8.0
2.0
14.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
22.0
38.0
*1 Assuming the use of aerial wiring (without rack or duct): 600V indoor PVC insulated wires (IV wires) for up to
60qC, 600V heat-resisting PVC insulated wires or 600V class polyethylene insulated wires (HIV wires) for up to
75qC, and 600V cross-link polyethylene-insulated wires (FSLC wires) for up to 90qC.
*2 Use crimp terminals for low voltage devices, CB100-8 (JEM 1399) compliant.
Note
1) A box („) in the above table replaces S (Standard type), E (EMC filter built-in type), or H (DCR built-in
type) depending on the product specifications.
2) A box (†) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or J depending on the shipping destination.
If environmental requirements such as power supply voltage and ambient temperature differ
from those recommendations listed above, select wires suitable for your system by referring to
Table 6.1 and Appendices, App. F "Allowable Current of Insulated Wires."
6-5
SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
FRN30F1„-2†
Aux. power input
(Fans) [R1,T1]
7.5
11.0
15
30
Control circuit
Aux. power input
(Ctrl. Cct.) [R0,T0]
Chap. 6
60°C
0.75 FRN0.75F1„-2†
Threephase
200 V
DC reactor
[P1, P(+)]
■ If the internal temperature of your power control cabinet is 40qC or below
Table 6.3 Wire Size (for main circuit power input and inverter output)
2
AppliPower cable
supply motor
voltage rating
(kW)
Recommended wire size (mm )
Allowable temp. *1
0.75 FRN0.75F1„-2†
1.5 FRN1.5F1„-2†
Allowable temp. *1
60qC
75qC
90qC
Current
䋨A䋩
60qC
75qC
90qC
Current
䋨A䋩
60qC
75qC
90qC
2.0
2.0
2.0
3.2
2.0
2.0
2.0
5.3
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
6.1
2.0
2.0
2.0
9.5
2.0
2.0
2.0
4.2
7.0
Current
䋨A䋩
FRN2.2F1„-2†
2.0
2.0
2.0
8.9
2.0
2.0
2.0
13.2
2.0
2.0
2.0
10.6
3.7
5.5
FRN3.7F1„-2†
FRN5.5F1„-2†
FRN7.5F1„-2†
2.0
2.0
3.5
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
15.0
21.1
28.8
3.5
5.5
8.0
2.0
3.5
5.5
2.0
2.0
3.5
22.2
31.5
42.7
2.0
3.5
3.5
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
16.7
22.5
29.0
11
FRN11F1„-2†
8.0
5.5
3.5
42.2
14.0
8.0
5.5
60.7
8.0
5.5
3.5
42.0
15
FRN15F1„-2†
14.0
8.0
5.5
57.6
22.0
14.0
14.0
80.1
14.0
8.0
5.5
55.0
14.0
14.0
8.0
71.0
38.0
22.0
14.0
97.0
14.0
14.0
8.0
68.0
22.0
14.0
14.0
84.4
38.0
22.0
14.0
112
22.0
14.0
14.0
80.0
18.5 FRN18.5F1„-2†
22 FRN22F1„-2†
30
FRN30F1„-2†
38.0
22.0
22.0
114
60.0
38.0
38.0
151
38.0
22.0
14.0
107
37
FRN37F1„-2†
60.0
38.0
22.0
138
100 *2
60.0
38.0
185
38.0
38.0
22.0
130
45
FRN45F1„-2†
60.0
38.0
38.0
167
100
60.0
60.0
225
60.0
38.0
38.0
156
55
75
FRN55F1„-2†
100
60.0
38.0
203
60×2
100
60.0
270
100
60.0
38.0
198
FRN75F1„-2†
60×2
100
100
282
-
-
-
-
60×2
100
60.0
270
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
3.1
5.9
2.0
2.0
1.6
3.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.5
3.7
0.75 FRN0.75F1„-4†
1.5 FRN1.5F1„-4†
2.2
FRN2.2F1„-4†
2.0
2.0
2.0
4.5
2.0
2.0
2.0
8.2
2.0
2.0
2.0
5.5
3.7
5.5
FRN3.7F1„-4†
FRN5.5F1„-4†
FRN7.5F1„-4†
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
7.5
10.6
14.4
2.0
2.0
3.5
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
13.0
17.3
23.2
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
9.0
12.5
16.5
11
FRN11F1„-4†
2.0
2.0
2.0
21.1
5.5
3.5
2.0
33.0
3.5
2.0
2.0
23.0
15
FRN15F1„-4†
3.5
2.0
2.0
28.8
8.0
5.5
3.5
43.8
3.5
3.5
2.0
30.0
5.5
3.5
3.5
35.5
14.0
8.0
5.5
52.3
5.5
3.5
3.5
37.0
8.0
5.5
3.5
42.2
14.0
8.0
5.5
60.6
8.0
5.5
3.5
44.0
7.5
Threephase
400 V
Allowable temp. *1
Inverter output [U , V , W]
2.2
7.5
Threephase
200 V
Main circuit power input [L1/R , L2/S , L3/T]
w/ DC reactor (DCR)
w/o DC reactor (DCR)
Inverter type
18.5 FRN18.5F1„-4†
22 FRN22F1„-4†
30
FRN30F1„-4†
14.0
8.0
5.5
57.0
22.0
14.0
8.0
77.9
14.0
8.0
5.5
58.0
37
FRN37F1„-4†
14.0
14.0
8.0
68.5
22.0
14.0
14.0
94.3
14.0
14.0
8.0
71.0
45
FRN45F1„-4†
22.0
14.0
14.0
83.2
38.0
22.0
14.0
114
22.0
14.0
14.0
84.0
55
FRN55F1„-4†
38.0
22.0
14.0
102
60.0
38.0
22.0
140
38.0
22.0
14.0
102
75
FRN75F1„-4†
60.0
38.0
22.0
138
-
-
-
-
60.0
38.0
22.0
139
90
FRN90F1„-4†
60
38.0
38
164
-
-
-
-
60
38.0
38.0
168
100
60.0
38.0
201
-
-
-
-
100
60
38.0
203
100
100
60.0
238
-
-
-
-
100
100
60.0
240
60×2
100
100
286
-
-
-
-
60×2
100
100
290
100×2
150
100
357
-
-
-
-
100×2
150
100
360
100×2
150
150
390
-
-
-
-
100×2
150
150
415
110 FRN110F1„-4†
132 FRN132F1„-4†
160 FRN160F1„-4†
200 FRN200F1„-4†
220 FRN220F1„-4†
*1 Assuming the use of aerial wiring (without rack or duct): 600V indoor PVC insulated wires (IV wires) for up to
60qC, 600V heat-resisting PVC insulated wires or 600V class polyethylene insulated wires (HIV wires) for up to
75qC, and 600V cross-link polyethylene-insulated wires (FSLC wires) for up to 90qC.
*2 Use crimp terminals for low voltage devices, CB100-8 (JEM 1399) compliant.
Note
1) A box („) in the above table replaces S (Standard type), E (EMC filter built-in type), or H (DCR built-in
type) depending on the product specifications.
2) A box (†) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or J depending on the shipping destination.
If environmental requirements such as power supply voltage and ambient temperature differ
from those recommendations listed above, select wires suitable for your system by referring to
Table 6.1 and Appendices, App. F "Allowable Current of Insulated Wires."
6-6
6.2 Selecting Wires and Crimp Terminals
Table 6.3 Cont. (for DC reactor, control circuits, auxiliary power input (for the control circuit and fans) and
inverter grounding)
AppliPower cable
supply motor
voltage rating
(kW)
Recommended wire size (mm2)
Inverter type
Allowable temp. *1
60°C
0.75 FRN0.75F1„-2†
1.5 FRN1.5F1„-2†
90°C
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
4.0
7.5
2.0
2.0
2.0
11.0
7.5
FRN3.7F1„-2†
FRN5.5F1„-2†
FRN7.5F1„-2†
2.0
3.5
5.5
2.0
2.0
3.5
2.0
2.0
3.5
18.4
25.9
35.3
11
FRN11F1„-2†
14.0
5.5
5.5
51.7
14.0
15 FRN15F1„-2†
18.5 FRN18.5F1„-2† 22.0
38.0
22 FRN22F1„-2†
60.0
30 FRN30F1„-2†
14.0
8.0
70.6
14.0
14.0
87.0
22.0
14.0
103
38.0
22.0
140
169
37
FRN37F1„-2†
60.0
38.0
38.0
45
FRN45F1„-2†
100
60
38.0
205
55
75
FRN55F1„-2†
-
100
60
249
-
150
100
345
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.1
4.0
2.2
FRN2.2F1„-4†
2.0
2.0
2.0
5.9
3.7
5.5
7.5
FRN3.7F1„-4†
FRN5.5F1„-4†
FRN7.5F1„-4†
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
9.7
13.8
18.7
11
FRN11F1„-4†
3.5
2.0
2.0
27.4
15
FRN15F1„-4†
5.5
3.5
3.5
37.3
18.5 FRN18.5F1„-4† 8.0
14.0
22 FRN22F1„-4†
22.0
30 FRN30F1„-4†
5.5
3.5
45.9
8.0
5.5
54.6
37
FRN37F1„-4†
22.0
45
FRN45F1„-4†
38.0
55
FRN55F1„-4†
38.0
75
FRN75F1„-4†
60
14.0
8.0
73.5
14.0
14.0
88.5
22.0
14.0
107
38.0
22.0
132
60.0
38.0
178
90
FRN90F1„-4†
100
60.0
60.0
212
110
FRN110F1„-4†
-
100
60.0
259
132
FRN132F1„-4†
-
100
100
307
160
FRN160F1„-4† 100×2 150
200
FRN200F1„-4†
100
369
150
460
FRN220F1„-4†
150
503
200
220
-
200
Aux. power input
(Fans) [R1,T1]
Inverter grounding
[\G]
2.0
3.5
0.75
to
1.25
0.75
to
1.25
0.75
to
1.25
2.0
2.0
-
-
2.0
5.5
8.0
14.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
22.0
2.0
-
-
-
3.5
5.5
0.75
to
1.25
0.75
to
1.25
0.75
to
1.25
2.0
2.0
8.0
2.0
14.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
22.0
38.0
*1 Assuming the use of aerial wiring (without rack or duct): 600V indoor PVC insulated wires (IV wires) for up to
60qC, 600V heat-resisting PVC insulated wires or 600V class polyethylene insulated wires (HIV wires) for up to
75qC, and 600V cross-link polyethylene-insulated wires (FSLC wires) for up to 90qC.
Note
1) A box („) in the above table replaces S (Standard type), E (EMC filter built-in type), or H (DCR built-in
type) depending on the product specifications.
2) A box (†) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or J depending on the shipping destination.
If environmental requirements such as power supply voltage and ambient temperature differ
from those recommendations listed above, select wires suitable for your system by referring to
Table 6.1 and Appendices, App. F "Allowable Current of Insulated Wires."
6-7
SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
FRN2.2F1„-2†
3.7
5.5
FRN75F1„-2†
Aux. power input
(Ctrl. Cct.) [R0,T0]
Current Allowable temp. *1 Allowable temp. *1 Allowable temp. *1 Allowable temp. *1
䋨A䋩
60°C 75°C 90°C 60°C 75°C 90°C 60°C 75°C 90°C 60°C 75°C 90°C
2.2
0.75 FRN0.75F1„-4†
1.5 FRN1.5F1„-4†
Threephase
400 V
75°C
Control circuit
Chap. 6
Threephase
200 V
DC reactor
[P1, P(+)]
6.3 Peripheral Equipment
[ 1 ] Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB), earth leakage circuit breaker
(ELCB) and magnetic contactor (MC)
[ 1.1 ] Functional overview
■ MCCBs and ELCBs*
*With overcurrent protection
Molded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCBs) are designed to protect the power circuits between the power
supply and inverter's main circuit terminals (L1/R, L2/S and L3/T) from overload or short-circuit,
which in turn prevents secondary accidents caused by the inverter malfunctioning.
Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers (ELCBs) function in the same way as MCCBs.
Built-in overcurrent/overload protective functions protect the inverter itself from failures related to its
input/output lines.
■ MCs
An MC can be used at both the power input (primary) and output (secondary) sides of the inverter. At
each side, the Magnetic Contactor (MC) works as described below. When inserted in the output circuit
of inverter, the MC can also switch the motor drive power source between the inverter output and
commercial power lines.
At the power source (primary) side
Insert an MC in the power source side of the inverter in order to:
(1) Forcibly cut off the inverter from the power source with the protective function built into the
inverter, or with the external signal input.
(2)
Stop the inverter operation in an emergency when the inverter cannot interpret the stop
command due to internal/external circuit failures.
(3) Cut off the inverter from the power supply if the MCCB on the power supply side cannot be
turned OFF when maintenance or inspection of motor is required. For this purpose only, it is
recommended that you use an MC that can be turned off manually.
When your system uses an MC to start or stop the inverter, keep the number of start/stop
operations once or less per hour. Frequent such operations shorten not only the service life of
the MC but also that of the inverter DC link bus capacitor(s) due to the thermal fatigue
caused by the frequent flow of the charging current. Use terminal commands (FWD) and
(REV) or the keypad as much as possible, to start or stop the inverter.
At the output (secondary) side
Insert an MC in the power output side of the inverter in order to:
(1) Prevent externally turned-around current from being applied to the inverter power output
terminals (U, V, and W) unexpectedly. An MC should be used, for example, if a circuit that
switches the motor driving power source between the inverter output and commercial power
lines is connected to the inverter.
As application of the external power to the inverter's output side may break the Insulated
Gate Bipolar Transistors (IGBTs), MCs should be used in the power control system circuits
to switch the motor drive power source to the commercial power lines after the motor has
come to a complete stop. Also ensure that voltage is never mistakenly applied to the inverter
output terminals due to unexpected timer operation, or similar.
(2) Drive more than one motor selectively by a single inverter.
(3) Selectively cut off the motor whose thermal overload relay or equivalent devices have been
activated.
6-8
6.3 Peripheral Equipment
Driving the motor using commercial power lines
MCs can also be used to run the motor driven by the inverter by a commercial power source.
Select the MC so as to satisfy the input RMS currents listed in Table 6.1, which are the most critical for
using the inverter (Refer to Table 6.5).
Use an MC of class AC3 specified by IEC 60947-4-1 (JIS C8201-4-1) for the commercial power
operation when you are making a switching operation of the motor between the inverter output and
commercial power lines.
[ 1.2 ] Applications and criteria for selection of contactors
Figure 6.2 shows external views and applications of MCCB/ELCB (with overcurrent protection) and
MC in the inverter input circuit. Table 6.5 lists the rated current for the MCCB/ELCB and Fuji MC
type. Table 6.6 lists the leakage current sensibility of the ELCB in conjunction with wiring length.
Doing so could result in a fire.
MC
Figure 6.2 External Views and Applications of MCCB/ELCB and MC
6-9
SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
MCCB/
ELCB
Chap. 6
Insert an MCCB or ELCB (with overcurrent protection) recommended for each inverter for its input
circuits. Do not use an MCCB or ELCB of a higher rating than that recommended.
Table 6.5 Rated Current of MCCB/ELCB and MC (Note that values in the table below are
valid in 50 qC of ambient temperature.)
-
The above table lists the rated current of MCCBs and ELCBs to be used in the power control enclosure
with an internal temperature of lower than 50qC. The rated current is factored by a correction
coefficient of 0.85 as the MCCBs' and ELCBs' original rated current is specified when using them in an
ambient temperature of 40qC or lower. Select an MCCB and/or ELCB suitable for the actual
short-circuit breaking capacity needed for your power systems.
- For the selection of the MC type, it is assumed that the 600V HIV (allowable ambient
temperature: 75qC) wires for the power input/output of the inverter are used. If an MC type for
another class of wires is selected, the wire size suitable for the terminal size of both the inverter and
the MC type should be taken into account.
-
Use ELCBs with overcurrent protection.
-
To protect your power systems from secondary accidents caused by the broken inverter, use an MCCB
and/or ELCB with the rated current listed in the above table. Do not use an MCCB or ELCB with a
rating higher than that listed.
Note
1) A box („) in the above table replaces S (Standard type), E (EMC filter built-in type), or H (DCR built-in
type) depending on the product specifications.
2) A box (†) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or J depending on the shipping destination.
6-10
6.3 Peripheral Equipment
Table 6.6 lists the relationship between the rated leakage current sensitivity of ELCBs (with
overcurrent protection) and wiring length of the output (secondary) sides of the inverter. Note that the
sensitivity levels listed in the table are estimated typical values based on the results obtained by the test
setup in the Fuji laboratory where each inverter drives a single motor.
Table 6.6 Rated Current Sensitivity of ELCBs
Power
supply
voltage
-
10 m
30 m
50 m
100 m
200 m
300 m
30 mA
100 mA
200 mA
500 mA
30 mA
100 mA
200 mA
500 mA
1000 mA
(Atypical
spec.)
1000 mA
(Atypical
spec.)
3000 mA
(Atypical
spec.)
Values listed above were obtained using Fuji ELCB EG or SG series applied to the test setup.
The rated current of applicable motor rating indicates values for Fuji standard motor (4 poles, 50 Hz and
200 V 3-phase).
The leakage current is calculated based on grounding of the single wire for 200V ' connection and the
neutral wire for 400V Y connection.
Values listed above are calculated based on the static capacitance to the earth when the 600V IV wires
are used in a metal conduit laid directly on the earth.
Wiring length is the total length of wiring between the inverter and motor. If more than one motor is to
be connected to a single inverter, the wiring length should be the total length of wiring between the
inverter and motors.
For an EMC filter built-in type inverter, use an ELCB with higher rated leakage current
sensitivity than specified one, or remove the built-in capacitive filter (grounding capacitor).
6-11
SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
Threephase
400 V
Wiring length and current sensitivity
Chap. 6
Threephase
200 V
Applicable
motor
rating
(kW)
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
132
160
200
220
280
315
355
400
450
500
[ 2 ] Surge killers
A surge killer eliminates surge currents induced by lightning and noise from the power supply lines.
Use of a surge killer is effective in preventing the electronic equipment, including inverters, from
damage or malfunctioning caused by such surges and/or noise.
The applicable model of surge killer is the FSL-323. Figure 6.3 shows its external dimensions and
application example. Refer to the catalog "Fuji Noise Suppressors (SH310: Japanese edition only)" for
details. These products are available from Fuji Electric Technica Co., Ltd.
Figure 6.3 Dimensions of Surge Killer and Application Example
[ 3 ] Arresters
An arrester suppresses surge currents and noise invaded from the power supply lines. Use of an
arrester is effective in preventing electronic equipment, including inverters, from damage or
malfunctioning caused by such surges and/or noise.
Applicable arrester models are the CN23232 and CN2324E. Figure 6.4 shows their external
dimensions and application examples. Refer to the catalog "Fuji Noise Suppressors (SH310: Japanese
edition only)" for details. These products are available from Fuji Electric Technica Co., Ltd.
Figure 6.4 Arrester Dimensions and Application Examples
6-12
6.3 Peripheral Equipment
[ 4 ] Surge absorbers
A surge absorber suppresses surge currents and noise from the power lines to ensure effective
protection of your power system from the malfunctioning of the magnetic contactors, mini-control
relays and timers.
Applicable surge absorber models are the S2-A-O and S1-B-O. Figure 6.5 shows their external
dimensions. Refer to the catalog "Fuji Noise Suppressors (SH310: Japanese edition only)" for details.
The surge absorbers are available from Fuji Electric Technica Co., Ltd.
Chap. 6
6-13
SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
Figure 6.5 Surge Absorber Dimensions
6.4 Selecting Options
6.4.1 Peripheral equipment options
[ 1 ] DC reactors (DCRs)
A DCR is mainly used for power supply normalization and for input power-factor improvement (for
suppressing harmonics).
■ For power supply normalization
-
Use a DCR when the capacity of a power supply transformer exceeds 500 kVA and is 10 times or
more the rated inverter capacity. In this case, the percentage-reactance of the power source
decreases, and harmonic components and their peak levels increase. These factors may break
rectifiers or capacitors in the converter section of inverter, or decrease the capacitance of the
capacitor (which can shorten the inverter's service life).
-
Also use a DCR when there are thyristor-driven loads or when phase-advancing capacitors are
being turned on/off.
-
Use a DCR when the interphase voltage unbalance ratio of the inverter power source exceeds 2%.
Interphase voltage unbalance (%) =
Max. voltage (V) Min. voltage (V)
u 67
3 - phase average voltage (V)
■ For input power-factor improvement (for suppressing harmonics)
Generally a capacitor is used to correct the power factor of the load, however, it cannot be used in a
system that includes an inverter. Using a DCR increases the reactance of inverter's power source so as
to decrease harmonic components on the power source lines and correct the power factor of inverter.
Using a DCR corrects the input power factor to approximately 95%.
x At the time of shipping, a jumper bar is connected across terminals P1 and P (+) on the
terminal block. Remove the jumper bar when connecting a DCR.
x If a DCR is not going to be used, do not remove the jumper bar.
㩷
Figure 6.6 External View of a DCR and Application Example
6-14
6.4 Selecting Options
Table 6.7 DCRs
Power
supply
voltage
Threephase
200 V
Applicable
motor
rating
(kW)
Type
Rated current
(A)
Inductance
(mH)
Coil resistance
(m:)
Generated loss
(W)
0.75
FRN0.75F1„-2† DCR2-0.75
5.0
7.0
123
2.8
1.5
FRN1.5F1„-2†
DCR2-1.5
8.0
4.0
57.5
4.6
2.2
FRN2.2F1„-2†
DCR2-2.2
11
3.0
43
6.7
3.7
FRN3.7F1„-2†
DCR2-3.7
18
1.7
21
8.8
5.5
FRN5.5F1„-2†
DCR2-5.5
25
1.2
16
14
7.5
FRN7.5F1„-2†
DCR2-7.5
34
0.8
9.7
16
11
FRN11F1„-2†
DCR2-11
50
0.6
7.0
27
15
FRN15F1„-2†
DCR2-15
67
0.4
4.3
27
0.35
3.1
29
DCR2-22A
98
0.3
2.7
38
30
FRN30F1„-2†
DCR2-30B
136
0.23
1.1
37
37
FRN37F1„-2†
DCR2-37B
167
0.19
0.82
47
45
FRN45F1„-2†
DCR2-45B
203
0.16
0.62
52
55
FRN55F1„-2†
DCR2-55B
244
0.13
0.79
55
75
FRN75F1„-2†
DCR2-75B
341
0.080
0.46
55
57
90
FRN90F1„-2†
DCR2-90B
410
0.067
0.28
110
FRN110F1„-2†
DCR2-110B
526
0.055
0.22
67
0.75
FRN0.75F1„-4† DCR4-0.75
2.5
30
440
2.5
1.5
FRN1.5F1„-4†
DCR4-1.5
4.0
16
235
4.8
2.2
FRN2.2F1„-4†
DCR4-2.2
5.5
12
172
6.8
3.7
FRN3.7F1„-4†
DCR4-3.7
9.0
7.0
74.5
8.1
5.5
FRN5.5F1„-4†
DCR4-5.5
13
4.0
43
10
7.5
FRN7.5F1„-4†
DCR4-7.5
18
3.5
35.5
15
11
FRN11F1„-4†
DCR4-11
25
2.2
23.2
21
15
FRN15F1„-4†
DCR4-15
34
1.8
18.1
28
FRN18.5F1„-4† DCR4-18.5
41
1.4
12.1
29
22
FRN22F1„-4†
DCR4-22A
49
1.2
10.0
35
30
FRN30F1„-4†
DCR4-30B
71
0.86
4.00
35
37
FRN37F1„-4†
DCR4-37B
88
0.70
2.80
40
45
FRN45F1„-4†
DCR4-45B
107
0.58
1.90
44
55
FRN55F1„-4†
DCR4-55B
131
0.47
1.70
55
75
FRN75F1„-4†
DCR4-75B
178
0.335
1.40
58
90
FRN90F1„-4†
DCR4-90B
214
0.29
1.20
64
110
FRN110F1„-4†
DCR4-110B
261
0.24
0.91
73
132
FRN132F1„-4†
DCR4-132B
313
0.215
0.64
84
160
FRN160F1„-4†
DCR4-160B
380
0.177
0.52
90
200
FRN200F1„-4†
DCR4-200B
475
0.142
0.52
126
220
FRN220F1„-4†
DCR4-220B
524
0.126
0.41
131
280
FRN280F1„-4†
DCR4-280B
649
0.100
0.32
150
315
FRN315F1„-4†
DCR4-315B
739
0.089
0.33
190
355
FRN355F1„-4†
DCR4-355B
833
0.079
0.28
205
400
FRN400F1„-4†
DCR4-400B
938
0.070
0.23
215
450
FRN450F1„-4†
DCR4-450B
1056
0.063
0.23
272
500
FRN500F1„-4†
DCR4-500B
1173
0.057
0.20
292
6-15
SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
81
FRN22F1„-2†
Chap. 6
FRN18.5F1„-2† DCR2-18.5
22
18.5
18.5
Threephase
400 V
DCR
Inverter type
Note
1) Generated losses listed in the above table are approximate values that are calculated according to the
following conditions:
- The power source is 3-phase 200 V/400 V 50 Hz with 0% interphase voltage unbalance ratio.
- The power source capacity uses the larger of either 500 kVA or 10 times the rated capacity of the inverter.
- The motor is a 4-pole standard model at full load (100%).
- An AC reactor (ACR) is not connected.
2) A box („) in the above table replaces S (Standard type), E (EMC filter built-in type), or H (DCR built-in
type) depending on the product specifications.
3) A box (†) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or J depending on the shipping destination.
Figure 6.7 Applying a DC Reactor (DCR)
[ 2 ] AC reactors (ACRs)
Use an ACR when the converter part of the inverter should supply very stable DC power, for example,
in DC link bus operation (shared PN operation). Generally, ACRs are used for correction of voltage
waveform and power factor or for power supply normalization, but not for suppressing harmonic
components in the power lines. For suppressing harmonic components, use a DCR.
An ACR should be also used when the power source is extremely unstable; for example, when the
power source involves an extremely large interphase voltage unbalance.
Figure 6.8 External View of ACR and Application Example
6-16
6.4 Selecting Options
Table 6.8 ACR
Power
supply
voltage
㪫㪿㫉㪼㪼㪄
㫇㪿㪸㫊㪼
㪉㪇㪇㩷㪭
Applicable
motor
rating
(kW)
Type
Rated current Reactance (m:/phase) Coil resistance Generated loss
(A)
(W)
(m:)
50 Hz
60(Hz)
0.75
FRN0.75F1„-2† ACR2-0.75A
5
493
592
12
1.5
FRN1.5F1„-2†
ACR2-1.5A
8
295
354
14
2.2
FRN2.2F1„-2†
ACR2-2.2A
11
213
256
16
3.7
FRN3.7F1„-2†
ACR2-3.7A
17
218
153
23
5.5
FRN5.5F1„-2†
ACR2-5.5A
25
87.7
105
7.5
FRN7.5F1„-2†
ACR2-7.5A
33
65.0
78.0
11
FRN11F1„-2†
ACR2-11A
46
45.5
54.7
37
15
FRN15F1„-2†
ACR2-15A
43
㵪
27
30
59
34.8
41.8
FRN18.5F1„-2† ACR2-18.5A
74
28.6
34.3
51
22
FRN22F1„-2†
ACR2-22A
87
24.0
28.8
57
30
FRN30F1„-2†
37
FRN37F1„-2†
ACR2-37
200
10.8
13.0
㪇㪅㪌
45
FRN45F1„-2†
55
FRN55F1„-2†
㩷㪘㪚㪩㪉㪄㪌㪌
270
㪎㪅㪌㪇
9.00
0.375
75
FRN75F1„-2†
ACR2-75
390
5.45
6.54
0.250
18.5
28.6
40.8
66.1
55.1
FRN90F1„-2†
ACR2-90
450
4.73
5.67
0.198
61.5
FRN110F1„-2†
ACR2-110
500
4.25
5.10
0.180
83.4
0.75
FRN0.75F1„-4† ACR4-0.75A
2.5
1920
2300
10
1.5
FRN1.5F1„-4†
ACR4-1.5A
3.7
1160
1390
11
2.2
FRN2.2F1„-4†
ACR4-2.2A
5.5
851
1020
14
3.7
FRN3.7F1„-4†
ACR4-3.7A
9
512
615
5.5
FRN5.5F1„-4†
ACR4-5.5A
13
349
418
7.5
FRN7.5F1„-4†
ACR4-7.5A
18
256
307
27
11
FRN11F1„-4†
ACR4-11A
24
183
219
40
15
FRN15F1„-4†
ACR4-15A
30
139
167
46
FRN18.5F1„-4† ACR4-18.5A
39
114
137
57
22
FRN22F1„-4†
45
95.8
115
30
FRN30F1„-4†
37
FRN37F1„-4†
45
FRN45F1„-4†
55
FRN55F1„-4†
75
FRN75F1„-4†
ACR4-22A
17
㪄
22
62
ACR4-37
100
㪋㪈㪅㪎
50
2.73
ACR4-55
135
㪊㪇㪅㪏
37
1.61
ACR4-75 *
160
25.8
31
1.16
ACR4-110
250
㪈㪍㪅㪎
20
0.523
ACR4-132
270
20.8
25
0.741
38.9
55.7
50.2
70.7
65.3
90
FRN90F1„-4†
110
FRN110F1„-4†
132
FRN132F1„-4†
160
FRN160F1„-4†
200
FRN200F1„-4† 㩷ACR4-220 *
220
FRN220F1„-4†
280
FRN280F1„-4†
315
FRN315F1„-4† Consult your Fuji Electric representative case by case for these classes of inverters.
355
FRN355F1„-4†
400
FRN400F1„-4†
450
FRN450F1„-4†
500
FRN500F1„-4†
42.2
60.3
119
56.4
561
㪈㪇㪅㪇
12
0.236
90.4
825
6.67
8
0.144
108
107
ACR4-280
䋭
*Cool these reactors using a fan with 3 m/s or more WV (Wind Velocity).
Note
1) Generated losses listed in the above table are approximate values that are calculated according to the
following conditions:
- The power source is 3-phase 200 V/400 V 50 Hz with 0% interphase voltage unbalance ratio.
- The power source capacity uses the larger of either 500 kVA or 10 times the rated capacity of the inverter.
- The motor is a 4-pole standard model at full load (100%).
2) A box („) in the above table replaces S (Standard type), E (EMC filter built-in type), or H (DCR built-in
type) depending on the product specifications.
3) A box (†) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or J depending on the shipping destination.
6-17
SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
90
Chap. 6
47.1
110
18.5
㪫㪿㫉㪼㪼㪄
㫇㪿㪸㫊㪼
㪋㪇㪇㩷㪭
ACR
Inverter type
[ 3 ] Output circuit filters (OFLs)
Insert an OFL in the inverter power output circuit to:
-
-
-
Suppress the voltage fluctuation at the motor power terminals
This protects the motor from insulation damage caused by the application of high voltage surge
currents from the 400 V class of inverters.
Suppress leakage current (due to higher harmonic components) from the inverter output lines
This reduces the leakage current when the motor is connected by long power feed lines. Keep the
length of the power feed line less than 400 m.
Minimize radiation and/or induction noise issued from the inverter output lines
OFLs are effective noise suppression device for long wiring applications such as that used at
plants.
Use an ACR within the allowable carrier frequency range specified by function code F26
(Motor sound (carrier frequency)). Otherwise, the filter will overheat.
Figure 6.9 External View of OFL and Application Example
6-18
6.4 Selecting Options
Table 6.9 OFL (OFL- ***-2/4)
Chap. 6
SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
Note
1) For inverter type of 30 kW (FRN30F1) or above, capacitor(s) of the OFL are to be installed separately.
2) A box („) in the above table replaces S (Standard type), E (EMC filter built-in type), or H (DCR built-in
type) depending on the product specifications.
3) A box (†) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or J depending on the shipping destination.
6-19
Table 6.10 OFL (OFL- ***-4A)
Note
1) For inverter type of 30 kW (FRN30F1) or above, capacitor(s) of the OFL are to be installed separately.
2) The OFL-***-4A models have no restrictions on carrier frequency.
3) A box („) in the above table replaces S (Standard type), E (EMC filter built-in type), or H (DCR built-in
type) depending on the product specifications.
4) A box (†) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or J depending on the shipping destination.
6-20
6.4 Selecting Options
[ 4 ] Ferrite ring reactors for reducing radio noise (ACL)
An ACL is used to reduce radio frequency noise emitted by the inverter.
An ACL suppresses the outflow of high frequency harmonics caused by switching operation for the
power supply lines inside the inverter. Pass the power source (primary) lines together through the
ACL.
If wiring length between the inverter and motor is less than 20 m, insert an ACL to the power source
(primary) lines; if it is more than 20 m, insert it to the power output (secondary) lines of the inverter.
Wire size is determined depending upon the ACL size (I.D.) and installation requirements.
Chap. 6
SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
Figure 6.10 Dimensions of ACL and Application Example
Table 6.11 ACL
Ferrite ring type
Installation requirements for
making 4 turns
Number of
rings
Number of
turns
1
4
2
2
1
4
2
2
4
1
ACL-40B
ACL-74B
Wire size
(mm2)
2.0
3.5
5.5
8
14
8
14
22
38
60
100
150
200
250
325
The installation requirements and wire size listed above are determined for allowing three wires
(3-phase input lines) to pass through the corresponding ferrite ring.
6-21
6.4.2 Options for operation and communications
[ 1 ] External potentiometer for frequency setting
An external potentiometer may be used to set the frequency command. Connect the potentiometer to
control signal terminals [11] to [13] of the inverter as shown in Figure 6.11.
Model: RJ-13 (BA-2 B-characteristics, 1 k:)
Model: WAR3W (3W B-characteristics, 1 k:)
Figure 6.11 External Potentiometer Dimensions and Application Example
6-22
6.4 Selecting Options
[ 2 ] Multi-function keypad
By installing a TP-G1 multi-function keypad directly on a FRENIC-Eco series inverter as a built-in
keypad or connecting those keypad using an optional remote operation extension cable (CB-5S,
CB-3S, or CB-1S, depending on the distance), you can operate the inverter locally or remotely. In
either mode, you can run and stop the motor, monitor the running status, and set up the function code
data.
In addition, you can perform "Data copying": You can read function code data from the FRENIC-Eco,
copy (write) it into another inverter, or verify it.
Chap. 6
The extension cable connects the inverter with the keypad (standard or multi-function) or USB-RS485
converter to enable remote operation of the inverter. The cable is a straight type with RJ-45 jacks and
its length is selectable from 5, 3, and 1 m.
Do not use an off-the-shelf LAN cable for connection of the multi-function keypad.
Table 6.12 Extension Cable Length for Remote Operation
Type
Length (m)
CB-5S
5
CB-3S
3
CB-1S
1
You can use these cable to connect RS485 level converter to FRENIC-Eco inverters with some
limitations described in "RS485 communications port," in Chapter 8, Section 8.4.1 "Terminal
functions."
6-23
SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
[ 3 ] Extension cable for remote operation
[ 4 ] RS485 communications card
The RS485 communications card is exclusively designed for use with the FRENIC-Eco series of
inverters and enables extended RS485 communication in addition to the standard RS485
communication (via the RJ-45 connector for connecting the keypad.)
The main functions include the following:
-
Connecting the inverter to host equipment such as a PC or PLC, which enables the inverter to be
controlled as a slave device.
Operating the inverters by frequency command setting, forward/reverse running/stopping,
coast-to-stop and resetting, etc.
Monitoring the operation status of the inverter, e.g., output frequency, output current and alarm
information, etc.
Setting function code data.
Note that the card does not support any standard/multi-function keypad.
Table 6.13 Transmission Specifications
Item
Communication
protocol
Specifications
SX protocol
(for exclusive use
with FRENIC
Loader)
Modbus RTU
(Conforming to Modicon's
Modbus RTU)
Electrical
specifications
Fuji general-purpose
inverter protocol
EIA RS-485
Number of units
connected
Host: 1 unit, Inverter: 31 units
Transmission rate
2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, and 38400 bps
Synchronization
system
Asynchronous start-stop system
Transmission
method
Maximum length of
communication
network (m)
Half-duplex
500 (including tap-offs for multi-drop connection)
6-24
6.4 Selecting Options
[ 5 ] Relay output card
The relay output card mounted on your FRENIC-Eco series of inverters converts transistor outputs at
[Y1] to [Y3] on the inverter to relay outputs--three pairs of transfer contacts (SPDT).
When the relay output card is mounted, transistor output terminals [Y1] to [Y3] cannot be
used.
„ Terminal assignment
The relay output terminals are assigned as shown below. Basically, the meaning of the relay outputs
follows that of the transistor outputs [Y1] to [Y3], which is determined by their corresponding
function codes.
Table 6.14 Terminal Assignment
Terminal Symbol
[Y1A/Y1B/Y1C]
Relay Output 1
[Y2A/Y2B/Y2C]
Relay Output 2
[Y3A/Y3B/Y3C]
Relay Output 3
When the inverter's control power is OFF, all the B - C contact pairs are short-circuited. If
you are using negative logic to realize fail-safe operation, make sure that this does not cause
any logic fault or confliction.
„ Electrical specifications
Table 6.15 Electrical Specifications
Item
Specification
Contact capacity
250 VAC, 0.3 A (cosI = 0.3) or 48 VDC, 0.5 A (resistive load)
Contact life
200 thousand operations (with ON/OFF intervals of 1 second)
If you anticipate frequent operations (ON/OFF switching) of relays (for example, if you
deliberately use a signal for limiting the inverter's output to control the main current), be sure
to use the transistor signals at terminals [Y1] through [Y3].
Wire properly, referring to the terminal allocation and symbol diagram, the internal block diagram,
and the terminal and wiring specification table shown below.
Table 6.16
Terminal Size &
Recommended
Wire Gauge
Terminal Size &
Recommended Wire Gauge
Terminal Size
M3
Tightening Torque
0.7 N·m
Recommended
Wire Gauge*
0.75 mm2
* A 600 V HIV wire with allowable
Figure 6.12 Terminal
temperature of 75qC is
Allocation and
recommended. An ambient
Symbol
temperature of 50qC is assumed.
Diagram
Figure 6.13 Internal Block Diagram
To prevent noise from causing malfunctioning, separate signal wires for the control circuit
as far apart as possible from those for the main circuits. Also, inside the inverter, bundle and
fix the wires for the control circuit so that they do not come into direct contact with live parts
of the main circuits (for example, the main circuit terminal block).
6-25
SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
Description
These are relay outputs directly linked to transistor outputs
[Y1] to [Y3]. Each relay is excited when its corresponding
signal ([Y1], [Y2], or [Y3]) is ON. When excited, the relays
[Y1A] - [Y1C], [Y2A] - [Y2C], and [Y3A] - [Y3C] are closed,
and ones between [Y1B] - [Y1C], [Y2B] - [Y2C], and [Y3B] [Y3C] are opened. In this manner, the signals corresponding to
function codes E20 to E22 (such as inverter running, frequency
arrival, and motor overload early warning signals) can be
output as contact signals.
Chap. 6
Terminal Name
[ 6 ] Inverter support loader software
FRENIC Loader is an inverter support software which enables the inverter to be operated via the
standard RS485 communications port. The main functions include the following:
-
Easy editing of function code data
Monitoring the operation statuses of the inverter such as I/O monitor and multi-monitor
Operation of inverters on a PC screen (Windows-based only)
Refer to Chapter 5 "RUNNING THOUGH RS485 COMMUNICATION" for details.
6-26
6.4 Selecting Options
6.4.3 Extended installation kit options
[ 1 ] Panel-mount Adapter
This adapter allows you to mount your FRENIC-Eco series of inverters using the mounting holes for
an existing inverter (FRENIC 5000P11S 5.5 kW/15 kW/30 kW).
(The FRENIC5000P11S 7.5 kW/11 kW/18.5 kW/22 kW can be replaced with the FRENIC-Eco series
without this adapter.)
Table 6.17 Panel-mount Adapter
Applicable Inverter Models
Model Name of Adapter and Accompanying Screws
MA-F1-15
4 (M8 u 25) Cross recessed
pan head screws
with captive
washer
MA-F1-30
4 (M8 u 25) Cross recessed
pan head screws
with captive
washer
Note
FRN5.5F1S-2†
FRN5.5F1S-4†
FRN5.5P11S-2
FRN5.5P11S-4
FRN15F1S-2†
FRN15F1S-4†
FRN15P11S-2
FRN15P11S-4
FRN30F1S-2†
FRN30F1S-4†
FRN30P11S-2
FRN30P11S-4
A box (†) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or J depending on the shipping destination.
6-27
SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
4 (M5 u 15) Cross recessed
pan head screws
with captive
washer
FRENIC5000P11S
Chap. 6
MA-F1-5.5
FRENIC-Eco
[ 2 ] Mounting Adapter for External Cooling
This adapter allows you to mount your FRENIC-Eco series of inverters (30 kW or less) on the panel in
such a way that the heat sink assembly may be exposed to the outside. Using this adapter greatly
reduces heat radiated or spread inside your enclosure. (For your inverter of 37 kW or above, remount
its mounting base and mount it on the wall of your enclosure to realize the external cooling capability.
Refer to FRENIC-Eco Instruction Manual (INR-S147-0882-E) Chapter 2 "MOUNTING AND
WIRING OF THE INVERTER" for details,)
Table 6.18 Mounting Adapter for External Cooling
Model Name of Adapter and Accompanying Screws and Nuts
FRN5.5F1S-2†
PB-F1-5.5
2 adapter plates
4 (M5 u 8) Cross recessed head
tapping screws
6 (M6 u 15) Cross recessed pan head
screws with captive
washer
6 (M6)
1 adapter plate
6 (M8 u 25) Cross recessed pan head
screws with captive
washer
4 (M8)
Hexagon nuts
PB-F1-30
1 adapter plate
FRN5.5F1S-4†
Hexagon nuts
PB-F1-15
Note
Applicable Inverter
Models
6 (M8 u 25) Cross recessed pan head
screws with captive
washer
4 (M8)
Hexagon nuts
FRN7.5F1S-2†
FRN11F1S-2†
FRN15F1S-2†
FRN7.5F1S-4†
FRN11F1S-4†
FRN15F1S-4†
FRN18.5F1S-2†
FRN22F1S-2†
FRN30F1S-2†
FRN18.5F1S-4†
FRN22F1S-4†
FRN30F1S-4†
A box (†) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or J depending on the shipping destination.
6-28
6.4 Selecting Options
6.4.4 Meter options
[ 1 ] Frequency meters
Connect a frequency meter to analog signal output terminals [FMA] (+) and [11] (-) of the inverter to
measure the frequency component selected by function code F31. Figure 6.14 shows the dimensions
of the frequency meter and application example.
Model: TRM-45 (10 VDC, 1 mA)
Chap. 6
SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
Model: FM-60 (10 VDC, 1 mA)
Figure 6.14 Frequency Meter Dimensions and Application Example
6-29
Part 4 Selecting Optimal
Inverter Model
Chapter 7 SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND INVERTER CAPACITIES
Chapter 7
SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND
INVERTER CAPACITIES
This chapter provides you with information about the inverter output torque characteristics, selection
procedure, and equations for calculating capacities to help you select optimal motor and inverter models.
This also helps you select braking resistors.
Contents
7.1 Selecting Motors and Inverters ................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.1 Motor output torque characteristics..................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.2 Selection procedure............................................................................................................................. 7-3
7.1.3 Equations for selections ...................................................................................................................... 7-6
7.1.3.1 Load torque during constant speed running ................................................................................ 7-6
7.1.3.2 Acceleration and deceleration time calculation........................................................................... 7-7
7.1.3.3 Heat energy calculation of braking resistor ............................................................................... 7-10
7.1 Selecting Motors and Inverters
7.1 Selecting Motors and Inverters
When selecting a general-purpose inverter, first select a motor and then inverter as follows:
(1) Key point for selecting a motor: Determine what kind of load machine is to be used, calculate its
moment of inertia, and then select the appropriate motor capacity
(2) Key point for selecting an inverter: Taking into account the operation requirements (e.g.,
acceleration time, deceleration time, and frequency in operation) of the load machine to be driven
by the motor selected in (1) above, calculate the acceleration/deceleration/braking torque.
This section describes the selection procedure for (1) and (2) above. First, it explains the output torque
obtained by using the motor driven by the inverter (FRENIC-Eco).
7.1.1
Motor output torque characteristics
Figures 7.1 and 7.2 graph the output torque characteristics of motors at the rated output frequency
individually for 50 Hz and 60 Hz base. The horizontal and vertical axes show the output frequency and
output torque (%), respectively. Curves (a) through (d) depend on the running conditions.
Chap. 7
SELECTING OPTIMAL INVERTER MODEL
Figure 7.1 Output Torque Characteristics (Base frequency: 50 Hz)
7-1
Figure 7.2 Output Torque Characteristics (Base frequency: 60 Hz)
(1)
Continuous allowable driving torque (Curve (a) in Figures 7.1 and 7.2)
Curve (a) shows the torque characteristic that can be obtained in the range of the inverter continuous
rated current, where the motor cooling characteristic is taken into consideration. When the motor runs
at the base frequency of 60 Hz, 100 % output torque can be obtained; at 50 Hz, the output torque is
somewhat lower than that in commercial power, and it further lowers at lower frequencies. The
reduction of the output torque at 50 Hz is due to increased loss by inverter driving, and that at lower
frequencies is mainly due to heat generation caused by the decreased ventilation performance of the
motor cooling fan.
(2)
Maximum driving torque in a short time (Curves (b) and (c) in Figures 7.1 and 7.2)
Curve (b) shows the torque characteristic that can be obtained in the range of the inverter rated current
in a short time (the output torque is 150% for one minute) when quick torque-vector control (the auto
torque boost and slip compensation functions are activated) is enabled. At that time, the motor cooling
characteristics have little effect on the output torque.
Curve (c) shows an example of the torque characteristic when one class higher capacity inverter is
used to increase the short-time maximum torque. In this case, the short-time torque is 20 to 30%
greater than that when the standard capacity inverter is used.
(3)
Starting torque (around the output frequency 0 Hz in Figures 7.1 and 7.2)
The maximum torque in a short time applies to the starting torque as it is.
(4)
Braking torque (Curve (d) in Figures 7.1 and 7.2)
In braking of the motor, kinetic energy is converted to electrical energy and regenerated to the
reservoir capacitor on the DC link bus of the inverter. Only the motor and inverter consume this energy
as their internal losses, so the braking torque is as shown in curve (d).
Note that the torque value in % varies according to the inverter capacity.
7-2
7.1 Selecting Motors and Inverters
7.1.2
Selection procedure
Figure 7.3 shows the general selection procedure for optimal inverters. Items numbered (1) through
(3) are described on the following pages.
You may easily select inverter capacity if there are no restrictions on acceleration and deceleration
times. If "there are any restrictions on acceleration or deceleration time" or "acceleration and
deceleration are frequent," then the selection procedure is more complex than that of the constant
speed running.
Chap. 7
SELECTING OPTIMAL INVERTER MODEL
Figure 7.3 Selection Procedure
7-3
(1)
Calculating the load torque during constant speed running (For detailed calculation,
refer to Section 7.1.3.1)
It is essential to calculate the load torque during constant speed running for all loads.
First calculate the load torque of the motor during constant speed running and then select a
tentative capacity so that the continuous rated torque of the motor during constant speed running
becomes higher than the load torque. To perform capacity selection efficiently, it is necessary to
match the rated speeds (base speeds) of the motor and load. To do this, select an appropriate
reduction-gear (mechanical transmission) ratio and the number of motor poles.
If the acceleration or deceleration time is not restricted, the tentative capacity can apply as a
defined capacity.
(2)
Calculating the acceleration time (For detailed calculation, refer to Section 7.1.3.2)
When there are some specified requirements for the acceleration time, calculate it according to
the following procedure:
1) Calculate the total moment of inertia for the load and motor
Calculate the moment of inertia for the load, referring to Section 7.1.3.2, "Acceleration and
deceleration time calculation." For the motor, refer to the related motor catalogs. Sum them
up.㩷
2)㩷 Calculate the required minimum acceleration torque (See Figure 7.4)㩷
The acceleration torque is the difference between the motor short-time output torque (base
frequency: 60 Hz) explained in Section 7.1.1 (2), "Maximum driving torque in a short time"
and the load torque (WL / KG) during constant speed running calculated in the above (1).
Calculate the required minimum acceleration torque over the whole range of speed.㩷
3) Calculate the acceleration time
Assign the value calculated above to the equation (7.10) in Section 7.1.3.2, "Acceleration
and deceleration time calculation" to calculate the acceleration time. If the calculated
acceleration time is longer than the expected time, select the inverter and motor having one
class higher capacity and calculate it again.
Figure 7.4 Example Study of Required Minimum Acceleration Torque
7-4
7.1 Selecting Motors and Inverters
(3)
Deceleration time (For detailed calculation, refer to Section 7.1.3.2)
To calculate the deceleration time, check the motor deceleration torque characteristics for the
whole range of speed in the same way as for the acceleration time.
1) Calculate the total moment of inertia for the load and motor
Same as for the acceleration time.
2)㩷 Calculate the required minimum deceleration torque (See Figures 7.5 and 7.6.)㩷
Same as for the acceleration time.
3) Calculate the deceleration time
Assign the value calculated above to the equation (7.11) to calculate the deceleration time in
the same way as for the acceleration time. If the calculated deceleration time is longer than
the requested time, select the inverter and motor having one class higher capacity and
calculate it again.
Chap. 7
Example Study of Required
Minimum Deceleration Torque (1)
7-5
Figure 7.6
Example Study of Required
Minimum Deceleration Torque (2)
SELECTING OPTIMAL INVERTER MODEL
Figure 7.5
7.1.3
7.1.3.1
Equations for selections
Load torque during constant speed running
[ 1 ] General equation
The frictional force acting on a horizontally moved load must be calculated. Calculation for driving a
load along a straight line with the motor is shown below.
Where the force to move a load linearly at constant speed X(m/s) is F (N) and the motor speed for
driving this is NM (r/min), the required motor output torque WM (N·m) is as follows:
WM
60 x X
2 S x NM
x
F
KG
( N x m)
(7.1)
where, KG is Reduction-gear efficiency.
When the inverter brakes the motor, efficiency works inversely, so the required motor torque should
be calculated as follows:
WM
60 x X
( N x m)
x FxK
G
2 S x NM
(7.2)
(60·X) / (2S·NM) in the above equation is an equivalent turning radius corresponding to speed Xaround
the motor shaft.
The value F (N) in the above equations depends on the load type.
[ 2 ] Obtaining the required force F
Moving a load horizontally
A simplified mechanical configuration model is assumed as shown in Figure 7.7. If the mass of the
carrier table is W0 (kg), the load is W kg, and the friction coefficient of the ball screw is P, then the
friction force F (N) is expressed as follows, which is equal to a required force for driving the load:
F ( W0 W) x g x P ( N)
(7.3)
where, g is the gravity acceleration (| 9.8 m/s2).
Then, the required output torque around the motor shaft is expressed as follows:
WM
60 x X
2 S x NM
x
( W0 W) x g x P
KG
( N x m)
(7.4)
Figure 7.7 Moving a Load Horizontally
7-6
7.1 Selecting Motors and Inverters
7.1.3.2
Acceleration and deceleration time calculation
When an object whose moment of inertia is J (kg·m2) rotates at the speed N (r/min), it has the
following kinetic energy:
E
J 2S x N 2
x(
) (J)
2
60
(7.5)
To accelerate the above rotational object, the kinetic energy will be increased; to decelerate the object,
the kinetic energy must be discharged. The torque required for acceleration and deceleration can be
expressed as follows:
2S dN
( ) ( N x m)
(7.6)
60 dt
This way, the mechanical moment of inertia is an important element in the acceleration and
deceleration. First, calculation method of moment of inertia is described, then those for acceleration
and deceleration time are explained.
W Jx
[ 1 ] Calculation of moment of inertia
2
¦ ( Wi x ri 2 ) (kg x m )
(7.7)
The following describes equations to calculate moment of inertia having different shaped loads or load
systems.
(1)
Hollow cylinder and solid cylinder
The common shape of a rotating body is hollow cylinder. The moment of inertia around the hollow
cylinder center axis can be calculated as follows, where the outer and inner diameters are D1 and D2 [m]
and total mass is W (kg) in Figure 7.8.
W x (D12 D2 2 )
(kg x m 2 )
8
For a similar shape, a solid cylinder, calculate the moment of inertia as D2 is 0.
J
(7.8)
Figure 7.8 Hollow Cylinder
(2)
For a general rotating body
Table 7.1 lists the calculation equations of moment of inertia of various rotating bodies including the
above cylindrical rotating body.
7-7
SELECTING OPTIMAL INVERTER MODEL
J
Chap. 7
For an object that rotates around the rotation axis, virtually divide the object into small segments and
square the distance from the rotation axis to each segment. Then, sum the squares of the distances and
the masses of the segments to calculate the moment of inertia.㩷
Table 7.1 Moment of Inertia of Various Rotating Bodies
Mass: W (kg)
Shape
Hollow cylinder
Mass: W (kg)
Shape
Moment of inertia:
J (kg·m2)
W
J
S
2
2
x (D1 D 2 ) x L x U
4
Moment of inertia:
J (kg·m2)
W
1
2
2
x W x (D1 D 2 )
8
A xBxLxU
1
2
2
x W x (L A )
12
1
1
2
2
Jb
x W x (L xA )
12
4
1
J c | W x (L0 2 L0 x L x L2 )
3
Ja
Sphere
Cone
W
S
3
xD xU
6
J
1
2
xWx D
10
W
J
Rectangular prism
Square cone (Pyramid,
rectangular base)
Triangular prism
W
W
1
xA xBxLxU
3
J
1
2
2
x W x (A B )
20
W
3
2
xA xLxU
4
1
3
2
2
x W x (L xD )
12
4
1
3
2
2
Jb
x W x (L xD )
3
16
1
Jc | W x (L02 L0 x L x L2 )
3
W
1
xA xBxLxU
3
1
1
2
2
x W x (L xA )
10
4
3
3
Jc | Wx (L02 x L0 x L x L2 )
2
5
Jb
1
2
xW xA
3
W
3
2
xA xLxU
12
S
2
xD xLxU
12
1
3
2
2
x W x (L xD )
10
8
3
3
Jc | Wx (L02 x L0 x L x L2 )
2
5
Jb
J
S
2
xD xLxU
4
Ja
A xBxLxU
1
2
2
x W x (A B )
12
W
W
3
2
xWxD
40
J
J
Tetrahedron with an
equilateral triangular
base
S
2
xD xLxU
12
1
2
xW xA
5
Main metal density (at 20qC) U(kg/m3) Iron: 7860, Copper: 8940, Aluminum: 2700
7-8
7.1 Selecting Motors and Inverters
(3)
For a load running horizontally
Assume a carrier table driven by a motor as shown in Figure 7.7. If the table speed is X (m/s) when the
motor speed is NM (r/min), then an equivalent distance from the rotation axis is equal to 60·X / (2S·NM)
m. The moment of inertia of the table and load to the rotation axis is calculated as follows:
J
(
60 x X 2
) x ( W0 W) (kg x m 2 )
2 S x NM
(7.9)
[ 2 ] Calculation of the acceleration time
Figure 7.9 shows a general load model. Assume that a motor drives a load via a reduction-gear with
efficiency KG. The time required to accelerate this load to a speed of NM (r/min) is calculated with the
following equation:
t ACC
J1 J2 KG
WM WL KG
x
2S x ( NM 0)
(s)
60
(7.10)
where,
Chap. 7
J1: Motor shaft moment of inertia (kg·m2)
J2: Load shaft moment of inertia converted to motor shaft (kg·m2)
WM: Minimum motor output torque in driving mode (N·m)
WL: Maximum load torque converted to motor shaft (N·m)
KG: Reduction-gear efficiency.
Figure 7.9 Load Model Including Reduction-gear
[ 3 ] Calculation of the deceleration time
In a load system shown in Figure 7.9, the time needed to stop the motor rotating at a speed of NM
(r/min) is calculated with the following equation:
t DEC
J1 J 2 x KG
WM WL x K
G
x
2S x ( 0 N M )
(s)
60
(7.11)
where,
J1: Motor shaft moment of inertia (kg·m2)
J2: Load shaft moment of inertia converted to motor shaft (kg·m2)
WM: Minimum motor output torque in deceleration mode (N·m)
WL: Maximum load torque converted to motor shaft (N·m)
KG: Reduction-gear efficiency
In the above equation, generally output torque WM is negative and load torque WL is positive. So,
deceleration time becomes shorter.
7-9
SELECTING OPTIMAL INVERTER MODEL
As clarified in the above equation, the equivalent moment of inertia becomes (J1+J2/KG) by
considering the reduction-gear efficiency.
7.1.3.3
Heat energy calculation of braking resistor
If the inverter brakes the motor, the kinetic energy of mechanical load is converted to electric energy to
be transmitted into the inverter circuit. This regenerative energy is often consumed in so-called
braking resistors as heat. The following explains the braking resistor rating.
[ 1 ] Calculation of regenerative energy
In the inverter operation, one of the regenerative energy sources is the kinetic energy that is generated
at the time an object is moved by an inertial force.
Kinetic energy of a rotational object
When an object with moment of inertia J (kg·m2) rotates at a speed N2 (r/min), its kinetic energy is as
follows:
E
|
J 2 S x N2 2
x(
) (J)
2
60
(7.12)
1
2
x J x N2
(J)
182.4
(7.12)'
When this object is decelerated to a speed N1 (r/min), the output energy is as follows:
E
|
2
2
J ª§ 2S x N 2 · § 2S x N1 · º
x Ǭ
¸ ¨
¸ » (J )
2 ¬«© 60 ¹ © 60 ¹ ¼»
(7.13)
1
2
2
x J x ( N 2 N1 ) ( J )
182.4
(7.13)'
The energy regenerated to the inverter as shown in Figure 7.9 is calculated from the reduction-gear
efficiency KG and motor efficiency WM as follows:
E|
1
182.4
x
J1 J 2 x KG x KM x N2 2 N1 2 (J)
(7.14)
[ 2 ] Calculation of energy able to regenerate per inverter
Energy able to regenerate per inverter is determined by the power source voltage and capacitance of
the DC link bus capacitor(s).
Ec
1
x
Cx V
2
(J)
(7.15)
2
If the value E obtained by the equation (7.14) does not exceed the value Ec obtained here, the inverter
is able to decelerate its load.
7-10
Part 5 Specifications
Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS
Chapter 9 FUNCTION CODES
Chapter 8
SPECIFICATIONS
This chapter describes specifications of the output ratings, control system, and terminal functions for the
FRENIC-Eco series of inverters. It also provides descriptions of the operating and storage environment,
external dimensions, examples of basic connection diagrams, and details of the protective functions.
Contents
8.1 Standard Models ......................................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.1 Three-phase 200 V series .................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.2 Three-phase 400 V series .................................................................................................................... 8-2
8.2 Models Available on Order ......................................................................................................................... 8-4
8.2.1 DCR built-in type................................................................................................................................ 8-4
8.2.1.1 Three-phase 200 V series ............................................................................................................ 8-4
8.2.1.2 Three-phase 400 V series ............................................................................................................ 8-5
8.3 Common Specifications .............................................................................................................................. 8-6
8.4 Terminal Specifications............................................................................................................................... 8-9
8.4.1 Terminal functions .............................................................................................................................. 8-9
8.4.2 Terminal arrangement diagram and screw specifications.................................................................. 8-28
8.4.2.1 Main circuit terminals ............................................................................................................... 8-28
8.4.2.2 Control circuit terminals............................................................................................................ 8-30
8.5 Operating Environment and Storage Environment ................................................................................... 8-31
8.5.1 Operating environment...................................................................................................................... 8-31
8.5.2 Storage environment ......................................................................................................................... 8-32
8.5.2.1 Temporary storage..................................................................................................................... 8-32
8.5.2.2 Long-term storage ..................................................................................................................... 8-32
8.6 External Dimensions ................................................................................................................................. 8-33
8.6.1 Standard models ................................................................................................................................ 8-33
8.6.2 DC reactor ......................................................................................................................................... 8-36
8.6.3 Models available on order ................................................................................................................. 8-37
8.6.3.1 DCR built-in type ...................................................................................................................... 8-37
8.6.4 Standard keypad ................................................................................................................................ 8-40
8.7 Connection Diagrams................................................................................................................................ 8-41
8.7.1 Running the inverter with keypad ..................................................................................................... 8-41
8.7.2 Running the inverter by terminal commands .................................................................................... 8-42
8.7.3 Running the DCR built-in type with terminal commands................................................................. 8-44
8.8 Protective Functions.................................................................................................................................. 8-46
8.1 Standard Models
8.1 Standard Models
8.1.1
Three-phase 200 V series
Chap. 8
SPECIFICATIONS
Note A box (†) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or J depending on the shipping destination.
8-1
8.1.2
Three-phase 400 V series
Note A box (†) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or J depending on the shipping destination.
8-2
8.1 Standard Models
Chap. 8
SPECIFICATIONS
Note A box (†) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or J depending on the shipping destination.
8-3
8.2 Models Available on Order
8.2.1
DCR built-in type
In the European version, the DCR built-in type is provided as a standard model. In other versions, it is
available on order.
8.2.1.1
Three-phase 200 V series
Note A box (†) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or J depending on the shipping destination.
8-4
8.2 Models Available on Order
8.2.1.2
Three-phase 400 V series
Chap. 8
SPECIFICATIONS
Note A box (†) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or J depending on the shipping destination.
8-5
8.3 Common Specifications
8-6
8.3 Common Specifications
Chap. 8
SPECIFICATIONS
8-7
8-8
8.4 Terminal Specifications
8.4 Terminal Specifications
8.4.1
Terminal functions
Main circuit
Classification
Main circuit and analog input terminals
Symbol
Functions
Connect the three-phase input power lines.
U, V, W
Inverter outputs
Connect a three-phase motor.
R0, T0
Auxiliary power
input for the
control circuit
For a backup of the control circuit power supply,
connect AC power lines same as that of the main
power input.
P1, P(+)
DC reactor
connection
Connect a DC reactor (DCR) for improving power
factor (an option for the inverter whose capacity is 55
kW or below).
P(+), N(-)
DC link bus
Connect a DC link bus of other inverter(s). An
optional regenerative converter is also connectable to
these terminals.
R1, T1
Auxiliary power Normally, no need to use these terminals. Use these
input for the fans terminals for an auxiliary power input of the fans in a
power system using a power regenerative PWM
converter (RHC series).
Related
function
codes
Chap. 8
L1/R, L2/S, Main circuit
L3/T
power inputs
SPECIFICATIONS
Grounding for
inverter and
motor
Grounding terminals for the inverter’s chassis (or
case) and motor. Earth one of the terminals and
connect the grounding terminal of the motor. Inverters
provide a pair of grounding terminals that function
equivalently.
[13]
Potentiometer
power supply
Power supply (+10 VDC) for frequency command
potentiometer (Potentiometer: 1 to 5 k:)
Allowable maximum output current: 10 mA
[12]
Voltage input
The frequency is commanded according to the
external analog input voltage.
(Normal
operation)
0 to +10 VDC/0 to 100 %
(Inverse
operation)
+10 to 0 VDC/0 to 100 % (switchable by digital input E01-E05,
signal)
E98, E99
(PID control)
Used for reference signal (PID process command) or
PID feedback signal.
(Auxiliary
frequency
command
source)
Used as additional auxiliary setting to various
frequency command sources.
(Analog input
monitor)
The peripheral analog signal can be displayed on the
keypad. (Displaying coefficient: valid)
G
Analog input
Name
F01, F18,
C30,
C32-C34,
E61
0 to +5 VDC/0 to 100 % or +1 to +5 VDC/0 to 100 %
can be selected by function code setting.
Electric characteristics of terminal [12]
•
Input impedance:
22 k:
•
Allowable maximum input voltage: +15 VDC
(If the input voltage is +10 VDC or over, the inverter assumes it to be
+10 VDC.)
8-9
Classification
Symbol
[C1]
Name
Current input
(Normal
operation)
Analog input
(Inverse
operation)
Functions
Related
function
codes
The frequency is commanded according to the
external analog input current.
F01, F18,
C30,
C37-C39,
4 to 20 mA DC/0 to 100%
E62,
E01-E05,
20 to 4 mA DC/0 to 100 % (switchable by digital input E98, E99
signal)
(PID control)
Used for reference signal (PID process command) or
PID feedback signal.
(Auxiliary
frequency
command)
Used as additional auxiliary setting to various
frequency commands.
(Analog input
monitor)
The peripheral analog signal can be displayed on the
keypad. (Displaying coefficient: valid)
Electric characteristics of terminal [C1]
• Input impedance: 250 :
• Allowable maximum input current:
+30 mA DC
(If the input current exceeds +20 mA
DC, the inverter will limit it at +20
mA DC.)
Figure 8.1 A-D conversion
Analog input
[V2]
Voltage input
The frequency is commanded according to the
external analog input voltage.
(Normal
operation)
0 to +10 VDC/0 to 100 %
(Inverse
operation)
(PID control)
F01, F18,
C30,
C42-C44,
E63
0 to +5 VDC/0 to 100 % or +1 to +5 VDC/0 to 100 % E01-E05,
can be selected by function code setting.
E98, E99
+10 to 0 VDC/0 to 100 % (switched by the terminal
command (IVS))
Used for a reference signal (PID process command) or
PID feedback signal.
8-10
Classification
8.4 Terminal Specifications
Symbol
(For PTC
thermistor)
Functions
Related
function
codes
Connects PTC (Positive Temperature Coefficient)
thermistor for motor protection. Ensure that the slide
switch SW5 on the control circuit PCB is turned to the
PTC position (refer to "Setting up the slide switches"
on page 8-26).
The figure shown below illustrates the internal circuit
diagram where SW5 (switching the input of terminal
[V2] between V2 and PTC) is turned to the PTC
position. For details on SW5, refer to "Setting up the
slide switches" on page 8-26. In this case, you must
change data of the function code H26.
Analog input
[V2]
Name
Used as additional auxiliary setting to various
frequency commands.
(Analog input
monitor)
The peripheral analog signal can be displayed on the
keypad. (Displaying coefficient: valid)
Electric characteristics of terminal [V2]
Input impedance:
22 k:
•
Allowable maximum input voltage: +15 VDC
(If the input voltage is +10 VDC or over, the inverter assumes it to
be +10 VDC.)
•
[11]
Analog
common
Common for analog input signals ([13], [12], [C1],
[V2], and [FMA])
(Isolated from terminals [CM] and [CMY].)
8-11
SPECIFICATIONS
(Auxiliary
frequency
command)
Chap. 8
Figure 8.2 Internal Circuit Diagram (SW5 Selecting
PTC)
Classification
Symbol
Name
-
-
Analog input
-
-
Functions
Related
function
codes
Since low level analog signals are handled, these signals are especially susceptible
to the external noise effects. Route the wiring as short as possible (within 20 m)
and use shielded wires. In principle, ground the shielded sheath of wires; if effects
of external inductive noises are considerable, connection to terminal [11] may be
effective. As shown in Figure 8.3, ground the single end of the shield to enhance
the shielding effect.
Use a twin contact relay for low level signals if the relay is used in the control
circuit. Do not connect the relay's contact to terminal [11].
When the inverter is connected to an external device outputting the analog signal,
a malfunction may be caused by electric noise generated by the inverter. If this
happens, according to the circumstances, connect a ferrite core (a toroidal core or
an equivalent) to the device outputting the analog signal and/or connect a
capacitor having the good cut-off characteristics for high frequency between
control signal wires as shown in Figure 8.4.
Do not apply a voltage of +7.5 VDC or higher to terminal [C1]. Doing so could
damage the internal control circuit.
Figure 8.3 Connection of Shielded Wire
8-12
Figure 8.4 Example of Electric Noise Reduction
8.4 Terminal Specifications
Classification
Digital Input Terminals
Symbol
Related
function
codes
Name
Functions
[X1]
Digital input 1
[X2]
Digital input 2
[X3]
Digital input 3
[X4]
Digital input 4
[X5]
Digital input 5
[FWD]
Run forward
command
[REV]
Run reverse
command
(1) The various signals such as coast-to-stop, alarm
from external equipment, and multistep
frequency commands can be assigned to
terminals [X1] to [X5], [FWD] and [REV] by
setting function codes E01 to E05, E98, and E99.
For details, refer to Chapter 9, Section 9.2
"Overview of Function Codes."
(2) Input mode, i.e. Sink/Source, is changeable by
using the internal slide switch. (Refer to "Setting
up the slide switches" on page 8-26.)
(3) Switches the logic value (1/0) for ON/OFF of the
terminals between [X1] to [X5], [FWD] or
[REV], and [CM]. If the logic value for ON
between [X1] and [CM] is 1 in the normal logic
system, for example, OFF is 1 in the negative
logic system and vice versa.
(4) The negative logic system never applies to the
terminals assigned for (FWD) and (REV).
E01
E02
E03
E04
E05
E98
E99
(Digital input circuit specifications)
Chap. 8
Digital input
SPECIFICATIONS
Figure 8.5 Digital Input Circuit
Item
ON level
Operation
voltage
OFF level
(SINK)
ON level
Operation
voltage
(SOURCE) OFF level
Operation current at ON
(Input voltage is at 0V)
Allowable leakage
current at OFF
Min.
0V
Max.
2V
22 V
27 V
22 V
27 V
0V
2V
2.5 mA
5 mA
-
0.5 mA
[PLC]
PLC signal
power
Connects to PLC output signal power supply.
(Rated voltage: +24 VDC: Allowable range: +22 to
+27 VDC)
This terminal also supplies a power to the circuitry
connected to the transistor output terminals [Y1] to
[Y3]. Refer to "Analog output, pulse output, transistor
output, and relay output terminals" in this Section for
more.
[CM]
Digital
common
Two common terminals for digital input signal
terminals and output terminal [FMP]
These terminals are electrically isolated from the
terminals [11]s and [CMY].
8-13
Classification
Symbol
Name
Functions
Related
function
codes
„ Using a relay contact to turn [X1], [X2], [X3], [X4], [X5], [FWD], or [REV] ON
or OFF
Figure 8.6 shows two examples of a circuit that uses a relay contact to turn control
signal input [X1], [X2], [X3], [X4], [X5], [FWD], or [REV] ON or OFF. In circuit (a),
the slide switch SW1 has been turned to SINK, whereas in circuit (b) it has been turned
to SOURCE.
Note: To configure this kind of circuit, use a highly reliable relay
(Recommended product: Fuji control relay Model HH54PW.)
(a) With the switch turned to SINK
(b) With the switch turned to SOURCE
Digital input
Figure 8.6 Circuit Configuration Using a Relay Contact
„ Using a programmable logic controller (PLC) to turn [X1], [X2], [X3], [X4],
[X5], [FWD], or [REV] ON or OFF
Figure 8.7 shows two examples of a circuit that uses a programmable logic controller
(PLC) to turn control signal input [X1], [X2], [X3], [X4], [X5], [FWD], or [REV] ON
or OFF. In circuit (a), the switch SW1 has been turned to SINK, whereas in circuit (b)
it has been turned to SOURCE.
In circuit (a) below, short-circuiting or opening the transistor's open collector circuit in
the PLC using an external power source turns ON or OFF control signal [X1], [X2],
[X3], [FWD], or [REV]. When using this type of circuit, observe the following:
- Connect the + node of the external power source (which should be isolated from the
PLC's power) to terminal [PLC] of the inverter.
- Do not connect terminal [CM] of the inverter to the common terminal of the PLC.
(a) With the switch turned to SINK
(b) With the switch turned to SOURCE
Figure 8.7 Circuit Configuration Using a PLC
For details about the slide switch setting, refer to "Setting up the slide switches" on page
8-26.)
8-14
8.4 Terminal Specifications
Classification
Commands assigned to digital input terminals
Command
(FWD)
Functions
The motor runs forward.
Related
function
codes
E98, E99
(= 98)
Run forward
command
(FWD) ON:
Run reverse
command
(REV) ON:
(SS1)
Multistep
frequency
command 1
E01-E05,
E98, E99
(= 0,1,2)
(SS2)
Multistep
frequency
command 2
8-step operation can be conducted with ON/OFF
signals at (SS1) to (SS4).
Multistep frequency 0 indicates the frequency set by
the keypad or analog signal.
(SS4)
Multistep
frequency
command 4
(HLD)
3-wire operation
command
Used for 3-wire operation.
(HLD) ON:
The inverter self-holds the
command (FWD) or (REV).
E01-E05,
E98, E99
(= 6)
(REV)
(FWD) OFF:
The motor decelerates and stops.
When the (FWD) and (REV) are simultaneously ON,
the inverter immediately decelerates and stops the
motor. This command can be assigned only to
terminals [FWD] and [REV].
The motor runs reverse.
(REV) OFF:
The motor decelerates and stops.
When (FWD) and (REV) are simultaneously ON, the
inverter immediately decelerates and stops the motor.
This command can be assigned only to terminals
[FWD] and [REV].
The inverter releases self-holding.
The inverter output is stopped E01-E05,
immediately and the motor will E98, E99
(= 7)
coast to stop.
(No alarm signal will be output.)
(BX)
Coast-to-stop
command
(BX) ON:
(RST)
Alarm reset
(RST) ON:
Alarm status is reset.
(ON signal should be held for 10 ms or longer.)
(THR)
(Hz2/Hz1)
C05-C11
= 0.00120.0 Hz
Trip command
(external
thermal failure)
(THR) OFF:
The inverter output is stopped and
the motor coasts to stop.
Frequency
command 2/1
(Hz2/Hz1) ON: Frequency command 2 is effective.
Alarm signal for the alarm code J will be output.
E01-E05,
E98, E99
(= 8)
E01-E05,
E98, E99
(= 9)
E01-E05,
E98, E99
(= 11)
F01 = 0-7
C30 = 0-7
(DCBRK)
DC braking
command
(DCBRK) ON:
Starts DC braking action.
E01-E05,
E98, E99
(= 13)
F20-F22
8-15
SPECIFICATIONS
(HLD) OFF:
E98, E99
(= 98)
Chap. 8
Commands assigned to digital input terminals
Command name
Classification
Commands assigned to digital input terminals
Command
Command name
Functions
Related
function
codes
(SW50)
Switch to
commercial
power (50 Hz)
(SW50) ON:
Starts at 50 Hz.
E01-E05,
E98, E99
(= 15)
(SW60)
Switch to
commercial
power (60 Hz)
(SW60) ON:
Starts at 60 Hz
E01-E05,
E98, E99
(= 16)
(UP)
UP command
(UP) ON:
The output frequency rises while the E01-E05,
E98, E99
circuit across (UP) and CM is
(= 17)
connected.
F01, C30,
J02
(DOWN)
DOWN
command
(DOWN) ON:
The output frequency drops while
the circuit across (DOWN) and CM
is connected.
E01-E05,
E98, E99
(= 18)
F01, C30,
J02
(WE-KP)
(Hz/PID)
Enable editing
of function
code data from
keypad
(WE-KP) ON:
The function code data can be
changed from the keypad.
(Data can be changed when this function is not
allocated.)
E01-E05,
E98, E99
(= 19)
Disable PID
control
(Hz/PID) ON:
E01-E05,
E98, E99
(= 20)
This signal cancels the PID control
and switches to the operation using
the frequency determined by a
multistep frequency command,
keypad input, or analog input.
F00
J01-J06
J10-J19
For details about J01 to J06 data, refer to Chapter 9,
F01 = 0-4
"FUNCTION CODES.
C30 = 0-4
(IVS)
(IL)
Switch between
normal/inverse
operation
Interlock
command
(IVS) ON:
(IL) ON:
8-16
This signal switches the operation
determined by frequency settings or
PID control, between normal and
inverse.
E01-E05,
E98, E99
(= 21)
This signal interlocks the inverter
upon occurrence of a momentary
power failure in order to thoroughly
detect the power failure if an MC is
inserted between the inverter and
motor so that its auxiliary B contact
is driven by commercial/factory
power sources.
Accordingly, this signal helps the
inverter restart smoothly after a
recovery from the power failure.
E01-E05,
E98, E99
(= 22)
C53, J01
F14
Classification
8.4 Terminal Specifications
Command
(LE)
Command name
Enable
communications
link
Functions
(LE) ON:
Related
function
codes
While the circuit across (LE) and
(CM) is short-circuited, the inverter
runs according to commands sent via
the standard or optional RS485 or
field bus (option) communications
port.
E01-E05,
E98, E99
(= 24)
H30 = 3
y99
(U-DI)
Universal DI
(U-DI) ON:
An arbitrary digital input signal is
transmitted to the host equipment.
E01-E05,
E98, E99
(= 25)
(STM)
Select idling
motor sync
mode
(STM) ON:
Starting at the pick-up frequency
becomes valid.
E01-E05,
E98, E99
(= 26)
(STOP)
Forced stop
command
(STOP) ON:
The inverter is forcibly stopped in
the specified deceleration time.
E01-E05,
E98, E99
(= 30)
H56
(PID-RST)
Reset PID
integral and
derivative
components
(PID-RST) ON: PID integration and differentiation
are reset.
E01-E05,
E98, E99
(= 33)
J10-J19
(PID-HLD)
Hold PID
integral
component
(PID-HLD) ON: PID integration is temporarily
stopped.
E01-E05,
E98, E99
(= 34)
J01-J06
J10-J19
(LOC)
Select local
(keypad)
operation
(LOC) ON:
The run commands and frequency
commands given at the keypad
become valid.
E01-E05,
E98, E99
(= 35)
(RE)
Enable to run
command
(RE) ON:
After a run command is input,
operation starts upon activation of
(RE).
E01-E05,
E98, E99
(= 38)
(DWP)
Protect the
motor from a
dew
condensation
(DWP) ON:
A current flows through the motor
E01-E05,
to avoid motor temperature drop
E98, E99
during inverter stoppage so that dew (= 39)
condensation will not occur.
J21, F21,
F22
8-17
SPECIFICATIONS
J01-J06
Chap. 8
Commands assigned to digital input terminals
H17, H09
Classification
Command
Commands assigned to digital input terminals
(ISW50)
(ISW60)
(FR2/FR1)
Command name
Functions
Related
function
codes
Line operation starts according to
the switching sequence built in the
inverter. (For 50 Hz commercial
line)
E01-E05,
E98, E99
(= 40)
Line operation starts according to
the switching sequence built in the
inverter. (For 60 Hz commercial
line)
E01-E05,
E98, E99
(= 41)
(FR2/FR1) ON: The run command source switches
to (FWD2) or (REV2) side.
E01-E05,
E98, E99
(= 87)
Enable the
integrated
sequence to
switch motor
drive source to
commercial
power
(50 Hz)
(ISW50) ON:
Enable the
integrated
sequence to
switch motor
drive source to
commercial
power
(60 Hz)
(ISW60) ON:
Switch the run
command
source 2/1
J22
J22
F02
(FWD2)
Run forward
command 2
(FWD2) ON:
The motor runs forward.
(FWD2) OFF: The motor decelerates and stops.
When (FWD2) and (REV2) are simultaneously ON,
the inverter immediately decelerates and stops the
motor.
E01-E05,
E98, E99
(= 88)
(REV2)
Run reverse
command 2
(REV2) ON:
The motor runs reverse.
(REV2) OFF:
The motor decelerates and stops.
When (FWD2) and (REV2) are simultaneously ON,
the inverter immediately decelerates and stops the
motor.
E01-E05,
E98, E99
(= 89)
8-18
8.4 Terminal Specifications
Classification
Analog output, pulse output, transistor output, and relay output terminals
Symbol
[FMA]
Name
Analog monitor
Functions
The monitor signal for analog DC voltage (0 to +10 F29-F31
V) or analog DC current (+4 to +20 mA) is output.
You can select either one of the output switching the
slide switch SW4 on the control PCB (Refer to
"Setting up the slide switches" on page 8-26.), and
changing data of the function code F29. You can also
select the signal functions following with function
code F31.
㨯 Output frequency
㨯 Output voltage
㨯 Load factor
㨯 PID feedback value
㨯 Universal AO
㨯 Analog output test
㨯 PID output
Analog output
Related
function
codes
㨯 Output current
㨯 Output torque
㨯 Input power
㨯 DC link bus voltage
㨯 Motor output
㨯 PID command
* Input impedance of external device:
Min. 5k: (0 to 10 VDC output)
Input impedance of external device:
Max. 500: (4 to 20 mA DC output)
[11]
Analog common
Two common terminals for analog input and output
signal terminals
These terminals are electrically isolated from
terminals [CM]s and [CMY].
[FMP]
Pulse monitor
You can also select the signal functions following F33-F35
with function code F35.
Pulse output
㨯 Output frequency
㨯 Output voltage
㨯 Load factor
㨯 PID feedback value
㨯 Universal AO
㨯 Analog output test
㨯 PID output
㨯 Output current
㨯 Output torque
㨯 Input power
㨯 DC link bus voltage
㨯 Motor output
㨯 PID command
* Input impedance of the external device: Min. 5k:
* This output is capable to drive up to two meters
with 10k: impedance. (Driven by the average DC
voltage of the output pulse train.)
(Adjustable range of the gain: 0 to 200%)
[CM]
Digital common
Two common terminals for digital input signal
terminals and an output terminal [FMP]
These terminals are electrically isolated from other
common terminals, [11]s and [CMY].
These are the shared terminals with the common
terminal [CM]s of the digital inputs.
8-19
SPECIFICATIONS
* While the terminal is outputting 0 to 10 VDC, it is
capable to drive up to two meters with 10k:
impedance. While outputting the current, to drive
a meter with 500: impedance max. (Adjustable
range of the gain: 0 to 200%)
Chap. 8
* While the terminal is outputting 0 to 10 VDC, an
output less than 0.3 V may become 0.0 V.
Classification
Symbol
Name
[Y1]
Transistor
output 1
[Y2]
Transistor
output 2
[Y3]
Transistor
output 3
Related
function
codes
Functions
(1) Various signals such as inverter running, E20
speed/freq. arrival and overload early warning
can be assigned to any terminals, [Y1] to [Y3] by
setting function code E20, E21 and E22. Refer to E21
Chapter 9, Section 9.2 "Overview of Function
Codes" for details.
E22
(2) Switches the logic value (1/0) for ON/OFF of the
terminals between [Y1] to [Y3] and [CMY]. If the
logic value for ON between [Y1] to [Y3] and
[CMY] is 1 in the normal logic system, for
example, OFF is 1 in the negative logic system
and vice versa.
Transistor output circuit specification
Transistor output
Figure 8.8 Transistor Output Circuit
Item
Operation
voltage
Max.
ON level
3V
OFF level
27 V
Maximum load current
at ON
50 mA
Leakage current at OFF
0.1 mA
Figure 8.9 shows examples of connection between the
control circuit and a PLC.
• Check polarity of the input of the external
equipment or device.
• When connecting a control relay, connect
a surge-absorbing diode across the coil of
the relay.
• When any equipment or device connected
to the transistor output needs to be
supplied with DC power, feed the power
(+24 VDC: allowable range: +22 to +27
VDC, 50 mA max.) through the [PLC]
terminal. Short-circuit between the
terminals [CMY] and [CM] in this case.
[CMY]
Transistor
output common
Common terminal for transistor output signal
terminals
This terminal is electrically isolated from terminals,
[CM]s and [11]s.
8-20
Classification
8.4 Terminal Specifications
Symbol
Name
Functions
Related
function
codes
Transistor output
„ Connecting Programmable Controller (PLC) to Terminal [Y1], [Y2] or [Y3]
Figure 8.9 shows two examples of circuit connection between the transistor output of
the inverter’s control circuit and a PLC. In example (a), the input circuit of the PLC
serves as a sink for the control circuit output, whereas in example (b), it serves as a
source for the output.
(a) PLC serving as Sink
(b) PLC serving as Source
General
purpose relay
output
(1) A general-purpose relay contact output usable as E24
well as the function of the transistor output
terminal [Y1], [Y2] or [Y3].
Contact rating:
250 VAC 0.3 A, cos I = 0.3, 48 VDC, 0.5 A
(2) Switching of the normal/negative logic output is
applicable to the following two contact output
modes: "Active ON" (Terminals [Y5A] and
[Y5C] are closed (excited) if the signal is active.)
and "Active OFF" (Terminals [Y5A] and [Y5C]
are opened (non-excited) if the signal is active
while they are normally closed.).
[30A/B/C]
Alarm relay
output
(for any error)
(1) Outputs a contact signal (SPDT) when a
protective function has been activated to stop the
motor.
Contact rating:
250 VAC, 0.3A, cos I = 0.3, 48 VDC, 0.5A
(2) Any one of output signals assigned to terminals
[Y1] to [Y3] can also be assigned to this relay
contact to use it for signal output.
(3) Switching of the normal/negative logic output is
applicable to the following two contact output
modes: "Terminals [30A] and [30C] are closed
(excited) for ON signal output (Active ON)" or
"Terminals [30B] and [30C] are closed
(non-excited) for ON signal output (Active
OFF)."
8-21
E27
SPECIFICATIONS
[Y5A/C]
Chap. 8
Relay output
Figure 8.9 Connecting PLC to Control Circuit
Classification
Signals assigned to transistor output terminals
Functions
(RUN)
Inverter running
Comes ON when the output frequency is higher than
the starting frequency.
(RUN2)
Inverter output
on
E20-E22,
Comes ON when the inverter runs at the frequency
lower than the starting frequency or when DC braking E24, E27
is in action.
(= 35)
(FAR)
Frequency
arrival
Comes ON when the output frequency arrives the
reference frequency.
(Hysteresis band (fixed): 2.5 Hz)
(FDT)
Signals assigned to transistor output terminals
Related
function
codes
Signal name
Signal
Frequency
detection
Comes ON when the output frequency exceeds the
preset detection level.
This signal goes off when the output frequency drops
below the preset detection level.
E20-E22,
E24, E27
(= 0)
E20-E22,
E24, E27
(= 1)
E20-E22,
E24, E27
(= 2)
E31
(Hysteresis band (fixed): 1.0 Hz)
(LU)
undervoltage
detection
(inverter
stopped)
Comes ON when the inverter stops its output because E20-E22,
of undervoltage while the run command is ON.
E24, E27
(= 3)
(IOL)
Inverter output
limiting (under
current limiting)
Comes ON when the inverter is limiting the current or E20-E22,
is under the anti-regenerative control.
E24, E27
(= 5)
F43, F44
H12, H69
(IPF)
(OL)
Comes ON during auto-restarting operation (after a
Auto-restart
after a recovery recovery from momentary power failure and until
from momentary completion of restart).
power failure
Motor overload
early warning
E20-E22,
E24, E27
(= 6)
F14
Comes ON when the calculated value of the electronic E20-E22,
thermal simulator is higher than the preset alarm level. E24, E27
(= 7)
F10-F12
(RDY)
Inverter
ready-to-run
signal
Comes ON when the inverter becomes ready to run.
(SW88)
Commercial
power/inverter
switching
E20-E22,
Controls the magnetic contactor located at the
commercial power line side, for switching the motor E24, E27
drive source between the commercial power lines and (= 11)
the inverter outputs.
8-22
E20-E22,
E24, E27
(= 10)
Classification
8.4 Terminal Specifications
Functions
Related
function
codes
Signal
Signal name
(SW52-2)
Commercial
power/inverter
switching
Controls the magnetic contactor located at the inverter E20-E22,
output side (secondary side), for switching the motor E24, E27
drive source between the commercial power line and (= 12)
the inverter.
(SW52-1)
Commercial
power/inverter
switching
Controls the magnetic contactor located at the inverter E20-E22,
E24, E27
input side (primary side), for switching the motor
drive source between the commercial power line and (= 13)
the inverter.
(AX)
AX terminal
function
Controls the magnetic contactor located at the inverter E20-E22,
input side (primary side).
E24, E27
(= 15)
(FAN)
Cooling fan
on/off control
Comes ON when the cooling fan is running.
E20-E22,
E24, E27
(= 25)
(TRY)
Retry in
operation
Comes ON when the retry function is activated (H04
z 0).
E20-E22,
E24, E27
(= 26)
H04, H05
Universal DO
Comes ON to command a peripheral apparatus
according to signals sent from the host equipment.
E20-E22,
E24, E27
(= 27)
(OH)
Heat sink
overheat early
warning
Comes ON as a forecast warning before the inverter
trips due to a heat sink overheated.
E20-E22,
E24, E27
(= 28)
(LIFE)
This signal also comes ON if the internal air
circulation DC fan (used in 200V series inverters of
45 kW or above or 400V series inverters of 55 kW or
above) locks.
Service lifetime Outputs alarm signals according to the preset lifetime
level.
alarm
This signal also comes ON if the internal air
circulation DC fan (used in 200V series inverters of
45 kW or above or 400V series inverters of 55 kW or
above) locks.
(REF OFF)
Command loss
detected
Comes ON when a frequency command missing
condition is detected.
E20-E22,
E24, E27
(= 30)
H42, H43,
H98
E20-E22,
E24, E27
(= 33)
E65
(OLP)
Overload
prevention
control
Comes ON during inverter control for avoiding
overload.
E20-E22,
E24, E27
(= 36)
H70
8-23
SPECIFICATIONS
(U-DO)
Chap. 8
Signals assigned to transistor output terminal
H06
Classification
Signal
(ID)
Signal name
Current
detection
Functions
Related
function
codes
Comes ON when a current larger than the preset value E20-E22,
has been detected for the preset timer count.
E24, E27
(= 37)
E34, E35
(PID-ALM) PID alarm
detected
Signals an absolute-value alarm (J11 = 0 to 3) or
deviation-value alarm (J11 = 4 to 7) under PID
control.
E20-E22,
E24, E27
(= 42)
Signals assigned to transistor output terminal
J11 to J13
Comes ON when the PID control is active.
(PID-CTL)
PID control in
operation
(PID-STP)
Motor stopped at Comes ON if operation is stopped due to slow water
flowrate under PID control. (The inverter is stopped
slow flowrate
even if the operation command is issued.)
E20-E22,
E24, E27
(= 43)
E20-E22,
E24, E27
(= 44)
J15 to J17
(U-TL)
Low output
torque detected
Comes ON if the torque value has been below the
preset level for the time elapsed longer than the
specified timer count.
E20-E22,
E24, E27
(= 45)
E80 to
E81
(RMT)
Inverter in
remote
operation
Comes ON when the inverter is in Remote mode.
(AX2)
Run command
activated
Comes ON when the inverter receives a run command E20-E22,
and becomes ready to run.
E24, E27
(= 55)
(THM)
Overheat alarm Comes ON when a temperature alarm condition is
detected by PTC detected by a PTC thermistor in the motor but the
inverter is running the motor instead of issuing J.
E20-E22,
E24, E27
(= 54)
E20-E22,
E24, E27
(= 56)
H26, H27
(ALM)
Alarm relay
output (for any
fault)
Comes ON as a transistor output signal.
8-24
E20-E22,
E24, E27
(= 99)
8.4 Terminal Specifications
Connector
Name
RJ-45
connector
for the
keypad
Standard RJ-45
connector
Communication
Classification
RS485 communications port
Functions
Related
function
codes
(1) Used to connect the inverter with PC or PLC H30,
using RS485 port. The inverter supplies the y01-y10,
power to the keypad through the pins specified y98, y99
below. The extension cable for remote operation
also uses wires connected to these pins for
supplying the keypad power.
(2) Remove the keypad from the standard RJ-45
connector,
and
connect
the
RS485
communications cable to control the inverter
through the PC or PLC (Programmable Logic
Controller). Refer to "Setting up the slide
switches" on page 8-26 for setting of the
terminating resistor.
Chap. 8
* Do not use pins 1, 2, 7, and 8 for using this connector to connect other
equipment since these pins are assigned to power lines for the keypad.
•
Route the wiring of the control terminals as far from the wiring of the main circuit as
possible. Otherwise electric noise may cause malfunctions.
•
Fix the control circuit wires inside the inverter to keep them away from the live parts of the
main circuit (such as the terminal block of the main circuit).
8-25
SPECIFICATIONS
Figure 8.10 RJ-45 Connector and its Pin Assignment*
Setting up the slide switches
Switching the slide switches located on the PCB allows you to customize the operation mode of the
analog output terminals, digital I/O terminals, and communications ports. The locations of those
switches are shown in Figure 8.11.
To access the slide switches, remove the front and terminal block covers so that you can watch the
control PCB. For models of 37 kW or above, open also the keypad enclosure.
Close the control circuit terminal symbol plate since the plate being opened interferes with switching
of some switches. (Refer to the FRENIC-Eco Instruction Manual (INR-SI47-0882-E), Chapter 2,
Section 2.3.8, "Setting up slide switches and handling control circuit terminal symbol plate."
For details on how to remove the front cover, terminal block cover, and keypad enclosure, refer
to the FRENIC-Eco Instruction Manual (INR-SI47-0882-E), Chapter 2, Section 2.3.1,
"Removing and mounting the terminal block (TB) cover and the front cover" and Chapter 1,
Section 1.2, "External View and Terminal Blocks," Figure 1.4.
Table 8.1 lists the function of each slide switch.
Table 8.1 Function of Each Slide Switch
Slide Switch
Function
SW1
Switches the service mode of the digital input terminals between SINK and SOURCE.
To make the digital input terminal [X1] to [X5], [FWD] or [REV] serve as a current
sink, turn SW1 to the SINK position.
To make them serve as a current source, turn SW1 to the SOURCE position.
SW3
Switches the terminating resistor of RS485 communications port on the inverter on and
off.
To connect a keypad to the inverter, turn SW3 to OFF. (Factory default)
If the inverter is connected to the RS485 communications network as a terminating
device, turn SW3 to ON.
SW4
Switches the output mode of the analog output terminal [FMA] between voltage and
current.
When changing this switch setting, also change the data of function code F29.
SW5
SW4
Set data of F29 to:
Voltage output (Factory default)
VO
0
Current output
IO
1
Switches property of the analog input terminal [V2] for V2 or PTC.
When changing this switch setting, also change the data of function code H26.
Analog frequency setting in voltage
(Factory default)
PTC thermistor input
8-26
SW5
Set data of H26 to:
V2
0
PTC
1 or 2
8.4 Terminal Specifications
Figure 8.11 shows the location of slide switches for the input/output terminal configuration.
Switching example
SW1
SINK
SOURCE
SINK
Figure 8.11 Location of the Slide Switches
Chap. 8
SOURCE
SPECIFICATIONS
8-27
8.4.2
Terminal arrangement diagram and screw specifications
8.4.2.1
Main circuit terminals
The table below shows the main circuit screw sizes, tightening torque and terminal arrangements.
Note that the terminal arrangements differ according to the inverter types. Two terminals designed for
grounding shown as the symbol,
in Figures A to I make no distinction between a power supply
source (a primary circuit) and a motor (a secondary circuit).
Table 8.2 Main Circuit Terminal Properties
Power
supply
voltage
Threephase
200 V
Threephase
400 V
Applicable
motor rating
(kW)
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
132
160
200
220
Inverter type
FRN0.75F1„-2†
FRN1.5F1„-2†
FRN2.2F1„-2†
FRN3.7F1„-2†
FRN5.5F1„-2†
FRN7.5F1„-2†
FRN11F1„-2†
FRN15F1„-2†
FRN18.5F1„-2†
FRN22F1„-2†
FRN30F1„-2†
FRN37F1„-2†
FRN45F1„-2†
FRN55F1„-2†
FRN75F1„-2†
FRN0.75F1„-4†
FRN1.5F1„-4†
FRN2.2F1„-4†
FRN3.7F1„-4†
FRN5.5F1„-4†
FRN7.5F1„-4†
FRN11F1„-4†
FRN15F1„-4†
FRN18.5F1„-4†
FRN22F1„-4†
FRN30F1„-4†
FRN37F1„-4†
FRN45F1„-4†
FRN55F1„-4†
FRN75F1„-4†
FRN90F1„-4†
FRN110F1„-4†
FRN132F1„-4†
FRN160F1„-4†
FRN200F1„-4†
FRN220F1„-4†
Terminal
screw size
Tightening Grounding Tightening
screw size
torque
torque
Refer to:
(N·m)
(N·m)
M4
1.8
M4
1.8
M5
3.8
M5
3.8
M6
5.8
M6
5.8
M8
13.5
Figure A
Figure B
Figure C
Figure D
Figure E
M8
13.5
M10
27
Figure G
M4
1.8
M4
1.8
M5
3.8
M5
3.8
M6
5.8
M6
5.8
Figure A
Figure B
Figure C
Figure D
M8
Figure E
13.5
M8
M10
13.5
Figure F
Figure G
27
Figure H
M12
48
M10
27
Figure I
Terminal R0, T0 (Common to all types): Screw size M3.5, Tightening torque 1.2 (N·m)
Terminal R1, T1: Screw size M3.5, Tightening torque 0.9 (N·m) (for the models of 200 V series 45 kW or above, for
400 V series 55 kW or above
Note
1) A box („) in the above table replaces S (Standard type), E (EMC filter built-in type), or H (DCR built-in
type) depending on the product specifications.
2) A box (†) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or J depending on the shipping destination.
8-28
8.4 Terminal Specifications
Chap. 8
SPECIFICATIONS
8-29
8.4.2.2
Control circuit terminals
The control circuit terminal arrangement, screw sizes, and tightening torque are shown below. They
are the same in all FRENIC-Eco series of inverters.
Screw size: M3, Tightening torque: 0.7 Nxm
Recommended wire size: 0.75 to 1.25 mm2
8-30
8.5 Operating Environment and Storage Environment
8.5 Operating Environment and Storage Environment
8.5.1
Operating environment
Install the inverter in an environment that satisfies the requirements listed in Table 8.3.
Table 8.3 Environmental Requirements
Item
Specifications
Site location
Indoors
Ambient temperature
-10 to +50qC (Note 1)
Relative humidity
5 to 95% (No condensation)
Atmosphere
The inverter must not be exposed to dust, direct sunlight, corrosive gases,
flammable gas, oil mist, vapor or water drops.
Pollution level 2 (IEC60664-1) (Note 2)
The atmosphere can contain a small amount of salt.
(0.01 mg/cm2 or less per year)
The inverter must not be subjected to sudden changes in temperature that will
cause condensation to form.
1,000 m max. (Note 3)
Atmospheric pressure
86 to 106 kPa
Vibration
For models of 75 kW or below
(Max. amplitude)
3 mm
2 to less than 9 Hz
(Max. amplitude)
9.8 m/s2
9 to less than 20 Hz
2 m/s2
2 m/s2
20 to less than 55 Hz 1 m/s2
1 m/s2
55 to less than 200
Hz
2 to less than 9 Hz
9 to less than 55 Hz
55 to less than 200 Hz
(Note 1) When inverters are mounted side-by-side without any gap between them (5.5 kW or less), the ambient
temperature should be within the range from -10 to +40qC.
(Note 2) Do not install the inverter in an environment where it may be exposed to cotton waste or moist dust or
dirt which will clog the heat sink in the inverter. If the inverter is to be used in such an environment,
install it in the enclosure of your system or other dustproof containers.
(Note 3) If you use the inverter in an altitude above 1000 m, you should apply an output current derating factor
as listed in Table 8.4.
Table 8.4 Output Current Derating Factor in Relation to Altitude
Altitude
Output current derating factor
1000 m or lower
1.00
1000 to 1500 m
0.97
1500 to 2000 m
0.95
2000 to 2500 m
0.91 (Note 4)
2500 to 3000 m
0.88 (Note 4)
(Note 4) For the location with altitude of 2000 m or higher, insulate interface circuits/lines of the inverter from
the main power source/lines for complying with Low Voltage Directive.
8-31
SPECIFICATIONS
3 mm
For models of 90 kW or above
Chap. 8
Altitude
8.5.2
Storage environment
8.5.2.1
Temporary storage
Store the inverter in an environment that satisfies the requirements listed below.
Table 8.5 Storage and Transport Environments
Item
Storage
temperature
Specifications
-25 to +65qC
*1
Places not subjected to abrupt temperature changes or
condensation or freezing
Relative
humidity
5 to 95% *2
Atmosphere
The inverter must not be exposed to dust, direct sunlight, corrosive or flammable gases,
oil mist, vapor, water drops or vibration. The atmosphere must contain only a low level of
salt. (0.01 mg/cm2 or less per year)
Atmospheric
pressure
86 to 106 kPa (during storage)
70 to 106 kPa (during transportation)
*1 Assuming a comparatively short time storage, e.g., during transportation or the like.
*2 Even if the humidity is within the specified requirements, avoid such places where the inverter will be subjected
to sudden changes in temperature that will cause condensation to form.
Precautions for temporary storage
(1) Do not leave the inverter directly on the floor.
(2) If the environment does not satisfy the specified requirements listed above, wrap the inverter in
an airtight vinyl sheet or the like for storage.
(3) If the inverter is to be stored in a high-humidity environment, put a drying agent (such as silica
gel) in the airtight package described in item (2).
8.5.2.2
Long-term storage
The long-term storage method of the inverter varies largely according to the environment of the
storage site. General storage methods are described below.
(1) The storage site must satisfy the requirements specified for temporary storage.
However, for storage exceeding three months, the ambient temperature range should be within
the range from -10 to 30°C. This is to prevent electrolytic capacitors in the inverter from
deterioration.
(2) The package must be airtight to protect the inverter from moisture. Add a drying agent inside the
package to maintain the relative humidity inside the package within 70%.
(3) If the inverter has been installed to the equipment or control board at construction sites where it
may be subjected to humidity, dust or dirt, then temporarily remove the inverter and store it in the
environment specified in Table 8.5.
Precautions for storage over 1 year
If the inverter has not been powered on for a long time, the property of the electrolytic capacitors may
deteriorate. Power the inverters on once a year and keep the inverters powering on for 30 to 60 minutes.
Do not connect the inverters to the load circuit (secondary side) or run the inverter.
8-32
8.6 External Dimensions
8.6 External Dimensions
8.6.1
Standard models
The diagrams below show external dimensions of the FRENIC-Eco series of inverters according to the
type.
Unit: mm
Threephase
400 V
FRN0.75F1S-2†
FRN1.5F1S-2†
FRN2.2F1S-2†
FRN3.7F1S-2†
FRN5.5F1S-2†
FRN0.75F1S-4†
FRN1.5F1S-4†
FRN2.2F1S-4†
FRN3.7F1S-4†
FRN5.5F1S-4†
SPECIFICATIONS
Threephase
200 V
Type
Chap. 8
Power
supply
voltage
Note A box (†) in the above table replaces
A, C, E, or J depending on the shipping
destination.
8-33
Unit: mm
Power
supply
voltage
Threephase
200 V
Threephase
400 V
Dimensions (mm)
Type
FRN7.5F1S-2†
FRN11F1S-2†
FRN15F1S-2†
FRN18.5F1S-2†
FRN22F1S-2†
FRN30F1S-2†
FRN7.5F1S-4†
FRN11F1S-4†
FRN15F1S-4†
FRN18.5F1S-4†
FRN22F1S-4†
FRN30F1S-4†
W
W1
W2
W3
W4
H
H1
220
196
63.5
46.5
46.5
260
238
D
D1
D2
118.5 96.5
215
250
220
226
196
67
58
58
㧙
㧙
㧙
63.5
46.5
46.5
400
260
378
85
238
130
118.5 96.5
215
250
226
67
58
58
㧙
㧙
㧙
400
378
85
130
Note A box (†) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or J depending on the shipping destination.
8-34
D3
D4
IA
IB
141.7
16
27
34
136.7
21
166.2
2
34
42
㧙
㧙
㧙
㧙
141.7
16
27
34
136.7
21
166.2
2
34
42
㧙
㧙
㧙
㧙
8.6 External Dimensions
Unit: mm
Chap. 8
SPECIFICATIONS
Power
supply
voltage
Threephase
200 V
Threephase
400 V
Dimensions (mm)
Type
FRN37F1S-2†
FRN45F1S-2†
FRN55F1S-2†
FRN75F1S-2†
FRN37F1S-4†
FRN45F1S-4†
FRN55F1S-4†
FRN75F1S-4†
FRN90F1S-4†
FRN110F1S-4†
FRN132F1S-4†
FRN160F1S-4†
FRN200F1S-4†
FRN220F1S-4†
W
W1
W2
320
240
304 310.2
355
275
339 345.2
320
240
W3
W4
8
275
10
304 310.2
8
355
W5
10
339 345.2
H
H1
550
530
615
595
740
720
550
530
615
595
H2
12
12
15
15.5
1000
970
115
D4
IA
155
4
4.5
10
140
4.5
270
10
300
145
315
135
360
180
Note A box (†) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or J depending on the shipping destination.
8-35
D3
155
710
503 509.2 13.5
270
D2
140
115
720
430
D1
255
740
530
D
255
4
6
180
15
8.6.2
DC reactor
Unit: mm
Figure A
Figure B
Dimensions (mm)
Power
supply
voltage
DC reactor
type
Refer to:
FRN37F1S-2†
Three- FRN45F1S-2†
phase
200 V FRN55F1S-2†
DCR2-37C
Inverter type
E
F
G
Female
Female
mounting
terminal
thread
thread size
size
A
B
C
D
Figure A
210 r10
125
101 r2
185
81 r1 50.5 r1
125
M6
M10
DCR2-45C
Figure A
210 r10
125
106 r2
185
86 r1
53 r1
135
M6
M12
DCR2-55C
Figure A
255 r10
145
96 r2
225
76 r1
48 r1
140
M6
M12
FRN75F1S-2†
DCR2-75C
Figure A
255 r10
145
106 r2
225
86 r1
53 r1
145
M6
M12
FRN37F1S-4†
DCR4-37C
Figure B
210 r10
125
101 r2
185
81 r1 50.5 r1
105
M6
M8
FRN45F1S-4†
DCR4-45C
Figure A
210 r10
125
106 r2
185
86 r1
53 r1
120
M6
M8
FRN55F1S-4†
DCR4-55C
Figure A
255 r10
145
96 r2
225
76 r1
48 r1
120
M6
M10
DCR4-75C
Figure A
255 r10
145
106 r2
225
86 r1
53 r1
125
M6
M10
DCR4-90C
FRN75F1S-4†
Three- FRN90F1S-4†
phase
400 V FRN110F1S-4†
Figure A
255 r10
145
116 r2
225
96 r1
58 r1
140
M6
M12
DCR4-110C Figure A
300 r10
155
116 r2
265
90 r2
58 r1
175
M8
M12
FRN132F1S-4†
DCR4-132C Figure A
300 r10
160
126 r4
265
100 r2
63 r2
180
M8
M12
FRN160F1S-4†
DCR4-160C Figure A
350 r10
190
131 r4
310
103 r2 65.5 r2
180
M10
M12
FRN200F1S-4†
DCR4-200C Figure A
350 r10
190
141 r4
310
113 r2 70.5 r2
185
M10
M12
FRN220F1S-4†
DCR4-220C Figure A
350 r10
190
146 r4
310
118 r2
200
M10
M12
Note
1)
2)
73 r2
A DCR is standard for inverters of 75 kW or above, but optional for ones below 75 kW.
A box (†) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or J depending on the shipping destination.
8-36
8.6 External Dimensions
8.6.3
8.6.3.1
Models available on order
DCR built-in type
Unit: mm
Chap. 8
SPECIFICATIONS
Power supply voltage
Inverter type
Three-phase 200 V
FRN5.5F1H-2†
Three-phase 400 V
FRN5.5F1H-4†
Note A box (†) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or
J depending on the shipping destination.
8-37
Unit: mm
Power
supply
voltage
Dimensions (mm)
Inverter type
W
W1
W3
W4
W5
H
H1
220
160
63.5
46.5
46.5
440
415
D
FRN7.5F1H-2†
FRN11F1H-2†
Three- FRN15F1H-2†
phase
200 V FRN18.5F1H-2†
FRN22F1H-2†
260
250
190
66
59
59
600
575
D1
D2
IA
IB
205.5
16
27
34
200.5
21
202
7
34
FRN30F1H-2†
48
FRN7.5F1H-4†
FRN11F1H-4†
Three- FRN15F1H-4†
phase
400 V FRN18.5F1H-4†
FRN22F1H-4†
42
220
160
63.5
46.5
46.5
440
415
260
250
190
66
59
59
600
575
205.5
16
200.5
21
202
7
FRN30F1H-4†
27
34
34
42
48
Note A box (†) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or J depending on the shipping destination.
8-38
8.6 External Dimensions
Unit: mm
Chap. 8
SPECIFICATIONS
Power
supply
voltage
Threephase
200 V
Dimensions (mm)
Inverter type
W
W1
W2
W3
W4
W5
H
H1
H2
H3
FRN37F1H-2† 355.8 336.8 240
82.9
75
100
770
750
220
477 255.4 219.1
850
830
235
542
76.4
78
120
FRN45F1H-2†
FRN55F1H-2† 390.8 371.8 275
FRN75F1H-2†
FRN37F1H-4†
Threephase
400 V
FRN45F1H-4†
FRN55F1H-4†
FRN75F1H-4†
355.8 336.8 240
82.9
75
1000 980
260
667
770
220
477
100
750
D
D1
D2
IA
4
IB
48
48
270.4 231.1
7
64
255.4 219.1
4
48
48
390.8 371.8 275
76.4
78
120
270.4 231.1
850
830
235
542
Note A box (†) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or J depending on the shipping destination.
8-39
7
64
8.6.4
Standard keypad
8-40
8.7 Connection Diagrams
8.7 Connection Diagrams
8.7.1
Running the inverter with keypad
The diagram below shows a basic connection example for running the inverter with the keypad.
Chap. 8
SPECIFICATIONS
(Note 1) When connecting a DC reactor (DCR), first remove the short bar between terminals [P1] and [P+]. A DCR is
standard for inverters of 75 kW or above, but optional for ones below 75 kW. For inverters of 75 kW or above,
be sure to connect a DCR.
(Note 2) To protect wiring, insert a molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) or an earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB)
(with overcurrent protection) of the type recommended for the inverter between the commercial power
supply and the inverter. Do not use a circuit breaker with a capacity exceeding the recommended capacity.
(Note 3) In addition to an MCCB or ELCB, insert, if necessary, a magnetic contactor (MC) of the type recommended
for the inverter to cut off the commercial power supply to the inverter. Furthermore, if the coil of the MC or
solenoid comes into close contact with the inverter, install a surge absorber in parallel.
(Note 4) Connect this pair of wires to terminals [R0] and [T0] if you want the inverter to stay in standby state, with
only its control circuit being active, when the main circuit power supply is open (cut off). Without this pair of
wires connected to these terminals, you can still run the inverter as long as the main wires of the commercial
power supply to the main circuit are properly connected.
(Note 5) Normally no need to be connected. Use these terminals when the inverter is equipped with a high power
factor PWM converter with a regenerative facility.
(Note 6) It is recommended that a 3-phase, 4-wire cable be used for wiring to the motor for reduction of electric noises.
Connect the motor's grounding wire to the inverter's grounding terminal \G.
8-41
8.7.2
Running the inverter by terminal commands
The diagram below shows a basic connection example for running the inverter with terminal
commands.
8-42
8.7 Connection Diagrams
(Note 1)
When connecting a DC reactor (DCR), first remove the short bar between terminals [P1] and [P+]. A DCR is
standard for inverters of 75 kW or above, but optional for those below 75 kW. For inverters of 75 kW or
above, be sure to connect a DCR.
(Note 2)
To protect wiring, insert a molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) or an earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB)
(with overcurrent protection) of the type recommended for the inverter between the commercial power
supply and the inverter. Do not use a circuit breaker with a capacity exceeding the recommended capacity.
(Note 3)
In addition to an MCCB or ELCB, insert, if necessary, a magnetic contactor (MC) of the type recommended
for the inverter to cut off the commercial power supply to the inverter. Furthermore, if the coil of the MC or
solenoid comes into close contact with the inverter, install a surge absorber in parallel.
(Note 4)
Connect this pair of wires to terminals [R0] and [T0] if you want the inverter to stay in standby state, with
only its control circuit being active, when the main circuit power supply is open (cut off). Without this pair
of wires connected to these terminals, you can still run the inverter as long as the main wires of the
commercial power supply to the main circuit are properly connected.
(Note 5)
Normally no need to be connected. Use these terminals when the inverter is equipped with a high power
factor PWM converter with a regenerative facility.
(Note 6)
It is recommended that a 3-phase, 4-wire cable be used for wiring to the motor for reduction of electric
noises. Connect the motor's grounding wire to the inverter's grounding terminal \G.
(Note 7)
You can set the frequency command source either electronically by supplying a DC voltage signal (within
the range of 0 to 10 V, 0 to 5 V, or 1 to 5 V, depending on the model) between terminals [12] and [11], or
manually by connecting a frequency command potentiometer to terminals [13], [12], and [11].
(Note 8)
For the wiring of the control circuit, use shielded or twisted wires. When using shielded wires, connect the
shields to earth. To prevent malfunction due to noise, keep the control circuit wires as far away as possible
from the main circuit wires (recommended distance: 10 cm or longer), and never put them in the same wire
duct. Where a control circuit wire needs to cross a main circuit wire, route them so that they meet at right
angles.
Chap. 8
SPECIFICATIONS
8-43
8.7.3
Running the DCR built-in type with terminal commands
The diagram below shows a basic connection example for running the DC reactor (DCR) built-in type
with terminal commands.
8-44
8.7 Connection Diagrams
(Note 1)
To protect wiring, insert a molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) or an earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB)
(with overcurrent protection) of the type recommended for the inverter between the commercial power
supply and the inverter. Do not use a circuit breaker with a capacity exceeding the recommended capacity.
(Note 2)
In addition to an MCCB or ELCB, insert, if necessary, a magnetic contactor (MC) of the type recommended
for the inverter to cut off the commercial power supply to the inverter. Furthermore, if the coil of the MC or
solenoid comes into close contact with the inverter, install a surge absorber in parallel.
(Note 3)
Connect this pair of wires to terminals [R0] and [T0] if you want the inverter to stay in standby state, with
only its control circuit being active, when the main circuit power supply is open (cut off). Without this pair
of wires connected to these terminals, you can still run the inverter as long as the main wires of the
commercial power supply to the main circuit are properly connected.
(Note 4)
Normally no need to be connected. Use these terminals when the inverter is equipped with a high power
factor PWM converter with a regenerative facility.
(Note 5)
It is recommended that a 3-phase, 4-wire cable be used for wiring to the motor for reduction of electric
noises. Connect the motor's grounding wire to the inverter's grounding terminal \G.
(Note 6)
You can set the frequency command source either electronically by supplying a DC voltage signal (within
the range of 0 to 10 V, 0 to 5 V, or 1 to 5 V, depending on the model) between terminals [12] and [11], or
manually by connecting a frequency command potentiometer to terminals [13], [12], and [11].
(Note 7)
For the wiring of the control circuit, use shielded or twisted wires. When using shielded wires, connect the
shields to earth. To prevent malfunction due to noise, keep the control circuit wires as far away as possible
from the main circuit wires (recommended distance: 10 cm or longer), and never put them in the same wire
duct. Where a control circuit wire needs to cross a main circuit wire, route them so that they meet at right
angles.
Chap. 8
SPECIFICATIONS
8-45
8.8 Protective Functions
The table below lists the name of the protective functions, description, alarm codes on the LED
monitor, presence of alarm output at terminals [30A/B/C], and related function codes. If an alarm code
appears on the LED monitor, remove the cause of activation of the alarm function referring to the
FRENIC-Eco Instruction Manual (INR-SI47-0882-E), Chapter 6, "TROUBLESHOOTING."
Name
Alarm
Alarm
codes on
output
LED
[30A/B/C]
monitor
Description
Overcurrent
protection
Stops the inverter output to protect the
inverter from an overcurrent resulting
from overload.
Short-circuit
protection
Stops the inverter output to protect the
inverter from overcurrent due to a
short-circuiting in the output circuit.
Ground fault
protection
Stops the inverter output to protect the
inverter from overcurrent due to a
ground fault in the output circuit. This
protection is effective only during
startup of the inverter. If you turn ON
the inverter without removing the
ground fault, this protection may not
work. (Applicable to inverters of 75
kW or below (3-phase 200 V) or 220
kW or below (3-phase 400 V))
During
acceleration
E
During
deceleration
E
During
running at
constant speed
E
Upon detection of zero-phase current in
the output power, this function stops
the inverter output to protect the
inverter from overcurrent due to a
ground fault in the output circuit.
(Applicable to inverters of 90 kW or
above (3-phase 200 V) or 280 kW or
above (3-phase 400 V))
Overvoltage
protection
Undervoltage
protection
GH
Yes
Yes
The inverter stops the inverter output
upon detection of an overvoltage
condition (400 VDC for 3-phase 200V,
800 VDC for 3-phase 400V series) in
the DC link bus.
During
acceleration
W
During
deceleration
W
This protection is not assured if
extremely large AC line voltage is
applied inadvertently.
During
running at
constant speed
(Stopped)
W
Stops the inverter output when the DC link bus voltage
drops below the undervoltage level (200 VDC for
3-phase 200V, 400 VDC for 3-phase 400 V series).
Yes
NW
Yes*1
Related
function
codes
—
F14
However, if data "3, 4, or 5" is selected for F14, no alarm
is output even if the DC link bus voltage drops.
"—": Not applicable
*1 This alarm on [30A/B/C] should be ignored depending upon the function code setting.
8-46
8.8 Protective Functions
Name
Description
Input phase loss
protection
Detects input phase loss, stopping the inverter output.
This function prevents the inverter from undergoing
heavy stress that may be caused by input phase loss or
inter-phase voltage unbalance and may damage the
inverter.
LED
monitor
displays
Alarm
output
[30A/B/C]
Related
function
codes
NKP
Yes
H98
If connected load is light or a DC reactor is connected to
the inverter, this function will not detect input phase loss
if any.
Output phase
loss protection
Detects breaks in inverter output wiring at the start of
running and during running, stopping the inverter output.
RN
Yes
Overheat
protection
- Stops the inverter output upon detecting excess heat
sink temperature in case of cooling fan failure or
overload.
J
Yes
Stops the inverter output upon detecting an excessively
high ambient temperature inside the inverter caused by a
failure or an overload condition of the cooling fan.
J
Yes
Overload
protection
Stops the inverter output if the Insulated Gate Bipolar
Transistor (IGBT) internal temperature calculated from
the output current and temperature of inside the inverter
is over the preset value.
NW
Yes
—
External alarm
input
Places the inverter in alarm-stop state upon receiving
digital input signal (THR).
J
Yes
E01-E05
E98, E99
Blown fuse
Upon detection of a fuse blown in the inverter’s main
circuit, this function stops the inverter output.
(Applicable to 90 kW or above (for both 3-phase 200 V
and 3-phase 400 V))
(HWU
Yes
-
Abnormal
condition in
charger circuit
Upon detection of an abnormal condition in the charger
circuit inside the inverter, this function stops the inverter
output. (Applicable to 45 kW or above (3-phase 200 V)
or 55 kW or above (3-phase 400 V))
RDH
Yes
-
Electronic
thermal
overheat
simulator
In the following cases, the inverter stops running the
motor to protect the motor in accordance with the
electronic thermal overheat simulator setting.
N
Yes
F10
H43
* The operation level and thermal time constant can be
set by F11 and F12.
F11, F12
"—": Not applicable
8-47
SPECIFICATIONS
- Protects general-purpose motors over the entire
frequency range (F10 = 1.)
- Protects inverter motors over the entire frequency
range (F0 = 2.)
Chap. 8
Motor protection
- Detects a failure of the internal air circulation DC fan
and alarm-stops the inverter
(For models of 45 kW or above in 200 V series, 55 kW
or above in 400 V series)
Alarm
output
[30A/B/C]
Related
function
codes
J
Yes
H26, H27
—
—
E34, E35
—
—
H12
—
Yes
E20, E27
E01-E05
E98, E99
The inverter checks memory data after power-on and
when the data is written. If a memory error is detected,
the inverter stops.
GT
Yes
—
The inverter stops by detecting a communications error
Keypad
communications between the inverter and the keypad during operation
using the standard keypad or the multi-function keypad
error detection
(optional).
GT
Yes
F02
CPU error
detection
GT
Yes
—
Upon detection of an error in the communication between
Option
communications the inverter and an optional card, stops the inverter
output.
error detection
GT
—
—
Option error
detection
When an option card has detected an error, this function
stops the inverter output.
GT
—
—
Operation error
detection
STOP
key
priority
Pressing the
key on the keypad forces the
inverter to decelerate and stop the motor even
if the inverter is running by any run commands
given via the terminals or communications
(link operation). After the motor stops, the
inverter issues alarm GT.
GT
Yes
H96
Motor protection
LED
monitor
displays
Name
Description
PTC
thermistor
A PTC thermistor input stops the inverter output for
motor protection.
Connect a PTC thermistor between terminals [V2] and
[11] and set the function codes and slide switch on the
control PCB accordingly.
Overload
Outputs a preliminary alarm at a preset level before the
early warning motor is stopped by the electronic thermal function for
the purpose of protecting the motor.
Stall prevention
Operates when instantaneous overcurrent limiting is
active.
- Instantaneous overcurrent limiting:
Operates if the inverter's output current exceeds the
instantaneous overcurrent limit level, avoiding tripping
of the inverter (during constant speed operation or during
acceleration).
Alarm relay
output
(for any fault)
- The inverter outputs a relay contact signal when the
inverter issues an alarm and stops the inverter output.
< Alarm reset >
The alarm stop state is reset by pressing the
the digital input signal (RST).
key or by
< Saving the alarm history and detailed data >
The information on the previous 4 alarms can be saved
and displayed.
Memory error
detection
If the inverter detects a CPU error or LSI error caused by
noise or some other factors, this function stops the
inverter.
"—": Not applicable
8-48
8.8 Protective Functions
Name
Description
LED
monitor
displays
Alarm
output
[30A/B/C]
Related
function
codes
GT
Yes
H96
Tuning error
detection
During tuning of motor parameters, the tuning has failed
or has aborted, or an abnormal condition has been
detected in the tuning result, the inverter stops its
output.
GT
Yes
P04
RS485
communications
error detection
When the inverter is connected to a communications
network via the RS485 port designed for the standard
keypad, detecting a communications error stops the
inverter output and displays an error code GT.
GT
Yes
—
Data save error
during undervoltage
If the data could not be saved during activation of the
undervoltage protection function, the inverter displays
the alarm code.
GTH
Yes
—
RS485
communications
error detection
(optional)
When the inverter is connected to a communications
network via an optional RS485 communications card,
detecting a communications error stops the inverter
output and displays an error code GTR .
GTR
Yes
—
LSI error
detection
(Power PCB)
When an error occurred in the LSI on the power printed
circuit board, this function stops the inverter.
(Applicable to: 200 V series 45 kW or above, and 400 V
series 55 kW or above)
GTJ
Yes
—
Retry
When the inverter has stopped because of a trip, this
function allows the inverter to automatically reset itself
and restart. (You can specify the number of retries and
the latency between stop and reset.)
—
—
H04, H05
Surge protection Protects the inverter against surge voltages which might
appear between one of the power lines for the main
circuit and the ground.
—
—
—
Command loss
detected
Upon detecting a loss of a frequency command (because
of a broken wire, etc.), this function issues an alarm and
continues the inverter operation at the preset reference
frequency (specified as a ratio to the frequency just
before the detection).
—
—
E65
Protection
against
instantaneous
power failure
Upon detecting an instantaneous power failure lasting
more than 15 msec, this function stops the inverter
output.
—-
—
F14
Overload
prevention
control
In the event of overheating of the heat sink or an
overload condition (alarm code: J or NW ), the
output frequency of the inverter is reduced to keep the
inverter from tripping.
If restart after instantaneous power failure is selected,
this function invokes a restart process when power has
been restored within a predetermined period.
H13-H16
—
—
H70
"—": Not applicable
8-49
SPECIFICATIONS
The inverter prohibits any run operations and
Start
displays GT on the 7-segment LED
check
function monitor if any run command is present when:
- Powering up
- An alarm is released (the
key is turned
ON or an alarm reset (RST) is input.)
- "Enable communications link (LE)" has
been activated and the run command is
active in the linked source.
Chap. 8
Operation error
detection
Chapter 9
FUNCTION CODES
This chapter contains overview lists of seven groups of function codes available for the FRENIC-Eco series
of inverters and details of each function code.
Contents
9.1 Function Code Tables.................................................................................................................................. 9-1
9.2 Overview of Function Codes .................................................................................................................... 9-19
9.2.1 F codes (Fundamental functions) ...................................................................................................... 9-19
9.2.2 E codes (Extension terminal functions)............................................................................................. 9-48
9.2.3 C codes (Control functions of frequency) ......................................................................................... 9-87
9.2.4 P codes (Motor parameters) .............................................................................................................. 9-91
9.2.5 H codes (High performance functions) ............................................................................................. 9-94
9.2.6 J codes (Application functions)....................................................................................................... 9-119
9.2.7 y codes (Link functions).................................................................................................................. 9-130
9.1 Function Code Tables
9.1 Function Code Tables
Function codes enable the FRENIC-Eco series of inverters to be set up to match your system
requirements.
Each function code consists of a 3-letter alphanumeric string. The first letter is an alphabet that
identifies its group and the following two letters are numerals that identify each individual code in the
group. The function codes are classified into eight groups: Fundamental Functions (F codes),
Extension Terminal Functions (E codes), Control Functions of Frequency (C codes), Motor
Parameters (P codes), High Performance Functions (H codes), Application Functions (J codes), Link
Function (y codes) and. Option Function (o codes) To determine the property of each function code,
set data to the function code.
This manual does not contain the descriptions of Option Function (o codes). For Option Function (o
codes), refer to the instruction manual for each option.
The following descriptions supplement those given in the function code tables on page 9-3 and
subsequent pages.
„ Changing, validating, and saving function code data when the inverter is running
Function codes are indicated by the following based on whether they can be changed or not when the
inverter is running:
Validating and saving function code data
Y*
Possible
If the data of the codes marked with Y* is changed with
keys, the change will immediately take effect;
and
however, the change is not saved into the inverter's memory.
key. If you press the
key
To save the change, press the
key to exit the current state, then the
without pressing the
changed data will be discarded and the previous data will take
effect for the inverter operation.
Y
Possible
Even if the data of the codes marked with Y is changed with
and
keys, the change will not take effect. Pressing the
key will make the change take effect and save it into the
inverter's memory.
N
Impossible
—
„ Copying data
A standard keypad is capable of copying of the function code data stored in the inverter's memory into
the keypad's memory (refer to Menu #7 "Data copying" in Programming mode). With this feature, you
can easily transfer the data saved in a source inverter to other destination inverters.
If the specifications of the source and destination inverters differ, some code data may not be copied to
ensure safe operation of your power system. Therefore, you need to set up the uncopied code data
individually as necessary. Whether data will be copied or not is detailed with the following symbols in
the "Data copying" column of the function code tables given below.
Y: Will be copied unconditionally.
Y1: Will not be copied if the rated capacity differs from the source inverter.
Y2: Will not be copied if the rated input voltage differs from the source inverter.
N: Will not be copied. (The function code marked with "N" is not subject to the Verify operation,
either.)
It is recommended that you set up those function codes which are not subject to the Copy operation
individually using Menu #1 "Data setting" as necessary.
For details of how to set up or edit function codes, refer to Chapter 3 "OPERATION USING
THE KEYPAD."
If you are using the multi-function keypad (option), refer to the Multi-function Keypad
Instruction Manual (INR-SI47-0890-E) for details.
9-1
FUNCTION CODES
Change when running
Chap. 9
Notation
„ Using negative logic for programmable I/O terminals
The negative logic signaling system can be used for the digital input and output terminals by setting
the function code data specifying the properties for those terminals. Negative logic refers to inverted
ON/OFF (logical value 1 (true)/0 (false)) state of input or output signal. An ON-active signal (the
function takes effect if the terminal is short-circuited.) in the normal logic system is functionally
equivalent to OFF-active signal (the function takes effect if the terminal is opened.) in the negative
logic system. An ON-active signal can be switched to OFF-active signal, and vice verse, with the
function code data setting.
To set the negative logic system for an I/O signal terminal, enter data of 1000s (by adding 1000 to the
data for the normal logic) in the corresponding function code and then press the
key.
For example, if a coast-to-stop command (BX: data = 7) is assigned to any one of digital input
terminals [X1] to [X5] by setting any of function codes E01 through E05, then turning (BX) on will
make the motor coast to a stop. Similarly, if the coast-to-stop command (BX: data = 1007) is assigned,
turning (BX) off will make the motor coast to a stop.
9-2
9.1 Function Code Tables
The following tables list the function codes available for the FRENIC-Eco series of inverters
F codes: Fundamental Functions
Chap. 9
FUNCTION CODES
The
shaded function codes are applicable to the quick setup.
9-3
(F code continued)
The
shaded function codes are applicable to the quick setup.
*1 When you make settings from the keypad, the incremental unit is restricted by the number of digits that the LED monitor can
display.
(Example) If the setting range is from -200.00 to 200.00, the incremental unit is:
"1" for -200 to -100, "0.1" for -99.9 to -10.0 and for 100.0 to 200.0, and "0.01" for -9.99 to -0.01 and for 0.00 to 99.99.
*2 If the carrier frequency is set at 1 kHz or below, estimate the maximum motor output torque at 80% or less of the rated motor
torque.
9-4
9.1 Function Code Tables
(F code continued)
Chap. 9
FUNCTION CODES
9-5
E codes: Extension Terminal Functions
9-6
9.1 Function Code Tables
(E code continued)
Chap. 9
FUNCTION CODES
9-7
(E code continued)
The
shaded function codes are applicable to the quick setup.
*1 When you make settings from the keypad, the incremental unit is restricted by the number of digits that the LED monitor can
display.
(Example) If the setting range is from -200.00 to 200.00, the incremental unit is:
"1" for -200 to -100, "0.1" for -99.9 to -10.0 and for 100.0 to 200.0, and "0.01" for -9.99 to -0.01 and for 0.00 to 99.99.
*3 LCD monitor settings are applicable only to the inverter equipped with a multi-function keypad.
*4 Factory default setting varies depending on the shipping destination, that is, "1" for Asian countries and "0" for Japan.
9-8
9.1 Function Code Tables
(E code continued)
Chap. 9
*1 When you make settings from the keypad, the incremental unit is restricted by the number of digits that the LED monitor can
display.
(Example) If the setting range is from -200.00 to 200.00, the incremental unit is:
"1" for -200 to -100, "0.1" for -99.9 to -10.0 and for 100.0 to 200.0, and "0.01" for -9.99 to -0.01 and for 0.00 to 99.99.
FUNCTION CODES
9-9
(E code continued)
9-10
9.1 Function Code Tables
C codes: Control Functions of Frequency
Chap. 9
FUNCTION CODES
*1 When you make settings from the keypad, the incremental unit is restricted by the number of digits that the LED monitor can
display.
(Example) If the setting range is from -200.00 to 200.00, the incremental unit is:
"1" for -200 to -100, "0.1" for -99.9 to -10.0 and for 100.0 to 200.0, and "0.01" for -9.99 to -0.01 and for 0.00 to 99.99.
9-11
P codes: Motor Parameters
The
shaded function codes are applicable to the quick setup.
9-12
9.1 Function Code Tables
H codes: High Performance Functions
Chap. 9
FUNCTION CODES
9-13
(H code continued)
9-14
9.1 Function Code Tables
(H code continued)
Chap. 9
FUNCTION CODES
*1 When you make settings from the keypad, the incremental unit is restricted by the number of digits that the LED monitor can
display.
(Example) If the setting range is from -200.00 to 200.00, the incremental unit is:
"1" for -200 to -100, "0.1" for -99.9 to -10.0 and for 100.0 to 200.0, and "0.01" for -9.99 to -0.01 and for 0.00 to 99.99.
*2 The H86 through H91 are displayed, but they are reserved for particular manufacturers. Unless otherwise specified, do not
access these function codes.
*3 Select 0.10 for models of 45 kW or above (200 V series) and 55 kW or above (400 V series), 0.20 for models of 37 kW or
below (200 V series) and 45 kW or below (400 V series).
*4 Select 2 for models of 45 kW or above (200 V series) and 55 kW or above (400 V series), 0 for models of 37 kW or below
(200 V series) and 45 kW or below (400 V series).
9-15
J codes: Application Functions
*1 When you make settings from the keypad, the incremental unit is restricted by the number of digits that the LED monitor can
display.
(Example) If the setting range is from -200.00 to 200.00, the incremental unit is:
"1" for -200 to -100, "0.1" for -99.9 to -10.0 and for 100.0 to 200.0, and "0.01" for -9.99 to -0.01 and for 0.00 to 99.99.
9-16
9.1 Function Code Tables
y codes: Link Functions
Chap. 9
FUNCTION CODES
9-17
(y code continued)
9-18
9.2 Details of Function Codes
9.2 Overview of Function Codes
This section provides a detailed description of the function codes available for the FRENIC-Eco series
of inverters. In each code group, its function codes are arranged in an ascending order of the
identifying numbers for ease of access. Note that function codes closely related each other for the
implementation of an inverter's operation are detailed in the description of the function code having
the youngest identifying number. Those related function codes are indicated in the title bar as shown
below.
F01
9.2.1
F00
Frequency Command 1
Refer to C30.
F codes (Fundamental functions)
Data Protection
F00 specifies whether function code data is to be protected from being accidentally changed
by keypad operation.
Data for F00
Function
0
Disable the data protection function, allowing you to change all function code
data.
1
Enable the data protection function, allowing you to change only the data for
function code F00. You cannot change any other function code data.
Frequency Command 1
Refer to C30.
F01 selects the source of the reference frequency 1 (F01) or reference frequency 2 (C30) for
specifying the output frequency of the inverter (motor's rotation speed).
Data for
F01, C30
Function
0
/
keys on the standard or multi-function keypad. (Refer to
Enable
Chapter 3 "OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD.")
1
Enable the voltage input to terminal [12] (0 to 10 VDC, maximum frequency
obtained at 10 VDC).
2
Enable the current input to terminal [C1] (4 to 20 mA DC, maximum
frequency obtained at 20 mA DC).
3
Enable the sum of voltage and current inputs to terminals [12] and [C1]. See
the two items listed above for the setting range and the value required for
maximum frequencies.
Note: If the sum exceeds the maximum frequency (F03), the maximum
frequency will apply.
5
Enable the voltage input to terminal [V2] (0 to 10 VDC, maximum frequency
obtained at 10 VDC).
Enable (UP) and (DOWN) commands assigned to the digital input terminals.
Assign (UP) command (data = 17) and (DOWN) command (data = 18) to the
digital input terminals [X1] to [X5].
7
9-19
FUNCTION CODES
F01
Chap. 9
If data protection is enabled (F00 = 1), the
/
key operation to change data is disabled so
that no function code data except F00 data can be changed from the keypad. To change F00
+
(from 0 to 1) or
+
(from 1 to 0) keys is required.
data, simultaneous keying of
Even when F00 = 1, function code data can be changed via the communications
link.
For similar purposes, (WE-KP), a signal enabling editing of function code data
from the keypad is provided as a terminal command for digital input terminals. For
details, refer to function codes E01 to E05, E98 and E99.
Certain source settings (e.g., communications link and multistep frequency) have
priority over the one specified by F01. For details, refer to the block diagram in
Chapter 4, Section 4.2 "Drive Frequency Command Generator."
• You can modify the reference frequency anywhere you choose using the gain
and bias settings, to these analog inputs (voltages entered via terminals [12] and
[V2]; the current entered via terminal [C1]). For details, refer to function code
F18.
• You can enable the noise reduction filter that applies to the analog input
(voltages entered via terminals [12] and [V2]; the current entered via terminal
[C1]). For details, refer to function codes C33, C38 and C43 (Terminal [12], [C1]
and [V2] (Analog input) (Filter time constant)).
• Using the terminal command (Hz2/Hz1) assigned to one of the digital input
terminals switches between frequency commands 1 and 2. For details, refer to
function codes E01 to E05, E98 and E99.
• You can modify the reference frequency specified by frequency command 1
(F01) by using the selection (C53) and switching (IVS) of normal/inverse
operation. For details, refer to the description of "Switch Normal/Inverse
Operation (IVS)" in function codes E01 to E05.
F02
Run Command
F02 selects the source issuing a run command for running the motor.
Data for F02
0
Run Command
Description
Keypad
On standard keypad
Enables the
/
keys on the keypad to start and
stop the motor. The direction of rotation is
determined by the commands given at terminals
[FWD] and [REV].
On multi-function keypad
Enables
/
/
keys to run (forward and
reverse) and stop the motor.
(There is no need to specify a rotation direction
command.)
1
External signal
Enables the external signals given at terminals
[FWD] and [REV] to run the motor.
2
Keypad
(Forward rotation)
Enables only forward rotation. You cannot run the
motor in the reverse direction. There is no need to
specify the direction of rotation.
On standard keypad
Enables
/
keys to run and stop the motor.
On multi-function keypad
Enables
/
keys to run and stop the motor.
Disables the
key.
3
Keypad
(Reverse rotation)
Enables only reverse rotation. You cannot run the
motor in the forward direction. There is no need to
specify the direction of rotation.
On standard keypad
Enables
/
keys to run and stop the motor.
On multi-function keypad
Enables
/
keys to run and stop the motor.
key.
Disables the
When function code F02 = 0 or 1, the run forward command (FWD) and the run
reverse command (REV) must be assigned to terminals [FWD] and [REV],
respectively.
9-20
9.2 Details of Function Codes
In addition to the run command (F02) described, there are several other sources available
with priority over F02: Remote/Local switching, Communications link, Run forward
command 2 (FWD2), and Run reverse command 2 (REV2). For details, refer to the block
diagram in Chapter 4, Section 4.3 "Drive Command Generator."
The table below shows relationship between the keying and run commands in running per
standard keypad (F02 = 0, rotation direction is defined by the digital inputs).
Keying on the Keypad
key
Digital inputs
key
(FWD)
(REV)
Results
(Final command)
㧙
ON
㧙
㧙
Stop
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Stop
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Run forward
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
Run reverse
ON
OFF
ON
ON
Stop
• Digital input commands (FWD) and (REV) are valid for specifying the motor
rotation direction, and the commands (FWD2) and (REV2) are invalid.
• If you have assigned the (FWD) or (REV) function to the [FWD] or [REV]
terminal, you cannot change the setting of function code F02 while the terminals
[FWD] and [CM]* or the terminals [REV] and [CM]* are short-circuited.
When "Local" is selected in Remote/Local switching, the operation of the keypad concerning
run commands varies with the setting of F02. The operation also varies between the standard
keypad and the multi-function keypad. For details, refer to "■ Remote and local modes" in
Chapter 3, Section 3.2.3.
F03
Maximum Frequency
F03 specifies the maximum frequency at which the motor can run. Specifying the frequency
out of the range rated for the equipment driven by the inverter may cause damage or a
dangerous situation. Set a maximum frequency appropriate for the equipment.
- Data setting range: 25.0 to 120.0 (Hz)
The inverter can easily accept high-speed operation. When changing the speed setting,
carefully check the specifications of motors or equipment beforehand.
Otherwise injuries could occur.
Modifying F03 data to apply a higher output frequency requires also changing F15
data specifying frequency limiter (high).
9-21
FUNCTION CODES
*[CM] replaces with [PLC] for SOURCE mode.
Chap. 9
• If you have specified the external signal (F02 = 1) as the run command and have
assigned commands other than the (FWD) or (REV) command to the [FWD] or
[REV] terminal, caution should be exercised in changing the settings. Because, if
under this condition you assign the (FWD) or (REV) function to the [FWD] or
[REV] terminal while the terminals [FWD] and [CM]* or the terminals [REV]
and [CM]* are short-circuited, the motor would start running.
F04
Base Frequency
Refer to H50.
F05
Rated Voltage at Base Frequency
Refer to H51.
These function codes specify the base frequency and the voltage at the base frequency
essentially required for running the motor properly. If combined with the related function
codes H50 and H51, these function codes may profile the non-linear V/f pattern by specifying
increase or decrease in voltage at any point on the V/f pattern.
The following description includes setups required for the non-linear V/f pattern.
At high frequencies, the motor impedance may increase, resulting in an insufficient output
voltage and a decrease in output torque. This feature is used to increase the voltage at high
frequencies to prevent this problem from happening. Note, however, that you cannot increase
the output voltage beyond the voltage of the inverter’s input power.
„ Base Frequency (F04)㩷
Set the rated frequency printed on the nameplate labeled on the motor.
- Data setting range: 25.0 to 120.0 (Hz)
„ Rated Voltage at Base Frequency (F05)㩷
Set 0 or the rated voltage printed on the nameplate labeled on the motor.
Data for F05
Function
0
Output a voltage in proportion to input voltage. (The AVR is disabled. AVR:
Automatic Voltage Regulator)
80 to 240 (V)
Output a voltage AVR-controlled for 200 V series
160 to 500 (V) Output a voltage AVR-controlled for 400 V series
- If 0 is set, the rated voltage at base frequency is determined by the power source of the
inverter. The output voltage will vary in line with any variance in input voltage.
- If the data is set to anything other than 0, the inverter automatically keeps the output voltage
constant in line with the setting. When any of the automatic torque boost settings,
automatic energy saving or slip compensation is active, the voltage settings should be equal
to the rated voltage of the motor.
„ Non-linear V/f Pattern for Frequency (H50)
Set the frequency component at an arbitrary point of the non-linear V/f pattern.
- Data setting range: 0.0 to 120.0 Hz
(Setting 0.0 to H50 disables the non-linear V/f pattern operation.)
9-22
9.2 Details of Function Codes
„ Non-linear V/f Pattern for Voltage (H51)
Sets the voltage component at an arbitrary point of the non-linear V/f pattern.
Data for H51
Function
0 to 240 (V)
Output the voltage AVR-controlled for 200 V series
0 to 500 (V)
Output the voltage AVR-controlled for 400 V series
If the rated voltage at base frequency (F05) is set to 0, settings of function codes
H50 and H51 will be ignored.
If the auto torque boost (F37) is enabled, H50 and H51 will be ignored.
Factory settings:
For models of 22 kW or below the non-linear V/f is disabled (H50 = 0, H51 = 0.)
For models of 30 kW or above it is enabled, that is, (H50 = 5 Hz, H51 = 20 V), for
the 200 V series, (H50 = 5 Hz, H51 = 40 V) for 400 V series.
The factory default varies depending on the inverter's rated capacity and rated input voltage.
See the table below.
Function code
Name
Rated input voltage*
Rated capacity
(kW)
200 V series
400 V series
5.5 to 75
50.0 Hz
50.0 Hz
F05
Rated Voltage
(at base frequency)
5.5 to 75
200 V
400 V
H50
Non-linear V/f Pattern
(Frequency)
30 or below
0 Hz
0 Hz
37 or above
5.0 Hz
5.0 Hz
Non-linear V/f Pattern
(Voltage)
30 or below
0 Hz
0 Hz
37 or above
20 V
40 V
H51
*For Japanese models
9-23
FUNCTION CODES
Base Frequency
Chap. 9
F04
Example:
„ Normal (linear) V/f pattern
„ V/f Pattern with Non-linear Point below the Base Frequency
„ V/f Pattern with Non-linear Point above the Base Frequency
9-24
9.2 Details of Function Codes
F07
Acceleration Time 1
F08
Deceleration Time 1
F07 specifies the acceleration time, the length of time the frequency increases from 0 Hz to
the maximum frequency. F08 specifies the deceleration time, the length of time the frequency
decreases from the maximum frequency down to 0 Hz.
- Data setting range: 0.00 to 3600 (sec.)
• If you choose S-curve acceleration/deceleration or curvilinear acceleration/
deceleration in Acceleration/Deceleration Pattern (H07), the actual
acceleration/deceleration times are longer than the specified times. Refer to the
descriptions of H07 for details.
Torque Boost
Refer to F37.
F37 specifies V/f pattern, torque boost type, and auto energy saving operation for optimizing
the operation in accordance with the characteristics of the load. F09 specifies the type of
torque boost in order to provide sufficient starting torque.
Data for F37
V/f pattern
0
For
non-linear
torque load
1
2
3
Auto-energy
saving
For linear
torque load
For
non-linear
torque load
General-purpose fans and
pumps
Torque boost
specified by
F09
Auto torque
boost
Pumps require high starting
torque*1
Pumps require high start
torque (A motor may be
over-excited at no load.)
Auto-torque
boost
Enabled
For linear
torque load
Applicable load
General purpose fans and
pumps
Torque boost
specified by
F09
Disabled
4
5
Torque boost
Pumps require high start
torque*1
Pumps require high start
torque (A motor may be
over-excited at no load.)
*1 If a required (load torque + acceleration toque) is more than 50% of the constant torque, it is
recommended to apply the linear V/f pattern (factory default).
9-25
FUNCTION CODES
F09
Chap. 9
• If you specify an improperly long acceleration/deceleration time, the current
limiting function or the automatic deceleration function (regenerative bypass
function) may be activated, resulting in an actual acceleration/deceleration time
longer than the specified one.
Factory default setting varies depending on the inverter's rated capacity. See Table below.
Rated capacity (kW)
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30 or above
Factory default
3.4
2.7
2.1
1.6
1.3
1.1
0
FRENIC-Eco is a series of inverters exclusively designed for fans and pumps
whose torque loads are characterized by a term of variable torque load that is a
torque load increasing proportional to square of the load speed. FRENIC-Eco
cannot drive any constant torque load even if you select a linear V/f pattern. If you
attempt to drive a constant-torque load with a FRENIC-Eco inverter, the inverter’s
current limit function may be activated or an insufficient torque situation may
result, and you would need to reduce the inverter output. For details, contact your
Fuji Electric representative.
„ V/f characteristics
The FRENIC-Eco series of inverters offers a variety of V/f patterns and torque boosts, which
include V/f patterns suitable for non-linear torque load such as general fans and pumps or for
special pump load requiring high start torque. Two types of torque boost are available:
manual and automatic.
Non-linear torque characteristics (F37 = 0)
Linear torque characteristics (F37 = 1
When the non-linear torque load characteristics is selected in function code F37 (=
0 or 3), the output voltage may be low and insufficient voltage output may result in
less output torque of the motor at a low frequency zone, depending on some motor
itself and load characteristics. In such a case, it is recommended to increase the
output voltage at the low frequency zone using the non-linear V/f pattern.
Recommended value: H50 = 1/10 of the base frequency
H51 = 1/10 of the voltage at base frequency
9-26
9.2 Details of Function Codes
„ Torque boost
• Manual torque boost (F09)
In torque boost using F09, constant voltage is added to the basic V/f pattern, regardless of the
load, to give the output voltage. To secure a sufficient start torque, manually adjust the output
voltage to optimally match the motor and its load by using F09. Select an appropriate level
that guarantees smooth start-up and yet does not cause over-excitation with no or light load.
Torque boost per F09 ensures high driving stability since the output voltage remains constant
regardless of the load fluctuation.
Specify the data for function code F09 in percentage to the Rated Voltage at Base Frequency
(F05). At factory shipment, F09 is preset to a level that ensures some 50% of start torque.
Specifying a high torque boost level will generate a high torque, but may cause
overcurrent due to over-excitation at no load. If you continue to drive the motor, it
may overheat. To avoid such a situation, adjust torque boost to an appropriate level.
When the non-linear V/f pattern and the torque boost are used together, the torque
boost takes effect below the frequency on the non-linear V/f pattern’s point.
Chap. 9
This function automatically optimizes the output voltage to fit the motor with its load. Under
light load, automatic torque boost decreases the output voltage to prevent the motor from
over-excitation. Under heavy load, it increases the output voltage to increase output torque of
the motor.
• Since this function relies also on the characteristics of the motor, set the base
frequency (F04), the rated voltage at base frequency (F05), and other pertinent
motor parameters (P01 though P03 and P06 though P99) in line with the motor
capacity and characteristics, or else perform auto tuning per P04.
• When a special motor is driven or the load does not have sufficient rigidity, the
maximum torque might decrease or the motor operation might become unstable.
In such cases, do not use automatic torque boost but choose manual torque boost
per F09 (F37 = 0 or 1).
9-27
FUNCTION CODES
„ Automatic torque boost
„ Auto energy saving operation
This feature automatically controls the supply voltage to the motor to minimize the total
power consumption of motor and inverter. (Note that this feature may not be effective
depending upon the motor or load characteristics. Check the advantage of energy saving
before actually apply this feature to your power system.).
The inverter enables this feature only upon constant speed operation. During acceleration and
deceleration, the inverter will run with manual torque boost (F09) or automatic torque boost,
depending on data of the function code F37. If auto energy saving operation is enabled, the
response to a change in motor speed may be slow. Do not use this feature for a system that
requires quick acceleration and deceleration.
• Use auto energy saving only where the base frequency is 60 Hz or lower. If the
base frequency is set at 60 Hz or higher, you may get little or no energy saving
advantage. The auto energy saving operation is designed for use with the
frequency lower than the base frequency. If the frequency becomes higher than
the base frequency, the auto energy saving operation will be invalid.
• Since this function relies also on the characteristics of the motor, set the base
frequency (F04), the rated voltage at base frequency (F05), and other pertinent
motor parameters (P01 through P03 and P06 through P99) in line with the motor
capacity and characteristics, or else perform auto tuning per P04.
F10
Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor (Select motor
characteristics)
F11
Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor (Overload detection level)
F12
Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor (Thermal time constant)
F10 through F12 specify the thermal characteristics of the motor for its electronic thermal
overload protection that is used to detect overload conditions of the motor inside the inverter.
F10 selects the motor cooling mechanism to specify its characteristics, F11 specifies the
overload detection current, and F12 specifies the thermal time constant.
Thermal characteristics of the motor specified by F10 and F12 are also used for the
overload early warning. Even if you need only the overload early warning, set these
characteristics data to these function codes. To disable the electronic thermal motor
overload protection, set data of F11 to "0.00."
„ Select motor characteristics (F10)㩷
F10 selects the cooling mechanism of the motor--built-in cooling fan or externally powered
forced-ventilation fan.
Data for F10
Function
1
For general-purpose motors with built-in self-cooling fan
(The cooling effect will decrease in low frequency operation.)
2
For inverter-driven motors or high-speed motors with forced-ventilation fan
(The cooling effect will be kept constant regardless of the output frequency.)
9-28
9.2 Details of Function Codes
The figure below shows operating characteristics of the electronic thermal overload
protection when F10 = 1. The characteristic factors 1 through 3 as well as their
corresponding switching frequencies f2 and f3 vary with the characteristics of the motor. The
tables below lists the factors of the motor selected by P99 (Motor Selection).
Cooling characteristics of motor equipped with a self-cooling fan
Applicable motor rating and characteristic factors when P99 (Motor selection) = 0 or 4
Thermal
time
constant W
(Factory
default)
Characteristic
Output current Switching frequency for
for setting the motor characteristic factor
factor (%)
thermal time
constant
f2
f3
D1
D2
D3
(Imax)
0.4, 0.75
85
100
85
85
100
6 Hz
90
95
100
7 Hz
85
85
100
5 Hz
92
100
100
54
85
95
51
95
95
53
85
90
1.5 to 3.7
5.5 to 11
5 min
5 Hz
Rated
current
u 150%
15
18.5, 22
30 to 45
55 to 90
Base
frequency
u 33%
10 min
110 or above
Base
frequency
u 83%
Applicable motor rating and characteristic factors when P99 (Motor selection) = 1 or 3
Applicable
motor rating
(kW)
Thermal
time
constant W
(Factory
default)
0.2 to 22
5 min
Rated current
u 150%
30 to 45
55 to 90
Output current
for setting the
thermal time
constant
(Imax)
10 min
110 or
above
9-29
Switching frequency for
motor characteristic factor
f2
Base
frequency
u 33%
Characteristic
factor (%)
f3
D1
D2
D3
Base
frequency
u 33%
69
90
90
54
85
95
51
95
95
53
85
90
Base
frequency
u 83%
FUNCTION CODES
75
7 Hz
Chap. 9
Applicable
motor rating
(kW)
„ Overload detection level (F11)
F11 specifies the level at which an overload condition is to be recognized by the electronic
thermal overload protection.
- Data setting range: 1 to 135% of the rated current (allowable continuous drive current) of
the inverter
In general, set F11 to the rated current of motor when driven at the base frequency (i.e. 1.0 to
1.1 multiple of the rated current of motor (P03)). To disable the electronic thermal overload
protection, set F11 to 0.00 (Disable).
„ Thermal time constant (F12)㩷
F12 specifies the thermal time constant of the motor. The time constant is the time until the
electronic thermal overload protection detects the motor overload while the current of 150%
of the overload detection level set up by F11 has flown. The thermal constants of most
general-purpose motors including Fuji motors are set at about 5 minutes for capacities of 22
kW or below or about 10 minutes for capacities of 30 kW or above as default setting at
factory shipment.
- Data setting range: 0.5 to 75.0 (minutes), (in increments of 0.1 minute)
(Example) When function code F12 is set at "5.0" (5 minutes)
As shown below, the electronic thermal overload protection is activated to detect an alarm
condition (alarm code N) when the output current of 150% of the rated current flows for
5 minutes; 120% of the operating level for about 12.5 minutes.
The actual operating time when the motor overload alarm is issued tends to be shorter than the
specified value as the time period from when the output current starts exceeding the rated
current (100 %) until the current reaches the 150 % of the operating level.
Example of Operating Characteristics
9-30
9.2 Details of Function Codes
F14
Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure (Mode selection)
Refer to H13, H14, H15, H16, H92 and H93.
F14 specifies the action to be taken by the inverter such as trip and restart in the event of a
momentary power failure.
„ Restart after a momentary power failure (Mode selection) (F14)
Description
1
No restart after a
power failure
(Trip
immediately)
As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the
undervoltage detection level upon a momentary power
failure, the output of the inverter is shut down, with
undervoltage alarm NW issued, and the motor enters a
coast-to-stop state.
2
No restart after a
momentary
power failure
(Trip after
recovery of
power)
As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the
undervoltage detection level upon a momentary power
failure, the output of the inverter is shut down, the motor
enters a coast-to-stop state, but no undervoltage alarm NW
issued.
When power is restored, an undervoltage alarm NW is
issued, while the motor remains in coast-to-stop state.
3
Restart after a
momentary
power failure
(Continuous
running)
When the DC link bus voltage drops below the continuous
running level upon a momentary power failure, continuous
running control is invoked. Continuous running control
regenerates kinetic energy from the load’s moment of
inertia, slowing down the motor and prolongs the running
time. When an undervoltage condition is detected due to a
lack of energy to be regenerated, the output frequency at
that time is saved, the output of the inverter is shut down,
and the motor enters a coast-to-stop state.
When power is restored, if a run command has been input,
restart begins at the reference frequency saved during the
power failure processing. This setting is ideal for fan
applications with a large moment of inertia.
4
Restart after a
momentary
power failure
(Restart at the
frequency at
which the power
failure occurred)
As soon as the voltage of the DC link bus drops below the
undervoltage detection level upon a momentary power
failure, the output frequency at the time is saved, the output
of the inverter is shut down, and the motor enters a
coast-to-stop state.
When power is restored, if a run command has been input
restart begins at the reference frequency saved during the
power failure processing. This setting is ideal for
applications with a moment of inertia large enough not to
slow down the motor quickly, such as fans, even after the
motor enters a coast-to-stop state upon occurrence of a
momentary power failure.
5
Restart after a
momentary
power failure
(restart at the
starting
frequency)
After a momentary power failure, when power is restored
and then a run command is input, restart will begin at the
starting frequency commanded by function code F23.
This setting is ideal for heavy load applications such as
pumps, having a small moment of inertia, in which the
motor speed quickly goes down to zero as soon as it enters
a coast-to-stop state upon occurrence of a momentary
power failure.
If you enable the "restart mode after a momentary power failure" (Function code F14 = 3, 4, or
5), the inverter automatically restarts the motor running when the power is recovered. Design
the machinery or equipment so that human safety is ensured after restarting.
Otherwise an accident could occur.
9-31
FUNCTION CODES
Mode
Chap. 9
Data for F14
„ Restart after a recovery from momentary power failure (Basic operation)
The inverter recognizes a momentary power failure upon detecting the condition that DC link
bus voltage goes below the undervoltage level, while the inverter in running. If the load of the
motor is light and the duration of the momentary power failure is extremely short, the voltage
drop may not be great enough for a momentary power failure to be recognized, and the motor
may continue to run uninterrupted.
Upon recognizing a momentary power failure, the inverter enters the restart mode (after a
recovery from momentary power failure) and prepares for restart. When power is recovered,
the inverter goes through an initial charging stage and enters the ready-to-run state. When a
momentary power failure occurs, the power supply voltage for external circuits such as relay
sequence circuits may also drop, the run command may be turned off. In consideration of
such a situation, the inverter waits 2 seconds for input of a run command after the inverter
enters ready-to-run state. If a run command is received within 2 seconds, the inverter begins
the restart processing in accordance with the data of F14 (Mode selection). If no run
command has been received within 2-second wait period, the restart mode (after a recovery
from momentary power failure) will be canceled, and the inverter needs to be started again
from the ordinary starting frequency. Therefore, ensure that a run command is entered within
2 seconds after a recovery of power, or install a mechanical latch relay.
In case the run commands are entered via a standard keypad, the above operation is also
necessary for the mode (F02 = 0) in which the direction of rotation is determined by the
terminal command, (FWD) or (REV). In the modes where the direction of rotation is fixed
(F02 = 2 or 3), the direction of rotation is retained inside the inverter, and the restart will
begin as soon as the inverter enters the ready-to-run state.
9-32
9.2 Details of Function Codes
When the power is recovered, the inverter will wait 2 seconds for input of a run
command. However, if the allowable momentary power failure time (H16) elapses
after the power failure was recognized, even within the 2 seconds, the waiting time
for a run command is canceled. The inverter will start operation in the normal
stating sequence.
If a coast-to-stop command (BX) is entered during the power failure, the inverter
gets out of the restart mode and enters the normal running mode. If a run command
is entered with power supply applied, the inverter will start from the normal starting
frequency.
The inverter recognizes a momentary power failure by detecting an undervoltage
condition whereby the voltage of the DC link bus goes below the lower limit. In a
configuration where a magnetic contactor is installed on the output side of the
inverter, the inverter may fail to recognize a momentary power failure because the
momentary power failure shuts down the operating power of the magnetic
contactor, causing the contactor circuit to open. When the contactor circuit is open,
the inverter is cut off from the motor and load, and the voltage drop in the DC link
bus is not great enough to be recognized as a power failure. In such an event, restart
after a recovery from momentary power failure does not work properly as designed.
To solve this, connect the interlock command (IL) line to the auxiliary contact of
the magnetic contactor, so that a momentary power failure can sure be detected.
Chap. 9
During a momentary power failure the motor slows down. After power has been recovered,
the inverter is restarted at the frequency just before the momentary power failure. Then, the
current limiting function works and the output frequency of the inverter automatically
decreases. When synchronization is established between the output frequency and the
rotation of the motor, the motor accelerates up to the original frequency. Refer to the figure
below. In this case, to make the motor synchronize, the instantaneous overcurrent limiting
must be enabled (H12 = 1).
FUNCTION CODES
9-33
„ Restart mode after momentary power failure
(Allowable momentary power failure time) (H16)
Specifies the maximum allowable duration (0.0 to 30.0 seconds) from a momentary power
failure (undervoltage) occurrence until the inverter is to be restarted. Specify the maximum
length of time that can be tolerated in terms of the machine system and facility during which
the motor can coast to stop. Restart will take place if power is recovered within the specified
duration. When the power is not recovered within the duration, the inverter recognizes the
power has been shut down so that the inverter will make a start upon power recovery (normal
starting).
If you set the allowable momentary power failure time (H16) to "999," restart will take place
until the DC link bus voltage drops down to the allowable voltage for restart after a
momentary power failure as shown below. If the DC link bus voltage goes below the
allowable voltage for restart after momentary power failure, the inverter recognizes the power
has been shut down so that the inverter will make a start upon power recovery (normal
starting).
Allowable voltage for restart after momentary power failure
Power supply
Allowable voltage for restart after momentary power failure
200 V series
50 V
400 V series
100 V
The time required from when the DC link bus voltage drops from the threshold of
undervoltage until the voltage reaches the allowable voltage for restart after
momentary power failure, greatly varies depending on inverter capacity, the
presence of options, and other factors.
9-34
9.2 Details of Function Codes
„ Auto-restart after a recovery from momentary power failure (waiting time) (H13)
This function specifies the time period from momentary power failure occurrence until the
inverter reacts for restarting process.
If the inverter starts the motor while motor’s residual electricity is still in a high level, an
overvoltage alarm may be recognized due to a high rush current or temporary regeneration
occurrence. For safety, therefore, it is advisable to set H13 to a certain level so that restart will
take place only after the residual electricity has dropped to a low level. Note that even when
power is recovered, restart will not take place until the waiting time (H13) has elapsed.
Chap. 9
„ Factory default:
Inverter capacity
(kW)
H13: Factory default (unit: s) of waiting time for restarting after a
recovery from momentary power failure
0.1 to 7.5
0.5
11 to 37
1.0
45 to 110
1.5
132 to 160
2.0
200 to 280
2.5
315 to 355
4.0
400 to 500
5.0
Function code H13 (Restart mode after a momentary power failure -- waiting time)
also applies to the switching operation between line and inverter (refer to E01
through E05; terminals [X1] through [X5]).
9-35
FUNCTION CODES
By factory default, H13 is set at one of the values shown below according to the inverter
capacity. Basically, you do not need to change data of H13. However, if the long waiting time
causes the flow rate of the pump to overly decrease or causes any other problem, you might as
well reduce the setting to about a half of the default value. In such a case, make sure that no
alarm occurs.
„ Restart after a momentary power failure (Frequency fall rate) (H14)
If, during restart after a momentary power failure, synchronization cannot be established
between the output frequency of the inverter and the rotation of the motor, an overcurrent will
flow and the overcurrent limiting is activated. If an overcurrent is detected, reduce the output
frequency to match the rotation of the motor so that synchronization may be established.
Function code H14 specifies the rate of reducing the output frequency (Frequency fall rate:
Hz/s).
Data for H14
0.00
0.01 to 100.00 Hz/s
999
Inverter’s action on the frequency fall rate
Follow the deceleration time (F08).
Follow data specified by H14.
Follow setting of the PI controller in current limiter (PI constant is
prefixed inside the inverter).
If the frequency fall rate is too high, regeneration may take place at the moment the
rotation of the motor comes into synchronization with the output frequency of the
inverter, causing an overvoltage trip. If the frequency fall rate is too low, the time to
establish synchronization (duration of current limiting action) may be prolonged,
causing the inverter overload prevention control to be triggered.
„ Restart after a momentary power failure (Holding DC voltage) (H15)㩷
„ Continue to run (P, I) (H92, H93)㩷
If you have set F14 to "3"(Continuous running), a momentary power failure occurs while the
inverter is running, at the time when the DC link bus voltage drops below the continuous
running level (H15), the continuous running control will be activated DC link bus. H15
adjusts the continuous running level (voltage) for the continuous running control to be
evoked.
During the continuous running control, deceleration is controlled by PI regulator. Specify the
P (proportional) and I (integral) components with H92 and H93, respectively. For normal
operation of the inverter, you do not have to modify H15, H92 or H93.
D
Power Supply
9-36
22 kW or below
30 kW or above
200 V
5V
10 V
400 V
10 V
20 V
9.2 Details of Function Codes
Even if you select the continuous running control, the inverter may not be able to
continue operation when the load's inertia is small or the load is heavy, due to
undervoltage caused by a control delay. Even in such a case, however, the output
frequency when the undervoltage alarm occurred is saved and the inverter will
restart at the saved frequency upon recovery from momentary power failure.
When the input power voltage for the inverter is high, setting the continuous
running level high makes the control more stable even if the load's inertia is
relatively small. Raising the continuous running level too high, however, might
cause the continuous running control activated even during normal operation.
When the input power voltage for the inverter is extremely low, continuous running
control might be activated even during normal operation, at the beginning of
acceleration or at an abrupt change in load. To avoid this, lower the continuous
running level. Lowering the continuous running level too low, however, might
cause undervoltage that results from voltage drop due to a control delay. Even in
such a case, however, the output frequency when the undervoltage alarm occurred
is saved and the inverter will restart at the saved frequency upon recovery from
momentary power failure.
Before you change the continuous running level, make sure that the continuous
running control will be performed properly, by considering the fluctuations of the
load and the input voltage.
Chap. 9
FUNCTION CODES
9-37
F15
Frequency Limiter (High)
F16
Frequency Limiter (Low)
Refer to H63.
Frequency limiter (Upper) F15 specifies the upper limit of the output frequency, while
frequency limiter (Lower) F16 specifies the lower limit.
Low limiter H63 allows you to select the operation when the reference frequency drops below
the frequency limiter (Lower) F16 as follows:
• If H63 = 0, the output frequency will be held at the frequency limiter (Lower).
• If H63 = 1, the inverter decelerates to stop the motor.
- Data setting range: 0.0 to 120.0 Hz
(H63 = 0)
(H63 = 1)
• When you change the frequency limiter (High) (F15) in order to raise the running
frequency, be sure to change the maximum frequency (F03) accordingly.
• Maintain the following relationship among the data for frequency control:
F15 > F16, F15 > F23 and F15 > F25
F03 > F16
where, F23 is of the starting frequency and F25 is of the stop frequency.
If you specify any wrong data for these function codes, the inverter may not run
the motor at the desired speed, or cannot start it normally.
9-38
9.2 Details of Function Codes
F18
Bias (Frequency command 1)
Refer to C50, C32, C34, C37, C39, C42
and C44.
If you select any analog input for the frequency command 1 (F01), you can define the
relationship between the analog input and the frequency command arbitrarily by multiplying
the gain and adding the bias.
Function code
Function
Data setting range (%)
F18
Bias
-100.00 to 100.00
C50
Bias reference point
0.00 to 100.00
C32
Gain for terminal [12]
0.00 to 200.00
C34
Gain reference point for terminal [12]
0.00 to 100.00
C37
Gain for terminal [C1]
0.00 to 200.00
C39
Gain reference point for terminal [C1]
0.00 to 100.00
C42
Gain for terminal [V2]
0.00 to 200.00
C44
Gain reference point for terminal [V2]
0.00 to 100.00
As shown below, the relationship between the analog input and the reference frequency
selected by frequency command 1 is a frequency shown by the points "A" and "B." The bias
function code (F18) and its reference point (C50) define a point "A." The gain function code
(C32, C37, or C42) and its reference point (C34, C39, or C44) in conjunction with each
analog input define a point "B." A pair of C32 and C34 will apply to terminal [12], that of C37
and C39 for terminal [C1], and that of C42 and C44 to [V2].
Configure the bias (F18) and gain (C32, C37, C42), assuming the maximum frequency as
100%, and the bias reference point (C50) and gain reference point (C34, C39, C44), assuming
the full scale (10 VDC or 20 mA DC) of analog input as 100%.
Chap. 9
• The analog input less than the bias reference point (C50) is limited by the bias
value (F18).
FUNCTION CODES
• If you specified data that the data of the bias reference point (C50) is equal to or
greater than that of each gain reference point (C34, C39, C44), the inverter will
interpret the setting as an invalid one, and set the reference frequency to 0 Hz.
9-39
Example: Setting the bias, gain and its reference points when the reference frequency 0 to
100% follows the analog input of 1 to 5 VDC to terminal [12] (in frequency command 1).
(Point A)
If you want to make 0 Hz as the reference frequency at when the analog input is at 1 V, then
set the bias at 0% (F18 = 0). As 1 V is the bias reference point and 1 V is equal to 10% of 10
V, then set the bias reference point at 10% (C50 = 10).
(Point B)
If you want to make the maximum frequency as the reference frequency at when an analog
input is at 5 V, then set the gain at 100% (C32 = 100 As 5 V is the gain reference point and 5
V is equal to 50% of 10 V, set the gain reference point at 50% (C34 = 50).
The setting procedure for specifying a gain or bias alone without changing any
reference points is the same as that of Fuji conventional inverters of
FRENIC5000G11S/P11S series, FVR-E11S series, etc.
F20
DC Injection Braking (Starting frequency)
F21
DC Injection Braking (Operation level)
F22
DC Injection Braking (Braking time)
Refer to H95.
If it is necessary to prevent the motor from running by inertia during deceleration-to-stop
operation, enable the DC injection braking.
When the motor is in deceleration-to-stop operation by turning off the run command or by
decreasing the reference frequency, stop frequency makes the DC injection braking activate
at the time when the output frequency has reached the DC injection braking starting
frequency. Specify the function codes such as the DC injection braking starting frequency
(F20), the braking level (F21), and the braking time (F22). In addition, H95 specifies the
response of the DC injection braking current.
Setting function code F22 (Braking time) to "0.0" (second) means that DC injection braking
is disabled.
„ Starting frequency (F20)㩷
Specify the frequency at which the DC injection braking starts its operation during motor
deceleration-to-stop state.
- Data setting range: 0.0 to 60.0 (Hz)
„ Braking level (F21)㩷
Specify the output current level to be applied when the DC injection braking is activated. The
function code data should be set, assuming the rated output current of the inverter as 100% in
increments of 1%.
- Data setting range: 0 to 60 (%)
9-40
9.2 Details of Function Codes
„ Braking time (F22)㩷
Specify the braking period that activates DC injection braking.
- Data setting range: 0.01 to 30.00 (sec.)
(Note that setting 0.00 disables DC injection braking.)
„ DC injection braking response (H95)㩷
Specifies the DC injection braking response mode.
Note
0
Slow response. Slows the rising edge
of the current, thereby preventing
reverse rotation at the start of DC
injection braking.
Insufficient braking torque may result
at the start of DC injection braking.
1
Quick response. Quickens the rising
edge of the current, thereby
accelerating the build-up of the
braking torque.
Reverse
rotation
may
result
depending on the moment of inertia
of the mechanical load and the
coupling mechanism.
It is also possible to use an external digital input signal as DC injection braking
command (DCBRK).
When a DC injection braking command (DCBRK) is turned on, DC injection
braking takes place as long as (DCBRK) is on, regardless of the setting of the
braking time F22. Also, even while the inverter is in stopped state, DC injection
braking takes place when (DCBRK) is turned on. This allows the motor to be
excited before starting, resulting in smoother acceleration (quicker build-up of
acceleration torque).
In general, specify data of the function code F20 at a value close to the rated slip
frequency of motor. If you set it at an extremely high value, control may become
unstable and an overvoltage alarm may result in some cases.
The DC injection brake function of the inverter does not provide any holding mechanism.
Injuries could occur.
9-41
FUNCTION CODES
Characteristics
Chap. 9
Data for H95
F23
Starting Frequency
F25
Stop Frequency
At the startup of an inverter, the initial output frequency is equal to the starting frequency.
The inverter stops its output at the stop frequency.
Set the starting frequency to a level that will enable the motor to generate enough torque for
startup. Generally, set the motor's rated slip frequency at the starting frequency F23.㩷
- Data setting range: 0.0 to 60.0 (Hz) (for both starting and stop frequencies)
If the starting frequency is lower than the stop frequency, the inverter will not
output any power as long as the frequency command does not exceed the stop
frequency.
F26
Motor Operation Sound (Carrier frequency)
F27
Motor Operation Sound (Tone)
Refer to H98.
„ Motor operation sound (Carrier frequency) (F26)
F26 controls the carrier frequency so as to reduce a sound noise generated by the motor or
inverter itself, and to decrease a leakage current from the main output (secondary) wirings.
Carrier frequency
should be between:
Inverter rated capacity: 0.75 to 22 kW
0.75 kHz and 15 kHz
Inverter rated capacity: 30 to 75 kW
0.75 kHz and 10 kHz
Inverter rated capacity: 90 to 500 kW
0.75 kHz and 6 kHz
Motor sound noise emission
The higher the less.
Motor temperature (due to harmonics components)
The higher the less.
Output current waveform
The higher the better.
Leakage current
The lower the less.
Electromagnetic noise emission
The lower the less.
Inverter loss
The lower the less.
9-42
9.2 Details of Function Codes
If you specify the carrier frequency too low, the output current waveform tends to
have a large amount of ripples (many harmonics components). As a result, the
motor loss increases, causing the motor temperature to rise. Furthermore, the large
amount of ripples tends to cause a current limiting alarm. Therefore, if you have set
the carrier frequency below 1 kHz, reduce the load so that the inverter output
current is 80% or less of the rated current.
If you specify the carrier frequency too high, when the temperature of inverter
increases by ambient temperature rise or an increase of the load, a function that
automatically decreases the carrier frequency, and prevents inverter overheat alarm
J or inverter overload alarm NW, may be activated. If you do not wish to
automatically reduce the carrier frequency in consideration of the motor noise, you
can disable automatic reduction of carrier frequency. Refer to function code H98.
„ Motor operation sound (Tone) (F27)
Changes the motor running sound tone.
This setting is effective when the carrier
frequency set to function code F26 is 7
kHz or lower. Changing the tone level may
reduce the high and harsh running noise
from the motor.
Data for F27
Function
0
Disable (Tone level 0)
1
Enable (Tone level 1)
2
Enable (Tone level 2)
3
Enable (Tone level 3)
If the sound level is set too high, the output current may become unstable, or
mechanical vibration and noise may increase. Also, these function codes may not be
very effective for certain types of motor.
F30
Terminal [FMA] (Analog output) (Voltage adjust)
F31
Terminal [FMA] (Analog output) (Function)
These function codes allow you to output to terminal [FMA] monitored data such as the
output frequency and the output current in the form of an analog DC voltage or current. The
magnitude of such analog voltage or current is adjustable.
„ Terminal [FMA] (Analog output) (F29)
Specifies the property of the output to terminal [FMA]. You need to set the switch SW4 on
the control printed circuit board (PCB) again accordingly, referring to the table below.
Data for F29
Positioning slide switch (SW4) mounted on the
control PCB
Output form
0
Voltage (0 to 10 VDC)
VO
1
Current (4 to 20 mA DC)
IO
The current output is not isolated from the analog input and does not have its own
independent power source. Therefore, this output must not be connected in cascade
to outside instrument and gauges if some difference in potential is there between the
inverter and peripheral equipment regarding connection of analog input etc. Avoid
needlessly long wiring.
9-43
FUNCTION CODES
Terminal [FMA] (Analog output) (Selection)
Chap. 9
F29
„ Voltage adjust (F30)
Allows you to adjust the output voltage or current representing the monitored data selected by
function code F31 within the range of 0 to 200%.
- Data setting range: 0 to 200 (%)
„ Function (F31)㩷
This function specifies what is output to the analog output terminal [FMA].
Data for
F31
[FMA] output
Function
(Monitor the following)
Monitoring amount
(Full scale at 100%)
0
Output
frequency
Output frequency of the
inverter
Maximum frequency (F03)
2
Output current
Output current (RMS) of
the inverter
Twice the inverter rated current
3
Output voltage
Output voltage (RMS) of
the inverter
250 V for 200 V series,
500 V for 400 V series
4
Output torque
Motor shaft torque
Twice the rated motor torque
5
Load factor
Load factor (Equivalent to
the indication of the load
meter)
Twice the rated motor load, or
• Rated output torque of the
motor at the base frequency
or below
• Rated motor output (kW) at
the base frequency or above
6
Input power
Input power of the inverter
Twice the rated output of the
inverter
7
PID feedback
value (PV)
Feedback value under PID
control
100% of the feedback value
9
DC link bus
voltage
DC link bus voltage of the
inverter
500 V for 200 V series,
1000 V for 400 V series
10
Universal AO
Command via
communications link
(Refer to the RS485
Communications User’s
Manual (MEH448a))
20,000 as 100%
13
Motor output
Motor output (kW)
Twice the rated motor output
14
Calibration
analog output
(+)
Full scale output of the
meter calibration
10 VDC or 20 mA DC
15
PID process
command (SV)
Process command under
PID control
100% of the feedback value
16
PID process
output (MV)
Output level of the PID
controller under PID
control (Frequency
command)
Maximum frequency (F03)
9-44
9.2 Details of Function Codes
F33
Terminal [FMP] (Pulse output) (Pulse rate)
F34
Terminal [FMP] (Pulse output) (Duty)
F35
Terminal [FMP] (Pulse output) (Function)
These function codes allow you to output to terminal [FMP] monitored data such as the
output frequency and the output current in the form of a variable rate pulse train or a fixed rate
pulse train. The fixed rate (2 kpps) pulse train whose pulse duty control produces variance of
an average output voltage of the train can be used to drive an analog meter.
You can set the specification of the output pulse for each item of the monitored data (object).
To use this terminal as a pulse output, set function code F33 to an appropriate value and set
F34 to "0".
To use this terminal as the fixed rate pulse train output, set F34 within the range of 1 to 200%.
The setting of F33 will be ignored.
„ Pulse rate (F33)
Specifies the number of pulses at which the output of the set monitored item reaches 100%, in
accordance with the specifications of the counter to be connected.
- Data setting range: 25 to 6000 (pps)
„ Duty (F34)
Data for F34
1 to 200%
Pulse duty
Pulse rate
Connected equipment
(Example)
Pulse train
Around 50%
Variable
Pulse counter
Fixed rate pulse train
Variable
2000 pps
Analog meter
9-45
FUNCTION CODES
F34 allows you to scale the average voltage corresponding to full scale of the monitored item
selected by function code F35 within the range of 1 to 200 (%) where 100% stands on a half
cycle of a square wave pulse in the train.
Chap. 9
0
[FMP] output
• Pulse train output waveform
• FMP output circuit
For the voltage specifications of the pulse output, refer to Chapter 8
"SPECIFICATIONS."
„ Function (F35)
Select the item (object) to monitor and to output to the [FMP] terminal. Those contents, and
amounts (Definition of 100%) are the same as those for function code F31. Refer to the table
in function code F31.
F37
Load Selection/Auto Torque Boost/Auto Energy Saving Operation
Refer to F09.
Refer to the descriptions of function codes F09.
F43
Current Limiter (Operation selection)
Refer to H12.
F44
Current Limiter (Operation level)
Refer to H12.
When the output current of the inverter exceeds the level specified by the current limiter
(F44), the inverter automatically manages its output frequency to prevent a stall and to limit
the output current.
If F43 = 1, the current limiter is enabled only during constant speed operation. If F43 = 2, the
current limiter is enabled during both of acceleration and constant speed operation. Choose
F43 = 1 if you need to run the inverter at full capability during acceleration and to limit the
output current during constant speed operation.
9-46
9.2 Details of Function Codes
„ Operation selection (F43)㩷
Selects the motor running state in which the current limiter will be active.
Data for F43
Function
0
Disable (No current limiter is active.)
1
Enable the current limiter during constant speed operation
2
Enable the current limiter during acceleration and constant speed operation
„ Operation level (F44)㩷
Selects the operation level at which the current limiter will be active.
- Data setting range: 20 to 120 (%) (Percentage ratio to rated current of the inverter)
• Since the current limit operation with F43 and F44 is performed by software, it
may cause a delay in control. If you need a quick response, specify a current limit
operation by hardware (H12 = 1) at the same time.
• If an excessive load is applied when the current limiter operation level is set
extremely low, the inverter will immediately lower its output frequency. This
may cause an overvoltage trip or dangerous turnover of the motor rotation due to
undershooting.
Chap. 9
FUNCTION CODES
9-47
9.2.2
E codes (Extension terminal functions)
E01 to E05
Command Assignment to Terminal [X1] to [X5]
Refer to E98 and E99.
Function codes E01 to E05, E98 and E99 allow you to assign commands to terminals [X1] to
[X5], [FWD], and [REV] which are general-purpose programmable input terminals.
These function codes may also switch the logic system between normal and negative to
define how the inverter logic interprets either ON or OFF status of each terminal. The default
setting is normal logic system "Active ON." So, explanations that follow are given in normal
logic system "Active ON."
In the case of digital input, you can assign commands to the switching means for the run
command and its operation, the reference frequency and the motor drive power (e.g., (SS1),
(SS2), (SS4), (Hz2/Hz1), (SW50), (SW60), (Hz/PID), (IVS), (LE), (LOC), and (FR2/FR1)).
Be aware of that switching of any of such signals may cause a sudden start (running) or an
abrupt change in speed.
An accident or physical injury may result.
9-48
9.2 Details of Function Codes
Function code data
Assigned terminal command
Symbol
Active ON Active OFF
0
1000
(SS1)
1
1001
2
1002
6
1006
Enable 3-wire operation
7
1007
Coast to a stop
(BX)
8
1008
Reset alarm
(RST)
1009
9
Enable external alarm trip
(THR)
11
1011
13
Select multistep frequency
(SS2)
(SS4)
(HLD)
Switch reference frequency 2/1
(Hz2/Hz1)
㧙
DC injection brake
(DCBRK)
15
㧙
Switch to commercial power (50 Hz)
(SW50)
16
㧙
Switch to commercial power (60 Hz)
(SW60)
17
1017
UP (Increase output frequency)
18
1018
DOWN (Decrease output frequency)
(DOWN)
19
1019
Enable write from keypad (Data changeable)
(WE-KP)
20
1020
Cancel PID control
(Hz/PID)
21
1021
Switch normal/inverse operation
22
1022
Interlock
(IL)
24
1024
Enable communications link via RS485 or field bus
(option)
(LE)
25
1025
Universal DI
(U-DI)
26
1026
Select auto sync search mode
(STM)
1030
30
Force to stop
(STOP)
33
1033
Reset PID integral and differential components
(PID-RST)
34
1034
Hold PID integral component
(PID-HLD)
35
1035
Select local (keypad) operation
38
1038
Enable to run
39
㧙
Protect motor from dew condensation
40
㧙
Enable integrated sequence to switch to commercial
power (50 Hz)
(ISW50)
41
㧙
Enable integrated sequence to switch to commercial
power (60 Hz)
(ISW60)
87
1087
88
㧙
Run forward 2
(FWD2)
89
㧙
Run reverse 2
(REV2)
98
㧙
Run forward (Exclusively assigned to [FWD] and
[REV] terminals by E98 and E99)
(FWD)
99
㧙
Run reverse (Exclusively assigned to [FWD] and
[REV] terminals by E98 and E99)
(REV)
(LOC)
(RE)
(DWP)
(FR2/FR1)
FUNCTION CODES
9-49
(IVS)
Chap. 9
Switch run command 2/1
(UP)
For the functions having "㧙" under the Data: Active OFF column, you cannot
specify any negative logic (Active off) command.
For "External alarm" and "Forced to stop," fail-safe settings are selected by default.
For example, in External alarm, when data = "9," "Active OFF" (alarm is triggered
when OFF); when data = 1009, "Active ON" (alarm is triggered when ON).
Terminal function assignment and data setting
„ Assignment of multistep frequency (1 to 7 steps) – (SS1), (SS2), and (SS4)
(Function code data = 0, 1, and 2)㩷
Combination of turning digital input signals (SS1), (SS2), and (SS4) on and off selects one of
eight different frequency commands defined beforehand by seven function codes C05 to C11
(Multistep frequency 1 to 7). With this, the inverter can drive the motor at 8 different preset
speeds.
The table below lists the frequencies that can be obtained by the combination of switching
(SS1), (SS2), and (SS4). In the "Selected frequency" column, "Other than multistep
frequency" represents the reference frequency commanded by the frequency command 1
(F01), frequency command 2 (C30), or others. For details, refer to the block diagram in
Chapter 4, Section 4.2 "Drive Frequency Command Generator."
Terminal [X3]
Terminal [X2]
Terminal [X1]
(Function code E03)
(Function code E02)
(Function code E01)
2 (SS4)
1 (SS2)
0 (SS1)
OFF
OFF
OFF
Other than multistep
frequency
OFF
OFF
ON
C05 (Multistep frequency 1)
OFF
ON
OFF
C06 (Multistep frequency 2)
OFF
ON
ON
C07 (Multistep frequency 3)
ON
OFF
OFF
C08 (Multistep frequency 4)
ON
OFF
ON
C09 (Multistep frequency 5)
ON
ON
OFF
C10 (Multistep frequency 6)
ON
ON
ON
C11 (Multistep frequency 7)
9-50
Selected frequency
9.2 Details of Function Codes
„ Assignment of 3-wire operation command -- (HLD)
(Function code data = 6)
The (HLD) terminal command self-holds the forward (FWD) or reverse (REV) run command
issued with it, to enable 3-wire inverter operation.
Short-circuiting the terminals between the (HLD)-assigned and [CM] (i.e., when (HLD) is
on) will self-hold the first (FWD) or (REV) command at its leading edge. Turning (HLD) off
will release the self-holding.
When (HLD) is not assigned, 2-wire operation involving only (FWD) and (REV) takes effect.
㩷
„ Assignment of coast-to-stop command -- (BX)
(Function code data = 7)㩷
„ Assignment of reset alarm -- (RST)
Chap. 9
Short-circuiting the terminals between the (BX)-assigned and [CM] will immediately
shutdown the inverter output so that the motor will enter the coast-to-stop operation without
issuing any alarms.
(Function code data = 8)㩷
When you turn on the (RST) command, keep it on for 10 ms or more. The (RST) command
should be kept off for the normal inverter operation.
9-51
FUNCTION CODES
Turning (RST) on clears the (ALM) state — alarm output (for any fault). Turning it off
thereafter erases the alarm display and clears the alarm hold state.
„ Assignment of trip command from external equipment -- (THR)
(Function code data = 9)㩷
Turning (THR) OFF causes the inverter output to be immediately shut down (the motor will
coast to stop), the alarm J to be displayed, and alarm relay output (for any fault) (ALM) to
be output. This signal is self-held, and is reset when the alarm reset takes place.
Trip command from external equipment is used when you have to immediately shut
down the inverter output in the event of an abnormal situation in a peripheral
equipment.
„ Assignment of switch the reference frequency 2/1 -- (Hz2/Hz1)
(Function code data = 11)㩷
Turning the digital input signal (Hz2/Hz1) on and off switches the source of the reference
frequency between the frequency command 1 (Hz1: F01) and frequency command 2 (Hz2:
C30).
Turning the (Hz2/Hz1) command on allows you to run the inverter with the reference
frequency 2 from the frequency command 2.
If you have not made an assignment of code data 11, the frequency specified by F01 becomes
effective by default.
Frequency command
(Hz2/Hz1)
Frequency command source
OFF
Follow F01: Frequency command 1
ON
Follow C30: Frequency command 2
For details of the relationship with other frequency command sources, refer to Chapter
4, Section 4.2 "Drive Frequency Command Generator."
„ Assignment of DC injection braking command -- (DCBRK)
(Function code data 㧩 13)㩷
A digital input signal supplied from outside becomes the DC injection braking command
(DCBRK). When (DCBRK) is turned ON, DC injection braking takes place as long as
(DCBRK) is ON, regardless of the setting of the DC injection braking time. Furthermore,
when (DCBRK) is turned ON while the inverter is in stopped state, DC injection braking
takes place. This allows the motor to be excited before startup, resulting in smoother
acceleration (quicker build-up of acceleration torque).
You also need to set, using F20 to F22 and H95, parameters for DC injection
braking (starting frequency, braking level, braking time, and braking response
mode) properly.
„ Assignment of switch to commercial power command for 50 Hz (SW50) or 60 Hz
(SW60)
(Function code data = 15, 16)㩷
When an external sequence switches the motor drive power from the commercial lines to the
inverter according to the operation scheme shown on the next page, the terminal command
(SW50) or (SW60) enables the FRENIC-Eco inverter to start running the motor with the
current commercial power frequency, regardless settings of the reference/output frequency in
the inverter. A running motor driven by commercial power is carried on into inverter
operation. This command helps you smoothly switch the motor drive power source from the
commercial power to the inverter power. For details, refer to the table below, the operation
scheme and an example of an external sequence and its operation time scheme on the next
following pages.
Assignment
The inverter:
Description
(SW50)
Starts at 50 Hz.
(SW60)
Starts at 60 Hz.
Do not concurrently assign both
(SW50) and (SW60).
9-52
9.2 Details of Function Codes
<Operation scheme>
• When the motor speed remains almost the same during coast-to-stop:
• When the motor speed decreases significantly during coast-to-stop:
Chap. 9
FUNCTION CODES
9-53
• Secure more than 0.1 second before turning ON the Run command after turning
on the Switch to commercial power frequency command.
• Secure more than 0.2 second of overlapping between the Switch to commercial
power frequency command being ON and the Run command being ON.
• If an alarm has been issued or (BX) has been ON when the motor drive source is
switched from the commercial power to the inverter, the inverter will not be
started at the commercial power frequency and will remain OFF. After the alarm
has been reset or (BX) turned OFF, operation at the frequency of the commercial
power will not be continued, and the inverter will be started at the ordinary
starting frequency.
If you wish to switch the motor drive source from the commercial line to the
inverter, be sure to turn (BX) OFF before the Switch to commercial line
command is turned OFF.
• If you wish to switch the motor drive source from the inverter to commercial
power, adjust the inverter's reference frequency at or slightly higher than that of
the commercial power frequency beforehand, taking into consideration the motor
speed down during coast-to-stop period during the switching.
• Note that when the motor drive source is switched from the inverter to the
commercial power, a large rush current will be generated, because the phase of
the commercial power usually does not match the motor speed at the switching.
Make sure that the power supply and all the peripheral equipment are capable of
withstanding this rush current.
• If you have already selected auto-restart after a recovery from momentary power
failure (F14 = 3, 4, or 5), keep (BX) ON during operation by commercial power,
to prevent the inverter from entering the auto-restart after momentary power
failure mode.
9-54
9.2 Details of Function Codes
<Example of sequence circuit>
Chap. 9
FUNCTION CODES
Note 1) Emergency switch
- Manual switch provided for the event that the motor drive source cannot be switched normally to the commercial
power due to a serious problem of the inverter.
Note 2) When any alarm has occurred inside the inverter, the motor drive source will automatically be switched to the
commercial power.
9-55
<Example of operation time scheme>
Alternatively, you may use the integrated sequence by which some of the actions
above are automatically performed by the inverter itself. For details, refer to the
description of (ISW50) and (ISW60).
9-56
9.2 Details of Function Codes
„ Assignment of UP command (UP) and DOWN command (DOWN)
(Function code data = 17, 18)㩷
• Frequency setting
When UP/DOWN control is selected for a frequency command source and the Run command
is ON, turning (UP) or (DOWN) on causes the output frequency to increase or decrease
within the range of 0 Hz to the maximum frequency as shown below.
Data = 17
Data = 18
(UP)
(DOWN)
OFF
OFF
Keep the current output frequency.
ON
OFF
Increase the output frequency over the acceleration time
specified by function code F07.
OFF
ON
Decrease the output frequency over the deceleration time
specified by function code F08.
ON
ON
Keep the current output frequency.
Function
In UP/DOWN control, the inverter saves the output frequency in its internal memory. Thus,
the inverter will start control at the frequency that has been saved in the last operation when
operation is resumed (including restart by power on). Refer to the timing scheme diagram
shown below and table on the next page, for details of this operation.
Chap. 9
If you issue an (UP) or (DOWN) command before the internal frequency arrives up
to the current reference frequency previously commanded, during the restart cycle,
then the inverter saves the output frequency at the time of the (UP) or (DOWN)
command issued in its internal memory, and starts UP/DOWN control with
reference to this new frequency. This means that the previous frequency originally
saved is overwritten and is lost.
FUNCTION CODES
9-57
Initial settings of UP/DOWN control when the source of the frequency command is switched:
When the frequency command source is switched to UP/DOWN control from other sources,
the initial frequency of UP/DOWN control are as follows:
Frequency command
source
Switching command
Initial frequency of UP/DOWN
control
Other than UP/DOWN
(F01, C30)
Reference frequency
2/Reference frequency 1
(Hz 2/Hz 1)
Reference frequency given by the
frequency command source just
before switching
Local (keypad)
Local (Select the keypad)
(LOC)
Digital frequency command given by
keypad
PID conditioner
Cancel PID control
(Hz /PID)
Reference frequency given by PID
control (PID processor output)
Multistep frequency
Multistep frequency
command (SS1) to (SS4)
Reference frequency at the time of
previous UP/DOWN control
Communications link
Enable communications
link (LE)
To enable the UP command (UP) and the DOWN command (DOWN), you need to
select Frequency command source 1 (F01) or Frequency command 2 (C30) at "7"
beforehand.
• PID process command
While UP/DOWN control is selected as the PID process command, turning (UP) or (DOWN)
ON when the Run command is ON causes the process command to change within the range of
0 to 100%.
The setting is enabled in units of the process amount according to the PID display
coefficients.
(UP)
(DOWN)
Data = 17
Data = 18
OFF
OFF
Retain the current process command
ON
OFF
Increase the process command at a rate between 0.1%/0.1 s
and 1%/0.1 s.
OFF
ON
Decrease the process command at a rate between 0.1%/0.1
s and 1%/0.1 s.
ON
ON
Retain the current process command
Function
The process command specified by UP/DOWN control is internally retained. At the time of
restart (including power on), the operation resumes with the previous process command.
To enable the UP command (UP) and the DOWN command (DOWN), you need to
set the Remote Process command (J02 = 4) beforehand.
For details of PID control, refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.9, "PID Frequency Command
Generator" and Section 9.2.6, "J Codes."
For details of displaying the PID process command, refer to the descriptions of function
codes E40 and E41: PID Display Coefficients A and B.
9-58
9.2 Details of Function Codes
„ Assignment of Enable Editing of Function Code Data from the Keypad -- (WE-KP)
(Function code data = 19)㩷
Turning off the (WE-KP) command disables changing of function code data from the keypad.
Only when the (WE-KP) command is ON, you can change function code data from the
keypad according to the setting of function code F00 as listed below.
(WE-KP)
F00
OFF
Disable
Function
Disable editing of all function code data except that of F00.
0
Enable editing of all function code data
1
Inhibit editing of all function code data except that of F00
ON
If the (WE-KP) command is not assigned to any terminal, the inverter will interpret (WE-KP)
to be always ON by default.
If you mistakenly assign (WE-KP) command to a terminal, you cannot edit or
modify function code data anymore. In such a case, temporarily short-circuit (turn
ON) the (WE-KP)-assigned terminal to the terminal [CM], and then reassign the
(WE-KP) command to a correct terminal.
„ Assignment of Cancel PID control -- (Hz/PID)
(Function code data = 20)㩷
Turning the (Hz/PID) command ON disables the PID control.
If the PID control is disabled with the (Hz/PID) being ON, the inverter runs the motor with
the reference frequency manually set by any of the multistep, keypad, analog input, etc.
Function
OFF
Enable PID control
ON
Disable PID control/Enable manual settings
„ Assignment of Switch Normal/Inverse Frequency Command -- (IVS)
(Function code data = 21)
Turning the (IVS) command on/off switches the output frequency control between normal
(proportional to the input value) and inverse in PID process control and manual frequency
command. To select the inverse operation, turn the (IVS) command ON.
Switching between normal and inverse control of the output frequency is useful
particularly for air-conditioners that are switched between cooling and heating. In
cooling, the speed of the fan motor (output frequency of the inverter) is increased to
lower the temperature. In heating, the speed of the fan motor (output frequency of
the inverter) is reduced to lower the temperature. This switching is realized by the
switch normal/inverse frequency command.
9-59
FUNCTION CODES
For details of PID control, refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.9, "PID Frequency Command
Generator" and Section 9.2.6, "J Codes."
Chap. 9
(Hz/PID)
• When the inverter is driven by an external analog frequency command sources (terminals
[12], [C1], and [V2])
The switching normal/inverse frequency command can apply only to the analog frequency
command sources (terminals [12], [C1], and [V2]) in Frequency command 1 (F01) and does
not affect Frequency command 2 (C30) or UP/DOWN control. The table below summarizes
the combination of the setting of Selection of normal/inverse operation for the frequency
command 1 (C53) and the Switch normal/inverse frequency command (IVS).
Selection of normal/inverse operation (Frequency command 1) (C53)
Data for C53
Rotation defined by C53
0
Normal
1
(IVS)
Final rotation command
OFF
Normal
ON
Inverse
OFF
Inverse
ON
Normal
Inverse
• In case process control is performed under the PID control facility integrated in the
inverter:
During the mode in which process control is performed under the PID control function
integrated in the inverter, the PID cancel command (Hz/PID) enables PID control (process is
to be controlled by the PID processor) or disables PID control (process is to be controlled by
the manually set frequency). For both cases, you can select normal or inverse operation by the
combination of the Switch normal/inverse frequency command (IVS) and the Normal/inverse
operation selection (Frequency command 1) (C53), or PID Control selection (J01). The
normal or inverse operation can be determined as shown below.
• When PID control is enabled:
Normal/inverse operation selection for the PID processor output (reference frequency)
follows.
Mode selected for PID control (J01)
(IVS)
Rotation direction
1: Enable PID process control (normal
operation)
OFF
Normal
ON
Inverse
2: Enable PID process control (inverse
operation)
OFF
Inverse
ON
Normal
• When PID control is disabled:
Normal/inverse operation selection for the manual reference frequency follows.
Normal/inverse operation selection
(Frequency command 1) (C53)
(IVS)
Rotation direction
0: Normal operation
㧙
Normal
1: Inverse operation
㧙
Inverse
In case process control is performed under the PID control facility integrated in the
inverter, the Switch normal/inverse frequency command (IVS) is used to switch the
output (frequency setting) of the PID processor between normal and inverse mode,
and has no effect on any normal/inverse operation selection of the manual
frequency setting.
For details of PID control, refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.9 "PID Frequency Command
Generator" and Section 9.2.6 "J Codes."
9-60
9.2 Details of Function Codes
„ Assignment of Interlock Command -- (IL)
(Function code data = 22)㩷
In a configuration where a magnetic contactor is installed in the power output (secondary)
circuit of the inverter, the detection feature of momentary power failure provided inside the
inverter alone may not be able to accurately detect a momentary power failure. In such a
configuration, you can ensure accurate detection of a momentary power failure by inputting a
digital signal using the interlock command (IL).
Interlock
command (IL)
Status
OFF
No momentary power failure has occurred.
ON
A momentary power failure has occurred
(Restart after a recovery from momentary power failure enabled)
For details of operation after a recovery from momentary power failure, refer to the
description of function code F14.
Chap. 9
The inverter recognizes a momentary power failure by detecting an undervoltage condition
whereby the voltage of the DC link bus goes below the lower limit. In a configuration where
a magnetic contactor (MC) is installed on the secondary side of the inverter, however, the
inverter may fail to recognize a momentary power failure because the momentary power
failure may shutdown the exciter power for the magnetic contactor, which causes the
contactor to open. When the contactor circuit is open, the inverter is cut off from the motor,
and the voltage drop in the DC link bus is not high enough to be recognized as a power failure.
In this case, the function of restart after a recovery from momentary power failure does not
work properly as designed. To solve this problem, connect the interlock command (IL) line to
the auxiliary contact of the magnetic contactor, so that a momentary power failure can sure be
detected.
FUNCTION CODES
„ Assignment of Enable Communications Link -- (LE)
(Function code data 㧩 24)㩷
When (LE) is ON, the frequency command or the run command received via the RS485
communications link or the field bus (option) specified by the Communications link
operation (Function selection) (H30) or the Bus link function for supporting data input
(Function selection) (y98), takes precedence.
When (LE) is not assigned, the operation is the same as when (LE) is ON by default.
For details of switching, refer to H30 Communications Link Operation (Function
selection) and y98 Bus Link Function for Supporting Data Input (Function selection).
9-61
„ Assignment of Universal DI -- (U-DI)
(Function code data 㧩 25)㩷
You can monitor digital signals of peripheral equipments of the inverter via an RS485
communications link or a field bus (option) by feeding them into the digital input terminals of
the inverter. The signal assigned to the universal DI does not take part in the operation of the
inverter, but it is simply monitored.
For an access to Universal DI via the RS485 or field bus communications link, refer to
their respective Instruction Manuals.
„ Select Starting Characteristics -- (STM)
(Function code data 㧩 26)㩷
At the start, you can determine whether an idling motor is to be synchronized (an idling motor
to be synchronized without stopping it) or not, using this terminal command.
For details of synchronization of an idling motor, refer to H09 (Start mode) and H17
Start mode (Synchronizing frequency).
„ Assignment of Forced to Stop -- (STOP)
(Function code data 㧩 30)㩷
Turning the terminal command "STOP" OFF causes the motor to decelerate to stop over the
time specified by H56 (Deceleration time for forced to stop). After the motor stops, the
inverter enters the alarm state with alarm GT. Apply this command to a failsafe facility.
„ Assignment of Reset PID differential/integral operation -- (PID-RST)
(Function code data = 33)㩷
Turning (PID-RST) ON causes the delivative and integral components of the PID processor
to be reset.
For details of PID control, refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.9 "PID Frequency Command
Generator" and Section 9.2.6 "J Codes."
„ Assignment of Hold PID integral component -- (PID-HLD)
(Function code data = 34)㩷
Turning (PID-HLD) ON holds the integral components of the PID processor.
For details of PID control, refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.9 "PID Frequency Command
Generator" and Section 9.2.6 "J Codes."
„ Assignment of Select the Local (Keypad) Operation -- (LOC)
(Function code data 㧩 35)㩷
This command helps you switch the source of the run command and frequency command
between remote and local by an external digital input signal.
For details of the local mode, refer to "■ Switching between remote and local modes" in
Chapter 3, Section 3.2.3.
9-62
9.2 Details of Function Codes
„ Assignment of Run Enable -- (RE)
(Function code data = 38)㩷
If you assign the Run enable command (RE) to a digital input terminal, the inverter will not
start operation unless receiving a Run command. When the inverter gets ready for operation
after receiving the Run command, the inverter will output the digital signal (AX2) notifying
the presence of a Run command. The inverter will be started once the Run command has been
issued and the Run Enable command (RE) is turned ON.
Input
Run command
e.g., (FWD)
Run enable
command "RE"
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Output
"AX2"
(Run command
present)
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
Inverter's operation
Stopped
Stopped
Stopped
Running
<Usage example>
Listed below is a typical example of starting sequence:
(1) Run command "FWD" is issued to the inverter.
(2) Upon getting ready after receiving the Run command, the inverter issues the digital
signal "AX2", notifying that a Run command is present.
(3) Upon receiving "AX2", the host equipment starts preparation of the peripheral devices
such as opening the mechanical damper/brake.
(4) When the preparation of the peripheral devices is complete, the host equipment
(controller or sequencer) issues the Run Enable command "RE" to the inverter.
(5) Upon receiving "RE", the inverter starts operation.
(Function code data 㧩 39)㩷
For details of dew condensation protection, refer to function code J21 (Dew
Condensation Protection (Duty)).
„ Assignment of Enable integrated commercial power switching sequence (50Hz) --
(ISW50),
integrated commercial power switching sequence (60Hz) -- (ISW60)
(Function code data = 40, 41)㩷
Assigning the terminal command (ISW50) or (ISW60) allows the magnetic contactor for
switching the motor drive source between the commercial power and the inverter to be
controlled by the integrated sequence.
This control is effective only when (ISW50) or (ISW60) is already assigned, and (SW88) and
(SW52-2) used for switching from the commercial power to the inverter are also assigned to
the digital output terminals.
The selection between (ISW50) and (ISW60) is determined by the frequency of the
commercial power, that is, (ISW50) for 50 Hz, (ISW60) for 60 Hz.
For details of these commands, proceed to referring to the circuit diagrams and timing
schemes on the following pages.
Operation (when switched from
commercial power to inverter)
Assignment
Enable integrated commercial power switching sequence
(50Hz) (ISW50)
Starts at 50 Hz.
Enable integrated commercial power switching sequence
(60Hz) (ISW60)
Starts at 60 Hz.
Do not assign both (ISW50) and (ISW60) at the same time. If you do, the result
cannot be guaranteed.
9-63
FUNCTION CODES
When "DWP" is turned ON, a DC current is fed to the motor while it is in stopped state, so
that the heat generated by the current prevents dew condensation.
Chap. 9
„ Assignment of Protect the motor from Dew Condensation -- (DWP)
<Circuit diagram and Configuration>
Main circuit
Configuration of control circuit
Summary of operation
Input
(ISW50) or
(ISW60)
OFF
(Commercial power)
ON
(Inverter)
Command status and inverter operation
Run command
(SW52-1)
(SW52-2)
OFF
OFF
ON
(SW88)
Inverter
operation
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
9-64
9.2 Details of Function Codes
<Timing scheme>
Switching from inverter operation to commercial-power operation ((ISW50)/(ISW60): ON
o OFF)
(1) The inverter output is shut off immediately (Power gate IGBT OFF)
(2) The inverter primary circuit (SW52-1) and the inverter secondary side (SW52-2) are
turned off immediately.
(3) If a Run command is present after a lapse of t1 (time specified by function code H13 +
0.2 sec), the commercial power circuit (SW88) is turned on .
Switching from commercial-power operation to inverter operation ((ISW50)/(SW60): OFF
o ON)
(1) The inverter primary circuit (SW52-1) is turned on immediately .
(2) The commercial power circuit (SW88) is immediately shut off,
(3) After a lapse of t2 (time required for the main circuit to get ready + 0.2 sec) after
(SW52-1) is turned on, the inverter secondary circuit (SW52-2) is turned on.
(4) After a lapse of t3 (time specified by function code H13 + 0.2 sec) after (SW52-2) is
turned on, the inverter leads in the motor from the commercial-power operation,
afterwards the motor returns to the operation by the inverter operation.
Chap. 9
FUNCTION CODES
t1: 0.2 sec + time specified by H13 (Auto-restart wait time after a recovery from momentary
power failure)
t2: time required for inverter to get ready + 0.2 sec
t3: 0.2 sec + time specified by H13 (Auto-restart wait time after a recovery from momentary
power failure)
9-65
<Selection of the integrated commercial power switching sequence>
Function code J22 allows you to specify whether operation should automatically switched to
commercial-power operation when an inverter alarm occurs.
Data for J22
Sequence (for occurrence of an alarm)
0
Stay with inverter-operation. (Inverter is stopped with an alarm.)
1
Automatically switch to commercial-power operation.
• The sequence operates normally also even when (SW52-1) is not used and the
main power of the inverter is supplied at all times.
• If you choose to use (SW52-1), be sure to connect the input terminals [R0] and
[T0] for an auxiliary control power. Otherwise, when (SW52-1) is turned off, the
control power is also lost.
• In general, the sequence circuit operates normally even if an alarm occurs in the
inverter. If the inverter is broken, however, the sequence may not operate
normally. Therefore, for a critical facility, be sure to install an emergency
switching circuit outside the inverter.
• If you would turn on both the commercial-power-side contactor (SW88) and the
contactor for the inverter output (secondary) side (SW52-2) simultaneously, you
would be mistakenly supplying main power from the output (secondary) side of
the inverter, which might cause damage to the inverter. Be sure to set up
interlocking logic outside the inverter.
<Examples of sequence circuits>
1)
Standard sequence
9-66
9.2 Details of Function Codes
2)
Sequence with an emergency switching function
Chap. 9
FUNCTION CODES
9-67
3)
Sequence with an emergency switching function --Part 2 (Automatic switching by the
alarm output issued by the inverter)
9-68
9.2 Details of Function Codes
„ Assignment of Switch the Run Command 2/Run command 1 -- (FR2/FR1), 㩷
Run forward command 2 (FWD2), and Run reverse command 2 (REV2)
(Function code data 㧩 87, 88 or 89)
Allow you to switch the source of the run command. This is particularly useful when run
commands come either from the communications link or from the local keypad.
Refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.3 "Drive Command Generator" for details.
Run command source
Terminal command
"FR2/FR1"
Communications link disabled
(Normal operation)
Communications link enabled
OFF
Follow the data of F02.
Follow
S06: FWD/REV
ON
(FWD2) or (REV2)
Follow
S06: FWD2/REV2
An inverter runs the motor forward if (FWD2) is turned on and decelerates-to-stop the motor
if (FWD2) off.
An inverter runs the motor in reverse if (REV2) is turned on and decelerates-to-stop the motor
if (REV2) off.
„ Assignment of Run Forward Command -- (FWD)㩷
(Function code data = 98)
The Run forward command (FWD) is only assigned by E98 or E99.
(Function code data = 99)
If the (REV) is turned on, the inverter runs the motor in reverse; if off, it decelerates-to-stop
the motor.
The Run reverse command (REV) is only assigned by E98 or E99.
9-69
FUNCTION CODES
„ Assignment of Run Reverse Command -- (REV)㩷
Chap. 9
If the (FWD) command is turned on, the inverter runs the motor forward and
decelerates-to-stop the motor if (FWD) off.
E20 to E22
E24, E27
Status Signal Assignment to Terminal [Y1] to [Y3]
(Transistor signal)
Status Signal Assignment to Terminal [Y5A/C] and [30A/B/C]
(Relay contact signal)
Terminals [Y1], [Y2], [Y3], [Y5A/C], and [30A/B/C] are programmable, general-purpose
output terminals to which you can assign functions using function codes E20, E21, E22, E24,
and E27. By the selection of negative logic, you can also specify which of the ON and OFF
states are to be regarded as active.
The factory default settings for these functions are "Active ON." Terminals [Y1], [Y2], and
[Y3] are transistor outputs, whereas terminals [Y5A/C] and [30A/B/C] are relay contact
outputs. In general, in normal logic, when the relay is energized upon alarm occurrence,
terminals 30A and 30C are closed and terminals 30B and 30C are opened. In negative logic,
when the relay is de-energized upon alarm occurrence, terminals 30A and 30C are opened
and terminals 30B and 30C closed. Therefore, this negative logic is easily applied for a
fail-safe purpose.
• When negative logic is employed, all signals become active (e.g. an alarm would
be recognized) while the inverter is powered OFF. Therefore, it is
recommendable to arrange for some interlocking outside the inverter as
necessary, for example using the POWER ON signal. Furthermore, the validity
of output signals is not guaranteed for approximately 2 seconds after power-on,
and it is also recommendable to introduce a mechanism such that they will be
ignored (masked) during this transient period.
• Relay outputs (terminals [Y5A/C] and [30A/B/C]) are mechanical outputs and
cannot tolerate frequent ON/OFF switching. In case frequent switching
(ON/OFF) is anticipated (for example, limiting a current by using signals subject
to limit control in the inverter), use transistor outputs [Y1] through [Y3] instead.
The life of a relay contact is approximately 200,000 times if it is switched on and
off every second. For the signals that are turned on and off very frequently, use
the transistor outputs.
9-70
9.2 Details of Function Codes
The table below lists functions assigned to the terminals [Y1], [Y2], [Y3], [Y5A/C], and
[30A/B/C].
To make the explanations simpler, the examples shown below are all written for the normal
logic (Active ON.)
Function code data
Function (command) assigned to the terminal
Symbol
Active ON Active OFF
0
1000
Inverter running
(RUN)
1
1001
Frequency arrival signal
(FAR)
2
1002
Frequency detected
(FDT)
3
1003
Undervoltage detected (Inverter stopped)
(LU)
5
1005
Inverter output limiting (Current limiting)
(IOL)
6
1006
Auto-restarting after a recovery from momentary
power failure
(IPF)
7
1007
Motor overload early warning
(OL)
10
1010
Inverter ready to run
(RDY)
11
-
Switch the motor drive source between commercial
power and inverter output (For MC on the
commercial line)
(SW88)
Switch the motor drive source between commercial
power and inverter output (For the primary side)
(SW52-2)
13
-
Switch the motor drive source between commercial
line and inverter output (For the secondary side)
(SW52-1)
15
1015
Select the AX terminal function (For MC on the
primary side)
(AX)
25
1025
Cooling fan in operation
(FAN)
26
1026
Auto-resetting
(TRY)
27
1027
Universal DO enabled
(U-DO)
28
1028
Heat sink overheat early warning
30
1030
Service life alarm
33
1033
Command missing detected
35
1035
Inverter output on
36
1036
Overload prevention control
37
1037
Current detected
(ID)
42
1042
PID alarm output
(PID-ALM)
43
1043
Under PID control
(PID-CTL)
44
1044
Motor stopping due to slow flowrate under PID
control
(PID-STP)
45
1045
Low output torque detected
(U-TL)
54
1054
Inverter in remote operation
(RMT)
55
1055
Run command presence
(AX2)
56
1056
Motor overheat detection (PTC)
(THM)
99
1099
Alarm relay output (for any fault)
(ALM)
(OH)
(LIFE)
(REF OFF)
(RUN2)
(OLP)
A mark "-" in the Active OFF column means that you cannot apply a negative logic
for the terminal function.
9-71
FUNCTION CODES
-
Chap. 9
12
„ Assignment of Inverter Running (Presence of Speed) -- (RUN)㩷
(Function code data = 0)
This output signal is used to notify the external equipment that the inverter is running at a
starting frequency or higher. Its output is turned on when the inverter output frequency
exceeds the starting frequency and turned off when the output frequency is less the stop
frequency. The output is also turned off while the DC injection braking is activated. If this
signal is assigned as "Active OFF," it can be used as a signal indicating "inverter in stopped
state."
„ Assignment of Frequency Arrival Signal -- (FAR)㩷
(Function code data = 1)
This signal is turned on when the difference between the inverter output frequency and the
reference frequency comes into the allowable error zone. (prefixed to 2.5 Hz).
„ Assignment of Frequency Detection -- (FDT)㩷
(Function code data = 2)
This signal is turned on when the inverter output frequency comes into the frequency
detection level specified by function code E31 and turned off when the output frequency
drops lower than the detection level minus 1 Hz (hysteresis band of the frequency
comparator: prefixed at 1 Hz).
„ Assignment of Undervoltage Detection -- (LU)㩷
(Function code data = 3)
This signal is turned on when the DC link bus voltage of the inverter drops below the
specified undervoltage. Even if a running command is given during undervoltage detection,
the inverter cannot be operated. This signal is turned off if the DC link bus voltage exceeds
the specified undervoltage level. When the undervoltage protective function is activated and
the motor is in an abnormal stop sate (e.g.: tripped state), this signal is turned on.
„ Assignment of Inverter Output Limiting -- (IOL)㩷
(Function code data = 5)
This signal is turned on when the inverter is exerting control on the output frequency by
taking one of the following actions (minimum width of the output signal: 100 ms):
• Current limiting by software (F43: Current limiter (operation selection); F44: Current
limiter (Operation level))
• Current limiting by hardware (H12 = 1)
• Automatic deceleration (H69 = 3)
Note that when the "inverter output limiting (current limiting)" signal (IOL) is ON, the output
frequency may have deviated from (or dropped below) the frequency specified by the
frequency command because of this limiting function.
„ Assignment of Auto-restart from Momentary Power Failure -- (IPF)㩷
(Function code data = 6)
This signal is turned on either while continuous running control is invoked after power failure,
or during the period from when the inverter has detected an undervoltage condition and has
shut down the output until restart has been complete (the output has reached the reference
frequency). To enable the auto-restart after a recovery of momentary power failure (IPF), set
F14 (Restart after momentary power failure) at 3 (Continuous running), 4 (Restart mode from
power failure), or 5 (Restart at the starting frequency) beforehand.
„ Assignment of Motor Overload Early Warning -- (OL)㩷
(Function code data = 7)
This signal is used to issue a motor overload early warning for enabling you to take corrective
action before the inverter detects a motor overload alarm N and stops its output. Motor
overload early warning is turned on when the current exceeds the level specified by E34
(Overload early warning). In general, set E34 for 80-90% of the level specified by F11
(Electronic thermal motor overload protection). Also specify the thermal characteristics of
the motor with F10 (Select the motor property) and F12 (Thermal time constant).
Function code E34 is effective for not only the motor overload early warning (OL),
but also for the operation level of the current detection (ID).
9-72
9.2 Details of Function Codes
■ Assignment of Inverter Ready to Run -- (RDY)
(Function code data 㧩 10)㩷
This signal is turned on when hardware preparation such as initial charging up of DC link bus
capacitor/s (reservoir capacitor/s) and initialization of the control circuit has been complete
and no protective function activated so that the inverter has got ready to run.
■ Assignment of Switch Commercial Power/Inverter Operation -- (SW88), (SW52-2),
and (SW52-1)
(Function code data = 11, 12, 13)㩷
Upon receiving the terminal commands (ISW50) or (ISW60), the inverter controls the
magnetic contactor for switching the motor drive source between the commercial power and
the inverter output by means of the integrated sequence, using commands (WS52-2),
(SW52-1) and (SW88) assigned to the transistor output terminals [Y3], [Y2] and [Y1]
respectively e.g. For details, refer to the description and diagrams in the section of assignment
of (ISW50) (50 Hz) and (ISW60) (60 Hz) to any terminals [X1] through [X5], [FWD] and
[REV].
„ Assignment of Select the AX Terminal Function -- (AX)
(Function code data = 15)㩷
This signal controls the magnetic contactor on the commercial power supply side, in response
to a run command, (FWD).
The signal turns on when the inverter receives a run command, and off after the motor has
coasted-to-stop upon receiving a stop command. It turns off immediately when a
coast-to-stop command is received or when an alarm occurs.
Chap. 9
FUNCTION CODES
„ Assignment of Cooling fan in operation -- (FAN)
(Function code data = 25)㩷
When Cooling Fan ON/OFF control is enabled (H06 = 1), this signal is turned on while the
cooling fan is running and is off while it is stopped. This signal can be used to make the
cooling system of peripheral equipment interlocked for an ON/OFF control. „ Assignment of Auto-resetting -- (TRY)
(Function code data = 26)㩷
This signal is turned on while the retry function is in operation. The retry function is specified
by H04 (Number of retries or resetting times) and H05 (Latency time or Reset interval). Refer
to function codes H04 and H05 for details of the number of retries and output timing.
9-73
„ Assignment of Universal DO Enabled -- (U-DO)
(Function code data = 27)㩷
Connect an inverter output terminal that Universal DO signal has been assigned to, to a digital
input terminal of peripheral equipment via RS485 communications link or field bus.
Consequently, you can allow the inverter to give commands to the peripheral equipment.
Universal DO can be used as an output signal independent of the operation of the inverter.
For the procedure for establishing access to Universal DO via the RS485
communications link or the field bus, refer to the respective Instruction Manual.
„ Assignment of Heat Sink Overheat Early Warning--(OH)
(Function code data = 28)㩷
This signal is turned on when the temperature of the heat sink of the inverter exceeds the
threshold of the overheat trip (J temperature minus 5°C) and is turned off when it drops
down to (the J.temperature minus 8°C). Thus, this signal serves as a warning so that you
can take necessary action before an overheat trip actually happens.
This signal is also turned on when the internal air circulation DC fan has locked for models of
45 kW or above (200V series) or 55 kW or above (400V series). „ Assignment of Service Life Alarm -- (LIFE)
(Function code data = 30)㩷
This signal is turned on when it is judged that any of capacitors such as DC link bus
capacitor/s (reservoir capacitor/s) and electrolytic capacitor/s on the printed circuit board and
cooling fan has exceeded the service life judgment criteria.
This signal is also turned on when the internal air circulation DC fan has locked for models of
45 kW or above (200V series) or 55 kW or above (400V series).
This function provides tentative information for service life of the parts. If this signal is issued,
check the service life of these parts in your inverter according to the normal maintenance
procedure to determine whether the parts should be replaced or not. To maintain stable and
reliable operation and avoid unexpected failures, daily and periodic maintenance must be
performed.
For details, refer to the FRENIC-Eco Instruction Manual (INR-SI47-0882-E), Chapter
7, Section 7.3, Table 7.3 "Criteria for Issuing a Lifetime Alarm."
„ Assignment of Command Loss Detected -- (REF OFF)
(Function code data 㧩 33)㩷
This signal is turned on when an analog input used as the frequency command source is in
command loss state under some condition due to a broken wire or a weak connection, this
signal is turned on upon detecting the state. The condition is defined by E65 (Command Loss
detection (Level). This signal is turned off when the operation under the analog input used as
the frequency command source is resumed.
For details of the command loss detection, refer to the descriptions of function code
E65.
„ Assignment of Inverter Output On -- (RUN2)
(Function code data = 35)㩷
This signal is turned on when the inverter is running at the starting frequency or below, or the
DC injection braking is in operation.
„ Assignment of Overload Prevention Control -- (OLP)
(Function code data = 36)㩷
This signal is turned ON when the overload prevention control is activated. The minimum
ON-duration is 100 ms.
For details of the overload prevention control, refer to the descriptions of function code
H70.
9-74
9.2 Details of Function Codes
„ Assignment of Current Detection -- (ID)
(Function code data = 37)㩷
This signal is turned on when the output current of the inverter has exceeded the level
specified by E34 (Current Detection (Level)) longer than the period specified by E35
(Current Detection (Timer)), and is turned off when the output current drops below 90% of
the rated operation level. (Minimum width (ON-duration) of the output signal: 100 ms)
Function code E34 is effective for not only the motor overload early warning (OL),
but also for the operation level of the current detection (ID).
For details of current detection, refer to the descriptions of function code E34 and E35.
„ Assignment of PID Alarm output -- (PID-ALM)
(Function code data = 42)㩷
Two types of alarm output concerning PID control are provided: absolute-value alarm and
deviation alarm.
For details of PID alarm, refer to the descriptions of function codes J11 through J13.
„ Assignment of PID Control Enabled -- (PID-CTL)
(Function code data = 43)㩷
This signal is turned on when PID control is enabled (PID cancel command (Hz/PID) = OFF)
and a Run command is ON.
The inverter may stop upon activation of slow flowrate stopping function or due to
other reasons, even if PID control is enabled. Even in such cases, (PID-CTL)
remains ON. As long as (PID-CTL) is ON, PID control is taking effect. Note that
the inverter may abruptly resume its operation, depending on the feedback value in
PID control.
Otherwise, an accident could occur.
For details of PID control, refer to the description of function codes J01 or later.
„ Assignment of Motor Stopping due to Slow Flowrate under PID Control -- (PID-STP)
(Function code data = 44)㩷
This signal is turned ON when the inverter is in stopped state due to slow flowrate during PID
control.
For details of the slow flowrate function during PID control, refer to the description of
function codes J15 through J17.
9-75
FUNCTION CODES
Design your machinery so that safety is ensured even in such cases.
Chap. 9
When PID control is enabled, the inverter may stop its output during operation because of
sensor signals or for some other reasons. In such cases, operation will resume automatically.
„ Assignment of Low Output Torque Detected -- (LU-TL)
(Function code data 㧩 45)㩷
This signal is turned ON when the torque value calculated by the inverter has been below the
level specified by E80 (Detect low torque (Detection level)) longer than the period specified
by E81 (Detect low torque (Timer)). (Minimum width of the output signal: 100 ms)
For details of low output torque detection, refer to the description of function codes E80
and E81.
„ Assignment of Inverter in Remote Operation -- (RMT)
(Function code data 㧩 54)㩷
In Remote/Local switching, this signal is ON while the inverter is in the remote mode.
For details about switching between Remote and Local, refer to Chapter 3, Section
3.2.3 "■ Switching between remote and local modes."
„ Assignment of Run Command Presence -- (AX2)
(Function code data = 55)㩷
When the Run enable (RE) is assigned to a digital input terminal, the inverter cannot be
started with a Run command alone. (AX2) should be turned on to indicate the presence of a
Run command to notify the inverter is ready to run upon receipt of a Run command, for
external control equipment. Once (RE) is issued in such a state, the inverter is started.
For details of the Run Enable (RE) and the Run command presence (AX2), refer to the
description of (RE) (data = 38) for function codes E01 through E05.
„ Assignment of Motor Overheat Detection (PTC) -- (THM)
(Function code data = 56)㩷
This signal indicates that a temperature alarm condition has been detected by a PTC
thermistor on the motor. You may have the option of continuing operation while detecting an
alarm (THM) instead of stopping with issuing J alarm.
For details of the PTC thermistor, refer to the description of function codes H26 and
H27.
„ Assignment of Alarm Relay Contact Output (for any fault) -- (ALM)
(Function code data = 99)㩷
This signal is turned on if any of the protective functions is activated and the inverter enters
Alarm mode.
9-76
9.2 Details of Function Codes
E31
Frequency Detection (FDT) (Operation level)
„ Frequency Detection — (FDT)
When the output frequency has exceeded the frequency detection level specified by E31, the
FDT signal goes on; when it has dropped below "the frequency detection level minus
hysteresis (fixed at 1 Hz)," it goes off.
You need to assign (FDT) (Frequency detection: data = 2) to one of digital output terminals.
- Data setting range: 0.0 to 120.0 (Hz)
Overload Early Warning/Current Detection (Level)
E35
Overload Early Warning/Current Detection (Timer)
„ Overload Early Warning
The warning signal (OL) is used to detect a symptom of an overload condition (alarm code
N) of the motor so that the user can take an appropriate action before the alarm actually
happens. The signal turns on when the current level specified by E34 (Overload early
warning) is exceeded. In typical cases, set E34 to 80-90% against data of F11 (Electronic
thermal motor overload protection (Operation level)). Specify also the thermal characteristics
of the motor with F10 (Electronic thermal motor overload protection (Select the motor
property)) and F12 (Electronic thermal motor overload protection (Thermal time constant)).
To utilize this feature, you need to assign (OL) (Motor overload early warning) (data = 7) to
any of the digital output terminals.
9-77
FUNCTION CODES
These function codes specify, in conjunction with output terminal signals, (OL) and (ID), the
level and duration of overload and current beyond which an early warning or an alarm will be
issued.
Chap. 9
E34
„ Current Detection
The signal (ID) turns on when the output current of the inverter has exceeded the level
specified by E34 (Current detection (Level)) and the output current continues longer than the
period specified by E35 (Current detection (Timer)). The signal turns off when the output
current drops below 90% of the rated operation level. (Minimum width of the output signal:
100 ms)
To utilize this feature, you need to assign (ID) (Current detection) (data = 37) to any of digital
output terminals.
- Data setting range (E34): Current value of 1 to 150% of the rated inverter current in units
of amperes. (0: disable)
- Data setting range (E35): 0.01 to 600.00 (sec.)
E40
PID Display Coefficient A
E41
PID Display Coefficient B
These function codes provide display coefficients to convert the PID process command, PID
feedback value, or analog input monitor in easy-to-understand mnemonic physical quantities
to display.
- Data setting range: -999 to 0.00 to 9990 for the display coefficients A and B.
„ Display Coefficients of PID Process Command and PID Feedback Value
The PID display coefficients A and B convert the PID process command and the PID
feedback value into mnemonic quantities before they are displayed. E40 specifies the PID
display coefficient A (display of the value at 100% of the PID process command or PID
feedback value); and E41 specifies the PID display coefficient B (display of the value at 0%
of the PID process command or PID feedback value).
The value displayed is determined as follows:
Value displayed = (PID process command or PID feedback value (%))/100 u (display
coefficient A - B) + B
9-78
9.2 Details of Function Codes
„ Example
You wish to maintain the pressure around 16 kPa (sensor voltage 3.13 V) while the pressure
sensor can detect 0 - 30 kPa over the output voltage range of 1 - 5 V.
Select the terminal [12] as the feedback terminal and set the gain to 200% so that 5V
corresponds to 100%.
By setting:
“Display at 100% of PID process command & PID feedback value = Display coefficient E40
= 30.0” and
“Display at 0% of PID process command & PID feedback value = Display coefficient E41 =
-7.5,”
you can have the monitor and the setting on the keypad of the value of the PID process
command and PID feedback value recognized as the pressure.
If you wish to control the pressure at 16 kPa on the keypad, you set the value to 16.0.
For details of PID control, refer to the description of function codes J01 and later.
„ Analog input monitor
By inputting analog signals from various sensors such as temperature sensors in air
conditioners to the inverter, you can monitor the state of peripheral devices via the
communications link. By using an appropriate display coefficient, you can also have various
values converted into physical values such as temperature and pressure before being
displayed.
To set up the analog input monitor, use function codes E61 through E63. Use E43 to
choose the item to be displayed.
9-79
FUNCTION CODES
For the method to display the PID process command and PID feedback value, refer to
the description of function code E43.
Chap. 9
E43
LED Monitor (Item selection)
Refer to E48.
E43 specifies the monitoring item to be displayed on the LED monitor.
Data for E43
The LED monitor
displays:
Description
0
Speed monitor
Selected by the sub item of function code E48
3
Output current
Inverter output current expressed in RMS (A)
4
Output voltage
Inverter output voltage expressed in RMS (V)
8
Calculated torque
Output torque of the motor (%)
9
Input power
Inverter's input power (kW)
10
PID process command
value (frequency) *
Refer to function codes E40 and E41.
12
PID feedback value *
Refer to function codes E40 and E41.
14
PID output value *
100% at Maximum frequency
15
Load factor
Inverter's load factor (%)
16
Motor output
Motor output (kW)
17
Analog input (Monitor) Refer to function codes E40 and E41
* If 0 (Disable) is set for function code J01, "- - - -" appears on the LED monitor.
Selecting the speed monitor in E43 allows you to select a speed-monitoring format
determined by E48 (: LED Monitor (Speed Monitor Item)) to display a speed.
Define the speed-monitoring format on the LED monitor as shown in the table below.
Data for E48
Display format of the sub item:
0
Output frequency
Expressed in Hz
3
Motor speed in r/min
120 y Number of poles (P01) u frequency (Hz)
4
Load shaft speed in
r/min
Coefficient for speed display (E50) u Frequency (Hz)
7
Display speed in %
100% at Maximum output frequency (F03)
9-80
9.2 Details of Function Codes
E45
LCD Monitor (Item selection)
E45 specifies the mode of the LCD display during Running mode using the multi-function
keypad.
Data for E45
What is displayed:
0
Running status, direction of rotation, operation guide
1
Output frequency, output current, calculated torque in bar graphs
Example of display for E45 = 0 (during running)
Chap. 9
Example of display for E45 = 1 (during running)
FUNCTION CODES
Full-scale values on bar charts
Item displayed
Output frequency
Output current
Calculated torque
Full scale
Maximum frequency (F03)
Inverter's rated current u 200%
Motor's rated torque u 200%
9-81
E46
LCD Monitor (Language selection)
E46 specifies the language of display on the multi-function keypad as follows:
Data for E46
E47
0
Japanese
1
English
2
German
3
French
4
Spanish
5
Italian
LCD Monitor (Contrast control)
Adjusts the contrast of the LCD monitor on the multi-function keypad as follows:
Data for E47
Contrast
Language
E48
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
Less
High
LED Monitor (Speed monitor item)
Refer to E43.
For how to set E48: LED Monitor (Speed monitor item), refer to the description of function
code E43.
E50
Coefficient for Speed Indication
Use this coefficient for displaying the load shaft speed on the LED monitor (refer to function
code E43).
„ Load shaft speed
The load shaft speed is displayed as E50 (Coefficient for speed indication) u frequency (Hz).
E51
Display Coefficient for Input Watt-hour Data
Use this coefficient (multiplication factor) for displaying the input watt-hour data (A) in
a part of maintenance information on the keypad.
The input watt-hour data will be displayed as follows:
E51 (Coefficient for input watt-hour data) u input watt-hour (kWh)
Setting E51 = 0.000 clears the input watt-hour and its data to “0.” If the setting E51
= 0.000 remains, accumulators cannot start counting. After clearing them, restore
the setting of E51 for the previous display coefficient.
For the procedure for viewing maintenance information, refer to Chapter 3
"OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD."
9-82
9.2 Details of Function Codes
E52
Keypad (Menu display mode)
E52 specifies the menu display mode on the standard keypad as shown in the table below.
Menu #
0
Menu
"Quick Setup"
LED
monitor
shows:
HP
HAA
GAA
EAA
1
"Data Setting"
RAA
JAA
LAA
[AA
QAA
Main functions
"Data
Checking"
TGR
3
"Drive
Monitoring"
QRG
Displays the running information required for
maintenance or test running.
4
"I/O Checking"
KAQ
Displays external interface information.
5
"Maintenance
Information"
EJG
Displays maintenance information including
accumulated run time.
6
"Alarm
Information"
CN
7
"Data Copying"
ER[
Displays the latest four alarm codes. You can refer to
the running information at the time when the alarm
occurred.
Allows you to read or write function code data, as
well as verifying it.
(Note) An o code appears only when any option is mounted on the inverter. For details, refer to the
instruction manual of the corresponding option.
For details of each menu item, refer to Chapter 3, "OPERATION USING THE
KEYPAD."
The setting of function code E52 determines the menu to be displayed as follows:
Data for E52
Mode
Menu to be displayed
0
Function code data editing mode
Menu #0, Menu #1, and Menu #7
1
Function code data check mode
Menu #2 and Menu #7
2
Full-menu mode
Menu #0 through #7
The multi-function keypad always displays all the menu items regardless of the
setting of this function. Additional menu items are included on the multi-function
keypad.
9-83
FUNCTION CODES
2
Chap. 9
Displays only basic function codes to customize the
inverter operation.
F codes
(Fundamental functions)
E codes
(Extension terminal
functions)
C codes
(Control functions of
frequency)
Selecting each of
P codes
these function codes
(Motor parameters)
enables its data to be
displayed/changed.
H codes
(High performance
functions)
J codes
(Application functions)
y codes (Link functions)
o code (Optional function)
(Note)
Displays only function codes that have been changed
from their factory defaults. You can refer to or
change those function code data.
E61
Analog Input for Terminal [12] (Extension function selection)
E62
Analog Input for Terminal [C1] (Extension function selection)
E63
Analog Input for Terminal [V2] (Extension function selection)
E61, E62, and E63 define the function of the terminals [12], [C1], and [V2], respectively.
There is no need to set up these terminals if they are to be used for frequency command
sources.
Data for
E61, E62, or
E63
0
Input assigned to [12],
[C1] and [V2]:
None
Description
--
1
Auxiliary frequency
command 1*
Auxiliary frequency input to be added to the
reference frequency given by Frequency
command 1 (F01). Will not be added to any
other reference frequency given by such as
Frequency command 2 and Multistep frequency
commands.
2
Auxiliary frequency
command 2*
Auxiliary frequency to be added to all reference
frequencies given by Frequency command 1,
Frequency command 2, Multistep frequency
commands, etc.
3
PID process command 1
Inputs process command sources such as
temperature and pressure under PID control.
You also need to set function code J02.
5
PID feedback value
Inputs feedback values such as temperature and
pressure under PID control.
Analog signal input
monitor
By inputting analog signals from various
sensors such as the temperature sensors in air
conditioners to the inverter, you can monitor the
state of external devices via the communications
link. By using an appropriate display
coefficient, you can also have various values to
be converted into physical values such as
temperature and pressure before being
displayed.
20
* For details, refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.2 "Drive Frequency Command Generator."
If these terminals have been set up to have the same data, the operation priority is
given in the following order:
E61 > E62 > E63
E64
Saving Digital Reference Frequency
E64 specifies how to save the reference frequency specified in digital formats by the
keys on the keypad as shown in the table below.
/
Data for E64
How to save the reference frequency:
0
The reference frequency will be automatically saved when the main power is
turned off. At the next power-on, the inverter will start at the reference
frequency at the time of the previous power-off of the main power supply.
1
key. If the control
The reference frequency is to be saved by pressing the
key, the data will be lost. At the
power is turned off before you press the
next power-on, the inverter will start at the reference frequency saved when
key last.
you pressed the
9-84
9.2 Details of Function Codes
E65
Command Loss Detection (Level)
When the analog frequency command (by frequency setting through terminals [12], [C1], and
[V2]) has dropped below 10% of the expected frequency command within 400 ms, the
inverter presumes that the analog frequency command wire has been broken and continues its
operation at the frequency determined by the ratio specified by E65 to the reference
frequency. When the frequency command level (in voltage or current) returns to a level
higher than that specified by E65, the inverter presumes that the broken wire has been fixed
and continues to run following the frequency command.
9-85
FUNCTION CODES
Avoid abrupt voltage or current change for the analog frequency command.
Otherwise, a broken wire condition may be recognized.
When E65 is set at 999 (Disabled), though the command loss detection signal (REF
OFF) is issued, the reference frequency remains unchanged (the inverter runs at the
analog frequency command as specified).
When E65 is set at “0” or 999, the reference frequency level that the broken wire
has been recognized as fixed is “f1 u 0.2.”
When E65 is set at 100% or higher, the reference frequency level of the broken wire
fixing is “f1 u 1.”
The command loss detection is not affected by the setting of Analog input
adjustment (filter time constants: C33, C38, and C43).
Chap. 9
In the diagram above, f1 is the level of the analog frequency command sampled at any given
time. The sampling is repeated at regular intervals to continually monitor the wiring
connection of the analog frequency command.
E80
Detect Low Torque (Detection level)
E81
Detect Low Torque (Timer)
The signal (U-TL) turns on when the torque calculated by the inverter with reference to its
output current has dropped below the level specified by E80 (Detect low torque (Detection
level)) for the time longer than the period specified by E81 (Detect low torque (Timer)). The
signal turns off when the calculated torque exceeds the level specified by E80 + 5%.
(Minimum width of output signal: 100 ms)
You need to assign (U-TL) (Low output torque detection) (data = 45) to the general-purpose
output terminals.
The operation level is set so that 100% corresponds to the rated torque of the motor.
In the inverter’s low frequency operation, as substantial error in torque calculation occurs,
low torque cannot be detected. (In this case, the result of recognition before entering this
operation range is retained.)
The low torque detection signal (U-TL) turns off when the inverter is stopped..
Since the motor parameters are used in the calculation of torque, it is recommended that you
perform auto-tuning using by function code P04 to achieve higher accuracy.
E98
Command Assignment to Terminal [FWD]
(Refer to E01 to E05.)
E99
Command Assignment to Terminal [REV]
(Refer to E01 to E05.)
For details of the command assignment to terminals [FWD] and [REV], refer to the
descriptions for function codes E01 to E05.
9-86
9.2 Details of Function Codes
9.2.3
C codes (Control functions of frequency)
C01 to C03
C04
Jump Frequency 1, 2 and 3
Jump Frequency Band
These function codes enable the inverter to jump over three different points on the output
frequency in order to skip resonance caused by the motor running frequency and natural
frequency of the driven machinery.
- While you are increasing the reference frequency, the moment the reference frequency
reaches the bottom of the jump frequency band, the inverter keeps the output at that bottom
frequency. When the reference frequency exceeds the upper limit of the jump frequency
band, the internal reference frequency takes on the value of the reference frequency. When
you are decreasing the reference frequency, the situation will be reversed.
- When the more than two jump frequency bands overlap, the inverter actually takes the
lowest frequency within the overlapped bands as the bottom frequency and the highest as
the upper limit. Refer to the figure on the lower right.
Chap. 9
„ Jump frequencies 1, 2 and 3 (C01, C02 and C03)
Specify the center of the jump frequency band.
- Data setting range: 0.0 to 120.0 (Hz) (Setting at 0.0 results in no jump band)
„ Jump frequency band (C04)
Specify the jump frequency band.
- Data setting range: 0.0 to 30.0 (Hz) (Setting to 0.0 results in no jump band)
9-87
FUNCTION CODES
C05 to C11
Multistep Frequency 1 to 7
„ These function codes specify 7 frequencies required for driving the motor at
frequencies 1 to 7.
Turning terminal commands (SS1), (SS2) and (SS4) ON/OFF selectively switches the
reference frequency of the inverter in 7 steps. For details of the terminal function assignment,
refer to the descriptions for function codes E01 to E05 " Terminal Command Assignment to
[X1] to [X5]."
- Data setting range: 0.00 to 120.00 (Hz)
The combination of (SS1), (SS2), and (SS3) and the selected frequencies are as follows.
(SS4)
(SS2)
(SS1)
Selected frequency command
OFF
OFF
OFF
Other than multistep frequency *
OFF
OFF
ON
C05 (multistep frequency 1)
OFF
ON
OFF
C06 (multistep frequency 2)
OFF
ON
ON
C07 (multistep frequency 3)
ON
OFF
OFF
C08 (multistep frequency 4)
ON
OFF
ON
C09 (multistep frequency 5)
ON
ON
OFF
C10 (multistep frequency 6)
ON
ON
ON
C11 (multistep frequency 7)
* "Other than multistep frequency" means any other frequency command sources than multistep frequency
command sourced by the frequency command 1 (F01) and frequency command 2 (C30).
To use these features, you need to assign multistep frequency selections (SS1), (SS2), and
(SS4) (data = 0, 1, 2) to the digital input terminals.
For the relationship between multistep frequency operation and other frequency
commands, refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.2 "Drive Frequency Command Generator."
9-88
9.2 Details of Function Codes
„ To enable PID control (J01 = 1 or 2):
You can set the process command in PID control as the preset value (multistep frequency 1).
You can also use multistep frequency (multistep frequency 3) for manual speed command
during disabling of PID control ((Hz/PID) = ON).
• Process Command
(SS4)
(SS2)
(SS1)
Frequency Command
OFF
㧙
㧙
Process command by J02
ON
㧙
㧙
Multistep frequency by C08
You can set C08 in increments of 1 Hz. The following formula can be used to convert a value
of the process command to the C08 data and vice versa:
C08 data = Process command (%) u Maximum frequency (F03)y100
• Manual speed command
(SS2)
(SS1)
Selected frequency
㧙
OFF
OFF
Other than multistep frequency
㧙
OFF
ON
C05 (multistep frequency 1)
㧙
ON
OFF
C06 (multistep frequency 2)
㧙
ON
ON
C07 (multistep frequency 3)
For PID process commands, refer to the block diagram in Chapter 4, Section 4.9, "PID
Frequency Command Generator."
C30
Frequency Command 2
(Refer to F01.)
For details of the frequency command 2, refer to the description for function code F01.
C32
Analog Input Adjustment for Terminal [12] (Gain)
C34
Analog Input Adjustment for Terminal [12] (Gain reference point)
(Refer to F18.)
(Refer to F18.)
C37
Analog Input Adjustment for Terminal [C1] (Gain)
C39
Analog Input Adjustment for Terminal [C1] (Gain reference point)
(Refer to F18.)
(Refer to F18.)
C42
Analog Input Adjustment for Terminal [V2] (Gain)
C44
Analog Input Adjustment for Terminal [V2] (Gain reference point)
(Refer to F18.)
(Refer to F18.)
For details of the analog input commands, refer to the description for function code F18.
9-89
FUNCTION CODES
Chap. 9
(SS4)
C33
Analog Input Adjustment for Terminal [12] (Filter time constant)
C38
Analog Input Adjustment for Terminal [C1] (Filter time constant)
C43
Analog Input Adjustment for Terminal [V2] (Filter time constant)
These function codes provide the filter time constants for the voltage and current of the
analog input at terminals [12], [C1], and [V2]. Choose appropriate values for the time
constants considering the response speed of the mechanical system as large time constants
slow down the response. In case the input voltage fluctuates because of noise, specify large
time constants.
- Data setting range: 0.00 to 5.00 (sec.)
C50
Bias Reference Point (Frequency command 1)
(Refer to F18.)
For details of setting the bias reference point for the frequency command 1, refer to the
descriptions of function code F18.
C51
Bias (PID command 1)
C52
Bias reference point (PID command 1)
These function codes specify the bias and bias reference point of the analog PID process
command 1 to enable defining arbitrary relationship between the analog input and PID
process commands.
The actual setting is the same as that of function code F18. For details, refer to the
description of function code F18.
Note that function codes C32, C34, C37, C39, C42, and C44 are shared by the
frequency commands.
„ Bias (C51)
- Data setting range: -100.00 to 100.00 (%)
„ Bias reference point (C52)
- Data setting range: 0.00 to 100.00 (%)
C53
Selection of Normal/Inverse Operation (Frequency command souce1)
C53 switches the reference frequency given by Frequency command 1 (F01) or the manual
frequency command source under PID control between normal and inverse.
For details, refer to the description of Switch normal/inverse command (IVS) (data =
21) for function codes E01 through E05.
9-90
9.2 Details of Function Codes
9.2.4
P codes (Motor parameters)
P01
Motor (No. of poles)
P01 specifies the number of poles of the motor. Enter the value shown on the nameplate of the
motor. This setting is used to display the motor speed on the LED monitor (refer to function
code E43). The following formula is used for the conversion:
Motor speed (r/min)
P02
120
× Frequency (Hz)
No. of poles
Motor (Capacity)
P02 specifies the rated capacity of the motor. Enter the rated value shown on the nameplate of
the motor.
Data for P02
Unit
Dependency on function code P99
kW
P99 = 0, 3 or 4
HP
P99 = 1
0.01 to 1000
P03
Motor (Rated current)
- Data setting range: 0.00 to 2000 (A)
P04
Motor (Auto-tuning)
This function automatically detects the motor parameters and saves them in the inverter’s
internal memory. Basically, you do not need to perform tuning if you use a Fuji standard
motor with a standard connection with the inverter.
In any of the following cases, you may not obtain the best performance under auto torque
boost, torque calculation monitoring, or auto energy saving operation, by default settings,
since the motor parameters are different from that of Fuji standard motors. In such a case,
perform auto tuning.
• The motor to be driven is made by other manufacturer or is a non-standard motor.
• Cabling between the motor and the inverter is long.
• A reactor is inserted between the motor and the inverter.
For details of auto tuning, refer to the FRENIC-Eco Instruction Manual
(INR-SI47-0882-E), Chapter 4, Section 4.1.3 "Preparation before running the motor for
a test—Setting function code data."
9-91
FUNCTION CODES
Chap. 9
P03 specifies the rated current of the motor. Enter the rated value shown on the nameplate of
the motor.
P06
Motor (No-load current)
P07
Motor (%R1)
P08
Motor (%X)
These function codes specify no load current, %R1, and %X. Obtain the appropriate values
from the test report of the motor or by calling the manufacturer of the motor. If you perform
auto tuning, these parameters are automatically set as well.
• No load current: Enter the value obtained from motor manufacturer.
• %R1: Enter the value calculated by the following formula:
%R1
R1 Cable R1
× 100 (%)
V / ( 3× I )
where,
R1: primary resistance of the motor (:)
Cable R1: resistance of the output cable (:)
V: rated voltage of the motor (V)
I: rated current of the motor (A)
• %X: Enter the value calculated by the following formula:
%X
X1 X2 × XM / (X2 XM) Cable X
× 100 (%)
V / ( 3× I )
where,
X1: primary leakage reactance of the motor (:)
X2: secondary leakage reactance of the motor (converted to primary) (:)
XM: exciting reactance of the motor (:)
Cable X: reactance of the output cable (:)
V: rated voltage of the motor (V)
I: rated current of the motor (A)
For reactance, choose the value at the base frequency (F04).
9-92
9.2 Details of Function Codes
P99
Motor Selection
P99 specifies the motor to be used.
Data for P99
Motor type
0
Fuji standard motors (8-series)
1
GE motors
3
Fuji standard motors (6-series)
4
Other motors
Automatic control such as auto-torque boost and auto-energy saving or motor overload
protection (electronic thermal motor overload protection) uses the motor parameters and
characteristics. To match the property of a control system with that of the motor, select
characteristics of the motor, and set H03 Data initializing at "2" to initialize the old motor
parameters stored in the inverter. When initialization is complete, data of P03, P06, P07, and
P08 and the old related internal data is automatically updated.
For P99, enter the following data according to the motor type.
• Fuji standard 8-series motors (Current standard): P99 = 0 (Characteristics 1)
• Fuji standard 6-series motors (Conventional standard): P99 = 3 (Characteristics 2)
• Other manufacturer’s or unknown motors: P99 = 4 (Others)
• If you choose P99 = 4 (Others), the inverter runs following the motor
characteristics of Fuji standard 8-series.
Chap. 9
• The inverter also supports motors rated by HP (horse power: typical in North
America, P99 = 1).
FUNCTION CODES
9-93
9.2.5
H03
H codes (High performance functions)
Data Initializing
H03 initializes the current function code settings to the factory defaults or initializes the
motor parameters.
To change the H03 data, it is necessary to press
simultaneously.
Data for H03
and
keys or
and
keys
Function
0
Disable initialization
(Settings manually made by the user will be retained.)
1
Initialize all function code data to the factory defaults
Initialize the motor parameters in accordance with P02 (rated capacity) and
P99 (motor selection).
2
Function codes subject to initialization: P01, P03, P06, P07, and P08,
including the internal control constants
These function codes will be initialized to the values listed in tables on the
following pages.
• To initialize the motor parameters, set the related function codes as follows.
1) P02 Motor (Rated
capacity):
Set the rated capacity of the motor to be used in kW.
2) P99 Motor Selection:
Select the characteristics of the motor. (Refer to the
descriptions given for P99.)
3) H03 Data Initializing:
Initialize the motor parameters. (H03=2)
4) P03 Motor
(Rated current):
Set the rated current on the nameplate if the already set
data differs from the rated current printed on the nameplate
of the motor.
• Upon completion of the initialization, the data of function code H03 is reset to "0" (default
setting).
• If a capacity other than that of applicable motor rating is set at P02, the capacity will be
internally converted to the applicable motor rating (see the table on the following pages).
9-94
9.2 Details of Function Codes
„ When Fuji standard 8-series motors (P99 = 0) or other motors (P99 = 4) are selected,
the motor parameters for P02 through P08 are as listed in following tables.
200 V series motors shipped for Japan
Applicable motor
rating (kW)
Motor
capacity
(kW) P02
Rated
current (A)
P03
No-load
current
(A)
P06
%R
(%)
P07
%X
(%)
P08
0.01 to 0.09
0.06
0.44
0.40
13.79
11.75
0.10 to 0.19
0.1
0.68
0.55
12.96
12.67
0.20 to 0.39
0.2
1.30
1.06
12.95
12.92
0.40 to 0.74
0.4
2.30
1.66
10.20
13.66
0.75 to 1.49
0.75
3.60
2.30
8.67
10.76
1.50 to 2.19
1.5
6.10
3.01
6.55
11.21
2.20 to 3.69
2.2
9.20
4.85
6.48
10.97
3.70 to 5.49
3.7
15.0
7.67
5.79
11.25
5.50 to 7.49
5.5
22.5
11.0
5.28
14.31
7.50 to 10.99
7.5
29.0
12.5
4.50
14.68
42.0
17.7
3.78
15.09
15.00 to 18.49
15
55.0
20.0
3.25
16.37
18.50 to 21.99
18.5
67.0
21.4
2.92
16.58
22.00 to 29.99
22
78.0
25.1
2.70
16.00
30.00 to 36.99
30
107
38.9
2.64
14.96
37.00 to 44.99
37
130
41.5
2.76
16.41
45.00 to 54.99
45
156
47.5
2.53
16.16
55.00 to 74.99
55
190
58.6
2.35
16.20
75.00 to 89.99
75
260
83.2
1.98
16.89
90.00 to 109.99
90
310
99.2
1.73
16.03
110.00 or above
110
376
91.2
1.99
20.86
9-95
FUNCTION CODES
11
Chap. 9
11.00 to 14.99
400 V series motors shipped for Japan
Applicable motor
rating (kW)
Motor
capacity
(kW) P02
Rated
current (A)
P03
No-load
current
(A)
P06
%R
(%)
P07
%X
(%)
P08
0.01 to 0.09
0.06
0.22
0.20
13.79
11.75
0.10 to 0.19
0.10
0.35
0.27
12.96
12.67
0.20 to 0.39
0.20
0.65
0.53
12.95
12.92
0.40 to 0.74
0.4
1.15
0.83
10.20
13.66
0.75 to 1.49
0.75
1.80
1.15
8.67
10.76
1.50 to 2.19
1.5
3.10
1.51
6.55
11.21
2.20 to 3.69
2.2
4.60
2.43
6.48
10.97
3.70 to 5.49
3.7
7.50
3.84
5.79
11.25
5.50 to 7.49
5.5
11.5
5.50
5.28
14.31
7.50 to 10.99
7.5
14.5
6.25
4.50
14.68
8.85
3.78
15.09
11.00 to 14.99
11
21.0
15.00 to 18.49
15
27.5
10.0
3.25
16.37
18.50 to 21.99
18.5
34.0
10.7
2.92
16.58
22.00 to 29.99
22
39.0
12.6
2.70
16.00
30.00 to 36.99
30
54.0
19.5
2.64
14.96
37.00 to 44.99
37
65.0
20.8
2.76
16.41
45.00 to 54.99
45
78.0
23.8
2.53
16.16
55.00 to 74.99
55
95.0
29.3
2.35
16.20
75.00 to 89.99
75
130
41.6
1.98
16.89
90.00 to 109.99
90
155
49.6
1.73
16.03
110.00 to 131.99
110
188
45.6
1.99
20.86
132.00 to 159.99
132
224
57.6
1.75
18.90
160.00 to 199.99
160
272
64.5
1.68
19.73
200.00 to 219.99
200
335
71.5
1.57
20.02
220.00 to 249.99
220
365
71.8
1.60
20.90
250.00 to 279.99
250
415
87.9
1.39
18.88
280.00 to 314.99
280
462
93.7
1.36
19.18
315.00 to 354.99
315
520
120
0.84
16.68
355.00 to 399.99
355
580
132
0.83
16.40
400.00 to 449.99
400
670
200
0.62
15.67
450.00 to 529.99
450
770
270
0.48
13.03
530.00 or above
530
880
270
0.53
13.05
9-96
9.2 Details of Function Codes
„ When Fuji standard 6-series motors (P99 = 3) is selected, the motor parameters for
P02 through P08 are as listed in following tables.
The values below in the "Rated current" column are exclusively applicable to the
four-pole Fuji standard motors rated for 200 V and 400 V at 50 Hz. Even if you use
Fuji standard motors, when those base frequency, rated voltage, and the number of
poles differ from the above mentioned, change the P03 data to the rated current
shown on the motor's nameplate.
If you use non-standard or other manufacturer’s motors, change the P03 data to the
rated current printed on the motor's nameplate.
200 V series motors shipped for Japan
Rated
current (A)
P03
No-load
current
(A)
P06
%R
(%)
P07
%X
(%)
P08
0.01 to 0.09
0.06
0.44
0.40
13.79
11.75
0.10 to 0.19
0.1
0.68
0.55
12.96
12.67
0.20 to 0.39
0.2
1.30
1.00
12.61
13.63
0.40 to 0.74
0.4
2.30
1.56
10.20
14.91
0.75 to 1.49
0.75
3.60
2.35
8.67
10.66
1.50 to 2.19
1.5
6.10
3.00
6.55
11.26
2.20 to 3.69
2.2
9.20
4.85
6.48
10.97
3.70 to 5.49
3.7
15.0
7.70
5.79
11.22
5.50 to 7.49
5.5
22.0
10.7
5.09
13.66
7.50 to 10.99
7.5
29.0
12.5
4.50
14.70
11.00 to 14.99
11
42.0
17.6
3.78
15.12
15.00 to 18.49
15
55.0
20.0
3.24
16.37
18.50 to 21.99
18.5
67.0
21.9
2.90
17.00
22.00 to 29.99
22
78.0
25.1
2.70
16.05
30.00 to 36.99
30
107
38.9
2.69
15.00
37.00 to 44.99
37
130
41.5
2.76
16.42
45.00 to 54.99
45
156
47.5
2.53
16.16
55.00 to 74.99
55
190
58.6
2.35
16.20
75.00 to 89.99
75
260
83.2
1.98
16.89
90.00 to 109.99
90
310
99.2
1.73
16.03
110.00 or above
110
376
91.2
1.99
20.86
9-97
FUNCTION CODES
Motor
capacity
(kW) P02
Chap. 9
Applicable motor
rating (kW)
400 V series motors destined for Japan
Applicable motor
rating (kW)
Motor
capacity
(kW) P02
Rated
current (A)
P03
No-load
current
(A)
P06
%R
(%)
P07
%X
(%)
P08
0.01 to 0.09
0.06
0.22
0.20
13.79
11.75
0.10 to 0.19
0.10
0.35
0.27
12.96
12.67
0.20 to 0.39
0.20
0.65
0.50
12.61
13.63
0.40 to 0.74
0.4
1.20
0.78
10.20
14.91
0.75 to 1.49
0.75
1.80
1.18
8.67
10.66
1.50 to 2.19
1.5
3.10
1.50
6.55
11.26
2.20 to 3.69
2.2
4.60
2.43
6.48
10.97
3.70 to 5.49
3.7
7.50
3.85
5.79
11.22
5.50 to 7.49
5.5
11.0
5.35
5.09
13.66
7.50 to 10.99
7.5
14.5
6.25
4.50
14.70
8.80
3.78
15.12
11.00 to 14.99
11
21.0
15.00 to 18.49
15
27.5
10.0
3.24
16.37
18.50 to 21.99
18.5
34.0
11.0
2.90
17.00
22.00 to 29.99
22
39.0
12.6
2.70
16.05
30.00 to 36.99
30
54.0
19.5
2.69
15.00
37.00 to 44.99
37
65.0
20.8
2.76
16.42
45.00 to 54.99
45
78.0
23.8
2.53
16.16
55.00 to 74.99
55
95.0
29.3
2.35
16.20
75.00 to 89.99
75
130
41.6
1.98
16.89
90.00 to 109.99
90
155
49.6
1.73
16.03
110.00 to 131.99
110
188
45.6
1.99
20.86
132.00 to 159.99
132
224
57.6
1.75
18.90
160.00 to 199.99
160
272
64.5
1.68
19.73
200.00 to 219.99
200
335
71.5
1.57
20.02
220.00 to 249.99
220
365
71.8
1.60
20.90
250.00 to 279.99
250
415
87.9
1.39
18.88
280.00 to 314.99
280
462
93.7
1.36
19.18
315.00 to 354.99
315
520
120
0.84
16.68
355.00 to 399.99
355
580
132
0.83
16.40
400.00 to 449.99
400
670
200
0.62
15.67
450.00 to 529.99
450
770
270
0.48
13.03
530.00 or above
530
880
270
0.53
13.05
9-98
9.2 Details of Function Codes
„ When HP motors (P99 = 1) is selected, the motor parameters for P02 through P08 are
as listed in following tables.
The values below in the "Rated current" column are exclusively applicable to the
four-pole Fuji standard motors rated for 200 V and 400 V at 50 Hz. If you use any of
other voltage series, poles other than 4, non-standard or other manufacturer’s
motors, change the P03 data to its rated current printed on the motor's nameplate.
For 200 V series motors shipped for Japan
Applicable motor
rating (HP)
Motor
capacity
(HP)
P02
Rated
current (A)
P03
No-load
current
(A)
P06
%R
(%)
P07
%X
(%)
P08
0.01 to 0.11
0.1
0.44
0.40
13.79
11.75
0.12 to 0.24
0.12
0.68
0.55
12.96
12.67
0.25 to 0.49
0.25
1.40
1.12
11.02
13.84
0.50 to 0.99
0.5
2.00
1.22
6.15
8.80
1.00 to 1.99
1
3.00
1.54
3.96
8.86
2.00 to 2.99
2
5.80
2.80
4.29
7.74
3.00 to 4.99
3
7.90
3.57
3.15
20.81
5.00 to 7.49
5
12.60
4.78
3.34
23.57
7.50 to 9.99
7.5
18.60
6.23
2.65
28.91
25.30
8.75
2.43
30.78
15.00 to 19.99
15
37.30
12.70
2.07
29.13
20.00 to 24.99
20
49.10
9.20
2.09
29.53
25.00 to 29.99
25
60.00
16.70
1.75
31.49
30.00 to 39.99
30
72.40
19.80
1.90
32.55
40.00 to 49.99
40
91.00
13.60
1.82
25.32
50.00 to 59.99
50
115.00
18.70
1.92
24.87
60.00 to 74.99
60
137.00
20.80
1.29
26.99
75.00 to 99.99
75
174.00
28.60
1.37
27.09
100.00 to 124.99
100
226.00
37.40
1.08
23.80
125.00 to 149.99
125
268.00
29.80
1.05
22.90
150.00 or above
150
337.00
90.40
0.96
21.61
9-99
FUNCTION CODES
10
Chap. 9
10.00 to 14.99
For 400 V series motors shipped for Japan
Applicable motor
rating (HP)
Motor
capacity
(HP)
P02
Rated
current (A)
P03
No-load
current
(A)
P06
%R
(%)
P07
%X
(%)
P08
0.01 to 0.11
0.1
0.22
0.20
13.79
11.75
0.12 to 0.24
0.12
0.34
0.27
12.96
12.67
0.25 to 0.49
0.25
0.70
0.56
11.02
13.84
0.50 to 0.99
0.5
1.00
0.61
6.15
8.80
1.00 to 1.99
1
1.50
0.77
3.96
8.86
2.00 to 2.99
2
2.90
1.40
4.29
7.74
3.00 to 4.99
3
4.00
1.79
3.15
20.81
5.00 to 7.49
5
6.30
2.39
3.34
23.57
7.50 to 9.99
7.5
9.30
3.12
2.65
28.91
10.00 to 14.99
10
12.70
4.37
2.43
30.78
15.00 to 19.99
15
18.70
6.36
2.07
29.13
20.00 to 24.99
20
24.60
4.60
2.09
29.53
25.00 to 29.99
25
30.00
8.33
1.75
31.49
30.00 to 39.99
30
36.20
9.88
1.90
32.55
40.00 to 49.99
40
45.50
6.80
1.82
25.32
50.00 to 59.99
50
57.50
9.33
1.92
24.87
60.00 to 74.99
60
68.70
10.40
1.29
26.99
75.00 to 99.99
75
86.90
14.30
1.37
27.09
100.00 to 124.99
100
113.00
18.70
1.08
23.80
125.00 to 149.99
125
134.00
14.90
1.05
22.90
150.00 to 174.99
150
169.00
45.20
0.96
21.61
175.00 to 199.99
175
169.00
45.20
0.96
21.61
200.00 to 249.99
200
231.00
81.80
0.72
20.84
250.00 to 299.99
250
272.00
41.10
0.71
18.72
300.00 to 324.99
300
323.00
45.10
0.53
18.44
325.00 to 349.99
325
323.00
45.10
0.53
18.44
350.00 to 399.99
350
375.00
68.30
0.99
19.24
400.00 to 449.99
400
429.00
80.70
1.11
18.92
450.00 to 499.99
450
481.00
85.50
0.95
19.01
500.00 to 599.99
500
534.00
99.20
1.05
18.39
600.00 to 649.99
600
638.00
140.00
0.85
18.38
650.00 or above
650
638.00
140.00
0.85
18.38
9-100
9.2 Details of Function Codes
H04
Auto-resetting
(Times)
H05
Auto-resetting
(Reset Interval)
While the auto-resetting feature is specified, even if protective functions subject to retry is
activated and the inverter enters the forced to stop state (tripped state), the inverter will
automatically attempt to reset the tripped state and restart without issuing an alarm (for any
faults). Once the inverter enters the alarm mode in excess of the times specified by the
auto-resetting times H04, it will issue an alarm (for any faults) and not attempt to auto-reset
the tripped state.
Listed below are the recoverable alarm statuses of the inverter.
Alarm status
LED monitor
displays:
Alarm status
LED monitor
displays:
Instantaneous
overcurrent
protection
E, E or E
Motor overheated
J
Overvoltage
protection
W, W or W
Motor overloaded
N
Heat sink overheated
J
Inverter overloaded
NW
Inverter overheated
J
„ Number of Resetting Times (H04)
- Data setting range: 1 to 10 (times) (If "0" is set, the "retry" operation will not be activated.)
Design the machinery so that human body and peripheral equipment safety is ensured even
when the auto-resetting succeeds.
Otherwise an accident could occur.
9-101
FUNCTION CODES
If the "retry" function has been specified, the inverter may automatically restart and run the
motor stopped due to a trip fault, depending on the cause of the tripping.
Chap. 9
Sets the number of auto-resetting "retry" times for automatic escaping the alarm mode. If the
protective function is activated more than the specified resetting (retry) times, inverter enters
the alarm mode, issues an alarm (for any faults) and not attempt to escape the alarm mode.
„ Reset Interval (H05)
- Data setting range: 0.5 to 20.0 (sec.)
Sets the interval time to attempt performing auto-resetting the alarm mode (tripped state).
Refer to the timing scheme diagram below.
<Operation timing scheme>
<Timing scheme for failed retry (No. of retry times: three)>
- The retry operation state can be monitored by external equipment via the inverter’s output
terminal [Y1] through [Y3], [Y5A/C], or [30A/B/C]. Set the data "26" of terminal function
(TRY) in function codes E20 through E22, E24 and E27 to one of these terminals.
H06
Cooling Fan ON/OFF Control
To prolong the life of the cooling fan and to reduce fan noise during running, the cooling fan
is stopped when the temperature inside the inverter drops below a certain level while the
inverter is stopped. However, since frequent switching of the cooling fan shortens its life, it is
kept running for 10 minutes once it is started.
This function code (H06: Cooling fan control) allows you to specify whether the cooling fan
is to be kept running all the time or to be controlled ON/OFF.
Data for H06
Cooling fan ON/OFF:
0
Disable (Fan is always in operation)
1
Enable (ON/OFF controllable)
9-102
9.2 Details of Function Codes
H07
Acceleration/Deceleration Pattern
H07 specifies the acceleration and deceleration
patterns (Patterns to control output frequency).
Data for H07
Accl./Decel. pattern
0
Default: Linear
1
S-curve (weak)
2
S-curve (strong)
3
Curvilinear
Linear acceleration/deceleration
The inverter runs the motor with the constant acceleration and deceleration.
S-curve acceleration/deceleration
To reduce the impact on the inverter-driven motor and/or its mechanical load during
acceleration/deceleration, the inverter gradually accelerates/decelerates the motor in both the
acceleration/deceleration starting and ending zones. Two types of S-curve
acceleration/deceleration are available; 5% (weak) and 10% (strong) of the maximum
frequency, which are shared by the four inflection points. The acceleration/deceleration time
command determines the duration of acceleration/deceleration in the linear period; hence, the
actual acceleration/deceleration time is longer than the reference acceleration/deceleration
time.
Chap. 9
<S-curve acceleration/deceleration (weak): when the frequency change is more than 10% of
the maximum frequency>
Acceleration/deceleration time (s): (2 u 5/100 + 90/100+ 2 u 5/100) u (reference
acceleration or deceleration time)
= 1.1 u (reference acceleration or deceleration time)
<S-curve acceleration/deceleration (strong): when the frequency change is more than 20% of
the maximum frequency>
Acceleration/deceleration time (s): (2 u 10/100 + 80/100 + 2 u 10/100) u (reference
acceleration/deceleration time)
= 1.2 u (reference acceleration/deceleration time)
9-103
FUNCTION CODES
Acceleration/deceleration time
Curvilinear acceleration/deceleration
Acceleration/deceleration is linear below the base frequency (constant torque) but slows
down above the base frequency to maintain a certain level of load factor (constant output).
This acceleration/deceleration pattern allows the motor to accelerate or decelerate with the
maximum performance of the motor.
The figures at left show
the acceleration
characteristics.
Similar characteristics
apply to the
deceleration.
Choose an appropriate acceleration/deceleration time considering the machinery’s
load torque.
For details, refer to Chapter 7 "SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND
INVERTER CAPACITIES."
9-104
9.2 Details of Function Codes
H09
Auto Sync Search (Start mode)
Refer to H17.
H09 and H17 specify the auto synch search start mode and its starting frequency respectively
to synchronize and run the idling motor without stopping it.
The start mode can be also enabled by assigning the terminal command (STM) (Select start
mode) to one of digital input terminals (E01 to E05: function code data = 26). If no (STM) is
assigned, the inverter interprets it as (STM) being on by default.
Synchronizing an idling motor
When a run command is turned ON while (STM) is ON, the inverter starts the auto sync
search operation at the starting frequency (H17) to synchronize and run the idling motor
without stopping it. If there is a large difference between the motor speed and the
synchronizing frequency, the current limiting control may be triggered. The inverter
automatically reduces its output frequency to homologize with the idling motor speed for
synchronizing them each other. Upon completion of the synchronization, the inverter releases
the current limiting control and accelerates the motor to the reference frequency in
accordance with the preset acceleration time.
Chap. 9
Synchronization
This digital input signal specifies whether or not to perform auto sync search operation when
the inverter starts.
Data for H09
Auto synch
search start
mode
Select start
mode (STM)
0
Disable
-
3, 4, or 5
Function
Start at the starting frequency
ON
Start at the auto sync search starting
frequency (H17)
OFF
Start at the starting frequency
Enable
„ Starting frequency (H17)
H17 specifies the starting frequency for the auto sync search operation for an idling motor. Be
sure to set a value higher than the speed of the idling motor. Otherwise, an overvoltage trip
may occur. If the current motor speed is unknown, specify "999" that uses the maximum
frequency at the start of auto sync search operation.
9-105
FUNCTION CODES
„ Select start mode (STM) (Digital input signal)
„ Auto sync search start mode (H09)
H09 specifies the starting rotational direction of run command, auto sync search
(forward/reverse), and the starting pattern (pattern 1 to 4). If the motor is idling in reverse
direction that is against the specified direction because of natural convection, it is necessary
to start it in the direction opposite to the rotational direction of original reference frequency.
For the case when the rotational direction of the idling motor is unknown, two starting
patterns are provided as listed below, which start search from forward rotation and, if not
succeeded from reverse rotation (e.g. H09 =5, pattern 3), starts search from reverse rotation
(e.g. H09 =5, pattern 4).
Data for H09
3
4
5
Run command
Rotational direction
at the start of auto
sync search
Starting pattern
Run forward
Forward
Pattern 1
Run reverse
Reverse
Pattern 2
Run forward
Forward
Pattern 3
Run reverse
Reverse
Pattern 4
Run forward
Reverse
Pattern 4
Run reverse
Forward
Pattern 3
Starting patterns
The inverter makes its frequency shift in accordance with the starting patterns shown below
to search the speed and rotation direction of the idling motor. When synchronization is
complete between the motor speed (including its rotation direction) and the inverter output
frequency, the frequency shift by auto sync search operation is terminated.
*
* Only when the auto sync search has not succeeded at the first trial, the starting from the
opposite direction is attempted.
Starting Patterns
Auto sync search operation is attempted using one of the patterns shown above. If
not succeeded, it will be tried again. If seven consecutive retries failed, the inverter
will issue E alarm and stop.
9-106
9.2 Details of Function Codes
H11
Deceleration Mode
H11 specifies the mode of deceleration when the run command is turned OFF.
Data for H11
Function
0
The inverter decelerates and stops the motor according to normal deceleration
commands (H07: Deceleration pattern and F08: Deceleration time).
1
Coast-to-stop (The inverter immediately shuts down its output. The motor will
stop according to the inertia of motor and load machinery, and their kinetic
energy losses.
Even if you have chosen "coast-to-stop" (H11 = 1), deceleration takes place in
accordance with the setting of deceleration time when the reference frequency is
low.
H12
Instantaneous Overcurrent Limiting
H12 specifies whether the inverter invokes the current limit processing or enters the
overcurrent trip when its output current exceeds the instantaneous overcurrent limiting level.
Under the current limit processing, the inverter immediately turns off its output gate to
suppress the further current increase and continues to control the output frequency.
Function
0
Overcurrent trip at the instantaneous overcurrent limiting level is ineffective.
1
Current limiting processing is effective.
The function codes F43 and F44 have current limit functions similar to that of
function code H12. Because the current limit functions of F43 and F44 implement
the current control by software, an operation delay occurs. When you have enabled
the current limit by function codes F43 and F44, enable the current limit processing
by function code H12 as well, to obtain a quick response current limiting.
Depending on the load, extremely short acceleration time may activate the current
limiting to suppress the increase of the inverter output frequency, causing the
system oscillation (hunting) or activating the inverter overvoltage trip (Walarm).
When setting the acceleration time, therefore, you need to take into account
machinery characteristics and moment of inertia of the load.
9-107
FUNCTION CODES
In case any problem occurs when the motor torque temporarily drops during current limiting
processing, you need to enable overcurrent trip (H12 = 0) and actuate a mechanical brake at
the same time.
Chap. 9
Data for H12
H13
Restart Mode after Recovery from Momentary Power Failure (Restart time)
(Refer to F14.)
H14
Restart Mode after Recovery from Momentary Power Failure (Frequency fall
rate)
(Refer to F14.)
H15
Restart Mode after Recovery from Momentary Power Failure (Holding DC
voltage)
(Refer to F14.)
H16
Restart Mode after Recovery from Momentary Power Failure (Allowable
momentary power failure time)
(Refer to F14.)
For how to set these function codes (sub-functions for F14: Restart after a recovery from
momentary power failure, such as restart time (waiting time), frequency fall rate, holding DC
link bus voltage (continuous running voltage level of the DC link bus), and allowable time of
momentary power failure), refer to function code F14.
H17
Auto Sync Search (Starting frequency)
(Refer to F09.)
For how to set the starting frequency for the auto sync search operation, refer to function code
H09.
H26
PTC Thermistor (Selection)
H27
PTC Thermistor (Level)
These function codes protect the motor from overheating or to output an alarm signal using
the PTC (Positive Temperature Coefficient) thermistor embedded in the motor.
„ PTC thermistor (Selection) (H26)
Selects the function operation mode (protection or alarm) for the PTC thermistor as shown
below.
Data for H26
Action
0
Disable
1
Enable: When the voltage sensed by PTC thermistor exceeds the detection
level, motor protective function (alarm J ) is triggered, causing the inverter
to enter an alarm stop state.
2
Enable: When the voltage sensed by the PTC thermistor exceeds the detection
level, a motor alarm signal is output but the inverter continues running.
You need to assign the motor overheat protection (THM) to one of the digital
output terminals beforehand, by which a temperature alarm condition can been
detected by the thermistor (PTC) (function code data = 56).
9-108
9.2 Details of Function Codes
„ PTC thermistor (Level) (H27)
Specifies the detection level for the temperature (expressed in voltage) sensed by PTC
thermistor.
- Data setting range: 0.00 to 5.00 (V)
The temperature at which the overheating protection is to be activated depends on the
characteristics of the PTC thermistor. The internal resistance of the thermistor will
significantly change at the alarm temperature. The detection level (voltage) is specified based
on the change of internal resistance.
Suppose that the resistance of PTC thermistor at alarm temperature Rp, the detection
(voltage) level Vv2 is calculated by the equation below. Set the result Vv2 to function code
H27.
‫ޓ‬
u 4R
4 R
u 4 R
u 8
4 R
Connect the PTC thermistor as shown below. The voltage that is obtained by dividing the
input voltage to the terminal [V2] with a set of internal resistors is compared with the preset
detection level voltage (function code H27).
9-109
FUNCTION CODES
8
8
Chap. 9
Substitute the internal resistance of the PTC thermistor at the alarm temperature with Rp to
obtain Vv2:
H30
Communications Link Function (Function selection)
Refer to y98.
The FRENIC-Eco series offers external interfaces with personal computers and PLCs via
RS485 communications link and field bus (option), which allow you to monitor the operation
state of the inverter and the code data, to set frequency command contents and to issue a run
command from a remote location. These function codes allow you to specify the means of
setting frequencies and issuing run commands. H30 is for the RS485 communications link;
y98 is for the field bus.
Command source and description
Command source
Inverter
Description
Means except RS485 communications and field bus
Frequency command: Set by F01 and C30, or multistep
frequency command
Run command: Keypad and digital input terminals
RS485 communications
(Standard)
RS48 communications card
(Option)
Field bus (Option)
Via the standard RJ-45 port used for connecting keypad
Via RS485 communications card (option)
Via field bus (option) using FA protocol such as DeviceNet or
PROFIBUS-DP
Command source defined by H30 (Communications link function code)
Data for H30
Frequency command source
Run command source
0
Inside inverter
Inside inverter
1
Standard RS485 communications
Inside inverter
2
Inside inverter
Standard RS485 communications
3
Standard RS485 communications
Standard RS485 communications
4
Optional RS485 communications
Inside inverter
5
Optional RS485 communications
Standard RS485 communications
6
Inside inverter
Optional RS485 communications
7
Standard RS485 communications
Optional RS485 communications
8
Optional RS485 communications
Optional RS485 communications
9-110
9.2 Details of Function Codes
Command source defined by y98 bus function
Data for y98
Frequency command source
Run command source
0
Follow setting of H30
Follow setting of H30
1
Follow setting via field bus (Option)
Follow setting of H30
2
Follow setting of H30
Follow setting via field bus (Option)
3
Follow setting via field bus (Option)
Follow setting via field bus (Option)
Command source definition matrix
Frequency command source
Run command source
Inside inverter
Field bus
(Option)
Inside inverter
H30 = 0
y98 = 0
H30 = 1
y98 = 0
H30=4
y98=0
H30=0 (1, 4)
y98=1
Standard RS485
communications
H30 = 2
y98 = 0
H30 = 3
y98 = 0
H30=5
y98=0
H30=2 (3, 5)
y98=1
Optional RS485
communications
H30 = 6
y98 = 0
H30 = 7
y98 = 0
H30=8
y98=0
H30=6 (7, 8)
y98=1
Field bus
(Option)
H30 = 0 (2 or 6) H30 = 1 (3 or 7) H30 = 4 (5 or 8) H30 = 0 (1 to 8)
y98 = 2
y98 = 2
y98 = 2
y98 = 3
For details, refer to Chapter 4 "BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC" and
the RS485 communication User’s Manual (MEH448a) or the Field Bus Option
Instruction Manual.
H42
Capacitance of DC Link Bus Capacitor
H42 displays the measured capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor (reservoir capacitor).
H43
Cumulative Run Time of Cooling Fan
H43 displays the cumulative run time of the cooling fan.
H47
Initial Capacitance of DC Link Bus Capacitor
H47 displays the initial value of the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor (reservoir
capacitor).
H48
Cumulative Run Time of Capacitors on the PCB
H48 displays the cumulative run time of the capacitors mounted on the printed circuit board.
9-111
FUNCTION CODES
• If you assign the (LE) terminal command to a digital input terminals, the settings of
function codes H30 and y98 become effective when the assigned input terminal and the
terminal [CM] are short-circuited, and become ineffective when they are open.
("Ineffective" means that for both frequency and run commands, the inverter takes control.)
Chap. 9
Standard RS485 Optional RS485
communications communications
H49
Idling Motor Sync Start Mode (Sync start time)
H49 specifies the synchronizing time.
- Data setting range: 0.0 to 10.0 (sec.)
H50
Non-linear V/f Pattern (Frequency)
(Refer to F04.)
H51
Non-linear V/f Pattern (Voltage)
(Refer to F05.)
For details of setting the non-linear V/f pattern, refer to the descriptions of function code F04
and F05.
H56
Deceleration Time for Forced to stop
When (STOP) is turned on while the forced to stop signal (STOP) is assigned to the digital
input terminal (function code data = 30), the inverter output decelerates to stop in accordance
with the setting of H56 (Deceleration time for forced to stop). When the inverter output has
stopped after deceleration, it enters an alarm stop state, with the GTalarm displayed.
H63
Lower Limiter (Select)
(Refer to F15 and F16.)
For how to set up this function code data, refer to function codes F15 and F16.
H64
Lower Limiter (Specify the lower limiting frequency)
When the output current limiter and/or overload prevention control is activated, this function
specifies the lower limit of the frequency that may vary with the limit control.
- Data setting range: 0.0 to 60.0 (Hz)
H69
Automatic Deceleration
H69 specifies whether automatic deceleration
control is to be enabled or disabled. During
deceleration of the motor, if regenerative energy
exceeds the level that can be handled by the
inverter, overvoltage trip may happen. With
automatic deceleration enabled, when the DC link
bus voltage exceeds the level (internally fixed) for
starting automatic deceleration, the output
frequency is controlled to prevent the DC link bus
voltage from rising further; thus regenerative
energy is suppressed .
Data for H69
Function
0
Disable
1
Enable
If automatic deceleration is enabled, deceleration may take a longer time. This is
designed to limit the torque during deceleration, and is therefore of no use where
there is a braking load.
Disable the automatic deceleration when a braking unit is connected. The automatic
deceleration control may be activated at the same time when a braking unit starts
operation, which may make the acceleration time fluctuate. In case the set
deceleration time is so short, the DC link bus voltage of the inverter rises quickly,
and consequently, the automatic deceleration may not follow the voltage rise. In
such a case, prolong the deceleration time.
Even if the time period of 3 times of the deceleration time 1 (F08) has elapsed after
the inverter entered automatic deceleration, there may be a case that the motor does
not stop or the frequency dose not decrease. In this case, cancel the automatic
deceleration forcibly for safety and decelerate the motor according to the set
deceleration time. Prolong the deceleration time also.
9-112
9.2 Details of Function Codes
H70
Overload Prevention Control
H70 specifies the rate of decreasing the output frequency to prevent an overload condition.
Under this control, an overload trip is prevented by decreasing the output frequency of the
inverter before the inverter trips because of the overheating of the cooling fan or the
overloading of the inverter (with an alarm indication of J or NW). This control is useful
for facilities such as pumps where a decrease in the output frequency leads to a decrease in the
load and it is necessary to keep the motor running even when the output frequency goes low.
Data for H70
0.00
Decelerate the motor by the deceleration time 1 (F08)
0.01 to 100.0
999
H71
Function
Decelerate the motor by deceleration rate 0.01 to 100.0(Hz/s)
Disable overload prevention control
In applications where a decrease in the output frequency does not lead to a decrease
in the load, this function is of no use and should not be enabled.
Deceleration Characteristics
H80
Function
0
Disable
1
Enable
This function is aimed at controlling the torque during deceleration; it has no effect
if there is braking load.
Gain for Suppression of Output Current Fluctuation for Motor
The inverter output current driving the motor may fluctuate due to the motor characteristics
and/or backlash in the mechanical load. Modify the data in function code H80 to adjust the
controls in order to suppress such fluctuation. However, as incorrect setting of this gain may
cause larger current fluctuation, do not modify the default setting unless it is necessary.
- Data setting range: 0.00 to 0.40
9-113
FUNCTION CODES
Data for H71
Chap. 9
Setting this function code to "1" (ON)
enables forced brake control. If the
regenerative energy produced during the
deceleration of the motor exceeds the
inverter’s regenerative braking capacity,
an overvoltage trip will occur. Forced
brake control increases the loss of the
motor and the deceleration torque during
deceleration.
H92
Continue to Run (P-component: gain)
(Refer to F14.)
H93
Continue to Run (I-component: time)
(Refer to F15.)
For how to set continuous running (P, I), refer to function code F14.
H94
Cumulative Run Time of Motor
You can view the cumulative run time of the motor on the keypad. This feature is useful for
management and maintenance of the mechanical system. With this function code (H94), you
can set the cumulative run time of the motor to any value you choose. For example, by
specifying "0," you can clear the cumulative run time of the motor.
The data for H94 is in hexadecimal notation. Check the cumulative run time of the
motor on the keypad.
H95
DC Injection Braking (Braking response mode)
(Refer to F20 through F22.)
For how to set DC injection braking, refer to function codes F20 through F22.
H96
STOP Key Priority/Start Check Function
The inverter can be operated using a functional combination of "Priority on
"Start Check."
Data for H96
Priority on
key
Key" and
Start check function
0
Disable
Disable
1
Enable
Disable
2
Disable
Enable
3
Enable
Enable
„ STOP key priority
Even when the run commands are received from the digital input terminals or via RS485
communications link (link operation), pressing the
key forces the inverter to decelerate
and stop the motor. "GT " is displayed on the LED monitor after stopping.
„ Start check function
For safety, this function checks whether any run command has been turned ON or not. If a run
command has been turned ON, an alarm code "GT " is displayed on the LED monitor
without the inverter being started up. This applies to the following situations:
• When any run command has been ON when the power to the inverter is turned ON.
• A run command is already input when the
key is pressed to release the alarm status or
when the reset alarm command (RST) (digital input) is input.
• When the run command source has been switched by the enable link operation (LE) (digital
input) or the run command 2/run command 1 (FR2/FR1), a run command is already turned
ON at the new source.
9-114
9.2 Details of Function Codes
H97
Clear Alarm Data
H97 deletes the information such as alarm history and data at the time of alarm occurrence,
including alarms that have occurred during the check-up or adjustment of the machinery.
Data is then brought back to a normal state without an alarm.
Deleting the alarm information requires simultaneous keying of
and
keys.
Data for H97
Function
0
Disable
1
Clear all. (Setting data at "1" clears all alarm data stored and H97 returns to
"0".
H98
Protection/Maintenance Function
(Refer to F26.)
H98 specifies whether to enable or disable (a) automatic lowering of the carrier frequency,
(b) protection against input phase loss, (c) protection against output phase loss, and (d)
judgment on the DC link bus capacitor life, and the change of judgment criteria on the DC
link bus capacitor life and the selection of handling on DC fan lock detection, in a style of
combination. Automatic lowering function of carrier frequency
Protection against input phase loss (NKP)
In configurations where only a light load is driven or a DC reactor is connected, a
phase loss or an inter-phase imbalance may not be detected because of the relatively
small stress on the apparatus connected to the main circuit.
Protection against output phase loss (RN: Output Phase Loss)
Upon detecting a phase loss in the output while the inverter is running, this feature stops the
inverter and displays an alarm RN. Where a magnetic contactor is installed in the inverter
output circuit, if the magnetic contactor goes OFF during operation, all the phases will be lost.
In such a case, this protection feature does not work.
Selection of life judgment criteria of the DC link bus capacitors
Allows you to select the criteria for judging the life of the DC link bus capacitor/s (reservoir
capacitor/s) between factory default setting and your own choice.
Before specifying the criteria of your own choice, measure and confirm the
reference level in advance. For details, refer to the FRENIC-Eco Instruction
Manual (INR-SI47-0882-E), Chapter 7 "MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION."
9-115
FUNCTION CODES
Upon detecting an excessive stress inflicted on the apparatus connected to the main circuit
because of phase loss or inter-phase imbalance in the 3-phase power supplied to the inverter,
this feature stops the inverter and displays an alarm NKP.
Chap. 9
You have to prevent an important machinery from stopping as much as possible. Even if the
inverter is in heat sink overheating or overload state because of excessive load, abnormal
ambient temperature, or a trouble in the cooling system, with this function enabled, the
inverter lowers the carrier frequency to avoid tripping (JJ or NW). Note that if this
feature is enabled the motor noise increases.
Judgment on the life of DC link bus capacitors
Whether the DC link bus capacitor (reservoir capacitor) has reached its life is determined by
measuring the length of time for discharging after power off. The discharging time is
determined by the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor and the load inside the inverter.
Therefore, if the load inside the inverter fluctuates significantly, the discharging time cannot
be accurately measured, and as a result, it may be mistakenly determined that the life has been
reached. To avoid such an error, you can disable the judgment on the life of the DC link bus
capacitor.
Load may vary significantly in the following cases. Disable the judgment on the life during
operation, and either conduct the measurement with the judgment enabled under appropriate
conditions during periodical maintenance or conduct the measurement under the actual use
conditions.
• Auxiliary input for control power is used
• An option card or multi-function keypad is used
• Another inverter or equipment such as a PWM converter is connected to the terminals of
the DC link bus.
For details, refer to the FRENIC-Eco Instruction Manual (INR-SI47-0882-E), Chapter 7
"MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION."
Detection of DC fan lock (200 V series: 45 kW or above, 400 V series: 55 kW or above)
An inverter of 45 kW or above (200 V series), or of 55 kW or above (400 V series) is
equipped with the internal air circulation DC fan. When the inverter detects that the DC fan is
locked by a failure or other cause, you can select either continuing the inverter operation or
entering into alarm state.
Entering alarm state: The inverter issues the alarm J and coasts to stop the motor.
Continuing operation: The inverter does not enter the alarm mode, and continues operation of
the motor.
Note that, however, the inverter turns on (OH) and (LIFE) signals on the transistor output
terminals whenever the DC fan lock is detected regardless your selection.
If ON/OFF control of the cooling fan is enabled (H06 = 1), the cooling fan may stop
depending on operating condition of the inverter. In this case, the DC fan lock
detection feature is considered normal (e.g.; the cooling fan is normally stopped by
the stop fan command.) so that the inverter may turn off the (LIFE) or (OH) signal
output, or enable to cancel the J alarm, even if the internal air circulation DC
fan is locked due to a failure etc. (When you start the inverter in this state, it
automatically issues the run fan command, then the inverter detects the DC fan lock
state, and turn on the (LIFE) or (OH) output or enters the J alarm state.)
9-116
9.2 Details of Function Codes
Note that, operating the inverter under the condition that the DC fan is locked for long time
may shorten the life of electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit board due to local high
temperature inside the inverter. Be sure to check with the (LIFE) signal etc., and replace the
broken fan as soon as possible.
To set data of the function code H98, assign functions to each bit (total 6 bits) and set it in
decimal format. The table below lists functions assigned to each bit.
Bit
Function
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Select the life
Detect
Detect
Judge life of judgment
Detect DC
input phase
the DC link
criteria of the output
fan lock
phase loss loss
bus capacitor/s DC link bus
capacitor/s
Bit 0
Auto
lowering of
the carrier
frequency
Data = 0
Enter into
the alarm
state
Disable
Use the
factory
default
Disable
Disable
Disable
Data = 1
Continue
the
operation
Enable
Use the user
setting
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable (1)
Use the
factory
default (0)
Disable
(0)
Enable (1)
Enable (1)
Example
Enter into
of decimal the alarm
expression state (0)
(19)
Chap. 9
FUNCTION CODES
9-117
Conversion table (Decimal to/from binary)
Binary
Binary
Decimal
Decimal
Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
32
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
33
1
0
0
0
0
1
2
0
0
0
0
1
0
34
1
0
0
0
1
0
3
0
0
0
0
1
1
35
1
0
0
0
1
1
4
0
0
0
1
0
0
36
1
0
0
1
0
0
5
0
0
0
1
0
1
37
1
0
0
1
0
1
6
0
0
0
1
1
0
38
1
0
0
1
1
0
7
0
0
0
1
1
1
39
1
0
0
1
1
1
8
0
0
1
0
0
0
40
1
0
1
0
0
0
9
0
0
1
0
0
1
41
1
0
1
0
0
1
10
0
0
1
0
1
0
42
1
0
1
0
1
0
11
0
0
1
0
1
1
43
1
0
1
0
1
1
12
0
0
1
1
0
0
44
1
0
1
1
0
0
13
0
0
1
1
0
1
45
1
0
1
1
0
1
14
0
0
1
1
1
0
46
1
0
1
1
1
0
15
0
0
1
1
1
1
47
1
0
1
1
1
1
16
0
1
0
0
0
0
48
1
1
0
0
0
0
17
0
1
0
0
0
1
49
1
1
0
0
0
1
18
0
1
0
0
1
0
50
1
1
0
0
1
0
19
0
1
0
0
1
1
51
1
1
0
0
1
1
20
0
1
0
1
0
0
52
1
1
0
1
0
0
21
0
1
0
1
0
1
53
1
1
0
1
0
1
22
0
1
0
1
1
0
54
1
1
0
1
1
0
23
0
1
0
1
1
1
55
1
1
0
1
1
1
24
0
1
1
0
0
0
56
1
1
1
0
0
0
25
0
1
1
0
0
1
57
1
1
1
0
0
1
26
0
1
1
0
1
0
58
1
1
1
0
1
0
27
0
1
1
0
1
1
59
1
1
1
0
1
1
28
0
1
1
1
0
0
60
1
1
1
1
0
0
29
0
1
1
1
0
1
61
1
1
1
1
0
1
30
0
1
1
1
1
0
62
1
1
1
1
1
0
31
0
1
1
1
1
1
63
1
1
1
1
1
1
9-118
9.2 Details of Function Codes
9.2.6
J codes (Application functions)
J01
PID Control (Selection)
J02
PID Control (Remote process command)
J03
PID Control (Gain)
J04
PID Control (Integral time)
J05
PID Control (Differentiation time)
J06
PID Control (Feedback filter)
In PID control, the state of control object is detected by a sensor or similar device and is
compared with the commanded value (e.g. temperature control command). If there is any
deviation between them, the PID control operates so as to minimize it. Namely, it is a closed
loop feedback system that matches controlled variable (feedback value). The PID control
applies to a process control such as flowrate control, pressure control, and temperature
control as shown in the schematic block diagram below.
If PID control is enabled (J01 = 1 or 2), frequency control of the inverter is switched from the
drive frequency command generator block to the PID frequency command generator block.
Refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.9 "PID Frequency Command Generator" for details.
Chap. 9
i PID Control Selection (J01)
Selects PID control function.
Data for J01
Function
0
Disable PID control
1
Enable PID control
(normal operation)
2
Enable PID control
(inverse operation)
- As normal operation or inverse operation against the output of PID control can be selected,
you can fine-control the motor speed and rotation direction against the difference between
commanded value and feedback value. Thus, FRENIC-Eco inverters can apply to many
kinds of applications such as air conditioners. The operation mode can also be switched
between normal and inverse by using the terminal command (IVS).
Refer to function codes E01 to E05 for details of assignment of the switching
normal/inverse command (IVS).
9-119
FUNCTION CODES
Selection of Feedback Terminals
For feedback control, determine the connection terminal according to the type of the sensor
output.
• If the sensor is current output type: Use the current input terminal [C1] of the inverter.
• If the sensor is voltage output type: Use the voltage input terminal [12] or [V2] of the
inverter.
For details, refer to function codes E61 through E63.
The operating range for PID control is internally controlled as 0% through 100%. For the
given feedback input, determine the range of control by means of gain adjustment.
For example, if the sensor output is in the range of 1 - 5 V:
• Use terminal [12] since this is a voltage input.
• Example of gain adjustment
Set Gain adjustment (C32) at 200%, so that the maximum value (5 V) of the external
sensor's output corresponds to 100%. Note that the input specification for terminal [12] is 0
- 10 V corresponding to 0 - 100%; thus, a gain factor of 200% (= 10 V y 5 u 100) should be
specified. Note also that any bias setting must not apply to feedback control.
„ Remote process command (J02)
Selects the source to set the command value (SV) under PID control.
Data for J02
Function
Keypad
0
Using the
/
key on the keypad in conjunction with display coefficients
E40 and E41, you can specify the PID process command in 0 to 100% of the
easy-to-understand converted command format, such as in temperature and
pressure. For details of operation, refer to Chapter 3 "OPERATION USING
THE KEYPAD."
PID Process command 1 (Terminals [12], [C1], [V2])
1
In addition to J02, various analog settings (function codes E61, E62, and E63)
also need to select PID process command 1. For details, refer to function codes
E61, E62, and E63.
UP/DOWN command
3
Using the UP (UP) or DOWN (DOWN) command in conjunction with display
coefficients E40 and E41, you can specify the PID process command in 0 to
100% of the easy-to-understand converted command format. In addition to
setting J02 at "3," you also need to assign the function selection for the E01
through E05 terminals ([X1] to [X5]) to the UP (UP) and DOWN (DOWN)
commands (function code data = 17, 18). For details of (UP)/(DOWN)
operation, refer to the assignment of the UP (UP) and DOWN (DOWN)
command.
Command via communications link
4
Use the function code (S13) for communications-linked PID process
command: the transmission data of 20000 (decimal) is equal to 100% (max.
frequency) of the process command. For details of the communications format
etc., refer to the RS485 communication User's Manual (MEH448a).
9-120
9.2 Details of Function Codes
Other than the process command selection by function code J02, the multistep
frequency (C08 = 4) specified by the terminal command (SS4) can also be selected
as a preset value for the PID process command.
Calculate the setting data of the process command using the equation below.
Process command data (%) = (preset multistep frequency) y (maximum frequency)
u 100
Setting range for PID process command (for analog input only)
The operating range for PID control is internally controlled at 0% through 100%. Therefore,
if you use an analog input as a PID process command, you need to set the range of the PID
process command beforehand. As with frequency setting, you can arbitrary map relationship
between the process command and the analog input value by adjusting the gain and bias.
For details, refer to function codes C32, C34, C37, C39, C42, C44, C51, and C52.
Example) Mapping the range of 1 through 5 V at the terminal [12] to 0 through 100%
PID Display Coefficient and monitoring
Refer to function codes E40 and E41 for details on display coefficients, and to E43 for
details on monitoring.
9-121
FUNCTION CODES
To monitor the PID process command and its feedback value, set the display coefficient to
convert the displayed value into easy-to-understand numerals of the process control value
such as temperature.
Chap. 9
„ Gain (J03)
Sets the gain for the PID processor.
- Data setting range: 0.000 to 30.000 (multiple)
P (Proportional) control
An operation that an MV (manipulated value: output frequency) is proportional to the
deviation is called P control, which outputs a manipulated value in proportion to deviation.
However, the manipulated variable alone cannot eliminate deviation.
Gain is data that determines the system response level against the deviation in the P control.
An increase in gain speeds up response, an excessive gain may cause vibration, and a
decrease in gain delays response.
„ Integration time (J04)
Sets the integration time for the PID processor.
- Data setting range: 0.0 to 3600.0 (sec.)
0.0 means that the integral component is ineffective.
I (Integral) control
An operation that the change rate of an MV (manipulated value: output frequency) is
proportional to the integral value of deviation is called I control that outputs the manipulated
value that integrates the deviation. Therefore, I control is effective in bringing the feedback
value close to the commanded value. For the system whose deviation rapidly changes,
however, this control cannot make it react quickly.
The effectiveness of I control is expressed by integration time as parameter, that is J4 data.
The longer the integration time, the slower the response. The reaction to the external
turbulence also becomes slow. The shorter the integration time, the faster the response.
Setting too short integration time, however, makes the inverter output tend to oscillate against
the external turbulence.
9-122
9.2 Details of Function Codes
„ Differentiation time (J05)
Sets the differentiation time for the PID processor.
- Data setting range: 0.00 to 600.00 (sec.)
0.0 means that the differential component is ineffective.
D (Differential) control
An operation that the MV (manipulated value: output frequency) is proportional to the
differential value of the deviation is called D control that outputs the manipulated value that
differentiates the deviation. D control makes the inverter quickly react to a rapid change of
deviation.
The effectiveness of D control is expressed by differentiation time as parameter, that is J05
data. Setting a long differentiation time will quickly suppress oscillation caused by P action
when a deviation occurs. Too long differentiation time makes the inverter output oscillation
more. Setting short differentiation time will weakens the suppression effect when the
deviation occurs.
Chap. 9
(1) PI control
PI control, which is a combination of P and I control, is generally used to minimize the
remaining deviation caused by P control. PI control acts to always minimize the deviation
even if a commanded value changes or external disturbance steadily occurs. However, the
longer the integration time, the slower the system response to quick-changed control.
P control can be used alone for loads with very large part of integral components.
(2) PD control
In PD control, the moment that a deviation occurs, the control rapidly generates much
manipulative value than that generated by D control alone, to suppress the deviation increase.
When the deviation becomes small, the behavior of P control becomes small.
A load including the integral component in the controlled system may oscillate due to the
action of the integral component if P control alone is applied. In such a case, use PD control to
reduce the oscillation caused by P control, for keeping the system stable. That is, PD control
is applied to a system that does not contain any braking actions in its process.
(3) PID control
PID control is implemented by combining P control with the deviation suppression of I
control and the oscillation suppression of D control. PID control features minimal control
deviation, high precision and high stability.
In particular, PID control is effective to a system that has a long response time to the
occurrence of deviation.
9-123
FUNCTION CODES
Descriptions of a combined use of P, I, and D control are shown below.
Follow the procedure below to set data to PID control function codes.
It is highly recommended that you adjust the PID control value while monitoring the system
response waveform with an oscilloscope or equivalent. Repeat the following procedure to
determine the optimal solution for each system.
- Increase the data of function code J03 PID control (P (gain)) in the range where the
feedback signal does not oscillate.
- Decrease the data of function code J04 PID control (I (Integration time)) in the range where
the feedback signal does not oscillate.
- Increase the data of function code J05 PID control (D (Differentiation time)) in the range
where the feedback signal does not oscillate.
Refining the system response waveforms is shown below.
1) Suppressing overshoot
Increase the data of function code J04 (Integration time) and decrease that of code J05
(Differentiation time)
2) Quick stabilizing (moderate overshoot allowable)
Decrease the data of function code J03 (Gain) and increase that of code J05
(Differentiation time)
3) Suppressing oscillation longer than the integration time specified by function code J04
Increase the data of function code J04 (Integration time)
9-124
9.2 Details of Function Codes
4) Suppressing oscillation of approximately same period as the time set for function code
J05 (Differentiation time)
Decrease the data of function code J05 (Differentiation time).
Decrease the data of function code J03 (Gain), when the oscillation cannot be suppressed
even if the differentiation time is set at 0 sec.
„ Feedback filter (J06)
Sets the time constant of the filter for feedback signals in PID control.
- Data setting range: 0.0 to 900.0 (sec.)
- This setting is used to stabilize the PID control loop. Setting too long a time constant makes
the system response slow.
J10
PID Control (Anti reset windup)
- Data setting range: 0.0 to 200.0 (%)
Chap. 9
J10 suppresses overshoot in control with PID processor. As long as the deviation between the
feedback value and the PID process command is beyond the preset range, the integrator holds
its value and does not perform integration operation.
FUNCTION CODES
9-125
J11
PID Control (Select alarm output)
J12
PID Control (Upper limit alarm (AH))
J13
PID Control (Lower limit alarm (AL))
Two types of alarm signals are can be output associated with PID control: absolute-value
alarm and deviation alarm. You need to assign the PID alarm output (PID-ALM) to one of the
digital output terminals (function code data = 42).
„ PID Control (Select alarm output) (J11)
Specifies the alarm type. The table below lists all the alarms available in the system.
Data for J11
Alarm
Description
0
Absolute-value
alarm
While PV < AL or AH < PV, (PID-ALM) is ON.
1
Absolute-value
alarm (with hold)
Same as above (with hold)
2
Absolute-value
alarm (with latch)
Same as above (with latch)
3
Absolute-value
alarm (with hold
and latch)
Same as above (with hold and latch)
4
Deviation alarm
While PV < SV - AL or SV + AH < PV, (PID-ALM)
is ON.
5
Deviation alarm
(with hold)
Same as above (with hold)
6
Deviation alarm
(with latch)
Same as above (with latch)
7
Deviation alarm
(with hold and
latch)
Same as above (with hold and latch)
Hold: During the power-on sequence, the alarm output is kept OFF (disabled) even when
the monitored quantity is within the alarm range. Once it goes out of the alarm range,
and comes into the alarm range again, the alarm is enabled.
Latch: Once the monitored quantity comes into the alarm range and the alarm is turned ON,
the alarm will remain ON even if it goes out of the alarm range. To release the latch,
perform a reset by using the
key or turning ON the terminal command (RST), etc.
Resetting can be done by the same way as resetting an alarm.
9-126
9.2 Details of Function Codes
„ PID Control (High limit alarm (AH)) (J12)
Specifies the upper limit of the alarm (AH) in percentage (%) of the process value.
„ PID Control (Low limit alarm) (AL)) (J13)
Specifies the lower limit of the alarm (AL) in percentage (%) of the process value.
The value displayed (%) is the ratio of the upper/lower limit to the full scale (10 V
or 20 mA) of the feedback value (in the case of a gain of 100%).
High limit alarm AH and Low limit alarm AL also apply to the following alarms.
How to handle the alarm:
Alarm
Description
Select alarm
output (J11)
Parameter setting
High limit
(absolute)
ON when AH < PV
Low limit
(absolute)
ON when PV < AL
High limit
(deviation)
ON when SV + AH < PV
Low limit
(deviation)
ON when PV < SV - AL
J12 = 100%
High/low limit
(deviation)
ON when |SV - PV| > AL
J13 = J12
Range high/low
limit (deviation) *
ON when SV - AL < PV <
SV + AL
Deviation alarm
(DO) inversed
Range high/low
limit (absolute) *
ON when AL < PV < AH
Absolute-value
alarm
(DO) inversed
Range high/low
limit (deviation) *
ON when SV - AL < PV <
SV + AH
Deviation alarm
(DO) inversed
Absolute-value
alarm
J13 = 0
J12 = 100%
Deviation alarm
J13 = 100%
J15
PID Control (Stop frequency for slow flowrate)
J16
PID Control (Slow flowrate level stop latency)
J17
PID Control (Starting frequency)
These function codes specify the data for the slow flowrate stop in pump control, a feature
that stops the inverter when, the discharge pressure rises, causing the volume of water to
decrease.
„ Slow flowrate stop feature
When the discharge pressure has increased, decreasing the reference frequency (output of the
PID processor) below the stop frequency for slow flowrate level (J15) for more than the
elapsed stopping time on slow flowrate level stop latency (J16), the inverter decelerates to
stop, while PID control itself continues to operate. When the discharge pressure decreases,
increasing the reference frequency (output of the PID processor) above the starting frequency
(J17), the inverter resumes operation.
If you wish to have a signal indicating the state in which the inverter is stopped due to the
slow flowrate stop feature, you need to assign (PID-STP) (Inverter stopping due to slow
flowrate under PID control ) to one of the general-purpose output terminal (function code
data = 44).
„ PID Control (Stop frequency for slow flowrate) (J15)
Specifies the frequency which triggers slow flowrate stop of inverter.
9-127
FUNCTION CODES
Chap. 9
*Alarm limit is given via the communications line.
„ PID Control (Slow flowrate level stop latency) (J16)
Specifies the elapsed time from when the inverter stops operation due to slow flowrate level
condition.
„ PID Control (Starting frequency) (J17)
Specifies the starting frequency. Select a frequency higher than the slow flowrate level stop
frequency. If the specified starting frequency is lower than the slow flowrate level stop
frequency, the latter stop frequency is ignored; the slow flowrate level stop is triggered when
the output of the PID processor drops below the specified starting frequency.
J18
PID Control (Upper limit of PID process output)
J19
PID Control (Lower limit of PID process output)
The upper and lower limiter can be specified to the PID output, exclusively used for PID
control. The settings are ignored when PID cancel is enabled and the inverter is operated at
the reference frequency previously specified.
„ PID Control (Upper limit of PID process output) (J18)
Specifies the upper limit of the PID processor output limiter in increments of 1 Hz. If you
specify "999," the setting of the frequency limiter (Upper) (F15) will serve as the upper limit.
„ PID Control (Lower limit of PID process output) (J19)
Specifies the lower limit of the PID processor output limiter in increments of 1 Hz. If you
specify "999," the setting of the frequency limiter (Lower) (F16) will serve as the lower limit.
9-128
9.2 Details of Function Codes
J21
Dew Condensation Prevention (Duty)
When the inverter is stopped, dew condensation on the motor can be prevented, by feeding
DC power to the motor at regular intervals to keep the temperature of the motor above a
certain level.
To utilize this feature, you need to assign a terminal command (DWP) (dew condensation
prevention) to one of general-purpose digital input terminals (function code data = 39).
„ Enabling Dew Condensation Prevention
To enable dew condensation prevention, turn ON the condensation prevention command
(DWP) while the inverter is stopped. Then, this feature starts.
„ Dew Condensation Prevention (Duty) (J21)
The magnitude of the DC power applied to the motor is the same as the setting of F21 (DC
injection braking: Braking level) and its duration inside each interval is the same as the
setting of F22 (DC injection braking: Braking time). The interval T is determined so that the
ratio of the duration of the DC power to T is the value (Duty) set for J21.
Duty for condensati on prevention (J21)
F22
× 100 (%)
T
Condensation Prevention Cycle
Chap. 9
J22
Commercial Power Switching Sequence
(Refer to E01 to E05.)
For how to set the commercial power switching sequence, refer to function codes E01
through E05.
9-129
FUNCTION CODES
9.2.7
y codes (Link functions)
Up to two ports of RS485 communications link are available, including the terminal block
option as shown below.
Port
Route
Function code
Applicable equipment
Port 1
Standard RS485
Communications (for
connection with keypad) via
RJ-45 port
y01 through y10
Standard keypad
Multi-function keypad
PC running FRENIC
Loader
Host equipment
Port 2
Optional RS485
communications card via the
terminal port on the card
y11 through y20
Host equipment
No FRENIC Loader
supported
To connect any of the applicable devices, follow the procedures shown below.
(1) Standard keypad; Multi-function keypad (optional)
Both the standard keypad and the multi-function keypad (optional) allow you to run and
monitor the inverter.
There is no need to set the y codes.
(2) FRENIC Loader
Using your PC running FRENIC Loader, you can monitor the inverter’s running status
information, edit function codes, and test-run the inverters.
Setting data of the y codes, refers to function codes y01 to y10. For details, refer to the
FRENIC Loader Instruction Manual (INR-SI47-0903-E).
(3) Host equipment
The inverter can be managed and monitored by connecting host equipment such as a PC and
PLC to the inverter. Modbus RTU* and Fuji general-purpose inverter protocol are available
for communications protocols.
*Modbus RTU is a protocol established by Modicon, Inc.
For details, refer to the RS485 communication User's Manual (MEH448a).
9-130
9.2 Details of Function Codes
y01 to y20
RS485 Communication (Standard and option)
„ Station Address (y01 for standard port and y11 for option port)
These function codes specify the station address for the RS485 communications link. The
table below lists the protocols and the station address setting ranges.
Protocol
Station address
Broadcast address
Modbus RTU
1 to 247
0
FRENIC Loader
1 to 255
None
FUJI general-purpose inverter
1 to 31
99
- If any wrong address beyond the above range is specified, no response is returned since the
inverter will be unable to receive any enquiries except the broadcast message.
- When FRENIC Loader is used, set the station address in line with that of the connected PC.
„ Communications error processing (y02 for standard port and y12 for option port)
Set the operation performed when an RS485 communications error has occurred.
Function
0
Indicate an RS485 communications error (GT for y02 and GTR for y12),
and stop operation immediately. (The inverter stops with alarm issue.)
1
Run during the time set on the error processing timer (y03, y13), display an
RS485 communications error (GT for y02 and GTR for y12), and then stop
operation. (The inverter stops with alarm issue.)
2
Retry transmission during the time set on the error processing timer (y03,
y13). If communications link is recovered, continue operation. Otherwise,
display an RS485 communications error (GT for y02 and GTR for y12) and
stop operation. (The inverter stops with alarm issue.)
3
Continue operation even when a communications error occurs.
For details, refer to the RS485 communication User's Manual (MEH448a).
„ Error processing timer (y03 and y13)
Set an error processing timer.
When the set timer count has elapsed because of no response on other end etc., if a response
request was issued, the inverter interprets that an error occurs. See the section of
"No-response error detection time (y08, y18)."
- Data setting range: 0.0 to 60.0 (sec.)
9-131
FUNCTION CODES
Data for y02
and y12
Chap. 9
RS485 communications errors contain logical errors such as address error, parity error,
framing error, and transmission protocol error, and physical errors such as communications
disconnection error set by y08 and y18. In each case, these are judged as an error only when
the inverter is running while the operation command or frequency command has been set to
the configuration specified through RS485 communications. When neither the operation
command nor frequency command are issued through RS485 communications, or the
inverter is not running, error occurrence is not recognized.
„ Transmission speed (y04 and y14)
Select the transmission speed for RS485
communications.
Data for y04
and y14
- Setting for FRENIC Loader: Set the same
transmission speed as that specified by
the connected PC.
Transmission speed (bps)
0
2400
1
4800
2
9600
3
19200
4
38400
„ Character length (y05 and y15)
Select the character length for transmission.
-
Setting for FRENIC Loader:
Loader sets the length in 8 bits
automatically. (The same applies to the
Modbus RTU protocol.)
Data for y05
and y15
Character length
0
8 bits
1
7 bits
„ Parity check (y06 and y16)
Data for y06
and y16
Select the property of the parity bit.
- Setting for FRENIC Loader:
Loader sets it to the even parity
automatically.
Parity
0
No parity bit
1
Even parity
2
Odd parity
„ Stop bits (y07 and y17)
Select the number of stop bits.
- Setting for FRENIC Loader:
Loader sets it to 1 bit automatically.
Data for y07
and y17
For the Modbus RTU protocol, the stop
bits are automatically determined
associated with the property of parity
bits. So no setting is required.
Stop bit(s)
0
2 bits
1
1 bit
„ No-response error detection time (y08 and y18)
Set the time interval from the inverter
detecting no access until it enters
communications error alarm mode due to
network failure and processes the
communications error. This applies to a
mechanical system that always accesses its
station within a predetermined interval
during communications using the RS485
communications link.
For the processing of communications
errors, refer to y02 and y12.
9-132
Data for y08
and y18
0
1 to 60
Function
Disable
1 to 60 sec.
9.2 Details of Function Codes
„ Response latency time (y09 and y19)
Sets the latency time after the end of receiving a query sent from the host equipment (such as
a PC or PLC) to the start of sending the response. This function allows using equipment
whose response time is slow while a network requires quick response, enabling the
equipment to send a response timely by the latency time setting.
- Data setting range: 0.00 to 1.00 (sec.)
T1 = Latency time + D
where D is the processing time inside the inverter. This time may vary depending on the processing
status and the command processed in the inverter.
For details, refer to the RS485 communication User's Manual (MEH448a).
When setting the inverter with FRENIC Loader, pay sufficient attention to the
performance and/or configuration of the PC and protocol converter such as
RS485-RS232C communications level converter. Note that some protocol
converters monitor the communications status and switch the send/receive of
transmission data by a timer.
„ Protocol selection (y10)
Select the communications protocol for the
standard RS485 port.
Data for y10
- Specifying FRENIC loader to connect to
the inverter can only be made by y10.
Select FRENIC Loader (y10 = 1).
0
Modbus RTU
1
FRENIC Loader
2
FUJI general-purpose
inverter
Protocol
Select the communications protocol for the
optional communications port.
y98
Data for y20
Protocol
0
Modbus RTU
2
FUJI general-purpose
inverter
Bus Link Function (Function selection)
(Refer to H30.)
For how to set y98 bus link function (function selection), refer to function code H30.
9-133
FUNCTION CODES
„ Protocol selection (y20)
Chap. 9
y99
Loader Link Function (Function selection)
This is a link switching function for FRENIC Loader. Rewriting the data of this function code
y99 (= 3) to enable RS485 communications from Loader helps Loader send the inverter the
frequency and run commands. Since the data in the function code of the inverter is
automatically set by Loader, no keypad operation is required. While Loader is selected as the
source of the run command, if the PC runs out of control and cannot be stopped by a stop
command sent from Loader, disconnect the RS485 communications cable from the standard
port (Keypad), connect a keypad instead, and reset the y99 to "0." This setting "0" in y99
means that the run and frequency command source specified by function code H30 takes
place.
Note that the inverter cannot save the setting of y99. When power is turned off, the data in
y99 is lost (y99 is reset to "0").
Function
Data for y99
Frequency command
Run command
0
Follow the setting of H30
Follow the setting of H30
1
Enable commands from RS485
communications link (S01 and S05)
Follow the setting of H30
2
Follow the setting of H30
Enable commands from RS485
communications link (S06)
3
Enable commands from RS485
communications link (S01 and S05)
Enable commands from RS485
communications link (S06)
9-134
Appendices
Contents
App.A
A.1
A.2
A.3
App.B
B.1
B.2
App.C
C.1
C.2
C.3
C.4
App.D
App.E
App.F
Advantageous Use of Inverters (Notes on electrical noise) ............................................................... A-1
Effect of inverters on other devices .................................................................................................... A-1
Noise .................................................................................................................................................. A-2
Noise prevention ................................................................................................................................ A-4
Japanese Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics by Customers Receiving High Voltage or
Special High Voltage ........................................................................................................................ A-12
Application to general-purpose inverters ......................................................................................... A-12
Compliance to the harmonic suppression for customers receiving high voltage or
special high voltage .......................................................................................................................... A-13
Effect on Insulation of General-purpose Motors Driven with 400 V Class Inverters ...................... A-17
Generating mechanism of surge voltages ......................................................................................... A-17
Effect of surge voltages .................................................................................................................... A-18
Countermeasures against surge voltages .......................................................................................... A-18
Regarding existing equipment.......................................................................................................... A-19
Inverter Generating Loss.................................................................................................................. A-20
Conversion from SI Units ................................................................................................................ A-21
Allowable Current of Insulated Wires.............................................................................................. A-23
App. A Advantageous Use of Inverters (Notes on electrical noise)
App.A Advantageous Use of Inverters (Notes on electrical
noise)
- Disclaimer: This document provides you with a summary of the Technical Document of the Japan Electrical
Manufacturers' Association (JEMA) (April 1994). It is intended to apply to the domestic market only. It is
only for reference for the foreign market. -
A.1
Effect of inverters on other devices
Inverters have been and are rapidly expanding its application fields. This paper describes the effect
that inverters have on electronic devices already installed or on devices installed in the same system as
inverters, as well as introducing noise prevention measures. (Refer to Section A.3 [3], "Noise
prevention examples" for details.)
[1]
Effect on AM radios
Phenomenon
If an inverter operates, an AM radio set near the inverter may pick up noise
radiated from the inverter. (An inverter has almost no effect on an FM radio or
television set.)
Probable cause
Measures
Radios may receive noise radiated from the inverter.
Inserting a noise filter on the power source (primary) side of the inverter is
effective.
[2]
Effect on telephones
If an inverter operates, nearby telephones may pick up noise radiated from the
inverter in conversation so that it may be difficult to hear.
Probable cause
A high-frequency leakage current radiated from the inverter and motors enters
shielded telephone cables, causing noise.
It is effective to commonly connect the grounding terminals of the motors and
return the common grounding line to the grounding terminal of the inverter.
Measures
[3]
Effect on proximity switches
Phenomenon
If an inverter operates, proximity switches (capacitance-type) may malfunction.
Probable cause
Measures
The capacitance-type proximity switches may provide inferior noise immunity.
It is effective to connect a filter to the input terminals of the inverter or change the
power supply treatment of the proximity switches. These switches can be
replaced with superior noise immunity types such as magnetic type ones.
[4]
Effect on pressure sensors
Phenomenon
If an inverter operates, pressure sensors may malfunction.
Probable cause
Measures
Noise may penetrate through a grounding wire into the signal line.
It is effective to install a noise filter on the power source (primary) side of the
inverter or to change the wiring.
[5]
Effect on position detectors (pulse generators PGs or pulse encoders)
Phenomenon
If an inverter operates, pulse encoders may produce erroneous pulses that shift
the stop position of a machine.
Probable cause
Erroneous pulses are liable to occur when the signal lines of the PG and power
lines are bundled together.
The influence of induction noise and radiation noise can be reduced by
separating the PG signal lines and power lines. Providing noise filters at the input
and output terminals will be also an effective measure.
Measure
A-1
App.
Phenomenon
A.2
Noise
This section gives a summary of noises generated in inverters and their effects on devices subject to
noise.
[1]
Inverter noise
Figure A.1 shows an outline of the inverter configuration. The inverter converts AC to DC
(rectification) in a converter unit, and converts DC to AC (inversion) with 3-phase variable voltage
and variable frequency. The conversion (inversion) is performed by PWM implemented by switching
six transistors (IGBT: Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor, etc), and is used for variable speed motor
control.
Switching noise is generated by high-speed on/off switching of the six transistors. Noise current (i) is
emitted and at each high-speed on/off switching, the noise current flows through stray capacitance (C)
of the inverter, cable and motor to the ground. The amount of the noise current is expressed as follows:
i = C·dv/dt
It is related to the stray capacitance (C) and dv/dt (switching speed of the transistors). Further, this
noise current is related to the carrier frequency since the noise current flows each time the transistors
are switched on or off.
In addition to the main inverter part, the DC-to-DC switching power regulator (DC-DC converter),
which is the power source for the control electronics of the inverter, may be a noise source in the same
principles as stated above. Refer to Figure A.1 below.
The frequency band of this noise is less than approximately 30 to 40 MHz. Therefore, the noise will
affect devices such as AM radio sets using low frequency band, but will not virtually affect FM radio
sets and television sets using higher frequency than this frequency band.
Figure A.1 Outline of Inverter Configuration
A-2
App. A Advantageous Use of Inverters (Notes on electrical noise)
[2]
Types of noise
Noise generated in an inverter is propagated through the main circuit wiring to the power source
(primary) and output (secondary) sides so as to affect a wide range of applications from the power
supply transformer to the motor. The various propagation routes are shown in Figure A.2. According
to those routes, noises are roughly classified into three types--conduction noise, induction noise, and
radiation noise.
Figure A.2 Noise Propagation Routes
(1) Conduction noise
Noise generated in an inverter may propagate through the conductor and power supply so as to affect
peripheral devices of the inverter (Figure A.3). This noise is called "conduction noise." Some
conduction noises will propagate through the main circuit . If the ground wires are connected to a
common ground, conduction noise will propagate through route . As shown in route , some
conduction noises will propagate through signal lines or shielded wires.
App.
Figure A.3 Conduction Noise
(2) Induction noise
When wires or signal lines of peripheral devices are brought close to the wires on the input and output
sides of the inverter through which noise current is flowing, noise will be induced into those wires and
signal lines of the devices by electromagnetic induction (Figure A.4) or electrostatic induction (Figure
A.5). This is called "induction noise" .
Figure A.4 Electromagnetic Noise
A-3
Figure A.5 Electrostatic Induction Noise
(3) Radiation noise
Noise generated in an inverter may be radiated through the air from wires (that act as antennas) at the
power source (primary) and output (secondary) sides of the inverter. This noise is called "radiation
noise" as shown below. Not only wires but motor frames or power control enclosures containing
inverters may also act as antennas.
Figure A.6 Radiation Noise
A.3
Noise prevention
The more noise prevention is strengthened, the more effective. However, with the use of appropriate
measures, noise problems may be resolved easily. It is necessary to implement economical noise
prevention according to the noise level and the equipment conditions.
[1]
Noise prevention prior to installation
Before inserting an inverter in your power control enclosure or installing an inverter enclosure, you
need to consider noise prevention. Once noise problems occur, it will cost additional materials and
time for solving them.
Noise prevention prior to installation includes:
1)
2)
3)
4)
Separating the wiring of main circuits and control circuits
Putting main circuit wiring into a metal pipe (conduit pipe)
Using shielded wires or twist shielded wires for control circuits.
Implementing appropriate grounding work and grounding wiring.
These noise prevention measures can avoid most noise problems.
A-4
App. A Advantageous Use of Inverters (Notes on electrical noise)
[2]
Implementation of noise prevention measures
There are two types of noise prevention measures--one for noise propagation routes and the other for
noise receiving sides (that are affected by noise).
The basic measures for lessening the effect of noise at the receiving side include:
Separating the main circuit wiring from the control circuit wiring, avoiding noise effect.
The basic measures for lessening the effect of noise at the generating side include:
1) Inserting a noise filter that reduces the noise level.
2) Applying a metal conduit pipe or metal enclosure that will confine noise, and
3) Applying an insulated transformer for the power supply that cuts off the noise propagation route.
Table A.1 lists the noise prevention measures, their goals, and propagation routes.
Table A.1 Noise Prevention Measures
Goal of noise prevention
measures
Noise prevention method
Wiring and
installation
Line filter
Insulation transformer
Use a passive capacitor
Measures at for control circuit
noise
Use ferrite core for
receiving
control circuit
sides
Line filter
Separate power supply
systems
Others
Lower the carrier
frequency
Anti-noise
device
Cutoff
Reduce Conduc- Inducnoise
Confine
noise
tion
tion
conduc- noise
level
noise
noise
tion
Y
Radiation
noise
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y*
Y: Effective, Y*: Effective conditionally, Blank: Not effective
Y
Y
Y
A-5
Y
Y
App.
Power
control
enclosure
Separate main circuit
from control circuit
Minimize wiring
distance
Avoid parallel and
bundled wiring
Use appropriate
grounding
Use shielded wire and
twisted shielded wire
Use shielded cable in
main circuit
Use metal conduit pipe
Appropriate
arrangement of devices
in the enclosure
Metal enclosure
Make it
more
difficult
to
receive
noise
Conduction route
What follows is noise prevention measures for the inverter drive configuration.
(1) Wiring and grounding
As shown in Figure A.7, separate the main circuit wiring from control circuit wiring as far as possible
regardless of being located inside or outside the system enclosure containing an inverter. Use shielded
wires and twisted shielded wires that will block out extraneous noises, and minimize the wiring
distance. Also avoid bundled wiring of the main circuit and control circuit or parallel wiring.
Figure A.7 Separate Wiring
For the main circuit wiring, use a metal conduit pipe and connect its wires to the ground to prevent
noise propagation (refer to Figure A.8).
The shield (braided wire) of a shielded wire should be securely connected to the base (common) side
of the signal line at only one point to avoid the loop formation resulting from a multi-point connection
(refer to Figure A.9).
The grounding is effective not only to reduce the risk of electrical shocks due to leakage current, but
also to block noise penetration and radiation. Corresponding to the main circuit voltage, the grounding
work should be Class D grounding work (300 VAC or less, grounding resistance of 100: or less) and
Class C grounding work (300 to 600 VAC, grounding resistance of 10: or less). Each ground wire is
to be provided with its own ground or separately wired to a grounding point.
Figure A.8 Grounding of Metal Conduit Pipe
Figure A.9 Treatment of Braided Wire of
Shielded Wire
(2) Power control enclosure
A power control enclosure containing an inverter is generally made of metal, which can shield noise
radiated from the inverter itself.
When installing other electronic devices such as a programmable logic controller in the same
enclosure, be careful with the layout of each device. If necessary, arrange shield plates between the
inverter and peripheral devices.
A-6
App. A Advantageous Use of Inverters (Notes on electrical noise)
(3) Anti-noise devices
To reduce the noise propagated through the electrical circuits and the noise radiated from the main
circuit wiring to the air, a line filter and power supply transformer should be used (refer to Figure
A.10).
Line filters are available in these types--the simplified type such as a capacitive filter to be connected
in parallel to the power supply line and an inductive filter to be connected in series to the power supply
line and the orthodox type such as an LC filter to meet radio noise regulations. Use them according to
the targeted effect for reducing noise.
Power supply transformers include popular isolation transformers, shielded transformers, and
noise-cutting transformers. These transformers have different effectiveness in blocking noise
propagation.
(a) Capacitive filter
(b) Inductive filter
(c) LC filter
(zero-phase reactor or ferrite ring)
Figure A.10 Various Filters and their Connection
1) Lower the circuit impedance by connecting capacitors or resistors to the input and output terminals
of the signal circuit in parallel.
2) Increase the circuit impedance for noise by inserting choke coils in series in the signal circuit or
passing signal lines through ferrite core beads. It is also effective to widen the signal base lines (0 V
line) or grounding lines.
(5) Other
The level of generating/propagating noise will change with the carrier frequency of the inverter. The
higher the carrier frequency, the higher the noise level.
In an inverter that can change the carrier frequency, lowering the carrier frequency can reduce the
generation of electrical noise and result in a good balance with the audible noise of the running motor.
A-7
App.
(4) Noise prevention measures at the receiving side
It is important to strengthen the noise immunity of those electronic devices installed in the same
enclosure as the inverter or located near an inverter. Line filters and shielded or twisted shielded wires
are used to block the penetration of noise in the signal lines of these devices. The following treatments
are also implemented.
[3]
Noise prevention examples
Table A.2 lists examples of the measures to prevent noise generated by a running inverter.
Table A.2 Examples of Noise Prevention Measures
No.
1
Target
device
AM
radio
set
Phenomena
Noise prevention measures
Notes
When operating an inverter,
noise enters into an AM radio
broadcast band (500 to 1500
kHz).
<Possible cause>
The AM radio set may
receive noise radiated from
wires at the power source
(primary) and output
(secondary) sides of the
inverter.
2
AM
radio
set
1) Install an LC filter at the
power source side of the
inverter. (In some cases, a
capacitive filter may be
used as a simple method.)
2) Install a metal conduit
wiring between the
motor and inverter. Or
use shielded wiring.
Note: Minimize the distance between
the LC filter and inverter as much as
possible (within 1m).
When operating an inverter,
noise enters into an AM radio
broadcast band (500 to 1500
kHz).
1) Install inductive filters at
the power source
(primary) and output
(secondary) sides of the
inverter.
<Possible cause>
The AM radio set may
receive noise radiated from
the power line at the power
source (primary) side of the
inverter.
The number of turns of
the zero-phase reactor (or
ferrite ring) should be as
large as possible. In
addition, wiring between
the inverter and the
zero-phase reactor (or
ferrite ring) should be as
short as possible. (within
1m)
2) When further
improvement is
necessary, install LC
filters.
A-8
1) The radiation
noise of the
wiring can be
reduced.
2) The conduction
noise to the
power source
side can be
reduced.
Note: Sufficient
improvement may
not be expected in
narrow regions such
as between
mountains.
1) The radiation
noise of the
wiring can be
reduced.
App. A Advantageous Use of Inverters (Notes on electrical noise)
Table A.2 Continued
No.
3
Target
device
Telephone
(in a
common
private
residence
at a
distance
of 40 m)
Phenomena
Noise prevention measures
Notes
When driving a ventilation
fan with an inverter, noise
enters a private telephone in a
residence at a distance of 40
m.
1) The effect of the
inductive filter
and LC filter
may not be
expected
because of its
incapability of
eliminating
audio frequency.
1) Connect the ground
terminals of the motors in
a common connection
with the inverter to return
the high frequency
components to the
inverter enclosure, and
insert a 1 PF capacitor
between the input
terminal of the inverter
and ground. Refer to the
note at right for details.
<Possible cause>
A high-frequency leakage
current emitted from the
inverter or motor onto the
commercial power lines
interferes with a public
telephone network service hub
near the pole transformer,
through the transformer’s
grounding line. In this case,
the leakage current flowing on 㩷
the grounding line may
crosstalk in the hub through
its grounding line and will be
propagated to the telephone
by electrostatic induction.
㩷
2) In the case of a
V-connection
power supply
transformer in a
200V system, it
is necessary to
connect
capacitors as
shown in the
following figure,
because of
different
potentials to
ground.㩷
App.
4
Photoelectric
relay
1) As a temporary measure,
connect a 0.1PF capacitor
between the 0 V terminal
of the power supply circuit
in the photoelectric relay
of the overhead gear and a
frame of its enclosure.
A photoelectric relay
malfunctioned when the
inverter runs the motor.
[The inverter and motor are
installed in the same place
(such as for overhead hoist
gear)]㩷
㩷
<Possible cause>
It is considered that induction
noise entered the
photoelectric relay since the
inverter's input power supply
line and the photoelectric
relay's wiring are routed in
㩷
parallel each other within 25
mm clearance over a distance
of 30 to 40 m or longer. Due
to restrictions of the
installation, these lines
cannot be more separated.
2) As a permanent measure,
move the 24 V power
supply from the floor to
the overhead gear
㩷
enclosure, and transfer the
photoelectric relay signal
to the equipment on the
floor with relay contacts
in the overhead gear.
A-9
1) The wiring is
separated by
more than 30 cm.
2) When separation
is impossible,
signals can be
received and sent
with dry contacts
etc.
3) Never wire
weak-current
signal lines and
power lines
closely each
other in parallel.
Table A.2 Continued
No.
5
Target
device
Photoelectric
relay
Phenomena
Noise prevention measures
Notes
A photoelectric relay
malfunctioned when the
inverter was operated.
1) Insert a 0.1 PF capacitor
between the output
common terminal of the
amplifier of the
photoelectric relay and
the frame.
1) Taking a
weak-current
signal circuit
malfunctioning
into account may
help you easily
find simple and
economical
countermeasure.
1) Install an LC filter at the
output (secondary) side
of the inverter.
2) Install a capacitive filter
at the power source
(primary) side of the
inverter.
3) Ground the 0 V
(common) line of the DC
power supply of the
proximity switch through
a capacitor to the
enclosure of the machine.
1) Noise generated
in the inverter
can be reduced.
2) The switch is
superseded by a
proximity switch
of superior noise
immunity (such
as a magnetic
type).
<Possible cause>
Although the inverter and
photoelectric relay are
separated by a sufficient
distance but the power
supplies share a common
connection, it is considered
that conduction noise entered
through the power supply line
into the photoelectric relay.
6
Proximity
switch
(electrostatic
type)
A proximity switch
malfunctioned.
<Possible cause>
It is considered that the
capacitance type proximity
switch is susceptible to
conduction and radiation
noise because of its low noise
immunity.
A-10
App. A Advantageous Use of Inverters (Notes on electrical noise)
Table A.2 Continued
No.
7
Target
device
Pressure
sensor
Phenomena
Noise prevention measures
Notes
A pressure sensor
malfunctioned.
<Possible cause>
The pressure sensor may
malfunction due to noise that
came from the enclosure
through the shielded wire.
8
Position
detector
(pulse
generator
: PG)
Erroneous-pulse outputs
from a pulse converter caused
a shift in the stop position of a
crane.
1) The shield sheath
of the wire for
sensor signal is
connected to a
common point in
the system.
2) Conduction
noise from the
inverter can be
reduced.
1) Install an LC filter and a
capacitive filter at the
power source (primary)
side of the inverter.
2) Install an LC filter at the
output (secondary) side
of the inverter.
1) This is an
example of a
measure where
the power line
and signal line
cannot be
separated.
2) Induction noise
and radiation
noise at the
output side of the
inverter can be
reduced.
1) Install a capacitive filter
and an LC filter on the
power source (primary)
side of the inverter.
2) Install an LC filter on the
output (secondary) side
of the inverter.
3) Lower the carrier
frequency of the inverter.
1) Total conduction
noise and
induction noise
in the electric
line can be
reduced.
<Possible cause>
Erroneous pulses may be
outputted by induction noise
since the power line of the
motor and the signal line of
the PG are bundled together.
9
Program The PLC program sometimes
mable
malfunctions.
logic
controller
(PLC)
<Possible cause>
Since the power supply
system is the same for the
PLC and inverter, it is
considered that noise enters
the PLC through the power
supply.
A-11
App.
1) Install an LC filter on
the power source
(primary) side of the
inverter.
2) Connect the shield of the
wire of the pressure
sensor to the 0 V line
(common) of the
pressure sensor,
changing the old
connection.
App.B Japanese Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics by
Customers Receiving High Voltage or Special High
Voltage
- Disclaimer: This document provides you with a translated summary of the Guideline of the Ministry of
International Trade and Industry (September 1994). It is intended to apply to the domestic market only. It is
only for reference for the foreign market. Agency of Natural Resource and Energy of Japan published the following two guidelines for
suppressing harmonic noise in September 1994.
(1) Guideline for suppressing harmonics in home electric and general-purpose appliances
(2) Guideline for suppressing harmonics by customers receiving high voltage or special high voltage
Assuming that electronic devices generating high harmonics will be increasing, these guidelines are to
establish regulations for preventing high frequency noise interference on devices sharing the power
source. These guidelines should be applied to all devices that are used on the commercial power lines
and generate harmonic current. This section gives a description limited to general-purpose inverters.
B.1
Application to general-purpose inverters
[1]
Guideline for suppressing harmonics in home electric and general-purpose appliances
Our three-phase, 200V series inverters of 3.7 kW or less (FRENIC-Eco series) were the products of
which were restricted by the "Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics in Home Electric and
General-purpose Appliances" (established in September 1994 and revised in October 1999) issued by
the Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry.
The above restriction, however, was lifted when the Guideline was revised in January 2004. Since then,
the inverter makers have individually imposed voluntary restrictions on the harmonics of their
products.
We, as before, recommend that you connect a reactor (for suppressing harmonics) to your inverter.
[2]
Guideline for suppressing harmonics by customers receiving high voltage or special
high voltage
Unlike other guidelines, this guideline is not applied to the equipment itself such as a general-purpose
inverter, but is applied to each large-scale electric power consumer for total amount of harmonics. The
consumer should calculate the harmonics generated from each piece of equipment currently used on
the power source transformed and fed from the high or special high voltage source.
(1) Scope of regulation
In principle, the guideline applies to the customers that meet the following two conditions:
-
The customer receives high voltage or special high voltage.
The "equivalent capacity" of the converter load exceeds the standard value for the receiving
voltage (50 kVA at a receiving voltage of 6.6 kV).
Appendix B.2 [1] "Calculation of equivalent capacity (Pi)" gives you some supplemental information
with regard to estimation for the equivalent capacity of an inverter according to the guideline.
A-12
App. B Japanese Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics for Customers Receiving High Voltage or Special High Voltage
(2) Regulation
The level (calculated value) of the harmonic current that flows from the customer's receiving point out
to the system is subjected to the regulation. The regulation value is proportional to the contract
demand. The regulation values specified in the guideline are shown in Table B.1.
Appendix B.2 gives you some supplemental information with regard to estimation for the equivalent
capacity of the inverter for compliance to "Japanese guideline for suppressing harmonics by customers
receiving high voltage or special high voltage."
Table B.1 Upper Limits of Harmonic Outflow Current per kW of Contract Demand (mA/kW)
Receiving
voltage
5th
7th
11th
13th
17th
19th
23rd
Over
25th
6.6 kV
3.5
2.5
1.6
1.3
1.0
0.90
0.76
0.70
22 kV
1.8
1.3
0.82
0.69
0.53
0.47
0.39
0.36
(3) When the regulation applied
The guideline has been applied. As the application, the estimation for "Voltage waveform distortion
rate" required as the indispensable conditions when entering into the consumer's contract of electric
power is already expired.
B.2
Compliance to the harmonic suppression for customers receiving
high voltage or special high voltage
When calculating the required matters related to inverters according to the guideline, follow the terms
listed below. The following descriptions are based on "Technical document for suppressing
harmonics" (JEAG 9702-1995) published by the Japan Electric Association (JEA).
[1]
Calculation of equivalent capacity (Pi)
(1) "Inverter rated capacity" corresponding to "Pi"
- In the guideline, the conversion factor of a 6-pulse converter is used as reference conversion factor
1. It is, therefore, necessary to express the rated input capacity of inverters in a value including
harmonic component current equivalent to conversion factor 1.
-
Calculate the input fundamental current I1 from the kW rating and efficiency of the load motor, as
well as the efficiency of the inverter. Then, calculate the input rated capacity as shown below:
Input rated capacity
3 u (power supply voltage) u I1 u 1.0228/100 0 (kVA )
where 1.0228 is the 6-pulse converter's value of (effective current)/(fundamental current).
-
When a general-purpose motor or inverter motor is used, the appropriate value shown in Table B.2
can be used. Select a value based on the kW rating of the motor used, irrespective of the inverter
type.
The input rated capacity shown above is for the dedicated use in the equation to calculate
capacity of the inverters, following the guideline. Note that the capacity cannot be applied to
the reference for selection of the equipment or wires to be used in the power source (primary)
side.
For selection of capacity for the peripheral equipment, refer to the catalogs or technical
documents issued from their manufacturers.
A-13
App.
The equivalent capacity (Pi) may be calculated using the equation of (input rated capacity) x
(conversion factor). However, catalogs of conventional inverters do not contain input rated capacities,
so a description of the input rated capacity is shown below:
Table B.2 "Input Rated Capacities" of General-purpose Inverters Determined by the Applicable Motor Ratings
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
- 4.0
5.5
200V
0.57
0.97
1.95
2.81
4.61
6.77
400V
0.57
0.97
1.95
2.81
4.61
6.77
Applicable
motor rating
(kW)
Pi
(kVA)
(2) Values of "Ki (conversion factor)"
Depending on whether an optional ACR (AC reactor) or DCR (DC reactor) is used, apply the
appropriate conversion factor specified in the appendix to the guideline. The values of the
conversion factor are listed in Table B.3.
Table B.3 "Conversion Factors Ki" for General-purpose Inverters Determined by Reactors
Circuit
category
Conversion
factor Ki
Main applications
K31 = 3.4
x General-purpose
w/ reactor (ACR)
K32 = 1.8
x Elevators
w/ reactor (DCR)
K33 = 1.8
x Refrigerators, air
w/ reactors (ACR and DCR)
K34 = 1.4
Circuit type
w/o reactor
3
3-phase bridge
(w/ reservoir
capacitor)
inverters
conditioning
systems
x Other general
appliances
Some models are equipped with a reactor as a built-in standard accessory.
[2]
Calculation of harmonic current
(1) Value of "input fundamental current"
- When you calculate the amount of harmonics according to Table 2 in Appendix of the Guideline, you
have to previously know the input fundamental current.
-
Apply the appropriate value shown in Table B.4 based on the kW rating of the motor, irrespective
of the inverter type or whether a reactor is used.
If the input voltage is different, calculate the input fundamental current in inverse proportion
to the voltage.
Table B.4
"Input Fundamental Currents" of General-purpose Inverters
Determined by the Applicable Motor Ratings
Applicable motor rating
(kW)
Input
fundamental
current (A)
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
4.0
5.5
200V
1.62
2.74
5.50
7.92
13.0
19.1
400V
0.81
1.37
2.75
3.96
6.50
9.55
49
83
167
240
394
579
6.6 kV converted value
(mA)
㩷
A-14
App. B Japanese Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics for Customers Receiving High Voltage or Special High Voltage
(2) Calculation of harmonic current
Usually, calculate the harmonic current according to the Sub-table 3 "Three phase bridge rectifier with
the reservoir capacitor" in Table 2 of the Guideline's Appendix. Table B.5 lists the contents of the
sub-table 3.
Table B.5 Generated Harmonic Current (%), 3-phase Bridge Rectifier (w/ reservoir capacitor)
Higher harmonics order
-
5th
7th
11th
13th
17th
19th
23rd
25th
w/o a reactor
65
41
8.5
7.7
4.3
3.1
2.6
1.8
w/ a reactor (ACR)
38
14.5
7.4
3.4
3.2
1.9
1.7
1.3
w/ a reactor (DCR)
30
13
8.4
5.0
4.7
3.2
3.0
2.2
w/ reactors (ACR and DCR)
28
9.1
7.2
4.1
3.2
2.4
1.6
1.4
ACR:
DCR:
Reservoir capacitor:
Load:
3%
Accumulated energy equal to 0.08 to 0.15 ms (100% load conversion)
Accumulated energy equal to 15 to 30 ms (100% load conversion)
100%
Calculate the harmonic current of each order using the following equation:
nth harmonic current (A) Fundamental current (A) u
Generated nth harmonic current (%)
100
(3) Maximum availability factor
- For a load for elevators, which provides intermittent operation, or a load with a sufficient designed
motor rating, reduce the current by multiplying the equation by the "maximum availability factor"
of the load.
The "maximum availability factor of an appliance" means the ratio of the capacity of the harmonic
generating source in operation at which the availability reaches the maximum, to its total capacity,
and the capacity of the generating source in operation is an average for 30 minutes.
-
In general, the maximum availability factor is calculated according to this definition, but the
standard values shown in Table B.6 are recommended for inverters for building equipment.
Table B.6 Availability Factors of Inverters, etc. for Building Equipment (Standard Values)
Equipment
type
Inverter capacity
category
Single inverter
availability
Air
conditioning
system
200 kW or less
0.55
Over 200 kW
0.60
Sanitary pump
̆̆̆
0.30
Elevator
̆̆̆
0.25
Refrigerator,
freezer
50 kW or less
0.60
UPS (6-pulse)
200 kVA
0.60
Correction coefficient according to contract demand level
Since the total availability factor decreases if the scale of a building increases, calculating reduced
harmonics with the correction coefficient Eᴾdefined in Table B.7 is permitted.
Table B.7 Correction Coefficient according to the Building Scale
Contract demand
(kW)
Correction
coefficient E
300
500
1000
2000
1.00
0.90
0.85
0.80
A-15
App.
-
Note: If the contract demand is between two specified values listed in Table B.7, calculate the value
by interpolation.
Note: The correction coefficient E is to be determined as a matter of consultation between the
customer and electric power supplier for the customers receiving the electric power over 2000
kW or from the special high voltage lines.
(4) Order of harmonics to be calculated
The higher the order of harmonics, the lower the current flows. This is the property of harmonics
generated by inverters so that the inverters are covered by "The case without any special hazard" of the
term (3) in the Guideline's Appendix 3.
Therefore, "It is sufficient that the 5th and 7th harmonic currents should be calculated."
[3]
Examples of calculation
(1) Equivalent capacity
Input capacity and
Conversion factor
No. of inverters
Example of loads
Equivalent capacity
[Example 1] 400V, 3.7 kW, 10 units
w/ AC reactor and DC reactor
4.61 kVA u 10 units
K34 = 1.4
4.61 u 10 u 1.4
= 64.54 kVA
[Example 2] 400V, 1.5 kW, 15 units
w/ DC reactor
1.95 kVA u 15 units
K33 = 1.8
1.95 u 15 u 1.8
= 52.65 kVA
Refer to Table B.2. Refer to Table B.3.
(2) Harmonic current every orders
[Example 1] 400V, 3.7 kW 10 units, w/ AC reactor and DC reactor, and maximum availability: 0.55
Fundamental current
onto 6.6 kV lines (mA)
394 u 10= 3940
3940 u 0.55= 2167
Harmonic current onto 6.6 kV lines (mA)
5th
(28%)
7th
(9.1%)
11th
(7.2%)
13th
(4.1%)
17th
(3.2%)
19th
(2.4%)
23rd
(1.6%)
25th
(1.4%)
606.8
197.2
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
23rd
(3.0%)
25th
(2.2%)
Refer to Tables B.4 and
B.6.
Refer to Table B.5.
[Example 2] 400V, 1.5 kW, 15 units, w/ DC reactor, and maximum availability: 0.55
Fundamental current
onto 6.6 kV lines (mA)
167 u 15= 2505
2505 u 0.55= 1378
Harmonic current onto 6.6 kV lines (mA)
5th
(30%)
7th
(13%)
413.4
179.2
11th
(8.4%)
Refer to Tables B.4 and
B.6.
13th
(5.0%)
17th
(4.7%)
Refer to Table B.5.
A-16
19th
(3.2%)
App. C Effect on Insulation of General-purpose Motors Driven with 400 V Class Inverters
App.C Effect on Insulation of General-purpose Motors
Driven with 400 V Class Inverters
- Disclaimer: This document provides you with a summary of the Technical Document of the Japan Electrical
Association (JEA) (March, 1995). It is intended to apply to the domestic market only. It is only for reference
for the foreign market. -
Preface
When an inverter drives a motor, surge voltages generated by switching the inverter elements are
superimposed on the inverter output voltage and applied to the motor terminals. If the surge voltages
are too high they may have an effect on the motor insulation and some cases have resulted in damage.
For preventing such cases this document describes the generating mechanism of the surge voltages
and countermeasures against them.
C.1
Refer to A.2 [1] "Inverter noise" for details of the principle of inverter operation.
Generating mechanism of surge voltages
As the inverter rectifies a commercial power source voltage and smoothes into a DC voltage, the
magnitude E of the DC voltage becomes about 2 times that of the source voltage (about 620V in
case of an input voltage of 440 VAC). The peak value of the output voltage is usually close to this DC
voltage value.
This voltage sometimes reaches up to about twice that of the inverter DC voltage (620V x 2 =
approximately 1,200V) depending on a switching speed of the inverter elements and wiring
conditions.
Figure C.1 Voltage Wave Shapes of Individual Portions
A measured example in Figure C.2 illustrates the relation of a peak value of the motor terminal voltage
with a wiring length between the inverter and the motor.
From this it can be confirmed that the peak value of the motor terminal voltage ascends as the wiring
length increases and becomes saturated at about twice the inverter DC voltage.
The shorter a pulse rise time becomes, the higher the motor terminal voltage rises even in the case of a
short wiring length.
A-17
App.
But, as there exists inductance (L) and stray capacitance (C) in wiring between the inverter and the
motor, the voltage variation due to switching the inverter elements causes a surge voltage originating
in LC resonance and results in the addition of high voltage to the motor terminals. (Refer to Figure
C.1)
Figure C.2 Measured Example of Wiring Length and Peak Value of Motor Terminal Voltage
C.2
Effect of surge voltages
The surge voltages originating in LC resonance of wiring may be applied to the motor input terminals
and depending on their magnitude sometimes cause damage to the motor insulation.
When the motor is driven with a 200 V class inverter, the dielectric strength of the motor insulation has
no problem even if the peak value of the motor terminal voltage increases twice at most due to the
surge voltages since the DC link bus voltage is only approx. 300 V.
But in case of a 400 V class inverter the DC voltage to be switched is approximately 600 V and
depending on the wiring length, the surge voltages may greatly increase (nearly at 1,200 V) and
sometimes result in damage to the motor insulation.
C.3
Countermeasures against surge voltages
The following methods are countermeasures against damage to the motor insulation by the surge
voltages and using a motor driven with a 400 V class inverter.
[1]
Method using motors with enhanced insulation
Enhanced insulation of a motor winding allows its surge proof strength to be improved.
[2]
Method to suppress surge voltages
There are two methods for suppressing the surge voltages, one is to reduce the voltage rise time and
another is to reduce the voltage peak value.
(1) Output reactor
If wiring length is relatively short the surge voltages can be suppressed by reducing the voltage rise
time (dv/dt) with the installation of an AC reactor on the output (secondary) side of the inverter. (Refer
to Figure C.3 (1).)
However, if the wiring length becomes long, suppressing the peak voltage due to surges may be
difficult for this countermeasure.
(2) Output filter
Installing a filter on the output side of the inverter allows a peak value of the motor terminal voltage to
be reduced. (Refer to Figure C.3 (2).)
A-18
App. C Effect on Insulation of General-purpose Motors Driven with 400 V Class Inverters
(1) Output reactor
(2) Output filter
Figure C.3 Method to Suppress Surge Voltage
C.4
Regarding existing equipment
[1]
In case of a motor being driven with 400 V class inverter
A survey over the several years on motor insulation damage due to the surge voltages originating from
switching of inverter elements shows that the damage incidence is 0.013% under the surge voltage
condition of over 1,100 V and most of the damage occurs several months after commissioning the
inverter. Therefore there seems to be little probability of occurrence of motor insulation damage after
a lapse of several months of commissioning.
[2]
In case of an existing motor driven using a newly installed 400 V class inverter
We recommend suppressing the surge voltages with the method of Section C.3.
App.
A-19
App.D Inverter Generating Loss
The table below lists the inverter generating loss.
Power
supply
voltage
Applicable motor
rating (kW)
0.75
50
60
79
110
2.2
FRN2.2F1„-2†
110
140
167
210
210
280
320
410
410
520
550
660
670
800
810
970
1070
1190*3
1700
1800*3
1500
1650*3
1900
2150*3
2400
2700*3
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
FRN3.7F1„-2†
FRN5.5F1„-2†
FRN7.5F1„-2†
FRN11F1„-2†
FRN15F1„-2†
FRN18.5F1„-2†
FRN22F1„-2†
FRN30F1„-2†
FRN37F1„-2†
FRN45F1„-2†
FRN55F1„-2†
FRN75F1„-2†
FRN0.75F1„-4†
FRN1.5F1„-4†
FRN2.2F1„-4†
FRN3.7F1„-4†
FRN5.5F1„-4†
FRN7.5F1„-4†
FRN11F1„-4†
FRN15F1„-4†
FRN18.5F1„-4†
FRN22F1„-4†
FRN30F1„-4†
FRN37F1„-4†
FRN45F1„-4†
FRN55F1„-4†
FRN75F1„-4†
FRN90F1„-4†
45
82
60
110
80
150
130
230
160
280
220
370
340
530
450
700
460
790
570
970
950
1200*3
1150
1450*3
1300
1600*3
1350
1700*3
1550
2050*3
1850
2100*4
110
FRN110F1„-4†
2200
2500*4
132
FRN132F1„-4†
2550
2900*4
3150
3550*4
3800
4350*4
4350
4950*4
160
200
220
Note
High carrier
frequency *2
FRN1.5F1„-2†
5.5
Threephase
400 V
FRN0.75F1„-2†
Low carrier
frequency *1
1.5
3.7
Threephase
200 V
Generating loss (W)
Inverter type
FRN160F1„-4†
FRN200F1„-4†
FRN220F1„-4†
1) The carrier frequency fc is: 2 kHz for *1, 15 kHz for *2, 10 kHz for *3, and 6 kHz for *4
2) A box („) in the above table replaces S (Standard type), E (EMC filter built-in type), or H (DCR built-in
type) depending on the product specifications.
3) A box (†) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or J depending on the shipping destination.
A-20
App. E Conversion from SI Units
App.E Conversion from SI Units
All expressions given in Chapter 7, "SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND INVERTER
CAPACITIES" are based on SI units (International System of Units). This section explains how to
convert expressions to other units.
[1]
Conversion of units
(1) Force
(6) Inertia constant
• 1 (kgf) | 9.8 (N)
• 1 (N) | 0.102 (kgf)
J (kg·m2)
:moment of inertia
GD2 (kg·m2)
:flywheel effect
• GD2 = 4 J
(2) Torque
2
• J GD
• 1 (kgf·m) | 9.8 (N·m)
• 1 (N·m) | 0.102 (kgf·m)
4
(7) Pressure and stress
(3) Work and Energy
• 1 (mmAq) | 9.8 (Pa) | 9.8 (N/m2)
• 1(Pa) | 1(N/m2) | 0.102 (mmAq)
• 1 (bar) | 100000 (Pa) | 1.02 (kg·cm2)
• 1 (kg·cm2) | 98000 (Pa) | 980 (mbar)
• 1 atmospheric pressure = 1013 (mbar)
• 1 (kgf·m) | 9.8 (N·m) = 9.8(J) =
9.8 (W·s)
(4) Power
• 1 (kgf·m/s) | 9.8 (N·m/s) = 9.8 (J/s)
= 760 (mmHg) = 101300 (Pa)
| 1.033 (kg/cm2)
= 9.8(W)
• 1 (N·m/s) | 1 (J/s) = 1 (W)
| 0.102 (kgf·m/s)
(5) Rotation speed
• 1 (r/min)
A-21
App.
• 1 (rad / s)
2S
( rad / s) | 0.1047 (rad/s)
60
60
(r/min) | 9.549 (r/min)
2S
[2]
Calculation formula
(1) Torque, power, and rotation speed
(4) Acceleration torque
2S
x N (r/min) x W (N x m) 60
• P ( W ) | 1.026 x N (r/min) x T (kgf x m)
Driving mode
• P (W) |
J (kg x m2) 'N ( r / min)
x
9.55
't (s) x KG
2 ( kg x 2) 'N ( r / min)
m x
• T (kgf x m) | GD
375
' t (s ) x K G
• W (N x m) |
P (W)
N (r/min)
P (W)
• T (kgf x m) | 0.974 x
N (r/min)
• W (N x m) | 9.55 x
Braking mode
J ( kg x m2) 'N (r / min) x KG
x
9.55
't (s)
2 ( kg x 2) 'N ( r / min) x K
m x
G • T (kgf x m) | GD
375
' t (s )
• W (N x m) |
(2) Kinetic energy
1
2
x J ( kg x m2 ) x N 2 [(r/min) ]
182.4
1
2
• E (J) |
x GD2 ( kg x m2) x N 2 [(r/min) ] 730
• E (J ) |
(5) Acceleration time
• t ACC (s) |
J1 J 2 / KG (kg x m2) 'N (r / min)
x
9.55
W M W L / KG ( N x m )
• t ACC (s) |
GD12 GD 2 2 / KG (kg x m2) 'N ( r / min)
x
375
T M T L / KG ( kgf x m)
(3) Torque of linear moving load
Driving mode
• W (N x m) | 0.159 x
V (m / min)
N M (r/min) x KG
x
F ( N) V ( m / min)
N M (r/min) x KG
x
F (kgf ) • T (kgf x m) | 0.159 x
(6) Deceleration time
Braking mode
• W (N x m) | 0.159 x
•
V (m / min)
N M (r/min) / KG
V ( m / min)
T (kgf x m) | 0.159 x
N M (r/min) / KG
x
F ( N) x
㩷
F ( kgf ) 㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
A-22
•
t DEC (s) |
•
t DEC (s) |
J1 J 2 x KG (kg x m2)
WM WL x KG ( N x m)
x
'N (r / min)
9.55
GD12 GD 2 2 x KG (kg x m2)
T M T L x KG (kgf x m)
x
'N (r / min)
375
App. F Allowable Current of Insulated Wires
App.F Allowable Current of Insulated Wires
The tables below list the allowable current of IV wires, HIV wires, and 600 V class of cross-linked
polyethylene-insulated wires.
„ IV wires (Maximum allowable temperature: 60qC)
Table F.1 (a) Allowable Current of Insulated Wires
Wiring outside duct
Allowable current
Wire size
2
(mm )
Wiring in the duct (Max. 3 wires in one duct)
reference value
35qC
40qC
45qC
50qC
55qC
35qC
40qC
45qC
50qC
(up to 30qC)
(Io×0.91)
(Io×0.82)
(Io×0.71)
(Io×0.58)
(Io×0.40)
(Io×0.63)
(Io×0.57)
(Io×0.49)
(Io×0.40)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
27
24
22
19
15
11
17
15
13
10
3.5
37
33
30
26
21
15
23
21
18
14
5.5
49
44
40
34
28
20
30
27
24
19
8.0
61
55
50
43
35
25
38
34
29
24
14
88
80
72
62
51
36
55
50
43
35
22
115
104
94
81
66
47
72
65
56
46
38
162
147
132
115
93
66
102
92
79
64
60
217
197
177
154
125
88
136
123
106
86
100
298
271
244
211
172
122
187
169
146
119
150
395
359
323
280
229
161
248
225
193
158
200
469
426
384
332
272
192
295
267
229
187
250
556
505
455
394
322
227
350
316
272
222
325
650
591
533
461
377
266
409
370
318
260
400
745
677
610
528
432
305
469
424
365
298
500
842
766
690
597
488
345
530
479
412
336
2 x 100
497
452
407
352
288
203
313
283
243
198
2 x 150
658
598
539
467
381
269
414
375
322
263
2 x 200
782
711
641
555
453
320
492
445
383
312
2 x 250
927
843
760
658
537
380
584
528
454
370
2 x 325
1083
985
888
768
628
444
682
617
530
433
2 x 400
1242
1130
1018
881
720
509
782
707
608
496
2 x 500
1403
1276
1150
996
813
575
883
799
687
561
„ HIV wires (Maximum allowable temperature: 75qC)
Table F.1 (b) Allowable Current of Insulated Wires
Wiring outside duct
Allowable current
Wire size
2
(mm )
Wiring in the duct (Max. 3 wires in one duct)
reference value
35qC
40qC
45qC
50qC
55qC
35qC
40qC
45qC
50qC
(up to 30qC)
(Io×0.91)
(Io×0.82)
(Io×0.71)
(Io×0.58)
(Io×0.40)
(Io×0.63)
(Io×0.57)
(Io×0.49)
(Io×0.40)
Io (A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
2.0
32
31
29
27
24
22
21
20
18
17
3.5
45
42
39
37
33
30
29
27
25
23
5.5
59
56
52
49
44
40
39
36
34
30
8.0
74
70
65
61
55
50
48
45
42
38
14
107
101
95
88
80
72
70
66
61
55
22
140
132
124
115
104
94
92
86
80
72
38
197
186
174
162
147
132
129
121
113
102
60
264
249
234
217
197
177
173
162
151
136
100
363
342
321
298
271
244
238
223
208
187
150
481
454
426
395
359
323
316
296
276
248
200
572
539
506
469
426
384
375
351
328
295
250
678
639
600
556
505
455
444
417
389
350
325
793
747
702
650
591
533
520
487
455
409
400
908
856
804
745
677
610
596
558
521
469
500
1027
968
909
842
766
690
673
631
589
530
2 x 100
606
571
536
497
452
407
397
372
347
313
2 x 150
802
756
710
658
598
539
526
493
460
414
2 x 200
954
899
844
782
711
641
625
586
547
492
2 x 250
1130
1066
1001
927
843
760
741
695
648
584
2 x 325
1321
1245
1169
1083
985
888
866
812
758
682
2 x 400
1515
1428
1341
1242
1130
1018
993
931
869
782
2 x 500
1711
1613
1515
1403
1276
1150
1122
1052
982
883
A-23
App.
Io (A)
2.0
„ 600 V class of Cross-linked Polyethylene-insulated wires (Maximum allowable
temperature: 90qC)
Table F.1 (c) Allowable Current of Insulated Wires
Wiring outside duct
Allowable current
Wire size
2
(mm )
Wiring in the duct (Max. 3 wires in one duct)
reference value
35qC
40qC
45qC
50qC
55qC
35qC
40qC
45qC
50qC
(up to 30qC)
(Io×0.91)
(Io×0.82)
(Io×0.71)
(Io×0.58)
(Io×0.40)
(Io×0.63)
(Io×0.57)
(Io×0.49)
(Io×0.40)
Io (A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
2.0
38
36
34
32
31
29
25
24
22
21
3.5
52
49
47
45
42
39
34
33
31
29
5.5
69
66
63
59
56
52
46
44
41
39
8.0
86
82
78
74
70
65
57
54
51
48
14
124
118
113
107
101
95
82
79
74
70
22
162
155
148
140
132
124
108
103
97
92
38
228
218
208
197
186
174
152
145
137
129
60
305
292
279
264
249
234
203
195
184
173
100
420
402
384
363
342
321
280
268
253
238
150
556
533
509
481
454
426
371
355
335
316
200
661
633
605
572
539
506
440
422
398
375
250
783
750
717
678
639
600
522
500
472
444
325
916
877
838
793
747
702
611
585
552
520
400
1050
1005
961
908
856
804
700
670
633
596
500
1187
1136
1086
1027
968
909
791
757
715
673
2 x 100
700
670
641
606
571
536
467
447
422
397
2 x 150
927
888
848
802
756
710
618
592
559
526
2 x 200
1102
1055
1008
954
899
844
735
703
664
625
2 x 250
1307
1251
1195
1130
1066
1001
871
834
787
741
2 x 325
1527
1462
1397
1321
1245
1169
1018
974
920
866
2 x 400
1751
1676
1602
1515
1428
1341
1167
1117
1055
993
2 x 500
1978
1894
1809
1711
1613
1515
1318
1262
1192
1122
A-24
Glossary
This glossary explains the technical terms that are frequently used in this manual.
Glossary
Acceleration time
Automatic energy saving operation
Period required when an inverter accelerates its
output from 0 Hz to the output frequency.
Related function codes: F03, F07, E10, and H54
Energy saving operation that automatically drives
the motor with lower output voltage when the motor
load has been light, for minimizing the product of
voltage and current (electric power).
Related function code: F37
Alarm mode
One of the three operation modes supported by the
inverter. If the inverter detects any malfunction,
error, or fault in its operation, it immediately shuts
down or trips the output to the motor and enters this
mode in which corresponding alarm codes are
displayed on the LED monitor.
AVR (Automatic Voltage Regulator) control
A control that keeps an output voltage constant
regardless to variations of the input source voltage
or load.
Base frequency
Alarm output (for any faults)
A mechanical contact output signal that is generated
when the inverter is halted by an alarm, by
short-circuiting between terminals [30A] and
[30C].
Related function code: E27
See Alarm mode.
Analog input
The minimum frequency at which an inverter
delivers a constant voltage in the output V/f pattern.
Related function code: F04
An external voltage or current input signal to give
the inverter the frequency command. The analog
voltage is applied on the terminal [11] or [V2], the
current on the [C1]. These terminals are also used to
input the signal from the external potentiometer,
PTC and PID feedback signals depending on the
function code definition.
Related function codes: F01, C30, E60 to E62 and
J02
Bias
A value to be added to an analog input frequency to
modify and produce the output frequency.
Related function codes: F18, C50 to C52
Braking torque
An analog DC output signal of the monitored data
such as the output frequency, the current and
voltage inside an inverter. The signal drive an
analog meter installed outside the inverter for
indicating the current inverter running status.
Refer to Chapter 8, Section 8.4.1 "Terminal
functions."
Applicable motor rating
Rated output (in kW) of a general-purpose motor
that is used as a standard motor listed in tables in
Chapter
6,
"SELECTING
PERIPHERAL
EQUIPMENT" and Chapter 8, "SPECIFICATIONS."
Automatic deceleration
A control mode in which deceleration time is
automatically extended up to 3 times of the
commanded time to prevent the inverter from
tripping due to an overvoltage caused by
regenerative power even if a braking resistor is
used.
Related function code: H69
G-1
Glossary
Torque that acts in a direction that will stop a
rotating motor (or the force required to stop a
running motor).
Analog output
If a deceleration time is shorter than the natural
stopping time (coast-to-stop) determined by a
moment of inertia for a load machine, then the
motor works as a generator when it decelerates,
causing the kinetic energy of the load to be
converted to electrical energy that is returned to the
inverter from the motor. If this power (regenerative
power) is consumed or accumulated by the inverter,
the motor generates a braking force called "braking
torque."
Constant torque load
A constant torque load is characterized by:
1) A requirement for an essentially constant torque,
regardless of the r/min
2) A power requirement that decreases in
proportion to the r/min
Related function code: F37
Applications: Conveyors, elevators, and transport
machines
Carrier frequency
Frequency used to modulate a modulated frequency
to establish the modulation period of a pulse width
under the PWM control system. The higher the
carrier frequency, the closer the inverter output
current approaches a sinusoidal waveform and the
quieter the motor becomes.
Related function code: F26
Coast-to-stop
If the inverter stops its output when the motor is
running, the motor will coast to a stop due to inertial
force.
Communications link function
Control circuit terminals
Terminals on the inverter, which are used for
input/output of signals to control or manage the
inverter/external equipment directly or indirectly
A feature to control an inverter from external
equipment serially linked to the inverter such as a
PC or PLC.
Related function code: H30
Current limiter
Constant feeding rate time
Cursor
Time required for an object to move in a constant
distance previously defined. The faster speed, the
shorter time and vise versa. This facility may be
applied to a chemical process that determines a
processing time of materials as the speed such as
heating, cooling, drying, or doping in some
constant-speed machinery.
Related function codes: E50.
Marker blinking on the four-digit, 7-segment LED
monitor which shows that data in the blinking digit
can be changed/modified by keying operation.
Constant output load
A constant output load is characterized by:
1) The required torque is in inverse proportion to
the load r/min
2) An essentially constant power requirement
Related function code: F37
Applications: Machine tool spindles
A device that keeps an inverter output frequency
within the specified current limit.
Curvilinear V/f pattern
A generic name for the inverter output patterns with
curvilinear relation between the frequency and
voltage.
Refer to function code H07 in Chapter 9, Section
9.2.5 "H codes."
DC braking (DC injection braking)
DC current braking that an inverter injects into the
motor to brake and stop it against the moment of
inertia of the motor or its load. The inertial energy
generated is consumed as heat in the motor.
If a motor having the load with large moment of
inertia is going to stop abruptly, the moment of
inertia may force to rotate the motor after the
inverter output frequency has been reduced to 0 Hz.
Use DC injection braking to stop the motor
completely.
Related function codes: F20 and F21
G-2
Glossary
DC link bus voltage
Frequency resolution
Voltage at the DC link bus that is the end stage of
the converter part of inverters. The part rectifies the
input AC power to charge the DC link bus
capacitor/s as the DC power to be inverted to AC
power.
The minimum step, or increment, in which output
frequency is varied, rather than continuously.
Function code
Code to customize the inverter. Setting function
codes realizes the potential capability of the inverter
to meet it for the individual power system
applications.
Deceleration time
Period during which an inverter slows its output
frequency down from the maximum to 0 Hz.
Related function codes: F03, F08, E11, and H54
Gain (for frequency command)
A frequency command gain enables varying the
slope the reference frequency set with an analog
input signal.
Related function codes: C32, C34, C37, and C39
Digital input
Input signals given to the programmable input
terminals or the programmable input terminals
themselves. A command assigned to the digital
input is called the terminal command to control the
inverter externally.
Refer to Chapter 8, Section 8.4.1 "Terminal
functions."
IGBT (Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor)
Stands for Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor that
enables the inverter section to switch high
voltage/current DC power in very high speed and to
output pulse train.
Electronic thermal overload protection
Interphase unbalance
Electronic thermal overload protection to issue an
early warning of the motor overheating to safeguard
a motor.
An inverter calculates the motor overheat condition
based on the internal data (given by function code
P99 about the properties of the motor) and the
driving conditions such as the drive current, voltage
and frequency.
A condition of an AC input voltage (supply voltage)
that states the voltage balance of each phase in an
expression as:
Interphase voltage unbalance (%)
=
Max.voltage (V) - Min.voltage (V)
u 67
3 - phase average voltage (V)
External potentiometer
Inverse mode operation
Fan stop operation
A mode of operation in which the output frequency
lowers as the analog input signal level rises.
A mode of control in which the cooling fan is shut
down if the internal temperature in the inverter is
low and when no operation command is issued.
Related function code: H06
Jogging operation
Frequency accuracy (stability)
A special operation mode of inverters, in which a
motor jogs forward or reverse for a short time at a
slower speed than usual operating modes.
Related function codes: F03, C20, and H54
The percentage of variations in output frequency to
a predefined maximum frequency.
Jump frequencies
Frequencies that have a certain output with no
change in the output frequency within the specified
frequency band in order to skip the resonance
frequency band of a machine.
Related function codes: C01 to C04
Frequency limiter
Frequency limiter used inside the inverter to control
the internal drive frequency in order to keep the
motor speed within the specified level between the
high and low frequency.
Related function codes: F15, F16, and H64
Keypad operation
To use a keypad to run an inverter.
Line speed
Running speed of an object (e.g., conveyor) driven
by the motor. The unit is meter per minute, m/min.
G-3
Glossary
A potentiometer (optional) that is used to set
frequencies as well as built-in one.
Load shaft speed
PTC (Positive Temperature Coefficient)
Number of revolutions per minute (r/min) of a
rotating load driven by the motor, such as a fan.
thermistor
Main circuit terminals
Power input/output terminals of an inverter, which
includes terminals to connect the power source,
motor, DC rector, braking resistor, and other power
components.
Maximum frequency
The output frequency commanded by the input of
the maximum value of a reference frequency setup
signal (for example, 10 V for a voltage input range
of 0 to 10 V or 20 mA for a current input range of 4
to 20 mA).
Related function code: F03
Modbus RTU
Communication protocol used in global FA
network market, which is developed by Modicon,
Inc. USA.
Momentary voltage dip capability
The minimum voltage (V) and time (ms) that permit
continued rotation of the motor after a momentary
voltage drop (instantaneous power failure).
Multistep frequency selection
To preset frequencies (up to 7 stages), then select
them at some later time using external signals.
Related function codes: E01 to E03, C05 to C11
Overload capability
The overload current that an inverter can tolerate,
expressed as a percentage of the rated output
current and also as a permissible energization time.
Type of thermistor with a positive temperature
coefficient. Used to safeguard a motor.
Related function codes: H26 and H27
Rated capacity
The rating of an inverter output capacity (at the
secondary side), or the apparent power that is
represented by the rated output voltage times the
rated output current, which is calculated by solving
the following equation and is stated in kVA:
Rated capacity (kVA)
3 u Rated output voltage (V)
u Rated output current (A) u10 3
The rated output voltage is assumed to be 220 V for
200 V class equipment and 440 V for 400 V class
equipment.
Rated output current
A total RMS equivalent to the current that flows
through the output terminal under the rated input
and output conditions (the output voltage, current,
frequency, and load factor meet their rated
conditions). Essentially, equipment rated at 200 V
covers the current of a 200 V, 50 Hz 6-pole motor
and equipment rated at 400 V covers the current of a
380 V, 50 Hz 4-pole motor.
Rated output voltage
A fundamental wave RMS equivalent to the voltage
that is generated across the output terminal when
the AC input voltage (supply voltage) and
frequency meet their rated conditions and the output
frequency of the inverter equals the base frequency.
Required power supply capacity
PID control
The scheme of control that brings controlled objects
to a desired value quickly and accurately, and which
consists of three categories of action: proportional,
integral and derivative.
Proportional action minimizes errors from a set
point. Integral action resets errors from a desired
value to 0. Derivative action applies a control value
in proportion to a differential component of the
difference between the PID reference and feedback
values. (See Chapter 4, Figure 4.7.)
Related function codes: E01 to E03, E40, E41, E43,
E60 to E62, C51, C52, J01 to J06
The capacity required of a power supply for an
inverter. This is calculated by solving either of the
following equations and is stated in kVA:
Required power supply capacity (kVA)
3 u 200 u Input RMS current (200V, 50Hz)
or
3 u 220 u Input RMS current (220V, 60Hz)
Required power supply capacity (kVA)
3 u 400 u Input RMS current (400V, 50Hz)
or
3 u 440 u Input RMS current (40V, 6 0Hz)
Programming mode
One of the three operation modes supported by the
inverter. This mode uses the menu-driven system
and allows the user to set function codes or check
the inverter status/maintenance information.
G-4
Glossary
Running mode
Thermal time constant
One of the three operation modes supported by the
inverter. If the inverter is turned ON, it
automatically enters this mode which you may:
run/stop the motor, set up the reference frequency,
monitor the running status, and jog the motor.
The time needed to activate the electronic thermal
overload protection after the preset operation level
(current) continuously flows. This is an adjustable
function code data to meet the property of a motor
that is not manufactured by Fuji Electric.
Related function code: F12
S-curve acceleration/deceleration
(weak/strong)
Torque boost
To reduce the impact on the inverter driven
machine during acceleration/deceleration, the
inverter gradually accelerates/decelerates the motor
at the both ends of the acceleration/deceleration
zones like a figure of S letter.
Related function code: H07
If a general-purpose motor is run with an inverter,
voltage drops will have a pronounced effect in a
low-frequency region, reducing the motor output
torque. In a low-frequency range, therefore, to
increase the motor output torque, it is necessary to
augment the output voltage. This process of voltage
compensation is called torque boost.
Related function code: F09
Slip compensation control
A mode of control in which the output frequency of
an inverter plus an amount of slip compensation is
used as an actual output frequency to compensate
for motor slippage.
Related function code: P09
Stall
Transistor output
Starting frequency
A control signal that generates predefined data from
within an inverter via a transistor (open collector).
The minimum frequency at which an inverter starts
its output (not the frequency at which a motor starts
rotating).
Related function code: F23
Trip
In response to an overvoltage, overcurrent, or any
other unusual condition, actuation of an inverter's
protective circuit to stop the inverter output.
Starting torque
Torque that a motor produces when it starts rotating
(or the drive torque with which the motor can run a
load).
V/f characteristic
A characteristic expression of the variations in
output voltage V (V), and relative to variations in
output frequency f (Hz). To achieve efficient motor
operation, an appropriate V/f (voltage/frequency)
characteristic helps a motor produce its output
torque matching the torque characteristics of a load.
Simultaneous keying
To simultaneously press the 2 keys on the keypad.
This presents the special function of inverters.
Stop frequency
The output frequency at which an inverter stops its
output.
Related function code: F25
G-5
Glossary
A behavior of a motor when it loses speed by
tripping of the inverter due to overcurrent detection
or other malfunctions of the inverter.
V/f control
The rotating speed N (r/min) of a motor can be
stated in an expression as
N
120 u f u (1 s)
p
where,
f: Output frequency
p: Number of poles
s: Slippage
On the basis of this expression, varying the output
frequency varies the speed of the motor. However,
simply varying the output frequency f (Hz) would
result in an overheated motor or would not allow the
motor to demonstrate its optimum utility if the
output voltage V (V) remains constant. For this
reason, the output voltage V must be varied with the
output frequency f by using an inverter. This
scheme of control is called V/f control.
Variable torque load
A squared torque load is characterized by:
1) A change in the required torque in proportion to
the square of the number of revolutions per minute.
2) A power requirement that decreases in
proportion to the cube of the decrease in the number
of revolutions per minute.
Re quired power (kW )
Rotating speed (r / min) u Torque ( N x m)
9.55
Related function code: F37
Applications: Fans and pumps
Voltage and frequency variations
Variations in the input voltage or frequency within
permissible limits. Variations outside these limits
might cause an inverter or motor to fail.
G-6
Designed For Fan and Pump Applications
User's Manual
First Edition, March 2005
Fuji Electric FA Components & Systems Co., Ltd.
The purpose of this manual is to provide accurate information in the handling, setting up and operating of
the FRENIC-Eco series of inverters. Please feel free to send your comments regarding any errors or
omissions you may have found, or any suggestions you may have for generally improving the manual.
In no event will Fuji Electric FA Components & Systems Co., Ltd. be liable for any direct or indirect
damages resulting from the application of the information in this manual.